Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review/Test

go-math-grade-4-chapter-2-multiply-by-1-digit-numbers-review-test-answer-key

Get the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review/Test from this page and test your preparation standards. By downloading the 4th grade Go Math Chapter 2 Solution Key pdf you can make use of this guide whenever you need. So, start preparing with the HMH Go Math Grade 4 Review/Test Answer Key and score good marks in the exam.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review/Test

Improve your conceptual learning through the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Review/Test. This guide is very helpful to tally your answers & correct the mistakes by providing various methods to solve the questions. Learn the concepts properly and approach different techniques to solve problems in Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers.

Chapter 2: Review/Test

Review/Test – Page No. 95

Vocabulary

Choose the best term from the box.

Question 1.
To find the product of a 3-digit number and a 1-digit number, you can multiply the ones, multiply the tens, multiply the hundreds, and find the sum of each.
_________

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review Test img 1

Question 2.
The _______________________ states that multiplying a sum by a number is the same as multiplying each addend by the number and then adding the products.

Answer:
The distributive property states that multiplying a sum by a number is the same as multiplying each addend by the number and then adding the products.

Concepts and Skills

Estimate. Then find the product.

Question 3.
5 5
× 2
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 150
Product: 110

Explanation:
5 5
× 2
———-
110

Question 4.
$2 5
×   3
———-
Estimate: $ _________
Product: $ _________

Answer:
Estimate: $ 100
Product: $ 75

Explanation:
$2 5
×   3
———-
$ 75

Question 5.
3 0 6
×    8
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 2,500.
Product: 2,448.

Explanation:
3 0 6
×    8
———-
2,448

Question 6.
$9 2 4
×      5
———-
Estimate: $ _________
Product: $ _________

Answer:
Estimate: $ 5,000
Product: $ 4,620.

Explanation:
$9 2 4
×      5
———-
4,620

Question 7.
3, 563
×      9
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 30,000.
Product: 32,067

Explanation:
3, 563
×      9
———-
32,067

Question 8.
7, 048
×      7
———-
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 50,000
Product: 49,336

Explanation:
7, 048
×      7
———-
49,336

Question 9.
6, 203
×      3
————
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 19,000
Product: 18,609

Explanation:
6, 203
×      3
————
18,609

Question 10.
8, 798
×      6
————
Estimate: _________
Product: _________

Answer:
Estimate: 53,000
Product: 52,788

Explanation:
8, 798
×      6
————
52,788

Review/Test – Page No. 96

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 11.
Which number sentence shows the Distributive Property?
Options:
a. 2 × 3 = 3 × 2
b. 5 × 0 = 0
c. 3 × (5 + 2) = (3 × 5) + (3 × 2)
d. (3 × 7) × 4 = 3 × (7 × 4)

Answer: c

Explanation:
The distributive property means solving the expression in the form of a×(b+c). So the correct option is 3 × (5 + 2) = (3 × 5) + (3 × 2).

Question 12.
Look at the pattern below. What is the missing number?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review Test img 2
Options:
a. 8,000
b. 6,000
c. 600
d. 60

Answer: b

Explanation:
5×6,000= 30,000.

Question 13.
Which comparison sentence represents the equation?
45 = 5 × 9
a. 9 more than 5 is 45
b. 9 is 5 times as many as 45
c. 5 is 4 times as many as 45
d. 45 is 5 times as many as 9

Answer: d

Explanation:
45 is 5 times as many as 9.

Question 14.
There are 4 times as many alligators as crocodiles. If the total number of alligators and crocodiles is 40, how many alligators are there?
Options:
a. 40
b. 32
c. 24
d. 8

Answer: b

Explanation:
As there are 4 times as many alligators as crocodiles and if the total number of alligators and crocodiles is 40. To find how many alligators are there, we will put them in a group of 5 as there are 4 alligators and 1 crocodile, so 40÷5= 8 groups, in which 32 are alligators and 8 are crocodiles.

Review/Test – Page No. 97

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 15.
Gardeners at Seed Stop are planting seeds in 12-row seed trays. They plant 8 seeds in each row. How many plants will there be in each tray if all of the seeds germinate, or grow?
Options:
a. 84
b. 86
c. 96
d. 104

Answer: c

Explanation:
As gardeners at Seed Stop are planting seeds in 12-row seed trays, and they plant 8 seeds in each row. So the number of plants will there be in each tray are 12×8= 96.

Question 16.
Which shows the product of 4 × 15 × 25?
Options:
a. 150
b. 1,200
c. 1,500
d. 1,600

Answer: c

Explanation:
The product of 4×15×25= 1,500.

Question 17.
A Broadway musical group will have 9 performances. The theater can seat 2,518 people. If all of the seats at each performance are taken, how many people will see the show?
Options:
a. 18,592
b. 22,652
c. 22,662
d. 31,622

Answer: c

Explanation:
As a broadway musical group will have 9 performances and the theater can seat 2,518 people, so number of people will see the show are 9×2,518= 22,662.

Question 18.
The table below shows the type of film sold and the number of rolls in one pack at a local gift shop.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review Test img 3
Hannah buys 3 packs of 36 exposure film and 2 packs of 24 exposure film. She uses 8 rolls of film. How many rolls does she have left?
Options:
a. 8
b. 12
c. 20
d. 24

Answer: b

Explanation:
Hannah buys 3 packs of 36 exposure film and 2 packs of 24 exposure film, so the total number of films are 3×4= 12, 2×4= 8 which is 12+8= 20. And she uses 8 rolls, then the number of rolls left are 20-8= 12.

Review/Test – Page No. 98

Constructed Response

Question 19.
John’s grade has 3 classrooms. Each classroom has 14 tables. Two students sit at each table. About how many students are there in all? Use pictures, words, or numbers to show how you know.
About ______ students

Answer: 84 students.

Explanation:
As John’s grade has 3 classrooms, and each classroom has 14 tables and two students sit at each other, so total number of students are 14×2= 28 as John has 3 classrooms, so 28×3= 84 students.

Performance Task

Justin has $450 to buy supplies for the school computer lab. He buys 8 boxes of printer paper that cost $49 each.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review Test img 4

Question 20.
A. About how much money does Justin spend on the printer paper? Describe how you made your estimate.
About $ ______

Answer: $400.

Explanation:
As each printer paper costs $49 and Justin buys 8 boxes, so total costs $49×8= $392. And the estimated cost is $400.

Question 20.
B. Find the actual amount of money Justin spends on the printer paper. Explain whether your estimate is close to the actual price.
Actual price $ ______

Answer: $392.

Explanation:
The actual amount of money Justin spends on the printer paper is $49×8= $392. Yes, the estimation is close to the actual price.

Question 20.
C. Will Justin have enough money left over to buy 3 packages of blank DVDs that cost $17 each? Explain your answer.

Answer: Yes, Justin will have enough money left.

Explanation:
As Justin left some money which is $450-$392= $51, after he bought printer paper for $392, so he can buy 3 packages of blank DVDs that cost $17 each which costs $17×3= $51.

Conclusion:

Our math experts wishing that you collect the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers Review/Test effective. If you want to grasp more concepts of chapter 2, access the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 2 Multiply by 1-Digit Numbers homework practice FL Answer Key and seek help whenever you need it.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million

go-math-grade-4-chapter-1-place-value-addition-and-subtraction-to-one-million-pages-1-20-answer-key

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Pdf Download is available on this page for an efficient practice session. Provided solutions are very easy to understand and simple to learn the concept of Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million. Enhance your kid’s logical and analytical thinking by answering every practice question covered in the HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million

Here, we have designed a new path for students to solve each and every chapter question & improve their problem-solving skills. It is nothing but the HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key of Chapter 1. The topics of ch 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million are Model Place Value Relationships, Compare and Order Numbers, Round Numbers, Add and subtract Whole Numbers, etc. Now, you’ll find all topics Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 for better preparation.

Lesson: 1 – Model Place Value Relationships

Lesson: 2 – Read and Write Numbers

Lesson: 3 – Compare and Order Numbers

Lesson: 4 – Round Numbers 

Lesson: 5 – Rename Numbers

Lesson: 6 – Add Whole Numbers

Lesson: 7 – Subtract Whole Numbers

Lesson: 8 – Problem Solving Comparison Problems with Addition and Subtraction

Lesson: 9 

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 3

Model Place Value Relationships

Find the value of the underlined digit.

Question 1.
6,035
30

Question 2.
43,782
________

Answer: 700

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 43,782 is 700.

Question 3.
506,087
________

Answer: 7

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 506,087 is 7.

Question 4.
49,254
________

Answer: 9000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 49,254 is 9000.

Question 5.
136,422
________

Answer: 30,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 136,422 is 30,000.

Question 6.
673,512
________

Answer: 500

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 5 in 673,512 is 500.

Question 7.
814,295
________

Answer: 800,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 8 in 814,295 is 800,000.

Question 8.
736,144
________

Answer: 6,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 6 in 736,144 is 6,000.

Compare the values of the underlined digits.

Question 9.
6,300 and 530
The value of 3 in _____ is _____ times the value of 3 in _____.

Answer: The value of 3 in 6,300 is 10 times the value of 3 in 530.

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 6,300 is 300. And the place value of the digit 3 in 530 is 30. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 3 hundreds are ten times as many as 3 tens. So, the value of 3 in 6,300 is 10 times the value of 3 in 530.

Question 10.
2,783 and 7,283
The value of 2 in _____ is _____ times the value of 2 in _____.

Answer: The value of 2 in 2783 is 10 times the value of 2 in 7283.

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 2 in 2,783 is 2000. And the place value of the digit 2 in 7,283 is 200. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 2 thousands are ten times as many as 2 hundred. So, the value of 2 in 2783 is 10 times the value of 2 in 7283.

Question 11.
34,258 and 47,163
The value of 4 in _____ is _____ times the value of 4 in _____.

Answer: The value of 4 in 47,163 is 10 times the value of 4 in 34,258.

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 34,258 is 4,000. And the place value of the digit 4 in 47,163 is 40,000. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 4 thousands are ten times as many as 4 thousand tens. So, the value of 4 in 47,163 is 10 times the value of 4 in 34,258.

Question 12.
503,497 and 26,475
The value of 7 in _____ is _____ times the value of 7 in _____.

Answer: The value of 7 in 26,475 is 10 times the value of 7 in 5,03,497.

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 503,497 is 7. And the place value of the digit 7 in 26,475 is 70. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 7 are ten times as many as 7 tens. So, the value of 7 in 26,475 is 10 times the value of 7 in 5,03,497.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 13–14.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 1

Question 13.
What is the value of the digit 9 in the attendance at the Redskins vs. Titans game?
The value of 9 is _____

Answer: 9,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 69,143 is 9,000.

Question 14.
The attendance at which game has a 7 in the ten thousands place?
__________

Answer: Ravens vs. Panthers

Explanation:
Each digit of the number holds its own value. The adjacent digits of the number differ from each other by 10 times. Starting from the leftmost digit going to the right, the order of place values starts from ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and ten thousand. Therefore, the number should contain a digit 7 on the 5th digit from left to right.
Thus the attendance at Ravens vs. Panthers game has a 7 in the ten thousands place.

Question 15.
How does a digit in the ten thousands place compare to a digit in the thousands place?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
A digit in the ten thousand place has a value of 10,000 times the value of the mere digit. While a digit in the thousands place has a value 1,000 times the value of the digit. So to compare you can do 10,000 / 1,000 = 10, which means that a digit in the ten thousand place values ten times what the same digit values are it is the thousand place.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 4

Lesson Check

Question 1.
During one season, a total of 453,193 people attended a baseball team’s games. What is the value of the digit 5 in the number of people?
Options:
a. 500
b. 5,000
c. 50,000
d. 500,000

Answer: 50,000

Explanation:
Given,
During one season, a total of 453,193 people attended a baseball team’s games.
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 5 in 453,193 is 50,000.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Hal forgot the number of people at the basketball game. He does remember that the number had a 3 in the tens place. Which number could Hal be thinking of?
Options:
a. 7,321
b. 3,172
c. 2,713
d. 1,237

Answer: 1,237

Explanation:
Given,
Hal forgot the number of people at the basketball game.
He does remember that the number had a 3 in the tens place.
a. 7,321 – the value of 3 in 7321 is 300.
b. 3,172 – the value of 3 in 3172 is 3000.
c. 2,713 – the value of 3 in 2713 is 3.
d. 1,237 – the value of 3 in 1237 is 30.
Thus the number 3 in tens place is 1,237.
Therefore, the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Hot dog buns come in packages of 8. For the school picnic, Mr. Spencer bought 30 packages of hot dog buns. How many hot dog buns did he buy?
Options:
a. 24
b. 38
c. 110
d. 240

Answer: 240

Explanation:
Given,
Hot dog buns come in packages of 8.
For the school picnic, Mr. Spencer bought 30 packages of hot dog buns.
8 × 30 = 240 buns
He bought 240 hot dig buns.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
There are 8 students on the minibus. Five of the students are boys. What fraction of the students are boys?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{5}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
There are 8 students on the minibus. Five of the students are boys.
Divide the number of boys by the total number of students on the minibus.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
The clock below shows the time when Amber leaves home for school. At what time does Amber leave home?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 2
Options:
a. 2:41
b. 8:02
c. 8:10
d. 8:20

Answer: 8:10

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that Amber leave home is 8:10.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Jeremy drew a polygon with four right angles and four sides with the same length.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 3
What kind of polygon did Jeremy draw?
Options:
a. hexagon
b. square
c. trapezoid
d. triangle

Answer: square

Explanation:
A square has two pairs of parallel sides, four right angles, and all four sides are equal.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 5

Read and Write Numbers

Read and write the number in two other forms.

Question 1.
six hundred ninety-two thousand, four
standard form: 692,004;
expanded form: 600,000 + 90,000 + 2,000 + 4

Question 2.
314,207
Type below:
________

Answer:
Standard form: Three hundred fourteen thousand, two hundred seven.
Explanded form: 300,000 + 10,000 + 4,000 + 200 + 7

Question 3.
600,000 + 80,000 + 10
Type below:
________

Answer:
Standard form: 680,010
Expanded form: Six hundred eighty thousand ten.

Use the number 913,256.

Question 4.
Write the name of the period that has the digits 913.
________

Answer: thousands
Each group of three digits forms a period. The name of the period that has the digits 913 is thousands group.

Question 5.
Write the digit in the ten thousands place.
________

Answer: 1

Question 6.
Write the value of the digit 9.
________

Answer: 9 hundred thousands or 900,000.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 4

Question 7.
Which state had a population of eight hundred four thousand, one hundred ninety-four?
________

Answer: South Dakota

Explanation:
The standard form of eight hundred four thousand, one hundred ninety-four is 804,194.
We can see the population 804,194 in the above table in South Dakota.

Question 8.
What is the value of the digit 8 in Alaska’s population?
________

Answer: 8 ten thousands, or 80,000.

Explanation:
The population in Alaska is 686,293.
The value of the digit 8 in Alaska’s population is 80,000.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 6

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Based on a 2008 study, children 6–11 years old spend sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight minutes a year watching television. What is this number written in
standard form?
Options:
a. 6,918
b. 69,108
c. 69,180
d. 690,108

Answer: 69,108

Explanation:
Given,
Based on a 2008 study, children 6–11 years old spend sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight minutes a year watching television.
The standard form of sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight is 69,108.

Question 2.
What is the value of the digit 4 in the number 84,230?
Options:
a. 4
b. 400
c. 4,000
d. 40,000

Answer: 4,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 84,230 is 4,000.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
An ant has 6 legs. How many legs do 8 ants have in all?
Options:
a. 14
b. 40
c. 45
d. 48

Answer: 48

Explanation:
Given,
An ant has 6 legs.
To find:
How many legs do 8 ants have in all
6 legs × 8 = 48 legs
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Latricia’s vacation is in 4 weeks. There are 7 days in a week. How many days is it until Latricia’s vacation?
Options:
a. 9 days
b. 11 days
c. 20 days
d. 28 days

Answer: 28 days

Explanation:
Given,
Latricia’s vacation is in 4 weeks.
There are 7 days in a week.
4 × 7 days = 28 days
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Marta collected 363 cans. Diego collected 295 cans. How many cans did Marta and Diego collect in all?
Options:
a. 668
b. 658
c. 568
d. 178

Answer: 658

Explanation:
Marta collected 363 cans. Diego collected 295 cans.
363 cans + 295 cans = 658 cans
Marta and Diego collect 658 cans in all.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
The city Tim lives in has 106,534 people. What is the value of the 6 in 106,534?
Options:
a. 6,000
b. 600
c. 60
d. 6

Answer: 6,000

Explanation:
The city Tim lives in has 106,534 people.
The value of the 6 in 106,534 is 6,000.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 7

Compare and Order Numbers

Compare. Write < .> or =.

Question 1.
3,273 < 3,279

Question 2.
$1,323 ______ $1,400

Answer: <
The number $1,323 < $1,400 as 323 is less than 400.

Question 3.
52,692 ______ 52,692

Answer: =
The number 52,692 is equal to 52,692.

Question 4.
$413,005 ______ $62,910

Answer: >
The number $413,005 is greater than $62,910.

Question 5.
382,144 ______ 382,144

Answer: =
The number 382,144 is equal to 382,144.

Question 6.
157,932 ______ 200,013

Answer: <
The number 157,932 is less than 200,013.

Question 7.
401,322 ______ 410,322

Answer: <
The number 401,322 is less than 410,322.

Question 8.
989,063 ______ 980,639

Answer: >
The number 989,063 is greater than 980,639.

Question 9.
258,766 ______ 258,596

Answer: >
The number 258,766 is greater than 258,596.

Order from least to greatest.

Question 10.
23,710; 23,751; 23,715
______ < ______ < ______

Answer: 23,710; 23,715; 23,751

Question 11.
52,701; 54,025; 5,206
______ < ______ < ______

Answer: 5,206; 52,701; 54,025
The numbers from least to greatest is 5,206; 52,701; 54,025

Question 12.
465,321; 456,321; 456,231
______ < ______ < ______

Answer: 456,321; 456,231; 456,231
456,321 is less than 456,231 is less than 456,231. The numbers from least to greatest is 456,321; 456,231; 456,231.

Question 13.
$330,820; $329,854; $303,962
______ < ______ < ______

Answer: $303,962; $329,854; $330,820
$303,962 is less than $329,854 is less than $330,820. The numbers from least to greatest is $303,962; $329,854; $330,820.

Problem Solving

Question 14.
An online newspaper had 350,080 visitors in October, 350,489 visitors in November, and 305,939 visitors in December. What is the order of the months from greatest to least number of visitors?
1. ________
2. ________
3. ________

Answer:
1. November
2. October
3. December

Explanation:
Given,
An online newspaper had 350,080 visitors in October, 350,489 visitors in November, and 305,939 visitors in December.
350,489 is greater than 350,080 is greater than 305,939.
Thus the order of the months from greatest to least number of visitors is November, October and December.

Question 15.
The total land area in square miles of each of three states is shown below.
Colorado: 103,718
New Mexico: 121,356
Arizona: 113,635
What is the order of the states from least to greatest total land area?
1. ________
2. ________
3. ________

Answer:
1. Colorado
2. Arizona
3. New Mexico

Explanation:
The total land area in square miles of each of three states is shown below.
Colorado: 103,718
New Mexico: 121,356
Arizona: 113,635
The greatest number is 121,356, 113,635, 103,718
The order of the states from least to greatest total land area is Colorado, Arizona and New Mexico.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 8

Lesson Check

Question 1.
At the yearly fund-raising drive, the nonprofit company’s goal was to raise $55,500 each day. After three days, it had raised $55,053; $56,482; and $55,593. Which amount was less than the daily goal?
Options:
a. $55,500
b. $55,053
c. $55,593
d. $56,482

Answer: $55,053

Explanation:
At the yearly fund-raising drive, the nonprofit company’s goal was to raise $55,500 each day. After three days, it had raised $55,053; $56,482; and $55,593.
$55,053 < $55,593 < $56,482
The amount was less than the daily goal is $55,053.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Which of the following lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least?
Options:
a. 60,343; 60,433; 63,043
b. 83,673; 86,733; 86,373
c. 90,543; 90,048; 93,405
d. 20,433; 20,343; 20,043

Answer: 20,433; 20,343; 20,043

Explanation:
The lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least is 20,433; 20,343; 20,043
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Jess is comparing fractions. Which fraction is greater than \(\frac{5}{6}\)?
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{5}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Jess is comparing fractions.
The fraction is greater than \(\frac{5}{6}\) is \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
What is the perimeter of the rectangle below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 5
Options:
a. 14 inches
b. 26 inches
c. 28 inches
d. 48 inches

Answer: 28 inches

Explanation:
Given,
l = 6 in
w = 8 in.
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + l + w + w
P = 6 in + 6 in + 8 in + 8 in
P = 28 inches
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle is 28 inches.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
A website had 826,140 hits last month. What is the value of the 8 in 826,140?
Options:
a. 800
b. 8,000
c. 80,000
d. 800,000

Answer: 800,000

Explanation:
A website had 826,140 hits last month.
The value of the 8 in 826,140 is 800,000.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Which is 680,705 written in expanded form?
Options:
a. 680 + 705
b. 68,000 + 700 + 5
c. 600,000 + 8,000 + 700 + 5
d. 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5

Answer: 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5

Explanation:
The expanded form of 680,705 is 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5
The correct answer is option D.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 9

Round Numbers 

Round to the place value of the underlined digit.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 6
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.

Question 2.
123,499
_____

Answer: 123,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 3 in 123,499 is 123,000.

Question 3.
552,945
_____

Answer: 600,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 5 in 552,945 is 600,000.

Question 4.
389,422
_____

Answer: 390,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 8 in 389,422 is 390,000.

Question 5.
209,767
_____

Answer: 200,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 2 in 209,767 is 200,000.

Question 6.
191,306
_____

Answer: 191,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 191,306 is 191,000.

Question 7.
66,098
_____

Answer: 70,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 6 in 66,098 is 70,000.

Question 8.
73,590
_____

Answer: 74,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 3 in 73,590 is 74,000.

Question 9.
149,903
_____

Answer: 100,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 149,903 is 100,000.

Question 10.
684,303
_____

Answer: 684,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 4 in 684,303 is 684,000.

Question 11.
499,553
_____

Answer: 500,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 9 in 499,553 is 500,000.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 12–13.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 7

Question 12.
Find the height of Mt. Whitney in the table. Round the height to the nearest thousand feet.
_____ feet

Answer: 14,000 feet

Explanation:
The height to the nearest thousand feet for 14,494 is 14,000 feet.

Question 13.
What is the height of Mt. Bona rounded to the nearest ten thousand feet?
_____ feet

Answer: 20,000 feet

Explanation:
The height of Mt. Bona rounded to the nearest ten thousand feet for 16,500 is 20,000 feet.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 10

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which number is 247,039 rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 200,000
b. 250,000
c. 247,000
d. 7,000

Answer: 247,000

Explanation:
Round off the value means making a number simpler but keeping its value close to what it was. The result is less accurate but easy to use. So the number is 247,039 rounded to the nearest thousand is 247,000.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
To the nearest ten thousand, the population of Vermont was estimated to be about 620,000 in 2008. Which might have been the exact population of Vermont in 2008?
Options:
a. 626,013
b. 621,270
c. 614,995
d. 609,964

Answer: 621,270

Explanation:
To the nearest ten thousand, the population of Vermont was estimated to be about 620,000 in 2008.
The exact population of Vermont in 2008 might be 621,270.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which symbol makes the following number sentence true?
$546,322 Ο $540,997
Options:
a. <
b. >
c. =
d. +

Answer: >

Explanation:
$546,322 is greater than $540,997.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Pittsburgh International Airport had approximately 714,587 passengers in August 2009. Which number is greater than 714,587?
Options:
a. 714,578
b. 704,988
c. 714,601
d. 714,099

Answer: 714,601

Explanation:
Given,
Pittsburgh International Airport had approximately 714,587 passengers in August 2009.
The number greater than 714,587 is 714,601.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
June made a design with 6 equal tiles. One tile is yellow, 2 tiles are blue, and 3 tiles are purple. What fraction of the tiles are yellow or purple?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given,
June made a design with 6 equal tiles. One tile is yellow, 2 tiles are blue, and 3 tiles are purple.
We have to put the total number of tiles in the denominator.
The number of yellow or purple tiles is 3 + 1 = 4 put it in the numerator.
The fraction of the tiles are yellow or purple is \(\frac{4}{6}\).
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
The fourth grade collected 40,583 cans and plastic bottles. Which of the following shows that number in word form?
Options:
a. forty thousand, five hundred eighty
b. forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three
c. four thousand, five hundred eighty-three
d. four hundred thousand, five hundred eighty

Answer: forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three

Explanation:
Given,
The fourth grade collected 40,583 cans and plastic bottles.
The expanded form of 40,583 is forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 11

Rename Numbers

Rename the number. Use the place-value chart to help.

Question 1.
760 hundreds = 76,000
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 8

Question 2.
805 tens = ________

THOUSANDS ONES
Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones
_________ _________ _________ _________

Answer:

THOUSANDS ONES
Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones
8 0 5 0

Question 3.
24 ten thousands = ________

THOUSANDS ONES
Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones
_________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________

Answer:

THOUSANDS ONES
Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones
2 4 0 0 0 0

Rename the number.

Question 4.
720 = ____ tens

Answer: 72

Explanation:
720 can be calculated as 72 × 10 = 72 tens.

Question 5.
4 thousands 7 hundreds = 47 ________

Answer: hundreds

Explanation:
4 thousands 7 hundreds
4700 = 47 × 100 = 47 hundreds

Question 6.
25,600 = ____ hundreds

Answer: 256

Explanation:
25,600 = 256 × 100 = 256 hundreds

Question 7.
204 thousands = ____

Answer: 204,000

Explanation:
204 thousands = 204 × 1000 = 204,000.

Problem Solving

Question 8.
For the fair, the organizers ordered 32 rolls of tickets. Each roll of tickets has 100 tickets. How many tickets were ordered in all?
____ tickets

Answer: 3,200 tickets

Explanation:
Given,
For the fair, the organizers ordered 32 rolls of tickets. Each roll of tickets has 100 tickets.
32 × 100 tickets = 3200 tickets
Therefore 3200 tickets were ordered in all.

Question 9.
An apple orchard sells apples in bags of 10. The orchard sold a total of 2,430 apples one day. How many bags of apples was this?
____ bags

Answer: 243 bags

Explanation:
Given,
An apple orchard sells apples in bags of 10. The orchard sold a total of 2,430 apples one day.
2430/10 = 243 bags
There were 243 bags of apples.

Question 10.
Explain how you can rename 5,400 as hundreds. Include a quick picture or a place-value chart in your explanation.
____ hundreds

Answer: 54

Explanation:
It would be 54 hundreds because:
In 5400 there are 2 zeros
Also in 100, there are 2 zeros
2 zeros equals a hundred
100=1 hundred, because it has a 1 in front of the 2 zeros
5400=54 hundreds, because it has a 54 in front of the 2 zeros

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 12

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A dime has the same value as 10 pennies. Marley brought 290 pennies to the bank. How many dimes did Marley get?
Options:
a. 29
b. 290
c. 2,900
d. 29,000

Answer: 29

Explanation:
Given,
A dime has the same value as 10 pennies. Marley brought 290 pennies to the bank.
To find How many dimes did Marley get we have to divide 290 pennies by 10 pennies.
290/10 = 29
Therefore Marley gets 29 pennies.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
A citrus grower ships grapefruit in boxes of 10. One season, the grower shipped 20,400 boxes of grapefruit. How many grapefruit were shipped?
Options:
a. 204
b. 2,040
c. 20,400
d. 204,000

Answer: 204,000

Explanation:
Given,
A citrus grower ships grapefruit in boxes of 10.
One season, the grower shipped 20,400 boxes of grapefruit.
We need to find How many grapefruit were shipped.
Multiply 20,400 boxes with 10.
20,400 × 10 = 204,000
Therefore 204,000 grapefruit were shipped.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There were 2,605 people at the basketball game. A reporter rounded this number to the nearest hundred for a newspaper article. What number did the reporter use?
Options:
a. 2,600
b. 2,610
c. 2,700
d. 3,000

Answer: 2,600

Explanation:
Given,
There were 2,605 people at the basketball game. A reporter rounded this number to the nearest hundred for a newspaper article.
To find:
What number did the reporter use?
The number 2605 nearest to the hundred is 2600.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
To get to Level 3 in a game, a player must score 14,175 points. Ann scores 14,205 points, Ben scores 14,089 points, and Chuck scores 10,463 points. Which score is greater than the Level 3 score?
Options:
a. 14,205
b. 14,175
c. 14,089
d. 10,463

Answer: 14,205

Explanation:
Given,
To get to Level 3 in a game, a player must score 14,175 points. Ann scores 14,205 points, Ben scores 14,089 points, and Chuck scores 10,463 points.
By seeing the above points we can say that 14,205 is greater than level 3.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Henry counted 350 lockers in his school. Hayley counted 403 lockers in her school. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. The 3 in 350 is 10 times the value of the 3 in 403.
b. The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403.
c. The 3 in 403 is 10 times the value of the 3 in 350.
d. The 3 in 403 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 350.

Answer: The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403.

Explanation:
Given,
Henry counted 350 lockers in his school. Hayley counted 403 lockers in her school.
The statement “The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403” is true.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
There are 4 muffins on each plate. There are 0 plates of lemon muffins. How many lemon muffins are there?
Options:
a. 4
b. 2
c. 1
d. 0

Answer: 0

Explanation:
Given,
There are 4 muffins on each plate. There are 0 plates of lemon muffins.
Multiply the number of muffins with the number of plates.
4 × 0 = 0
There are 0 lemon muffins.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 13

Add Whole Numbers

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Estimate: 90,000
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 9

Question 2.
73,404
+ 27,865
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 100,000
Sum: 101,269
Estimate:
The number rounded to 73,404 is 70,000.
The number rounded to 27,865 is 30,000.
70,000
+30,000
100,000
Sum:
73,404
+ 27,865
101,269

Question 3.
404,446
+ 396,755
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 800,000
Sum: 800,201
Estimate:
The number rounded to 400,000
The number rounded to 400,000
400,000
+400,000
800,000
Sum:
404,446
+ 396,755
800,201

Question 4.
137,638
+ 52,091
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 200,000
Sum: 189,729
Estimate:
The number rounded to 150,000
The number rounded to 50,000
150,000
+50,000
200,000
Sum:
137,638
+ 52,091
189,729

Question 5.
200,629
+ 28,542
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 250,000
Sum: 229,171
Estimate:
The number rounded to 200,000
The number rounded to 50,000
200,000
+50,000
250,000
Sum:
200,629
+ 28,542
229,171

Question 6.
212,514
+ 396,705
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 600,000
Sum: 609,219
Estimate:
The number rounded to 200,000
The number rounded to 400,000
200,000
+400,000
600,000
Sum:
212,514
+ 396,705
609,219

Question 7.
324,867
+ 6,233
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 330,000
Sum: 331,100
Estimate:
The number rounded to 324,000
The number rounded to 6,000
324,000
+ 6,000
330,000
Sum:
324,867
+ 6,233
331,100

Question 8.
462,809
+ 256,738
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 800,000
Sum: 719,547
Estimate:
The number rounded to 500,000
The number rounded to 300,000
500,000
+300,000
800,000
Sum:
462,809
+ 256,738
719,547

Question 9.
624,836
+ 282,189
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 900,000
Sum: 907,025
Estimate:
The number rounded to 600,000
The number rounded to 300,000
600,000
+300,000
900,000
Sum:
624,836
+ 282,189
907,025

Problem Solving

Use the table for 10–12.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 10

Question 10.
Beth and Cade were on one team. What was their total score?
______

Answer: 407,502

Explanation:
The score of Beth is 251,567
The score of Cade is 155,935
251,567
+155,935
407,502
Thus the total score of Beth and Cade is 407,502.

Question 11.
Dillan and Elaine were on the other team. What was their total score?
______

Answer: 409,928

Explanation:
The score of Dillan is 188,983
The score of Elaine is 220,945
188,983
+220,945
409,928
The total score of Dillan and Elaine is 409,928.

Question 12.
Which team scored the most points?
_________

Answer: Dillan and Elaine
The total score of Dillan and Elaine is 409,928.
The total score of Beth and Cade is 407,502.
409,928
-407,502
002,226
Thus Dillan and Elaine team scored the most points.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 14

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The coastline of the United States is 12,383 miles long. Canada’s coastline is 113,211 miles longer than the coastline of the United States. How long is the coastline of Canada?
Options:
a. 100,828 miles
b. 115,594 miles
c. 125,594 miles
d. 237,041 miles

Answer: 125,594 miles

Explanation:
Given,
The coastline of the United States is 12,383 miles long.
Canada’s coastline is 113,211 miles longer than the coastline of the United States.
113,211
+12,383 
125,594
Therefore, the coastline of Canada is 125,594 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Germany is the seventh largest European country and is slightly smaller by area than Montana. Germany has a land area of 134,835 square miles and a water area of 3,011 square miles. What is the total area of Germany?
Options:
a. 7,846 square miles
b. 131,824 square miles
c. 137,846 square miles
d. 435,935 square miles

Answer: 137,846 square miles

Explanation:
Given,
Germany is the seventh largest European country and is slightly smaller by area than Montana. Germany has a land area of 134,835 square miles and a water area of 3,011 square miles.
134,835
+ 3,011
137,846
Therefore the total area of Germany is 137,846 square miles.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
In an election, about 500,000 people voted in all. Which number could be the exact number of people who voted in the election?
Options:
a. 429,455
b. 441,689
c. 533,736
d. 550,198

Answer: 533,736

Explanation:
Given,
In an election, about 500,000 people voted in all.
The number near to 500,000 is 533,736.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
In 2007, Pennsylvania had approximately 121,580 miles of public roads. What is 121,580 rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 100,000
b. 120,000
c. 121,000
d. 122,000

Answer: 122,000

Explanation:
Given,
In 2007, Pennsylvania had approximately 121,580 miles of public roads.
121,580 rounded to the nearest thousand is 122,000.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Which of the following lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least?
Options:
a. 33,093; 33,903; 33,309
b. 42,539; 24,995; 43,539
c. 682,131; 628,000; 682,129
d. 749,340; 740,999; 740,256

Answer: 749,340; 740,999; 740,256

Explanation:
a. 33,093; 33,903; 33,309
33,093 = 33,903 = 33,309
b. 42,539; 24,995; 43,539
42,539 > 24,995 < 43,539
c. 682,131; 628,000; 682,129
682,131 > 628,000 < 682,129
d. 749,340; 740,999; 740,256
749,340 > 740,999 > 740,256
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which symbol makes the following statement true?
$413,115 Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 11 $431,511
Options:
a. <
b. >
c. =
d. +

Answer: <

Explanation:
The number $413,115 is less than $431,511
$413,115 < $431,511
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 15

Subtract Whole Numbers

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 12

Question 2.
428,731
– 175,842
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 252,889
Estimate:
The number rounded to 428,731 is 400,000
The number rounded to 175,842 is 200,000
400,000
-200,000
200,000
Difference:
428,731
– 175,842
252,889

Question 3.
920,026
– 535,722
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 400,000
Difference: 384,304
Estimate:
The number rounded to 920,026 is 900,000
The number rounded to 535,722 is 500,000
900,000
-500,000
400,000
Difference:
920,026
– 535,722
384,304

Question 4.
253,495
– 48,617
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Answer:
Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 204,878
Estimate:
The number rounded to 253,495 is 250,000
The number rounded to 48,617 is 50,000

Subtract. Add to check.

Question 5.
735,249 – 575,388 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

Answer: 159,861
735,249
-575,388 
159,861
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
159,861
+575,388 
735,249

Question 6.
512,724 – 96,473 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

Answer: 416,251
512,724
-96,473 
416,251
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
416,251
96,473
512,724

Question 7.
600,000 – 145,782 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

Answer: 454,218
600,000
-145,782
454,218
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
454,218
+145,782 
600,000

Problem Solving

Use the table for 8 and 9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 13

Question 8.
How many more people attended the Magic’s games than attended the Pacers’ games?
______ people

Answer: 133,606

Explanation:
Number of people attended Magic’s games = 715,901
Number of people attended Pacers’ games = 582,295
To find:
How many more people attended the Magic’s games than attended the Pacers’ games
We need to subtract the Number of people attended Pacers’ games from the Number of people attended Magic’s games
715,901
-582,295
133,606

Question 9.
How many fewer people attended the Pacers’ games than attended the Clippers’ games?
______ people

Answer: 87,768

Explanation:
Number of people attended Pacers’ games = 582,295
Number of people attended Clippers’ games = 670,063
To find:
How many fewer people attended the Pacers’ games than attended the Clippers’ games
We need to subtract the number of people attended Pacers’ games from the Number of people attended Clippers’ games
670,063
-582,295
87,768

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 16

Lesson Check

Question 1.
This year, a farm planted 400,000 corn stalks. Last year, the farm planted 275,650 corn stalks. How many more corn stalks did the farm plant this year than last year?
Options:
a. 124,350
b. 125,450
c. 235,450
d. 275,650

Answer: 124,350

Explanation:
Given,
This year, a farm planted 400,000 corn stalks.
Last year, the farm planted 275,650 corn stalks.
400,000
-275,650 
124,350
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
One machine can make 138,800 small paper clips in one day. Another machine can make 84,250 large paper clips in one day. How many more small paper clips than large paper clips are made by the two machines in one day?
Options:
a. 44,550
b. 54,550
c. 54,650
d. 154,650

Answer: 54,550

Explanation:
Given,
One machine can make 138,800 small paper clips in one day.
Another machine can make 84,250 large paper clips in one day
138,800
-84,250 
54,550
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
In three baseball games over a weekend, 125,429 people came to watch. The next weekend, 86,353 came to watch the games. How many people in all watched
the six baseball games?
Options:
a. 201,782
b. 211,772
c. 211,782
d. 211,882

Answer: 211,782

Explanation:
Given,
In three baseball games over a weekend, 125,429 people came to watch.
The next weekend, 86,353 came to watch the games.
125,429
+86,353 
211,782
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Kevin read the number “two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight” in a book. What is this number in standard form?
Options:
a. 27,048
b. 27,480
c. 207,048
d. 207,480

Answer: 207,048

Explanation:
Given,
Kevin read the number “two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight” in a book.
The standard form of two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight is 207,048.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
A museum had 275,608 visitors last year. What is this number rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 275,600
b. 276,000
c. 280,000
d. 300,000

Answer: 276,000

Explanation:
A museum had 275,608 visitors last year.
The number 275,608 rounded to the nearest thousand is 276,000
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
At the Millville Theater, a play ran for several weeks. In all, 28,175 people saw the play. What is the value of the digit 8 in 28,175?
Options:
a. 8
b. 800
c. 8,000
d. 80,000

Answer: 8,000

Explanation:
At the Millville Theater, a play ran for several weeks. In all, 28,175 people saw the play.
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 8 in 28,175 is 8000.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 17

Problem Solving Comparison Problems with Addition and Substraction

Use the information in the table for 1–3.

Question 1.
How many square miles larger is the surface area of Lake Huron than the surface area of Lake Erie?
Think: How can a bar model help represent the problem? What equation can be written?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 14

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 15

Question 2.
Which lake has a surface area that is 14,938 square miles greater than the surface area of Lake Ontario? Draw a model and write a number sentence to solve the problem.
_________

Answer:

Explanation:
The surface area of Lake Ontario is 7,340 square miles.
14,938
+7,340
22,278 square miles
Go Math grade 4 answer key chapter 1 Homework Practice FL img-1

Question 3.
Lake Victoria has the largest surface area of all lakes in Africa. Its surface area is 26,828 square miles. How much larger is the surface area of Lake Superior than that of Lake Victoria?
_____ square milles

Answer: 4,872 square miles

Explanation:
The surface area of Lake Victoria is 26,828 square miles.
The surface area of Lake Superior is 31,700 square miles.
31,700
-26,828
04,872
The surface area of Lake Superior is 4,872 square miles larger than Lake Victoria.

Question 4.
At 840,000 square miles, Greenland is the largest island in the world. The second-largest island is New Guinea, at 306,000 square miles. How much larger is Greenland than New Guinea?
_____ square milles

Answer: 534,000 square miles

Explanation:
Given,
At 840,000 square miles, Greenland is the largest island in the world.
The second-largest island is New Guinea, at 306,000 square miles.
840,000
-306,000
534,000
Greenland is 534,000 square miles larger than New Guinea.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 18

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The Mariana Trench in the Pacific Ocean is about 36,201 feet deep. The Puerto Rico Trench in the Atlantic Ocean is about 27,493 feet deep. Based on these data, how many feet deeper is the Mariana Trench than the Puerto Rico Trench?
Options:
a. 8,708 feet
b. 9,718 feet
c. 9,808 feet
d. 63,694 feet

Answer: 8,708 feet

Explanation:
Given,
The Mariana Trench in the Pacific Ocean is about 36,201 feet deep.
The Puerto Rico Trench in the Atlantic Ocean is about 27,493 feet deep.
36,201
-27,493
08,708 feet
Mariana Trench is 8708 feet deeper than the Puerto Rico Trench.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
At 1,932 feet, Crater Lake, Oregon, is the deepest lake in the United States. The world’s deepest lake, Lake Baykal in Russia, is 3,383 feet deeper. How deep is Lake Baykal?
Options:
a. 3,383 feet
b. 4,215 feet
c. 4,315 feet
d. 5,315 feet

Answer: 5,315 feet

Explanation:
At 1,932 feet, Crater Lake, Oregon, is the deepest lake in the United States.
The world’s deepest lake, Lake Baykal in Russia, is 3,383 feet deeper.
3383
+1932
5315
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which of the following amounts is greater than $832,458?
Options:
a. $82,845
b. $832,458
c. $823,845
d. $832,485

Answer: $832,485

Explanation:
We have to compare all the options with $832,458
a. $82,845 < $832,458
b. $832,458 = $832,458
c. $823,845 < $832,458
d. $832,485 > $832,458
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
A stadium in Pennsylvania seats 107,282 people. A stadium in Arizona seats 71,706 people. Based on these facts, how many more people does the stadium in Pennsylvania seat than the stadium in Arizona?
Options:
a. 35,576
b. 35,586
c. 36,576
d. 178,988

Answer: 35,576

Explanation:
Given,
A stadium in Pennsylvania seats 107,282 people. A stadium in Arizona seats 71,706 people.
107,282
-71,706 
35,576
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Which of the following numbers is 399,713 rounded to the place value of the underlined digit?
Options:
a. 390,000
b. 398,000
c. 399,800
d. 400,000

Answer: 400,000

Explanation:
The number 399,713 rounded to the place value of the underlined digit is 400,000.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
About 400,000 people visited an art museum in December. Which number could be the exact number of people who visited the art museum?
Options:
a. 478,051
b. 452,223
c. 352,483
d. 348,998

Answer: 352,483

Explanation:
About 400,000 people visited an art museum in December.
The number that could be the exact number of people who visited the art museum is 352,483.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 19

Lesson 1.1

Find the value of the underlined digit.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Common Core - Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million img 16

Question 1.
6,493
____

Answer: 90

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 6,493 is 90.

Question 2.
16,403
____

Answer: 10,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 1 in 16,403 is 10,000.

Question 3.
725,360
____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 725,360 is 300.

Question 4.
952,635
____

Answer: 900,000

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 952,635 is 900,000.

Compare the values of the underlined digits in 46,395 and 14,906.

Question 5.
The value of 4 in ____ is ____ times the value of 4 in ____.

Answer: The value of 4 in 46,395 is 10 times the value of 4 in 14,906.

Explanation:
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 46,395 is 40,000. And the place value of the digit 4 in 14,906 is 4,000. So, the value of 4 in 46,395 is 10 times the value of 4 in 14,906.

Lesson 1.2

Read and write the number in two other forms.

Question 6.
304,001
word form: _______
expanded form: _______

Answer:
word form: three hundred four thousand one
expanded form: 300,000 + 4000 + 1

Explanation:
Convert the number 304,001 into the word form three hundred four thousand one.
The expanded form of 304,001 is 300,000 + 4000 + 1

Question 7.
two hundred eight thousand, five hundred sixty-one
standard form: _______
_______

Answer:
The standard form of two hundred eight thousand, five hundred sixty-one is 208,561.
The expanded form of 208,561 is 200,000 + 8,000 + 500 + 60 + 1

Use the number 751,486.

Question 8.
Write the name of the period that has the digits 486.
_________

Answer: The name of the period that has the digits 486 is Ones.

Question 9.
Write the name of the period that has the digits 751.
_________

Answer: The name of the period that has the digits 751 is thousands.

Question 10.
Write the digit in the thousands place.
The digit in the thousands place: ____

Answer: The digit in the thousands place is 1.

Question 11.
Write the value of the digit 5.
____

Answer: The value of the digit 5 in 751,486 is 50,000.

Lesson 1.3

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 12.
6,930 ____ 7,023

Answer: <

Explanation:
The number 6,930 is less than 7,023
6,930 < 7,023

Question 13.
98,903 ____ 98,930

Answer: <

Explanation:
The number 98,903 is less than 98,930
98,903 < 98,930

Question 14.
549,295 ____ 547,364

Answer: >

Explanation:
The number 549,295 is greater than 547,364
549,295 > 547,364

Order from least to greatest.

Question 15.
$26,940; $25,949; $26,490
Options:
a. $25,949; $26,490; $26,940
b. $26,490; $25,949; $26,940
c. $26,940; $25,949; $26,490

Answer: $25,949; $26,490; $26,940

Explanation:
We have to write the numbers from the least to the greatest.
$25,949 < $26,490 < $26,940
The order from the least to the greatest is $25,949; $26,490; $26,940
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 16.
634,943; 639,443; 589,932
Options:
a. 639,443; 589,932; 634,943
b. 634,943; 639,443; 589,932
c. 589,932; 634,943; 639,443

Answer: 589,932; 634,943; 639,443

Explanation:
We have to write the numbers from the least to the greatest.
589,932 < 634,943 < 639,443
The order from the least to the greatest is 589,932; 634,943; 639,443
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 20

Lesson 1.4

Round to the place value of the underlined digit.

Question 1.
286,476
____

Answer: 286,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 6 in 286,476 is 286,000.

Question 2.
289,342
____

Answer: 289,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 9 in 289,342 is 289,000.

Question 3.
245,001
____

Answer: 250,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 4 in 245,001 is 250,000.

Question 4.
183,002
____

Answer: 200,000

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 183,002 is 200,000.

Lesson 1.5

Rename the number.

Question 5.
82 thousands = ____

Answer: 82,000

Explanation:
82 thousands = 82 × 1000 = 82,000.

Question 6.
600,000 = ____ ten thousands

Answer: 60

Explanation:
600,000 = 60 × 10000
60 × 10000 = 60 ten thousands

Question 7.
9,200 = ____ hundreds

Answer: 92

Explanation:
9,200 = 92 × 100 = 92 hundreds

Question 8.
8 ten thousands 4 hundreds = ____

Answer: 80,400

Explanation:
8 ten thousands 4 hundreds
8 × 10,000 + 4 × 100 = 80,000 + 400 = 80,400

Lesson 1.6

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 9.
94,903
+ 49,995
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 140000
Sum: 144898

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 94,903 is 90,000
The number rounded to 49,995 is 50,000
90,000
+50,000
140,000
Sum:
94,903
+ 49,995
144,898

Question 10.
420,983
+ 39,932
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 460,000
Sum: 460915

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 420,983 is 420,000
The number rounded to 39,932 is 40,000
420,000
+40,000
460,000
Sum:
420,983
+39,932
460,915

Question 11.
540,943
+ 382,093
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 940,000
Sum: 923036

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 540,943 is 540,000
The number rounded to 382,093 is 400,000
540,000
+400,000
940,000
Sum:
540,943
+ 382,093
923,036

Lesson 1.7

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 12.
25,953
– 9,745
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 15,000
Difference: 16,208

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 25,953 is 25,000
The number rounded to 9,745 is 10,000.
25,000
-10,000
15,000
Difference:
25,953
– 9,745
16,208

Question 13.
740,758
– 263,043
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 450,000
Difference: 477715

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 740,758 is 750,000
The number rounded to 263,043 is 300,000
750,000
-300,000
450,000
Difference:
740,758
– 263,043
477,715

Question 14.
807,632
– 592,339
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Answer:
Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 215293

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 807,632 is 800,000
The number rounded to 592,339 is 600,000
800,000
-600,000
200,000
Difference:
807,632
– 592,339
215293

Lesson 1.8

Question 15.
The attendance for the first game of the football season was 93,584. The attendance for the second game was 104,227. How many more people attended the second game than the first game?
______ people

Answer: 10643 people

Explanation:
Given,
The attendance for the first game of the football season was 93,584.
The attendance for the second game was 104,227.
104,227
-93,584
10,643
Thus, 10,643 more people attended the second game than the first game.

Question 16.
Abby and Lee sold raffle tickets to raise money for a new playground. Abby sold 1,052 tickets. Lee sold 379 more tickets than Abby. How many tickets did Lee sell?
______ tickets

Answer: 1431 tickets

Explanation:
Given,
Abby and Lee sold raffle tickets to raise money for a new playground.
Abby sold 1,052 tickets. Lee sold 379 more tickets than Abby.
1,052
+379 
1431
Therefore, Lee sell 1431 tickets.

Conclusion

All these solutions explained in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million are easy to understand. Check out HMH Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 1 Solution Key to score good grades in the exams. For any queries go through the exercise problems of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million pdf.

Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations

go-math-grade-8-chapter-5-writing-linear-equations-answer-key

It is essential for the students to have the best material to study for the exams. Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations recommend to every student who wants to succeed in math. Fall in love with math by practicing the problems from Go Math 8th Grade Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Solution Key. We have provided the step by step explanation for each and every question in CCSS Math Answers. Quick & smart learning is possible with the Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear EquationsPDF.

Go Math Grade 8 Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Answer Key

The students who are willing to become masters in maths are suggested to follow our Go Math 8th Grade Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Solution Key. You can get free access for Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear equations topicwise here. Check out the topics of Writing Linear equations from the below section.

Lesson 1: Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs 

Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table

Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data

Model Quiz

Mixed Review

Guided Practice – Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs – Page No. 130

Question 1.
Li is making beaded necklaces. For each necklace, she uses 27 spacers, plus 5 beads per inch of necklace length. Write an equation to find how many beads Li needs for each necklace.
a. input variable:
____________

Answer:
The length of the necklace in inches

Question 1.
b. output variable:
____________

Answer:
The total number of beads in the necklace

Question 1.
c. equation:
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 5x

Question 2.
Kate is planning a trip to the beach. She estimates her average speed to graph her expected progress on the trip. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that represents the situation.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 1: Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs img 1
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -60x + 300

Explanation:
Choose two points on the graph to find the slope.
Find the slope
m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1)
m = -300/5 = -60
Read the y-intercept from the graph: b = 300
Use your slope and y-intercept values to write an equation in slope-intercept
form.
y = -60x + 300

Question 3.
At 59 °F, crickets chirp at a rate of 76 times per minute, and at 65 °F, they chirp 100 times per minute. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that represents the situation.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 4x – 160

Explanation:
Input variable: Temperature
Output variable: Number of chirps per minute
Slope:
m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (100 – 76)/(65 – 59) = 24/6 = 4
100 = 4(65) + b
y-intercept:
b = -160
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 4 and b = -160.
y = 4x – 160

Essential Question Check-In

Question 4.
Explain what m and b in the equation y = mx + b tell you about the graph of the line with that equation.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The equation of any straight line, called a linear equation, can be written as: y = mx + b, where m is the slope of the line and b is the y-intercept.
m = change in y-value/change in x-value
The y-intercept of this line is the value of y at the point where the line crosses the y-axis.

Independent Practice – Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs – Page No. 131

Question 5.
A dragonfly can beat its wings 30 times per second. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that shows the relationship between flying time in seconds and the number of times the dragonfly beats its wings
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 30x

Explanation:
The linear equation is y = mx + b where m is the slope and b is the y-intercept.
y variable will be the number of times the dragonfly has beat its wings and the x variable will be the time.
A dragonfly can beat its wings 30 times per second.
To find b, let’s consider how many times the dragonfly has beat its wings at time 0s.
So, the equation of the line is y = 30x

Question 6.
A balloon is released from the top of a platform that is 50 meters tall. The balloon rises at the rate of 4 meters per second. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that tells the height of the balloon above the ground after a given number of seconds.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 4x + 50

Explanation:
Input variable: Number of seconds
Output variable: Height of the balloon
The balloon rises at a rate of 4 meters per second. m = 4;
A balloon is released from the top of a platform that is 50 meters tall. b = 50.
y = 4x + 50

The graph shows a scuba diver’s ascent over time.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 1: Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs img 2

Question 7.
Use the graph to find the slope of the line. Tell what the slope means in this context.
Slope = _______ meters per second

Answer:
Slope = 1/8 or 0.125 meters per second

Explanation:
10m/80sec = 1/8
The scuba diver’s ascent gives up 1 meter per 16 seconds.

Question 8.
Identify the y-intercept. Tell what the y-intercept means in this context.
y-intercept = _______ meters

Answer:
y-intercept = -10 meters

Explanation:
The scuba divers start 10 meters below the water surface

Question 9.
Write an equation in slope-intercept form that represents the diver’s depth over time.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 1/8 x – 10

Question 10.
The formula for converting Celsius temperatures to Fahrenheit temperatures is a linear equation. Water freezes at 0°C, or 32°F, and it boils at 100°C, or 212°F. Find the slope and y-intercept for a graph that gives degrees Celsius on the horizontal axis and degrees Fahrenheit on the vertical axis. Then write an equation in slope-intercept form that converts degrees Celsius into degrees Fahrenheit.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Input variable: Celsius
Output variable: Fahrenheit
(0, 32) (100, 212)
m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (212 – 32)/(100 – 0) = 180/100 = 1.8
y intercepts = 32 when x = 0
F = 1.8C + 32

Question 11.
The cost of renting a sailboat at a lake is $20 per hour plus $12 for lifejackets. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that can be used to calculate the total amount you would pay for using this sailboat.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 20x + 12

Explanation:
Input variable: Number of hours sailboat is rented
Output variable: Total cost
The cost of renting a sailboat at a lake is $20 per hour plus $12 for lifejackets.
Slope m = 20; y-intercept b = 12
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 20 and b = 12.
y = 20x + 12

Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs – Page No. 132

The graph shows the activity in a savings account.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 1: Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs img 3

Question 12.
What was the amount of the initial deposit that started this savings account?
$ _______

Answer:
$1000

Explanation:
The amount of the initial deposit that started this savings account is $1000

Question 13.
Find the slope and y-intercept of the graphed line.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
slope = 500
y-intercept = 1000

Explanation:
slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (2000 – 1500)/(2 – 1) = 500/1 = 500
y-intercept = 1000

Question 14.
Write an equation in slope-intercept form for the activity in this savings account.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 500x + 1000

Explanation:
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 500 and b = 1000.
y = 500x + 1000

Question 15.
Explain the meaning of the slope in this graph.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The slope represents the amount of money saved in dollars per month in the plan.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 16.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Explain how you decide which part of a problem will be represented by the variable x, and which part will be represented by the variable y in a graph of the situation.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y=mx+b
M-slope
B-Y intercept
and
(x,y)- would be any point on the graph and if you were to plug those points in for x and y the equation would solve if done properly

Question 17.
Represent Real-World Problems
Describe what would be true about the rate of change in a situation that could not be represented by a graphed line and an equation in the form y = mx + b.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The rate of change would not be constant. Using different pairs of points in the slope formula would give different results.

Question 18.
Draw Conclusions
Must m, in the equation y = mx + b, always be a positive number? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
No; The slope m can be negative or positive. If the slope of the number is positive (the graph goes upward from left to right), then m will be positive, but if the slope is negative (the graph goes down from left to right), then m is negative.

Guided Practice – Writing Linear Equations from a Table – Page No. 136

Question 1.
Jaime purchased a $20 bus pass. Each time he rides the bus, a certain amount is deducted from the pass. The table shows the amount, y, left on his pass after x rides. Graph the data, and find the slope and y-intercept from the graph or from the table. Then write the equation for the graph in slope-intercept form.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 4
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 1
y = -5/4 x + 20

Explanation:
Slope = -20/16 = -5/4 = -1.25
y- intercepts = 20
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -1.25 and b = 20.
y = -5/4 x + 20

The table shows the temperature (y) at different altitudes (x). This is a linear relationship.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 5

Question 2.
Find the slope for this relationship.
_______

Answer:
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (51 – 59)/(2000 – 0) = -8/2000 = -0.004

Explanation:
(x1, y1) = (0, 59), (x2, y2) = (2000, 51)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (51 – 59)/(2000 – 0) = -8/2000 = -0.004

Question 3.
Find the y-intercept for this relationship.
y-intercept = _______

Answer:
b = 50

Explanation:
y-intercept = 59 when x = 0

Question 4.
Write an equation in slope-intercept form that represents this relationship.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -0.004x + 59

Explanation:
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -0.004 and b = 59.

Question 5.
Use your equation to determine the temperature at an altitude of 5000 feet.
_______ °F

Answer:
39°F

Explanation:
y = -0.004x + 59
y = -0.004(5000) + 59 = -20 + 59 = 39
The temperature is 39°F at the altitude of 5000 feet.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
Describe how you can use the information in a table showing a linear relationship to find the slope and y-intercept for the equation.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Use any two points from the table to fins teh slope.
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1)
If the value of y-intercept, when x=0 is not given in the table, use the slope and any ordered pair from the table and substitute in slope-intercept from y=mx + b to find b.

Independent Practice – Writing Linear Equations from a Table – Page No. 137

Question 7.
The table shows the costs of a large cheese pizza with toppings at a local pizzeria. Graph the data, and find the slope and y-intercept from the graph. Then write the equation for the graph in slope-intercept form.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 6
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 2

Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (10 – 8)/(1 – 0) = 2/1 = 2
y-intercept b = 8
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 2 and b = 8.
y = 2x + 8

Question 8.
The table shows how much an air-conditioning repair company charges for different numbers of hours of work. Graph the data, and find the slope and y-intercept from the graph. Then write the equation for the graph in slope-intercept form.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 7
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 3

Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (100 – 50)/(1 – 0) = 50/1 = 50
y-intercept b = 50
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 50 and b = 50.
y = 50x + 50

Question 9.
A friend gave Ms. Morris a gift card for a local car wash. The table shows the linear relationship of how the value left on the card relates to the number of car washes.
a. Write an equation that shows the number of dollars left on the card.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 8
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -1.50x + 30

Explanation:
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (18 – 30)/(8 – 0) = -12/8 = -1.5
y-intercept b = 30
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -1.50 and b = 30.
y = -1.50x + 30

Question 9.
b. Explain the meaning of the negative slope in this situation.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The negative slope means that the amount on the card decreased by $1.5 per car wash

Question 9.
c. What is the maximum value of x that makes sense in this context? Explain.
x = _______

Answer:
x = 20

Explanation:
0 = -1.50x + 30
1.5x = 30
x = 30/1.5 = 20
the maximum value of x = 20

The tables show linear relationships between x and y. Write an equation in slope-intercept form for each relationship.

Question 10.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 9
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (3 – 1)/(2 – 0) =  2/2 = 1
y-intercept b = 1
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 1 and b = 1.
y =  x + 1

Question 11.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 10
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (6 – 4)/(0 – 1) =  -2/1 = -2
y-intercept b = 6
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -2 and b = 6.
y = -2x + 6

Writing Linear Equations from a Table – Page No. 138

Question 12.
Finance
Desiree starts a savings account with $125.00. Every month, she deposits $53.50.
a. Complete the table to model the situation.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 11
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 4

Question 12.
b. Write an equation in slope-intercept form that shows how much money Desiree has in her savings account after x months.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 53.5x + 125

Explanation:
Desiree starts a savings account with $125.00. Every month, she deposits $53.50.
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 53.5 and b = 125.
y = 53.5x + 125

Question 12.
c. Use the equation to find how much money Desiree will have in savings after 11 months.
$ ________

Answer:
$713.5

Explanation:
y = 53.5x + 125
The value of x is 11
y = 53.5 (11) + 125 = 588.5 + 125 = 713.5
Desiree will have $713.5 in savings after 11 months.

Question 13.
Monty documented the amount of rain his farm received on a monthly basis, as shown in the table.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 2: Writing Linear Equations from a Table img 12
a. Is the relationship linear? Why or why not?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
No

Explanation:
The change in the months is constant but the change in rainfall is not constant.

Question 13.
b. Can an equation be written to describe the amount of rain? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
No

Explanation:
There is no apparent pattern in the given data.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 14.
Analyze Relationships
If you have a table that shows a linear relationship, when can you read the value for b, in y = mx + b, directly from the table without drawing a graph or doing any calculations? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
You can read the value of b directly from the table whrn the table contains the input value of 0 and its corresponding output values (value of y when x = 0)

Question 15.
What If?
Jaíme graphed linear data given in the form (cost, number). The y-intercept was 0. Jayla graphed the same data given in the form (number, cost). What was the y-intercept of her graph? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Jaíme graphed linear data given in the form (cost, number). The y-intercept was 0. Jayla graphed the same data given in the form (number, cost).
Jaíme’s graph contained (0, 0). Since Jayal’s data were the same y-intercept is 0 but x and y are switched.

Guided Practice – Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data – Page No. 144

Use the following graphs to find the equation of the linear relationship.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 13
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 30x

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 5
Find the slope using two points from the grapgh by
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (1, 30) and (x2, y2) = (2, 60)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (60 – 30)/(2 – 1) = 30/1 = 30
y-intercept b = 0
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 30 and b = 0.
y = 30x

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 14
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 2.5x + 2

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 6
Find the slope using two points from the grapgh by
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (2, 7) and (x2, y2) = (4, 12)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (12 – 7)/(4 – 2) = 5/2 = 2.5
y-intercept b = 2
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 2.5 and b = 2.
y = 2.5x + 2

Question 3.
The graph shows the relationship between the number of hours a kayak is rented and the total cost of the rental. Write an equation of the relationship. Then use the equation to predict the cost of a rental that lasts 5.5 hours.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 15
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 20x + 30
The cost of a rental that lasts 5.5 hours is $140

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the grapgh by
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (2, 70) and (x2, y2) = (4, 110)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (110 – 70)/(4 – 2) = 40/2 = 20
y-intercept b = 30
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 20 and b = 30.
y = 20x + 30
Substitue the value of x is 5.5 hrs
y = 20 (5.5) + 30
y = 110 + 30 = 140
The cost of a rental that lasts 5.5 hours is $140

Does each of the following graphs represent a linear relationship? Why or why not?

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 16
____________

Answer:
Yes; The graph has a constant rate of change

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the grapgh by
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (2, 6) and (x2, y2) = (5, 15)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (15 – 6)/(5 – 2) = 9/3 = 3
y-intercept b = 6
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 3 and b = 6.
y = 3x + 6
The values changing according to the constant change in the x values.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 17
____________

Answer:
No; The graph does not have a constant rate of change

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
How can you tell if a set of bivariate data shows a linear relationship?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
It is a linear relationship if the rate of change is constant or the graph is a straight line.

Independent Practice – Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data – Page No. 145

Does each of the following tables represent a linear relationship? Why or why not?

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 18
____________

Answer:
Linear Relationship

Explanation:
Find Rate of Change using Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1)
Rate of Change = (45 – 15)/(9 – 3) = 30/6 = 5
Rate of Change = (105 – 45)/(21 – 9) = 60/12 = 5
It is a Linear Relationship as the rate of the change is constant.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 19
____________

Answer:
not a Linear Relationship

Explanation:
Find Rate of Change using Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1)
Rate of Change = (76.8 – 30)/(8 – 5) = 46./3 = 15.6
Rate of Change = (235.2 – 76.8)/(14 – 8) = 158.4/6 = 26.4
It is not a Linear Relationship as the rate of the change is varies.

Explain whether or not you think each relationship is linear.

Question 9.
the cost of equal-priced DVDs and the number purchased
____________

Answer:
y = cx

Explanation:
The relation between the cost of equal-priced DVDs and the number purchased is linear because the change rate is constant. If we denote with c the cost of a DVD, with x the number of purchased DVDs and with y the total cost of the purchased DVDs, we get an equation of the form:
y = cx

Question 10.
the height of a person and the person’s age
____________

Answer:
Non – Linear relationship

Explanation:
The height of a person does not increase at a constant rate with a person’s age

Question 11.
the area of a square quilt and its side length
____________

Answer:
Non – Linear relationship

Explanation:
The rate of change in the area of a square quilt increase as the side length increases.

Question 12.
the number of miles to the next service station and the number of kilometers
____________

Answer:
Linear relationship

Explanation:
The number of miles increases at a constant rate with the number of kilometers.

Question 13.
Multistep
The Mars Rover travels 0.75 feet in 6 seconds. Add the point to the graph. Then determine whether the relationship between distance and time is linear, and if so, predict the distance that the Mars Rover would travel in 1 minute.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 20
Distance traveled in 1 min.: _______ ft.

Answer:
Relationship is linear
Distance traveled in 1 min.: 7.5 ft.

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 7
The graph is a straight line. So, the Relationship is linear
The equation representing the relationship between distance and time.
y = 0.125x
The value of x is 1 min = 60 sec
y = 0.125 (60) = 7.5 ft
Distance traveled in 1 min.: 7.5 ft.

Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data – Page No. 146

Question 14.
Make a Conjecture
Zefram analyzed a linear relationship, found that the slope-intercept equation was y=3.5x+16, and made a prediction for the value of y for a given value of x. He realized that he made an error calculating the y-intercept and that it was actually 12. Can he just subtract 4 from his prediction if he knows that the slope is correct? Explain.
____________

Answer:
Yes

Explanation:
The value of y is calculated using y = 3.5x+ 16. Since the slope of the point remains the same, 4 can be subtracted from the predicted answer as the value of y would be: y = 3.5x+ 16 – 4

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 15.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
The table shows a linear relationship. How can you predict the value of y when x = 6 without finding the equation of the relationship?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Lesson 3: Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data img 21
Type below:
____________

Answer:
57

Explanation:
Find Rate of Change using Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1)
Rate of Change = (76 – 38)/(8 – 4) = 38/4 = 9.5
Since the difference between 8 and S is 2, subtract twice the value of the rate of change from 76
y = 76 – (9.5 × 2) =57

Question 16.
Critique Reasoning
Louis says that if the differences between the values of x are constant between all the points on a graph, then the relationship is linear. Do you agree? Explain.
____________

Answer:
No

Explanation:
The difference between y should be constant for a constant interval of x.

Question 17.
Make a Conjecture
Suppose you know the slope of a linear relationship and one of the points that its graph passes through. How could you predict another point that falls on the graph of the line?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Find the equation of the linear relationship using the slope and given point. The insert any x-value to find a y value on the graph of the line.

Question 18.
Explain the Error
Thomas used (7, 17.5) and (18, 45) from a graph to find the equation of a linear relationship as shown. What was his mistake?
m = \(\frac{45-7}{18-17.5}=\frac{38}{0.5}\) = 79
y = 79x + b =
49 = 79 × 18 + b
45 = 1422 + b, so b = −1337
The equation is y = 79x − 1377
Type below:
____________

Answer:
He subtracted the x value of the first point from the y of the second point and the y value of the second point from the x value of the first point.
Hence, the slope is incorrect and the equation is incorrect as well. The correct slope is
(45 – 17.5)/(18 – 7) = 27.5/11 = 2.5

5.1 Writing Linear Equations from Situations and Graphs – Model Quiz – Page No. 147

Write the equation of each line in slope-intercept form.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 22
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 30x + 20

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (0, 20), (x2, y2) = (2, 80)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (0, 20), (x2, y2) = (2, 80)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (80 – 20)/(2 – 0) = 60/2 = 30
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
80 = 30(2) + b
y-intercept b = 20
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 30 and b = 20.
y = 30x + 20

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 23
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -10x + 60

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (6, 0), (x2, y2) = (0, 60)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (6, 0), (x2, y2) = (0, 60)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (60 – 0)/(0 – 6) = -60/6 = -10
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
60 = -10(0) + b
y-intercept b = 60
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -10 and b = 60.
y = -10x + 60

5.2 Writing Linear Equations from a Table

Write the equation of each linear relationship in slope-intercept form.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 24
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 0.35x + 1.5

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (0, 1.5), (x2, y2) = (100, 36.5)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (0, 1.5), (x2, y2) = (100, 36.5)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (36.5 – 1.5)/(100 – 0) = 35/100 = 0.35
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
1.5 =0.35(0) + b
y-intercept b = 1.5
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 0.35 and b = 1.5.
y = 0.35x + 1.5

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 25
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -0.6x + 109

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (25, 94), (x2, y2) = (35, 88)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (25, 94), (x2, y2) = (35, 88)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (88 – 94)/(35 – 25) = -6/10 = -0.6
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
88 = -0.6(35) + b
y-intercept b = 109
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -0.6 and b = 109.
y = -0.6x + 109

5.3 Linear Relationships and Bivariate Data

Write the equation of the line that connects each set of data points.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 26
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = 2/3x + 26 2/3

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 8
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (20, 40), (x2, y2) = (50, 60)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (20, 40), (x2, y2) = (50, 60)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (60 – 40)/(50 – 20) = 20/30 = 2/3
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
40 = 2/3(20) + b
y-intercept b = 26 2/3
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 2/3 and b = 26 2/3.
y = 2/3x + 26 2/3

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Model Quiz img 27
Type below:
____________

Answer:
y = -3x + 140

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 5 image 9
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (25, 65), (x2, y2) = (30, 50)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (25, 65), (x2, y2) = (30, 50)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (50 – 65)/(30 – 25) = -15/5 = -3
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
50 = -3(30) + b
y-intercept b = 140
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -3 and b = 140.
y = -3x + 140

Essential Question

Question 7.
Write a real-world situation that can be represented by a linear relationship.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
There is an hourly fee of $15 for renting the ski gears per hour and an entry fee of $10 for the ski lodge.

Selected Response – Mixed Review – Page No. 148

Question 1.
An hourglass is turned over with the top part filled with sand. After 3 minutes, there are 855 mL of sand in the top half. After 10 minutes, there are 750 mL of sand in the top half. Which equation represents this situation?
Options:
a. y = 285x
b. y = −10.5x + 900
c. y = −15x + 900
d. y = 75x

Answer:
c. y = −15x + 900

Explanation:
Identify the input and output variable
Input: Number of minutes
Output: Quantity of sand in the hourglass
Write the given information as ordered pair (3, 855), (10, 750)
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (10, 750), (x2, y2) =(3, 855)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (10, 750), (x2, y2) =(3, 855)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (855 – 750)/(3 – 10) = -105/7 = -15
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
750 = -15(10) + b
y-intercept b = 900
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = -15 and b = 900.
y = -15x + 900

Question 2.
Which graph shows a linear relationship?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Mixed Review img 28
Options:
a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D

Answer:
b. B

Explanation:
Graph B represents the linear relationship
The data appears to lie on a straight line

Question 3.
What are the slope and y-intercept of the relationship shown in the table?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Mixed Review img 29
Options:
a. slope = 0.05, y-intercept = 1,500
b. slope = 0.5, y-intercept = 1,500
c. slope = 0.05, y-intercept = 2,000
d. slope = 0.5, y-intercept = 2,000

Answer:
c. slope = 0.05, y-intercept = 2,000

Explanation:
Find the slope using two points from the graph by m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) where (x1, y1) = (10,000, 2,500), (x2, y2) =(20,000, 3,000)
Substitute the value of m and (x1, y1) = (10,000, 2,500), (x2, y2) =(20,000, 3,000)
Slope m = (y2 -y1)/(x2 – x1) = (3,000 – 2,500)/(20,000 – 10,000) = 500/10,000 = 0.05
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y intercept (b):
3,000 = 0.05(20,000) + b
y-intercept b = 2,000

Question 4.
Which is the sum of 3.15 × 107 + 9.3 × 106? Write your answer in scientific notation.
Options:
a. 4.08 × 107
b. 4.08 × 106
c. 0.408 × 108
d. 40.8 × 106

Answer:
a. 4.08 × 107

Explanation:
Given 3.15 × 107 + 9.3 × 106?
(3.15 + 0.93) × 107
4.08 × 107

Mini-Task

Question 5.
Franklin’s faucet was leaking, so he put a bucket underneath to catch the water. After a while, Franklin started keeping track of how much water was in the bucket. His data is in the table below.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Mixed Review img 30
a. Is the relationship linear or nonlinear?
_____________

Answer:
The relationship linear

Explanation:
Find the rate of change by Difference in Quarts/Hours
(6.5 – 5)/(3 – 2) = 1.5
(8 – 6.5)/(4 – 3) = 1.5
(9.5 – 8)/(5 – 4) = 1.5
Since the rate of change is constant, the relationship is linear.

Question 5.
b. Write the equation for the relationship.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Rate of change is the slope of the linear equation
m = 1.5

Question 5.
c. Predict how much water will be in the bucket after 14 hours if Franklin doesn’t stop the leak.
_______ quarts

Answer:
23 quarts

Explanation:
Substituting the value of slope (m) and (x, y) in the slope intercept form to find y-intercept (b)
y = mx + b
5 = 1.5(2) + b
y-intercept b = 2
Substituting the value of the slope m and y-intercept in the slope-intercept form. y = mx + b where, m = 1.5 and b = 2.
y = 1.5x + 2
The x value is 2
y = 1.5(2) + 2 = 23
There will be 23 quarts after 14 hrs.

Conclusion:

Every expert’s choice is utilizing Go math Grade 8 Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Answer Key PDF. Practice the question from our Go Math 8th Grade Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations Answers to score the highest marks in the exams. Compare the questions with the real-time problems and solve the problems with the help of Go Math Grade 8 Chapter 5 Answer Key Chapter 5 Writing Linear Equations. Stay tuned to our ccssmathanswers.com to get the all Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapterwise pdfs.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions

go-math-grade-4-answer-key-chapter-7-add-and-subtract-fractions

One of the best study guides for grade 4 students is Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions. Make use of these pdf formatted chapter 7 Go Math HMH 4th Grade Answer Key for free and learn the topics efficiently. Download the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions pdf from here and get the step-wise answers to all the questions. From this page, you’ll find the different possible models & techniques that students use to find the correct way to solve the fractions.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions

Approaching the best ways will make you understand the concepts of adding and subtracting fractions. Master in the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions by using the clear cut explanation for all the questions with images. Obtain the knowledge to write the fractions as sum and subtractions from Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key of Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions.

Lesson: 1 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 2 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 3 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 4 – Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole

Lesson: 5 – Add Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 6 – Subtract Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 7 – Subtract Fractions Using Models

Lesson: 8 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 9 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 10 – Add and Subtract Fractions

Lesson: 11 – Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 12 – Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 13 – Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 14 – Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers

Lesson: 15 – Record Subtraction with Renaming

Lesson: 16 – Record Subtraction with Renaming

Lesson: 17 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 18 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 19 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 20 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 21 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Lesson: 22 – Fractions and Properties of Addition

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 389

Use the model to write an equation.

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 1

Answer: 3/8 + 2/8 = 5/8

Explanation:
By seeing the above 3 figures we can say that the fraction of the shaded part of the first circle is 3/8, the fraction of the second figure is 2/8
By adding the 2 fractions we get the fraction of the third circle.
3/8 + 2/8 = 5/8

Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 2

Answer: 4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5

Explanation:
The fraction of the shaded part for the above rectangle is 4/5
The fraction of the box is 3/5
The equation for the above figure is 4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 3

Answer: 1/4 + 2/4 = 3/4

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of first figure is 1/4
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of second figure is 1/4
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of third figure is 3/4
So, The equation for the above figure is 1/4 + 2/4 = 3/4

Question 4:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 4

\(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of first figure is 2/6
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of second figure is 3/6
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of third figure is 5/6
So, The equation for the above figure is \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Question 5:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 389 Question 5

\(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Explanation:
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of figure is 3/5
The name of the fraction for the shaded part of closed box is 2/5
So, The equation for the above figure is \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } -\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Question 6:
Jake ate \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } \) of a pizza. Millie ate \(\frac { 3}{ 8 } \) of the same pizza. How much of the pizza was eaten by Jake and Millie?

Answer: 7/8 of pizza

Explanation:
Given that,
Jake ate \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } \) of a pizza.
Millie ate \(\frac { 3}{ 8 } \) of the same pizza.
To find how much of the pizza was eaten by Jake and Millie
We have to add both the fractions
\(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) = \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)
Thus the fraction of the pizza eaten by Jake and Millie is \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Question 7:
Kate ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of her orange. Ben ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of his banana. Did Kate and Ben eat \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2}{ 4 } =\frac { 3}{ 4 } \) of their fruit?

Answer: No, one whole refers to orange and the other whole to a banana.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 390

Question 1:
A whole pie is cut into 8 equal slices. Three of the slices are served. How much of the pie is left?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \)
(d)\(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \)

Explanation:
Given,
A whole pie is cut into 8 equal slices. Three of the slices are served.
The fraction of 8 slices is 8/8.
Out of which 3/8 are served.
8/8 – 3/8 = 5/8
Therefore \(\frac { 5 }{ 8} \) of the pie is left.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2:
An orange is divided into 6 equal wedges. Jody eats 1 wedge. Then she eats 3 more wedges. How much of the orange did Jody eat?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6} \)
(b) \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5}{ 6 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 6}{ 6} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
An orange is divided into 6 equal wedges.
Jody eats 1 wedge.
Then she eats 3 more wedges.
The fraction of orange that Jody eat is \(\frac { 4}{ 6 } \).
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 3:
Which list of distances is in order from least to greatest?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8} \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile
(d)\(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile

Answer: \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile

Explantion:
Compare the three fractions 1/8, 3/4 and 3/16
Make the common denominators.
1/8 × 2/2 = 2/16
3/4 × 4/4 = 12/16
The fractions are 2/16, 12/16 and 3/16
The numerator with the highest number will be the greatest.
The fractions from least to greatest is \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 16 } \) Mile, \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) Mile.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Jeremy walked 6/8 of the way to school and ran the rest of the way. What fraction, in simplest form, shows the part of the way that Jeremy walked?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 2} \)
(d)\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jeremy walked 6/8 of the way to school and ran the rest of the way.
The simplest form of 6/8 is 3/8.
The simplest form of part of the way that Jeremy walked is 3/8.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5:
An elevator starts on the 100th floor of a building. It descends 4 floors every 10 seconds. At what floor will the elevator be 60 seconds after it starts?
(a) 60th floor
(b) 66th floor
(c) 72nd floor
(d) 76th floor

Answer: 76th floor

Explanation:
Given,
An elevator starts on the 100th floor of a building.
It descends 4 floors every 10 seconds.
4 floors – 10 seconds
? – 60 seconds
60 × 4/10 = 240/10 = 24 floors
100 – 24 = 76th floor
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6:
For a school play, the teacher asked the class to set up chairs in 20 rows with 25 chairs in each row. After setting up all the chairs, they were 5 chairs short. How many chairs did the class set up?
(a) 400
(b) 450
(c) 495
(d) 500

Answer: 495

Explanation:
Given,
For a school play, the teacher asked the class to set up chairs in 20 rows with 25 chairs in each row.
After setting up all the chairs, they were 5 chairs short.
20 × 25 = 500
500 – 5 = 495
Therefore the class set up 495 chairs.
Thus the correct answer is c.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 393

Question 1:
Write \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 }\) as a sum of unit fractions.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 1
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 3/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 3/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4.

Write the fraction as a sum of unit fractions.
Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 2
\(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 5/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 5/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 393 Question 3
\(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 2/3 is 1/3 + 1/3.

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 2/3 is 1/3 + 1/3.

Question 4:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Question 5:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 6/8 is 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 6/8 is 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Question 6:
\(\frac { 8 }{ 10 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 8/10 is 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 8/10 is 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Question 7:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } = \)

Answer:
The sum of the unit fraction for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The sum of the unit fraction for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 8:
Compare Representations How many different ways can you write a fraction that has a numerator of 2 as a sum of fractions? Explain.

Answer:
Let’s say we have the fraction 2/9.
We can split this one fraction into two by modifying the numerator, like so: 2/9 = 1/9 + 1/9
This works because since both fractions have a numerator of 9, you can easily add the numerators to give 2, and that will give 2/9 in return. However, you can’t separate the denominators.
2/9 is not equal to 2/6 + 2/3
2/9 = 1/9 + 1/9
2/9 = 0.5/9 + 1.5/9 (which simplifies to 1/18 + 3/18, also giving 2/9)
2/9 = 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 + 0.5/9 = 1/18 + 1/18 + 1/18 + 1/18
I basically split it up into more and more fractions that add up to give 2/9. So, in short, there are infinitely many ways to do it.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 394

Question 9:
Holly’s garden is divided into 5 equal sections. She will fence the garden into 3 areas by grouping some equal sections together. What part of the garden could each fenced area be?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 394 Question 9
a. What information do you need to use?

Answer:
We need the information about the equal sections and fence the garden into 3 areas by grouping some equal sections together.

b. How can writing an equation help you solve the problem?

Answer: The equation helps to find what part of the garden could each fenced area be.

Explanation:
If you write an equation with 3 addends whose sum is 5/5, you could find the possible sizes of each fenced area. The size of each section is 1/5. Each addend represents the size of a fenced area.

c. How can drawing a model help you write an equation?

Answer: If you draw a model that shows 5 fifth-size parts representing the sections, you can see how to group the parts into 3 areas in different ways.

d. Show how you can solve the problem.

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 img_1

Question 9:
Complete the sentence.
The garden can be fenced into ______, ______, and ______ parts or ______, ______, and ______ parts.

Answer: 3/5, 1/5 and 1/5 parts or 2/5, 2/5 and 1/5 parts

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 395

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 394 Question 1
Answer: 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 4/5 is 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5.

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 }= \)

Answer: 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 3/8 is 1/8 + 1/8 + 1/8

Question 3:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 12 }= \)

Answer: 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 6/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

Question 4:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 4 }= \)

Answer: 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 4/4 is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4

Question 5:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 10 }= \)

Answer: 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 7/10 is 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10 + 1/10

Question 6:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } =\)

Answer: 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Explanation:
The sum of the unit fractions for 6/6 is 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6 + 1/6

Question 7:
Miguel’s teacher asks him to color \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 }\) of his grid. He must use 3 colors: red, blue, and green. There must be more green sections than red sections. How can Miguel color the sections of his grid to follow all the rules?

Answer: 1/8 red, 1/8 blue, and 2/8 green

Explanation:
If there are 8 tiles, coloring \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 }\) means coloring 4 tiles. Using those three colors, we could use each 1 time with 1 leftover. Since we must have more green, we would use it twice; this would give us 2 green, 1 red and 1 blue.
Since the grid is not necessarily 8 squares, we must account for this by saying 2/8 green, 1/8 red, and 1/8 blue.

Question 8:
Petra is asked to color \(\frac { 6 }{ 6 }\) of her grid. She must use 3 colors: blue, red, and pink. There must be more blue sections than red sections or pink sections. What are the different ways Petra can color the sections of her grid and follow all the rules?

Answer: 3/6 blue, 2/6 red, 1/6 pink

Explanation:
1. 3 blues, 2 red, 1 pink.
2. 3 blues, 2 pink, 1 red.
3. 4 blues, 1 red, 1 pink
The different ways in which Petra can color the sections of her grid and follow the rules are;
1. 3 blues, 2 red, 1 pink.
2. 3 blues, 2 pink, 1 red.
3. 4 blues, 1 red, 1 pink
All these three ways follows the rules that; there must be three colors an also Blue sections are more than red sections or pink sections.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 396

Question 1:
Jorge wants to write \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) as a sum of unit fractions. Which of the following should he write?
(a) \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 }+\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jorge wants to write \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) as a sum of unit fractions.
The sum of the unit fraction for \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) is \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2:
Which expression is equivalent to \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) ?
(a) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8}+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } +\frac {3 }{ 8 } +\frac { 1 }{ 8 } +\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)

Explanation:
The fraction equivalent to \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) is \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 }+\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \).
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3:
An apple is cut into 6 equal slices. Nancy eats 2 of the slices. What fraction of the apple is left?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
An apple is cut into 6 equal slices. Nancy eats 2 of the slices.
6 – 2 = 4
\(\frac { 6 }{ 6 } \) – \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Which of the following numbers is a prime number?
(a) 1
(b) 11
(c) 21
(d) 51

Answer: 11

Explanation:
A prime number is a natural number greater than 1 that is not a product of two smaller natural numbers.
11 is a multiple of 1 and itself.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5:
A teacher has a bag of 100 unit cubes. She gives an equal number of cubes to each of the 7 groups in her class. She gives each group as many cubes as she can. How many unit cubes are left over?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 6

Answer: 2

Explanation:
Given,
A teacher has a bag of 100 unit cubes. She gives an equal number of cubes to each of the 7 groups in her class.
She gives each group as many cubes as she can.
100 divided by 7 is 14 r 2, so there are 2 leftover.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
Jessie sorted the coins in her bank. She made 7 stacks of 6 dimes and 8 stacks of 5 nickels. She then found 1 dime and 1 nickel. How many dimes and nickels does Jessie have in all?
(a) 84
(b) 82
(c) 80
(d) 28

Answer: 84

Explanation:
Given,
Jessie sorted the coins in her bank. She made 7 stacks of 6 dimes and 8 stacks of 5 nickels.
She then found 1 dime and 1 nickel.
43 dimes and 41 nickles
43 + 41 = 84
Jessie has 84 dimes and nickels in all.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 399

Question 1:
Adrian’s cat ate \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \) of a bag of cat treats in September and \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) of the same bag of cat treats in October. What part of the bag of cat treats did Adrian’s cat eat in both months? Use the model to find the sum \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \). How many fifth-size pieces are shown?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 1
Use the model to find the sum \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \). How many fifth-size pieces are shown? fifth-size pieces

Answer: 4/5

Explanation:
Given,
Adrian’s cat ate \(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \) of a bag of cat treats in September and \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) of the same bag of cat treats in October.
From the above figure, we can see that there are 4 fifth size pieces.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 5 } \)+\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \).

Use the model to find the sum.
Question 2:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 2
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/4

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 3 one-fourth shaded parts.
So, \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } +\frac { 2 }{ 4 } =\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Question 3:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 3
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that there are 9 one-tenth shaded parts.
So, \(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \).

Find the sum. Use models to help.
Question 4:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 6/6 = 1

Explanation:
3/6 and 3/6 has same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { 6 }{ 6 } \)
6/6 = 1

Question 5:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 1 }{ 3 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 2/3

Explanation:
1/3 and 1/3 has same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 1 }{ 3 } =\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \)

Question 6:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 7/8

Explanation:
Given the expressions 5/8 and 2/8.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
So, \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Find the sum. Use models or iTools to help.
Question 7:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 7/8

Explanation:
Given the expressions 5/8 and 2/8.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
So, \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } +\frac { 2 }{ 8 } =\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 4/5

Explanation:
2/5 and 2/5 have the same numerators and same denominators so we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \)

Question 9:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } +\frac { 1 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: 5/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions 4/6 and 1/6.
The above fractions have the same denominators but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } +\frac { 1 }{ 6 } =\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \)

Question 10:
Jason is making a fruit drink. He mixes \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) quart of grape juice with \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) quart of apple juice. Then he adds \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) quart of lemonade. How much fruit drink does Jason make?
\(\frac { }{ } \) quart.
Answer: \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \) quart.

Explanation:
Given that,
Jason is making a fruit drink. He mixes \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) quart of grape juice with \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) quart of apple juice.
Then he adds \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) quart of lemonade
Add all the three fractions to how much fruit drink Jason makes.
2/8 + 3/8 + 1/8 = \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \) quart.

Question 11:
A sum has five addends. Each addend is a unit fraction. The sum is 1. What are the addends?

Answer: 1/5

Explanation:
Given that,
A sum has five addends. Each addend is a unit fraction. The sum is 1.
1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 + 1/5 = 5/5 = 1
Thus the addend is 1/5.

Question 12:
In a survey, \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) of the students chose Friday and \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) chose Saturday as their favorite day of the week. What fraction shows the students who chose Friday or Saturday as their favorite day? Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 399 Question 12
\(\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)

Explanation:
Given that,
In a survey, \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) of the students chose Friday and \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) chose Saturday as their favorite day of the week.
Add both the fractions 4/12 and 5/12
\(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \) + \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)

Add and Subtract Parts of a Whole Page No – 400

Question 13:
Model Mathematics Jin is putting colored sand in a jar. She filled \(\frac {2 }{ 10} \) of the jar with blue sand and \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \) of the jar with pink sand. Describe one way to model the part of the jar filled with sand.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13

Answer: \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \)

Explanation:
the answer is 4/10 because 4/10 + 2/10= 6/10+ 4/10 = 10/10. a bit confusing
4 + 2 = 6 right the, 6 + 4 = 10 so 10/10.

Have you ever seen a stained glass window in a building or home? Artists have been designing stained glass windows for hundreds of years.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13 - i

Help design the stained glass sail on the boat below.

Materials • color pencils

Look at the eight triangles in the sail. Use the guide below to color the triangles:

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 400 Question 13 - ii

  • \(\frac {2 }{8 } \) blue
  • \(\frac {3 }{8 } \) red
  • \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) orange
  • \(\frac {1 }{8 } \) yellow

Question 14:
Write an Equation Write an equation that shows the fraction of triangles that are red or blue.
Answer: \(\frac {3 }{8 } \) red

Question 15:
What color is the greatest part of the sail? Write a fraction for that color. How do you know that fraction is greater than the other fractions? Explain.
Answer: Red

Explanation:
Among all the colors Red color has the greatest part of the sail.

Add Fractions Using Models – Page No 401

Find the sum. Use fraction strips to help.

Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page 401 Question 1

Answer: 3/6

Question 2:
\(\frac { 4 }{ 10 } +\frac { 5 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Img_6

Question 3:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } +\frac { 2 }{ 3 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/3
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter Add & Subtract Fractions Img_7

Question 4:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } +\frac { 1 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/4
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Img_8

Question 5:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 12 } +\frac { 4 }{ 12 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 6/12
HMH Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_9

Question 6:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 6 } +\frac { 3 }{ 6 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/6
Go Math Grade 4 Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_10

Question 7:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 12 } +\frac { 9 }{ 12 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 12/12

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_11

Question 8:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } +\frac { 4 }{ 8 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 7/8

Go Math 4th Grade Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_12

Question 9:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } +\frac { 1 }{ 4 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 4/4
Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions Img_13

Question 9:
\(\frac { 1 }{ 5 } +\frac { 2 }{ 5 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter Img_14

Question 10:
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } +\frac { 3 }{ 10 } =\frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 9/10
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Img_15

Question 11:
Lola walks \(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) mile to her friend’s house. Then she walks \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) mile to the store. How far does she walk in all?

Answer: \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) mile

Explanation:
Given,
Lola walks \(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) mile to her friend’s house.
Then she walks \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) mile to the store.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 10} \) + \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \)
Therefore she walked \(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) mile in all.

Question 12:
Evan eats \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) of a pan of lasagna and his brother eats \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of it. What fraction of the pan of lasagna do they eat in all?
Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of the pan

Explanation:
Given,
Evan eats \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) of a pan of lasagna and his brother eats \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of it.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)
= \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)

Question 13:
Jacqueline buys \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) yard of green ribbon and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) yard of pink ribbon. How many yards of ribbon does she buy in all?

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) yard

Explanation:
Given,
Jacqueline buys \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) yard of green ribbon and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) yard of pink ribbon.
\(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
= \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)
Thus Jacqueline bought \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) yards of ribbon in all.

Question 14:
Shu mixes \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \) pound of peanuts with \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \) pound of almonds. How many pounds of nuts does Shu mix in all?

Answer: 3/3 pound

Explanation:
Given,
Shu mixes \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \) pound of peanuts with \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \) pound of almonds.
\(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } \) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \)
= \(\frac { 3 }{ 3 } \)
Therefore Shu mix \(\frac { 3 }{ 3 } \) pounds of nuts in all.

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 402

Question 1:
Mary Jane has \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of a medium pizza left. Hector has \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of another medium pizza left. How much pizza do they have altogether?

(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 4 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Mary Jane has \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) of a medium pizza left.
Hector has \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) of another medium pizza left.
To find how much pizza do they have altogether we have to add both the fractions.
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \)
Therefore Mary Jane and Hector has \(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } \) pizza altogether.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2:
Jeannie ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of an apple. Kelly ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of the apple. How much did they eat in all?

(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)
(c) \(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
(d) \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Answer: \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)

Explanation:
Given,
Jeannie ate \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) of an apple.
Kelly ate \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) of the apple.
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) + \(\frac { 2 }{ 4 } \) = \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 3:
Karen is making 14 different kinds of greeting cards. She is making 12 of each kind. How many greeting cards is she making?

(a) 120
(b) 132
(c) 156
(d) 168

Answer: 168

Explanation:
Given,
Karen is making 14 different kinds of greeting cards.
She is making 12 of each kind.
To find how many greeting cards she is making we have to multiply 14 and 12.
14 × 12 = 168.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
Jefferson works part-time and earns $1,520 in four weeks. How much does he earn each week?

(a) $305
(b) $350
(c) $380
(d) $385

Answer: $380

Explanation:
Jefferson works part-time and earns $1,520 in four weeks.
1520 – 4 weeks
? – 1 week
1520/4 = $380
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5:
By installing efficient water fixtures, the average American can reduce water use to about 45 gallons of water per day. Using such water fixtures, about how many gallons of water would the average American use in December?

(a) about 1,200 gallons
(b) about 1,500 gallons
(c) about 1,600 gallons
(d) about 2,000 gallons

Answer: about 1,500 gallons

Explanation:
Given,
By installing efficient water fixtures, the average American can reduce water use to about 45 gallons of water per day.
1 day – 45 gallons
31 days – ?
45 × 31 = 1395 gallons
The number near to 1395 is 1500 gallons.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
Collin is making a bulletin board and note center. He is using square cork tiles and square dry-erase tiles. One of every 3 squares will be a cork square. If he uses 12 squares for the center, how many will be cork squares?

(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Given that,
Collin is making a bulletin board and note center.
He is using square cork tiles and square dry-erase tiles.
One of every 3 squares will be a cork square.
12/3 = 4
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 405

Question 1:
Lisa needs 4/5 pound of shrimp to make shrimp salad. She has 1/5 pound of shrimp. How much more shrimp does Lisa need to make the salad?
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q1
Subtract \(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } – \frac { 1 }{ 5 }\). Use the model to help.
Shade the model to show how much shrimp Lisa needs.
Then shade the model to show how much shrimp Lisa has.
Compare the difference between the two shaded rows.
\(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } – \frac { 1 }{ 5 } = \frac {■ }{ 5} \)
Lisa needs _____ pound more shrimp.

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given that,
Lisa needs 4/5 pounds of shrimp to make shrimp salad. She has 1/5 pound of shrimp.
The denominators have the same numbers and numerators have different numbers.
4/5 – 3/5 = 1/5
Thus Lisa needs 1/5 pounds more shrimp.

Use the model to find the difference.

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3 }{ 6 } – \frac { 2 }{ 6 } = \frac {■ }{ 6} \)
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q2

Answer: 1/6

Explanation:
Given two fractions 3/6 and 2/6
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
3/6 – 2/6 = 1/6

Question 3:
\(\frac { 8 }{ 10 } – \frac { 5 }{ 10 } = \frac {■ }{ 10} \)
Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 405 Q 3

Answer: 3/10

Explanation:
Given two fractions 8/10 and 5/10
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different.
8/10 – 5/10 = 3/10

Subtract. Use models to help.

Question 4:
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } – \frac { 2 }{ 8 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 3/8

Explanation:
Given two fractions 5/8 and 2/8
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 5 }{ 8 } – \frac { 2 }{ 8 } = \frac { 3 }{ 8 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_1

Question 5:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } – \frac { 2 }{ 12 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 5/12

Explanation:
Given two fractions 7/12 and 2/12
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } – \frac { 2 }{ 12 } = \frac { 5 }{ 12 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_2

Question 6:
\(\frac { 3 }{4 } – \frac { 2 }{ 4 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 1/4

Explanation:
Given two fractions 3/4 and 2/4
Denominators are same but the numerators are different.
\(\frac { 3 }{4 } – \frac { 2 }{ 4 } = \frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions img_3

Question 7:
\(\frac { 2 }{ 3 } – \frac { 1 }{ 3 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 1/3

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add & Subtract Fractions img_4

Question 8:
\(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } – \frac { 5 }{ 8 } = \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 2/8

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions img_5

Question 9:
Explain how you could find the unknown addend in \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \) + _____ = 1 without using a model.
Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
1 can be written in the fraction form as 6/6
2/6 + x = 6/6
x = 6/6 – 2/6
x = 4/6

Add Fractions Using Models – Lesson Check – Page No 406

Question 10:
Mrs. Ruiz served a pie for dessert two nights in a row. The drawings below show the pie after her family ate dessert on each night. What fraction of the pie did they eat on the second night?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 406 Q 10

\( \frac { }{ } \)

Answer: 10/12

a. What do you need to know?

Answer: We need to find the fraction of the pie did they eat on the second night.

b. How can you find the number of pieces eaten on the second night?

Answer: We can find the number of pieces eaten on the second night by dividing the number of eaten pieces by the total number of pieces.

c. Explain the steps you used to solve the problem.
Complete the sentences.
After the first night, _______ pieces were left.
After the second night, _______ pieces were left.
So, _______ of the pie was eaten on the second night.

Answer:
After the first night, 9 pieces were left.
After the second night, 2 pieces were left.
So, 10 of the pie was eaten on the second night.

Question 11:
Make Connection Between Models Judi ate \(\frac { 7}{8} \) of a small pizza and Jack ate \(\frac { 2}{ 8 } \) of a second small pizza. How much more of a pizza did Judi eat?
\(\frac { }{ } \)
Answer: \(\frac {5}{8} \)

Explanation:
Given,
Make Connection Between Models Judi ate \(\frac { 7}{8} \) of a small pizza and Jack ate \(\frac { 2}{ 8 } \) of a second small pizza.
\(\frac {7}{8} \) – \(\frac {2}{8} \) = \(\frac {5}{8} \)
Therefore Judi eat \(\frac {5}{8} \) of a pizza.

Question 12:
Keiko sewed \(\frac { 3}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Pam sewed \(\frac { 1}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Shade the model to show how much more lace Keiko sewed on her backpack than Pam
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 406 Q 12
\(\frac { ■ }{  ■ } \)
Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given,
Keiko sewed \(\frac { 3}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack. Pam sewed \(\frac { 1}{4} \) yard of lace on her backpack.
\(\frac {3}{4} \) – \(\frac {1}{4} \) = \(\frac {2}{4} \)

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 407

Subtract. Use fraction strips to help.
Question 1:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Subtract Fractions Using Models Q1
Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given the fraction, 4/5 and 1/5
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
4/5 – 1/5 = 3/5

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 3}{ 4 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1}{ 4 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 3:
\(\frac { 5}{ 6 } – \frac { 1}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 6 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 5}{ 6 } – \frac { 1}{ 6 } = \frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Question 4:
\(\frac { 7}{ 8 } – \frac { 1}{ 8 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 6/8

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 7 }{ 8 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 8 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 7}{ 8 } – \frac { 1}{ 8 } = \frac { 6 }{ 8 } \)

Question 5:
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } – \frac { 2}{ 3 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 1/3

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 2 }{ 3 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } – \frac { 2}{ 3 } = \frac { 1}{ 3 } \)

Question 6:
\(\frac { 8}{ 10 } – \frac { 2}{ 10 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 6/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 8 }{ 10 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 2 }{ 10 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 8}{ 10 } – \frac { 2}{ 10 } = \frac { 6 }{ 10 } \)

Question 7:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 1 }{ 4 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac { 1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 7}{ 6 } – \frac {5}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac { 7 }{ 6 } \) and [/latex] \frac { 5 }{ 6 } [/latex]
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 7}{ 6 } – \frac {5}{ 6 } = \frac { 2 }{ 6 } \)

Problem Solving
Use the table for 9 and 10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Subtract Fractions Using Models Q9
Question 9:
Ena is making trail mix. She buys the items shown in the table. How many more pounds of pretzels than raisins does she buy?
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 5/8 pound

Explanation:
Given that,
Ena is making trail mix.
pretzels = 7/8
Raisins = 2/8
To find the number of more pounds of pretzels than raisins she buy
we have to subtract both the fractions.
7/8 – 2/8 = 5/8

Question 10:
How many more pounds of granola than banana chips does she buy?
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/8 pound

Explanation:
Granola = 5/8
Banana Chips = 3/8
To find How many more pounds of granola than banana chips does she buy we have to subtract both the fractions.
5/8 – 3/8 = 2/8 pounds

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 408

Question 1:
Lee reads for \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) hour in the morning and \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) hour in the afternoon. How much longer does Lee read in the morning than in the afternoon?
(a) 5 hours
(b) \(\frac { 5}{ 4} \)
(c) \(\frac { 4}{ 4} \)
(d) \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)

Explanation:
Given,
Lee reads for \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) hour in the morning and \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) hour in the afternoon.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) – \(\frac {2}{ 4} \) = \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \)
Lee read \(\frac { 1}{ 4} \) hour in the morning than in the afternoon.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2:
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add Fractions Using Models - Lesson Check - Page No 408 Q2
(a) \(\frac { 3}{ 6} – \frac { 2}{ 6} = \frac { 1}{ 6} \)
(b) \(\frac { 2}{ 6} – \frac { 1}{ 6} = \frac { 1}{ 6} \)
(c) \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)
(d) 1 – \( \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac {3}{ 6} \)

Answer: \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)

Explanation:
From the above figure we can say that \(\frac { 5}{ 6} – \frac { 3}{ 6} = \frac { 2}{ 6} \)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3:
A city received 2 inches of rain each day for 3 days. The meteorologist said that if the rain had been snow, each inch of rain would have been 10 inches of snow. How much snow would that city have received in the 3 days?

(a) 20 inches
(b) 30 inches
(c) 50 inches
(d) 60 inches

Answer: 60 inches

Explanation:
Given,
A city received 2 inches of rain each day for 3 days.
2 × 3 inches = 6 inches
The meteorologist said that if the rain had been snow, each inch of rain would have been 10 inches of snow.
6 × 10 inches = 60 inches
Therefore the city has received 60 inches of snow in 3 days.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4:
At a party there were four large submarine sandwiches, all the same size. During the party, \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \) of the chicken sandwich, \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) of the tuna sandwich, \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) of the roast beef sandwich, and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \) of the veggie sandwich were eaten. Which sandwich had the least amount left?

(a) chicken
(b) tuna
(c) roast beef
(d) veggie

Answer: veggie

Explanation:
Given,
At a party there were four large submarine sandwiches, all the same size. During the party, \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \) of the chicken sandwich, \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) of the tuna sandwich, \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) of the roast beef sandwich, and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \) of the veggie sandwich were eaten.
Compare the fractions \(\frac { 2}{ 3} \), \(\frac { 3}{ 4} \) , \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \) and \(\frac { 5}{ 6} \).
Among all the fractions veggie has the least fraction.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5:
Deena uses \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) cup milk and \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) cup oil in a recipe. How much liquid does she use in all?

(a) \(\frac {1}{ 8} \) cup
(b) \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup
(c) \(\frac {6}{ 8} \) cup
(d) 5 cups

Answer: \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup

Explanation:
Given,
Deena uses \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) cup milk and \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) cup oil in a recipe.
\(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) + \(\frac { 2}{ 8} \) = \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup
Therefore she used \(\frac {5}{ 8} \) cup of milk in all.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6:
In the car lot, \(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) of the cars are white and \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) of the cars are blue. What fraction of the cars in the lot are either white or blue?
(a) \(\frac { 1}{ 12} \)
(b) \(\frac { 7}{ 24} \)
(c) \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)
(d) 7

Answer: \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)

Explanation:
Given,
In the car lot, \(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) of the cars are white and \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) of the cars are blue.
\(\frac { 4}{ 12} \) + \(\frac { 3}{ 12} \) = \(\frac { 7}{ 12} \)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Subtract Fractions Using Models – Page No 411

Question 1:
9 twelfth-size parts − 5 twelfth-size parts =
\(\frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/12

Explanation:
9 twelfth-size parts − 5 twelfth-size parts
9 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \)
5 × \(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \)
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 9 }{ 12 } \) – \(\frac { 5 }{ 12 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 12 } \)

Question 2:
\(\frac { 3}{ 12} + \frac {8}{ 12 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 11/12

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 12 } \) and \(\frac { 8 }{ 12 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 12} + \frac {8}{ 12 } = \frac { 11 }{ 12 } \)

Question 3:
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } + \frac {1}{ 3 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/3

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 3 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 3 } + \frac {1}{ 3 } = \frac { 2 }{ 3 } \)

Question 4:
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 4 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 4 } – \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 5:
\(\frac { 2}{ 6 } + \frac {2}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \) and \(\frac { 2 }{ 6 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 2}{ 6 } + \frac {2}{ 6 } = \frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)

Question 6:
\(\frac { 3}{ 8 } – \frac {1}{ 8 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/8

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 3 }{ 8 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 8 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 8 } – \frac {1}{ 8 } = \frac { 2 }{ 8 } \)

Question 7:
\(\frac { 6}{ 10 } – \frac {2}{ 10 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 6 }{ 10 } \) and \(\frac { 2 }{ 10 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 6}{ 10 } – \frac {2}{ 10 } = \frac { 4 }{ 10 } \)

Question 8:
\(\frac { 1}{ 2 } – \frac {1}{2 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 0

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 2 } – \frac {1}{2 } \) = 0

Question 9:
\(\frac {5}{ 6 } – \frac {4}{ 6 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 1/6

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 5 }{ 6 } \) and \(\frac { 4 }{ 6 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac {5}{ 6 } – \frac {4}{ 6 } = \frac { 1 }{ 6 } \)

Question 10:
\(\frac { 4}{ 5 } – \frac {2}{ 5 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/5

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 4 }{ 5 } \) and \(\frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 4}{ 5 } – \frac {2}{ 5 } = \frac { 2 }{ 5 } \)

Question 11:
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } + \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \) and \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } + \frac {1}{ 4 } = \frac { 2 }{ 4 } \)

Question 12:
\(\frac { 9}{ 10 } – \frac {5}{ 10 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 4/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 9 }{ 10 } \) and \(\frac { 5 }{ 10 } \)
Subtract both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 9}{ 10 } – \frac {5}{ 10 } = \frac { 4 }{ 10 } \)

Question 13:
\(\frac { 1}{ 12 } + \frac {7}{ 12 } = \frac { —}{ — } \)

Answer: 8/12

Explanation:
Given the fractions,
\(\frac { 1 }{ 12 } \) and \(\frac { 7 }{ 12 } \)
Add both the fractions
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 12 } + \frac {7}{ 12 } = \frac { 8 }{ 12 } \)

Question 14:
Christopher mixes \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) gallon of red paint with \(\frac { 5}{ 8} \) gallon of blue paint to make purple paint. He uses \(\frac { 2}{8} \) gallon of the purple paint. How much purple paint is left?
\(\frac { —}{ — } \) gallon

Answer: \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \) gallon

Explanation:
Given,
Christopher mixes \(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) gallon of red paint with \(\frac { 5}{ 8} \) gallon of blue paint to make purple paint.
He uses \(\frac { 2}{8} \) gallon of the purple paint.
\(\frac { 3}{ 8} \) + \(\frac { 5}{ 8} \) = \(\frac { 8 }{ 8 } \)
\(\frac { 8 }{ 8 } \) – \(\frac { 2 }{ 8 } \) = \(\frac { 6 }{ 8 } \) gallon

Question 15:
A city worker is painting a stripe down the center of Main Street. Main Street is \(\frac { 8}{ 10} \) mile long. The worker painted \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \) mile of the street. Explain how to find what part of a mile is left to paint.
\(\frac { —}{ — } \) mile

Answer: \(\frac { 4 }{ 10 } \) mile

Explanation:
Given,
A city worker is painting a stripe down the center of Main Street.
Main Street is \(\frac { 8}{ 10} \) mile long.
The worker painted \(\frac { 4}{ 10} \) mile of the street.
\(\frac { 8 }{ 10 } \) – \(\frac { 4 }{ 10 } \) = \(\frac { 4 }{ 10 } \) mile

Question 16:
Sense or Nonsense? Brian says that when you add or subtract fractions with the same denominator, you can add or subtract the numerators and keep the same denominator. Is Brian correct? Explain.

Answer: correct

Explanation:
The statement of Brian is correct because when you add or subtract fractions with the same denominator, you can add or subtract the numerators and keep the same denominator.

Question 17:
The length of a rope was \(\frac { 6}{8} \) yard. Jeff cut the rope into 3 pieces. Each piece is a different length measured in eighths of a yard. What is the length of each piece of rope?

Answer: \(\frac { 2}{8} \)

Explanation:
Given,
The length of a rope was \(\frac { 6}{8} \) yard.
Jeff cut the rope into 3 pieces. Each piece is a different length measured in eighths of a yard.
Divide \(\frac { 6}{8} \) into 3 pieces.
\(\frac { 6}{8} \) ÷ 3 = \(\frac { 2}{8} \)

Question 18:
For 18a–18d, choose Yes or No to show if the sum or difference is correct.

a. \(\frac { 3}{ 5 } – \frac {1}{ 5 } = \frac {4 }{5 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 3}{ 5 } – \frac {1}{ 5 } = \frac {2 }{5 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

b. \(\frac { 1}{ 4 } – \frac {2}{4 } = \frac {3 }{8 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 1}{ 4 } – \frac {2}{4 } = \frac {1 }{4 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

c. \(\frac { 5}{ 8} – \frac {4}{ 8 } = \frac {1 }{8 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no

Answer: yes

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac { 5}{ 8} – \frac {4}{ 8 } = \frac {1 }{8 } \)
Thus the above statement is correct.

d. \(\frac { 4}{ 9 } – \frac {2}{ 9 } = \frac {6 }{9 } \)
(i) yes
(ii) no
Answer: no

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
d. \(\frac { 4}{ 9 } – \frac {2}{ 9 } = \frac {2 }{9 } \)
Thus the above statement is not correct.

Sense or Nonsense? – Page No. 412

Question 19.
Harry says that \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\). Jane says \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\).
Whose answer makes sense? Whose answer is nonsense? Explain your reasoning. Draw a model to help.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 412 Q 19
Type below:
___________

Answer: Jane’s Answer Makes Sense. Because the numerators are the same but the denominators are different. So, in order to add the fractions first, they have to make the denominators equal.
1/4 + 1/8 = 2/8 + 1/8 = 3/8

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 413

Find the sum or difference.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 413 Q 1

Answer: 12/12

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{12}\) + \(\frac{8}{12}\)
= \(\frac{12}{12}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{6}-\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{3}{6}\) – \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{4}{5}-\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1/5

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) – \(\frac{3}{5}\)
= \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{6}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Question 5.
1 – \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5/8

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
1 – \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= \(\frac{8}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/4

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{9}{12}-\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4/12

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{9}{12}-\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{4}{12}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{5}{6}-\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so Subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{5}{6}-\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/3 = 1

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{3}\) = 1

Problem Solving

Use the table for 10 and 11.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 413 Q 10

Question 10.
Guy finds how far his house is from several locations and makes the table shown. How much farther away from Guy’s house is the library than the cafe?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile

Explanation:
The distance from Guy’s house to the library is \(\frac{9}{10}\) mile
The distance from Guy’s house to the cafe is \(\frac{4}{10}\) mile
To find how much farther away from Guy’s house is the library than the cafe subtract both the fractions.
\(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{4}{10}\) = \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile

Question 11.
If Guy walks from his house to school and back, how far does he walk?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 10/10 mile

Explanation:
The distance from Guy’s house to school = \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile
From school to house \(\frac{5}{10}\) mile
\(\frac{5}{10}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{10}{10}\) mile

Add and Subtract Fractions – Lesson Check – Page No. 414

Question 1.
Mr. Angulo buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of red grapes and \(\frac{3}{8}\)pound of green grapes. How many pounds of grapes did Mr. Angulo buy in all?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\) pound
b. \(\frac{2}{8}\) pound
c. 1 pound
d. 2 pounds

Answer: 1 pound

Explanation:
Given that,
Mr. Angulo buys \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound of red grapes and \(\frac{3}{8}\)pound of green grapes.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= \(\frac{8}{8}\)
= 1
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 414 Q 2
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{8}\) – \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that, the equation of the model is
\(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There are 6 muffins in a package. How many packages will be needed to feed 48 people if each person has 2 muffins?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 16
d. 24

Answer: 16

Explanation:
There are 6 muffins in a package.
Number of people = 48
48/6 = 8
Also given that each person gets 2 muffins.
8 × 2 = 16
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Camp Oaks gets 32 boxes of orange juice and 56 boxes of apple juice. Each shelf in the cupboard can hold 8 boxes of juice. What is the least number of shelves
needed for all the juice boxes?
Options:
a. 4
b. 7
c. 11
d. 88

Answer: 11

Explanation:
Given,
Camp Oaks gets 32 boxes of orange juice and 56 boxes of apple juice.
Each shelf in the cupboard can hold 8 boxes of juice.
First, add the boxes of orange juice and apple juice.
32 + 56 = 88 boxes of juice
Now divide 88 by 8
88/8 = 11
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
A machine makes 18 parts each hour. If the machine operates 24 hours a day, how many parts can it make in one day
Options:
a. 302
b. 332
c. 362
d. 432

Answer: 432

Explanation:
Given,
A machine makes 18 parts each hour.
Multiply the number of parts with the number of hours.
18 × 24 = 432 parts in a day.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which equation does the model below represent?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 414 Q 6
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{5}\) – \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{5}\) – \(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
By observing the figure we can say that the equation is \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\).
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 415

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 1

Question 1.
A ___________ always has a numerator of 1.
________________

Answer: unit fraction

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer.

Write the fraction as a sum of unit fractions.

Question 2.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 1/3 + 1/3 + 1/3

Explanation:
A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The unit fraction of 3/3 is 1/3 + 1/3 + 1/3

Question 3.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12

A unit fraction is a rational number written as a fraction where the numerator is one and the denominator is a positive integer. The unit fraction of 4/12 is 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12 + 1/12.

Use the model to write an equation.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 4
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/5

Explanation:
By using the above model we can write the equation
3/5 – 2/5 = 1/5

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 5
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
By using the above model we can write the equation
5/6 – 1/6 = 4/6

Use the model to solve the equation.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 415 Q 6
\(\frac{3}{8}+\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5/8

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{3}{8}+\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}8}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/10

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Find the sum or difference.

Question 8.
\(\frac{9}{12}-\frac{7}{12}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2/12

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{9}{12}-\frac{7}{12}\) = \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/3

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{3}+\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{3}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{5}+\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4/5

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{1}{5}+\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4/6

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{4}{4}-\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{4}-\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 13.
\(\frac{7}{8}-\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/8

Explanation:
The denominators of both the fractions are the same so subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{7}{8}-\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 416

Question 14.
Tyrone mixed \(\frac{7}{12}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{1}{12}\) quart of yellow paint. How much paint does Tyrone have in the mixture?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) quart

Answer: 8/12 quart

Explanation:
Given that,
Tyrone mixed \(\frac{7}{12}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{1}{12}\) quart of yellow paint.
Add both the fraction of paints.
\(\frac{7}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\) quart
Therefore Tyrone has \(\frac{8}{12}\) quart in the mixture.

Question 15.
Jorge lives \(\frac{6}{8}\) mile from school and \(\frac{2}{8}\) mile from a ballpark. How much farther does Jorge live from school than from the ballpark?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) mile

Answer: 4/8 mile

Explanation:
Given,
Jorge lives \(\frac{6}{8}\) mile from school and \(\frac{2}{8}\) mile from a ballpark.
Subtract both the fractions.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Therefore Jorge live \(\frac{4}{8}\) mile from school than from the ballpark.

Question 16.
Su Ling started an art project with 1 yard of felt. She used \(\frac{2}{6}\) yard on Tuesday and \(\frac{3}{6}\) yard on Wednesday. How much felt does Su Ling have left?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) yard

Answer: 1/6 yard

Explanation:
Given,
Su Ling started an art project with 1 yard of felt.
She used \(\frac{2}{6}\) yard on Tuesday and \(\frac{3}{6}\) yard on Wednesday.
\(\frac{3}{6}\) – \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\) yard
Therefore, Su Ling \(\frac{1}{6}\) yard left.

Question 17.
Eloise hung artwork on \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bulletin board. She hung math papers on \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the same bulletin board. What part of the bulletin board has artwork or math papers?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
Given,
Eloise hung artwork on \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bulletin board.
She hung math papers on \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the same bulletin board.
\(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
\(\frac{3}{5}\) part of the bulletin board has artwork or math papers.

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 419

Write the unknown numbers. Write mixed numbers above
the number line and fractions greater than one below the number line.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 419 Q 1
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-419-Q-1

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9/8

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = (1 × 8 + 1)/8 = 9/8

Question 3.
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = (5 × 1 + 3)/5 = \(\frac{8}{5}\)

Question 4.
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5/3

Explanation:
Given the expression,
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = (3 × 1 + 2)/3 = \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Write the fraction as a mixed number.

Question 5.
\(\frac{11}{4}\) = _____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{11}{4}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{11}{4}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{6}{5}\) = _____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{6}{5}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{6}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{13}{10}\) = _____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{13}{10}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{13}{10}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 8.
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{27}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{27}{10}\)

Question 9.
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{11}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{11}{3}\)

Question 10.
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{22}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
4 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{22}{5}\)

Use Repeated Reasoning Algebra Find the unknown numbers.

Question 11.
\(\frac{13}{7}\) = 1 \(\frac{■}{7}\)
■ = _____

Answer: 1 \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{13}{7}\)
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
\(\frac{13}{7}\) = 1 \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Question 12.
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{6}\)
■ = _____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given the expression,
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{23}{6}\)
■ \(\frac{5}{6}\) × 6 = 23
■ ×  = 23 – 5
■ = 18/6
■ = 3

Question 13.
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = ■ \(\frac{■}{11}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{2}{11}\)

Explanation:
Given the expression,
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = ■ \(\frac{■}{11}\)
Convert from the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{57}{11}\) = 5 \(\frac{2}{11}\)

Question 14.
Pen has \(\frac{1}{2}\)-cup and \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup measuring cups. What are two ways he could measure out 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour?
Type below:
_________________

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)-cups and 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup

Explanation:
Pen has \(\frac{1}{2}\)-cup and \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup measuring cups.
1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)-cups + 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\)-cup

Question 15.
Juanita is making bread. She needs 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour. Juanita only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\)-cup measuring cup. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of flour will Juanita use to prepare the bread?
_____ \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of flour

Answer: 14 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of flour

Explanation:
Juanita is making bread. She needs 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of flour. Juanita only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\)-cup measuring cup.
3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore she needs 14 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of flour.

Add and Subtract Fractions – Page No. 420

Use the recipe to solve 16–18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 420 Q 16

Question 16.
Reason Quantitatively Cal is making energy squares. How many \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe?
_____ \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter

Explanation:
Given that 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.
We have to find how many \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of peanut butter are used in the recipe.

Question 17.
Suppose Cal wants to make 2 times as many energy squares as the recipe makes. How many cups of bran cereal should he use? Write your answer as a mixed number and as a fraction greater than 1 in simplest form.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Take the amount of bran Cal is using and multiply it by 2
Given that 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of bran cereal is used in the recipe.
3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 2
= \(\frac{13}{4}\) × 2
= \(\frac{13}{2}\)
= 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus 6 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of bran cereal he should use.

Question 18.
Cal added 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of raisins. Write this mixed number as a fraction greater than 1 in the simplest form.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Cal added 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of raisins.
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Question 19.
Jenn is preparing brown rice. She needs 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of brown rice and 2 cups of water. Jenn has only a \(\frac{1}{8}\)– cup measuring cup. How many \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups each of rice and water will Jenn use to prepare the rice?
brown rice: ________ \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups
water: _________ \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Answer:
Number of water cups = 16
Number of brown rice cups = 12

Explanation:
Brown rice needed = 1 1/2 cups = 3/2 cups
Water needed = 2 cups
Measuring cups = 1/8
No. of cups used of water = 2/1/8 = 16
No. of cups used of rice = 3/2/1/8 = 12 cups

Question 20.
Draw a line to show the mixed number and fraction that have the same value.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 420 Q 20
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-420-Q-20

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 421

Write the mixed number as a fraction.

Question 1.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 421 Q 1

Question 2.
4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{13}{3}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{13}{3}\)

Question 3.
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{7}{5}\)

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{3}{2}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{9}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{9}{2}\)

Question 5.
4 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{33}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{33}{8}\)

Question 6.
1 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{17}{10}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{10}{10}\) + \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{17}{10}\)

Question 7.
5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{11}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{11}{2}\)

Question 8.
2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{19}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Write the fraction as a mixed number.

Question 9.
\(\frac{31}{6}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{20}{10}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2

Explanation:
\(\frac{10}{10}\) + \(\frac{10}{10}\) = 1 + 1 = 2

Question 11.
\(\frac{15}{8}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{8}{8}\) + \(\frac{7}{8}\)
1 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{13}{6}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{6}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 13.
\(\frac{23}{10}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{10}{10}\) + \(\frac{10}{10}\) + \(\frac{3}{10}\)
1 + 1 + \(\frac{3}{10}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Question 14.
\(\frac{19}{5}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\)
1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 3 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 15.
\(\frac{11}{3}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 1 + 1 + 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 16.
\(\frac{9}{2}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 17.
A recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins, but Julie only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\) -cup measuring cup. How many \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups does Julie need to measure out 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins?
She needs ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Answer: 10 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
A recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups of raisins, but Julie only has a \(\frac{1}{4}\) -cup measuring cup.
\(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 10 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups

Question 18.
If Julie needs 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal, how many \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal will she use?
She will use ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal

Answer: 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{4}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore Julie needs 13 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of oatmeal.

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Lesson Check – Page No. 422

Question 1.
Which of the following is equivalent to \(\frac{16}{3}\) ?
Options:
a. 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
b. 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
c. 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
d. 5 \(\frac{6}{3}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{16}{3}\) = \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{3}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 5 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Stacey filled her \(\frac{1}{2}\)cup measuring cup seven times to have enough flour for a cake recipe. How much flour does the cake recipe call for?
Options:
a. 3 cups
b. 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
c. 4 cups
d. 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Stacey filled her \(\frac{1}{2}\)cup measuring cup seven times to have enough flour for a cake recipe.
\(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
1 + 1 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Becki put some stamps into her stamp collection book. She put 14 stamps on each page. If she completely filled 16 pages, how many stamps did she put in the book?
Options:
a. 224
b. 240
c. 272
d. 275

Answer: 224

Explanation:
Becki put some stamps into her stamp collection book.
She put 14 stamps on each page.
If she completely filled 16 pages
Multiply 14 with 16 pages.
14 × 16 = 224 pages
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Brian is driving 324 miles to visit some friends. He wants to get there in 6 hours. How many miles does he need to drive each hour?
Options:
a. 48 miles
b. 50 miles
c. 52 miles
d. 54 miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
Brian is driving 324 miles to visit some friends. He wants to get there in 6 hours.
Divide the number of miles by hours.
324/6 = 54 miles
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
During a bike challenge, riders have to collect various colored ribbons. Each \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile they collect a red ribbon, each \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile they collect a green ribbon, and each \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile they collect a blue ribbon. Which colors of ribbons will be collected at the \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile marker?
Options:
a. red and green
b. red and blue
c. green and blue
d. red, green, and blue

Answer: green and blue

Explanation:
Given,
During a bike challenge, riders have to collect various colored ribbons.
Each \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile they collect a red ribbon, each \(\frac{1}{8}\) mile they collect a green ribbon, and each \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile they collect a blue ribbon.
Green and Blue colors of ribbons will be collected at the \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile marker.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Stephanie had \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of bird seed. She used \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound to fill a bird feeder. How much bird seed does Stephanie have left?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound
b. \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound
c. 1 pound
d. \(\frac{10}{8}\) pound

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound

Explanation:
Given,
Stephanie had \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound of bird seed.
She used \(\frac{3}{8}\) pound to fill a bird feeder.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\) pound
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 425

Write the sum as a mixed number with the fractional part less than 1.

Question 1.
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
+3 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
+3 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
4 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = 4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
8 \(\frac{6}{5}\) = 9 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 3.
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
———————–
_______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 6

Find the difference.

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-2 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-2 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{2}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 5.
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 6.
6 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
-3 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
-3 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
3 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Write the sum as a mixed number with the fractional part less than 1.

Question 7.
7 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
+4 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
+4 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 8.
8 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
11 \(\frac{3}{3}\) = 12

Question 9.
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
+3 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
+3 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
9 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 10.
5 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
+4 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 9 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
+4 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
9 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Find the difference.

Question 11.
5 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 12.
5 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-4 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
-4 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 13.
3 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
-1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
3 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
-1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
2 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 14.
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
———————–
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Practice: Copy and Solve Find the sum or difference.

Question 15.
\(1 \frac{3}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\) = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
First add the whole numbers
1 + 2 = 3
3/8 + 7/8 = 10/8
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction
10/8 = 5/4 = 1 1/4
3 + 1 1/4 = 4 1/4

Question 16.
\(6 \frac{5}{8}\) – 4 = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(6 \frac{5}{8}\) – 4
Subtract the whole numbers
6 – 4 = 2
= 2 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 17.
\(9 \frac{1}{2}+8 \frac{1}{2}\) = _______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+ 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
18

Question 18.
\(6 \frac{3}{5}+4 \frac{3}{5}\) = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
+ 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
11 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 19.
\(8 \frac{7}{10}-\frac{4}{10}\) = _______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 8 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
 – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
8 \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Question 20.
\(7 \frac{3}{5}-6 \frac{3}{5}\) = _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
+ 6 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1

Rename Fractions and Mixed Numbers – Page No. 426

Solve. Write your answer as a mixed number.

Question 21.
Make Sense of Problems The driving distance from Alex’s house to the museum is 6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles. What is the round-trip distance?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 13 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given that,
The driving distance from Alex’s house to the museum is 6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles.
To find the round-trip distance we have to multiply the driving distance with 2.
6 \(\frac{7}{10}\) × 2 = 13 \(\frac{4}{10}\)
= 13 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Question 22.
The driving distance from the sports arena to Kristina’s house is 10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) miles. The distance from the sports arena to Luke’s house is 2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles. How much greater is the driving distance between the sports arena and Kristina’s house than between the sports arena and Luke’s house?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
The driving distance from the sports arena to Kristina’s house is 10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) miles.
The distance from the sports arena to Luke’s house is 2 \(\frac{7}{10}\) miles.
10 \(\frac{9}{10}\) –  2 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
First, subtract the whole numbers and then subtract the fractions
10 – 2 = 8
\(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) miles

Question 23.
Pedro biked from his house to the nature preserve, a distance of 23 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles. Sandra biked from her house to the lake, a distance of 12 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles. How many miles less did Sandra bike than Pedro?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 11 \(\frac{2}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Pedro biked from his house to the nature preserve, a distance of 23 4/5 miles. Converting 23 4/5 miles to an improper fraction, it becomes 119/5 miles.
Sandra biked from her house to the lake, a distance of 12 2/5 miles.
Converting 12 2/5 miles to an improper fraction, it becomes 62/5 miles.
Therefore, the difference in the number of miles biked by Sandra and Pedro is
119/5 – 62/5 = 57/5 = 11 2/5 miles

Question 24.
During the Martinez family trip, they drove from home to a ski lodge, a distance of 55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles, and then drove an additional 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles to visit friends. If the family drove the same route back home, what was the distance traveled during their trip?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 68 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
During the Martinez family trip, they drove from home to a ski lodge, a distance of 55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles, and then drove an additional 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles to visit friends.
55 \(\frac{4}{5}\) + 12 \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 67 \(\frac{8}{5}\) = 68 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles

Question 25.
For 25a–25d, select True or False for each statement.
a. 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{6}{8}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
Given the statement 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{6}{8}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
First add the whole numbers
2 + 1 = 3
\(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{9}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
3 +1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\).
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 25.
b. 1 \(\frac{1}{6}\) + 1 \(\frac{4}{12}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{2}{12}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
1 \(\frac{1}{6}\) + 1 \(\frac{4}{12}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{2}{12}\).
First add the whole numbers
1 + 1 = 2
\(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{12}\)

\(\frac{2}{12}\) + \(\frac{4}{12}\) = \(\frac{6}{12}\)
= 2 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 25.
c. 5 \(\frac{5}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equal to 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equal to 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
5 – 2 = 3
\(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 25.
d. 5 \(\frac{5}{8}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\).
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
5 \(\frac{5}{8}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
First, subtract the whole numbers
5 – 3 = 2
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 427

Find the sum. Write the sum as a mixed number, so the fractional part is less than 1.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 427 Q 1

Question 2.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7

4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
+2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
6 \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 6 + 1 = 7

Question 3.
2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
+3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
5 \(\frac{4}{3}\)
= 5 + 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 6 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 4.
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 14 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
+7 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
13 \(\frac{8}{5}\)
13 + 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
= 14 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 5.
9 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
+2 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
+2 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
11 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 6.
8 \(\frac{4}{12}\)
+3 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Explanation:
8 \(\frac{4}{12}\)
+3 \(\frac{6}{12}\)
11 \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Question 7.
4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
+1 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 6

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
+1 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
5 \(\frac{8}{8}\)
= 5 + 1 = 6

Question 8.
9 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
+6 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 15 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
+6 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
15 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Find the difference.

Question 9.
6 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
-4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Question 10.
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
4 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
-3 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 11.
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
-3 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
6 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
-3 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 12.
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
7 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
-2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Problem Solving

Question 13.
James wants to send two gifts by mail. One package weighs 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds. The other package weighs 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) pounds. What is the total weight of the packages?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
+ 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
Tierra bought 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards blue ribbon and 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\) yards yellow ribbon for a craft project. How much more blue ribbon than yellow ribbon did Tierra buy?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
4 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
-2 \(\frac{1}{8}\) 
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Lesson Check – Page No. 428

Question 1.
Brad has two lengths of copper pipe to fit together. One has a length of 2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) feet and the other has a length of 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\) feet. How many feet of pipe does he have in all?
Options:
a. 5 feet
b. 5 \(\frac{6}{12}\) feet
c. 5 \(\frac{10}{12}\) feet
d. 6 feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Given,
Brad has two lengths of copper pipe to fit together. One has a length of 2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) feet and the other has a length of 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\) feet.
Add both the lengths
2 \(\frac{5}{12}\) + 3 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
= 5 \(\frac{12}{12}\) = 5 feet
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
A pattern calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of material and 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of lining. How much total fabric is needed?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards
b. 3 yards
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards
d. 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards

Answer: 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards

Explanation:
Given,
A pattern calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of material and 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) yards of lining.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 3 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) yards
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Shanice has 23 baseball trading cards of star players. She agrees to sell them for $16 each. How much will she get for the cards?
Options:
a. $258
b. $358
c. $368
d. $468

Answer: $368

Explanation:
Given,
Shanice has 23 baseball trading cards of star players. She agrees to sell them for $16 each.
To find how much will she get for the cards
23 × 16 = 368
Therefore she will get $368 for the cards.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Nanci is volunteering at the animal shelter. She wants to spend an equal amount of time playing with each dog. She has 145 minutes to play with all 7 dogs. About how much time can she spend with each dog?
Options:
a. about 10 minutes
b. about 20 minutes
c. about 25 minutes
d. about 26 minutes

Answer: about 20 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Nanci is volunteering at the animal shelter. She wants to spend an equal amount of time playing with each dog. She has 145 minutes to play with all 7 dogs.
145/7 = 20.7
Therefore she can spend about 20 minutes with each dog.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Frieda has 12 red apples and 15 green apples. She is going to share the apples equally among 8 people and keep any extra apples for herself. How many apples will Frieda keep for herself?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given,
Frieda has 12 red apples and 15 green apples.
She is going to share the apples equally among 8 people and keep any extra apples for herself.
12 + 15 = 27
27/8
27 – 24 = 3
Thus Frieda keep for herself 3 apples.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
The Lynch family bought a house for $75,300. A few years later, they sold the house for $80,250. How much greater was the selling price than the purchase price?
Options:
a. $4,950
b. $5,050
c. $5,150
d. $5,950

Answer: $4,950

Explanation:
Given,
The Lynch family bought a house for $75,300.
A few years later, they sold the house for $80,250.
$80,250 – $75,300 = $4,950
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 431

Question 1.
Rename both mixed numbers as fractions. Find the difference.
3 \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{■}{6}\)
−1 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = – \(\frac{■}{6}\)
—————————————-
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to the improper fractions.
3 \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{21}{6}\)
1 \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{10}{6}\)
\(\frac{21}{6}\)
– \(\frac{10}{6}\)
\(\frac{11}{6}\)
Convert from improper fractions to the mixed fractions.
\(\frac{11}{6}\) = 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Find the difference.

Question 2.
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
− \(\frac{2}{3}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
1 \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
\(\frac{4}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 3.
4 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
− 1 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
———————
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{47}{10}\)
1 \(\frac{9}{10}\) = \(\frac{19}{10}\)
\(\frac{47}{10}\)
– \(\frac{19}{10}\)
\(\frac{28}{10}\) = 2 \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Question 4.
3 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
− \(\frac{8}{12}\)
———————
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
3 \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{41}{12}\)
\(\frac{41}{12}\)
− \(\frac{8}{12}\)
2 \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Question 5.
8 \(\frac{1}{10}\)
− 2 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
8 \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{81}{10}\)
2 \(\frac{9}{10}\) = \(\frac{29}{10}\)
\(\frac{81}{10}\)
–\(\frac{29}{10}\)
\(\frac{52}{10}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 6.
2
− 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
2
− 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 7.
4 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
− 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
———————
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{21}{5}\)
3 \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{17}{5}\)
\(\frac{21}{5}\)
–\(\frac{17}{5}\)
\(\frac{4}{5}\)

Practice: Copy and Solve Find the difference.

Question 8.
\(4 \frac{1}{6}-2 \frac{5}{6}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{25}{6}\)
2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{17}{6}\)
\(\frac{25}{6}\)
–\(\frac{17}{6}\)
\(\frac{8}{6}\) = 1 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 9.
\(6 \frac{9}{12}-3 \frac{10}{12}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{11}{12}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
6 \(\frac{9}{12}\)
– 3 \(\frac{10}{12}\)
2 \(\frac{11}{12}\)

Question 10.
\(3 \frac{3}{10}-\frac{7}{10}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
3 \(\frac{3}{10}\) = \(\frac{33}{10}\)
\(\frac{33}{10}\)
– \(\frac{7}{10}\)
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 11.
4 – 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{13}{5}\)
4
–\(\frac{13}{5}\) 
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 12.
Lisa mixed 4 \(\frac{2}{6}\) cups of orange juice with 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) cups of pineapple juice to make fruit punch. She and her friends drank 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) cups of the punch. How much of the fruit punch is left?
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) cups

Answer: 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Lisa mixed 4 \(\frac{2}{6}\) cups of orange juice with 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) cups of pineapple juice to make fruit punch.
She and her friends drank 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) cups of the punch.
Convert from mixed fractions to improper fractions.
4 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
+ 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
7 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Now subtract 3 \(\frac{4}{6}\) from 7 \(\frac{3}{6}\).
7 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
-3 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
3 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Add and Subtract Mixed Numbers – Page No. 432

Rename the fractions to solve.

Many instruments are coiled or curved so that they are easier for the musician to play, but they would be quite long if straightened out completely.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 432 Q 13

Question 13.
Analyze Relationships Trumpets and cornets are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a trumpet is 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet and the length of a cornet is 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) feet. The trumpet is how much longer than the cornet?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) feet

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet

Explanation:
Given,
Trumpets and cornets are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a trumpet is 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet and the length of a cornet is 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) feet.
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) – 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\)
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 4 = 1
\(\frac{1}{4}\) – \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet
Therefore trumpet is \(\frac{3}{4}\) feet longer than the cornet.

Question 14.
Tubas, trombones, and French horns are brass instruments. Fully stretched out, the length of a tuba is 18 feet, the length of a trombone is 9 \(\frac{11}{12}\) feet, and the length of a French horn is 17 \(\frac{1}{12}\) feet. The tuba is how much longer than the French horn? The French horn is how much longer than the trombone?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
First, convert the fractions to decimals making the trombone 8.93 feet and the french horn 17.21 feet. The tuba would be 0.79 feet longer than the french horn, and the french horn would be 8.23 feet longer than the trombone. However, if you need the answer to remain a fraction, the tuba would be 11/14 feet longer than a french horn, and a french horn would be 8 3/14 feet longer than a trombone.

Question 15.
The pitch of a musical instrument is related to its length. In general, the greater the length of a musical instrument, the lower its pitch. Order the brass instruments identified on this page from lowest pitch to the highest pitch.
____________
____________
____________

Answer:
Tuba
French Horn
Trombone

Explanation:
By seeing the above answer we can write the order of the brass instruments from the lowest pitch to the highest pitch. The order is tuba, french horn, and trombone.

Question 16.
Alicia had 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)yards of fabric. After making a tablecloth, she had 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\) yards of fabric. Alicia said she used 2 \(\frac{3}{6}\) yards of fabric for the tablecloth. Do you agree? Explain.
______

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
An easier way to do this is to make the fractions improper fractions.
3 1/6 can be rewritten as 19/6. 1 4/6 can be rewritten as 10/6.
Multiply the denominator by the number at its side, and add it to the numerator.
2 3/6 is 15/6.
Subtract 10/6 from 19/6.
19/6-10/6=9/6.
9/6 is not 15/6, therefore she did not use 2 3/6 yards of fabric.

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 433

Find the difference.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 433 Q 1

Question 2.
6
– 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
6 – 3 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
3 – \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 3.
5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 2 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4.
9 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
– 8 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 8 = 1
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
= – \(\frac{4}{8}\)
= – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 1 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 5.
12 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
– 7 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
12 – 7 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
5 – \(\frac{4}{10}\)
5 – \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 6.
8 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
– 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
8 – 3 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) – \(\frac{5}{6}\) = – \(\frac{2}{3}\)
5 – \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 7.
7 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
– 4 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
7 – 4 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{5}\) – \(\frac{4}{5}\) = – \(\frac{1}{5}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Question 8.
10 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
– 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
10 – 8 = 2
\(\frac{1}{2}\) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0

Question 9.
7 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
– 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
7 – 2 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) – \(\frac{5}{6}\) = – \(\frac{4}{6}\)
5 – \(\frac{4}{6}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 10.
9 \(\frac{3}{12}\)
– 4 \(\frac{7}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 4 = 5
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{12}\) – \(\frac{7}{12}\) = – \(\frac{4}{12}\) = – \(\frac{1}{3}\)
5 – \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 11.
9 \(\frac{1}{10}\)
– 8 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
9 – 8 = 1
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) = – \(\frac{6}{10}\)
1 – \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 12.
9 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 8 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
9 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
– \(\frac{2}{3}\)
8 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 13.
3 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

3 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
– 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
4 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
– 1 \(\frac{7}{8}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
4 – 1 = 3
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 15.
5 \(\frac{1}{12}\)
– 3 \(\frac{8}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1 \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Explanation:
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 3 = 2
Next subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{1}{12}\) – \(\frac{8}{12}\) = – \(\frac{7}{12}\)
2 – \(\frac{7}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Question 16.
7
– 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
7
– 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
5 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Problem Solving

Question 17.
Alicia buys a 5-pound bag of rocks for a fish tank. She uses 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds for a small fish bowl. How much is left?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Alicia buys a 5-pound bag of rocks for a fish tank. She uses 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds for a small fish bowl.
First subtract the whole numbers
5 – 1 = 4
4 – 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= 3 \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 18.
Xavier made 25 pounds of roasted almonds for a fair. He has 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds left at the end of the fair. How many pounds of roasted almonds did he sell at the fair?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 21 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Xavier made 25 pounds of roasted almonds for a fair.
He has 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds left at the end of the fair.
First subtract the whole numbers
25 – 3 = 22
22 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 21 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Lesson Check – Page No. 434

Question 1.
Reggie is making a double-layer cake. The recipe for the first layer calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar. The recipe for the second layer calls for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar. Reggie has 5 cups of sugar. How much will he have left after making both recipes?
Options:
a. 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
b. 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
c. 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
d. 2 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups

Answer: 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups

Explanation:
Given,
Reggie is making a double-layer cake. The recipe for the first layer calls for 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar.
The recipe for the second layer calls for 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups sugar.
Reggie has 5 cups of sugar.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
5 – 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Kate has 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards of fabric and needs 2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) yards to make a skirt. How much extra fabric will she have left after making the skirt?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
b. 2 \(\frac{2}{8}\) yards
c. 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
d. 1 \(\frac{2}{8}\) yards

Answer: 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards

Explanation:
Given,
Kate has 4 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards of fabric and needs 2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) yards to make a skirt.
First, subtract the whole numbers
4 – 2 = 2
Next, subtract the fractions,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = – \(\frac{4}{8}\)
2 – \(\frac{4}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Paulo has 128 glass beads to use to decorate picture frames. He wants to use the same number of beads on each frame. If he decorates 8 picture frames, how many beads will he put on each frame?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 14
d. 16

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Given,
Paulo has 128 glass beads to use to decorate picture frames. He wants to use the same number of beads on each frame
128/8 = 16
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Madison is making party favors. She wants to make enough favors so each guest gets the same number of favors. She knows there will be 6 or 8 guests at the party. What is the least number of party favors Madison should make?
Options:
a. 18
b. 24
c. 30
d. 32

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Given,
Madison is making party favors. She wants to make enough favors so each guest gets the same number of favors.
She knows there will be 6 or 8 guests at the party.
To find the least number of party favors, we have to consider the number of guests.
In this case, there are two possibilities—6 or 8.
For 6: 6, 12, 18, 24 (Add 6 to each number)
For 8: 8, 16, 24 (Add 8 to each number)
Now in both series, the least number (that is in common) is 24. Hence, Madison should make at least 24 party favors.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
A shuttle bus makes 4 round-trips between two shopping centers each day. The bus holds 24 people. If the bus is full on each one-way trip, how many passengers are carried by the bus each day?
Options:
a. 96
b. 162
c. 182
d. 192

Answer: 96

Explanation:
Given,
A shuttle bus makes 4 round-trips between two shopping centers each day. The bus holds 24 people.
4 × 24 = 96
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
To make a fruit salad, Marvin mixes 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of diced peaches with 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of diced pears. How many cups of peaches and pears are in the fruit salad?
Options:
a. 4 cups
b. 3 \(\frac{2}{4}\) cups
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups
d. 3 cups

Answer: 4 cups

Explanation:
Given,
To make a fruit salad, Marvin mixes 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of diced peaches with 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of diced pears.
1 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 4 cups
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 437

Question 1.
Complete. Name the property used.
\(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
The property used is associative property.
9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(3 \(\frac{4}{10}\) + 5 \(\frac{2}{10}\)) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
3 + 5 = 8
8 + \(\frac{4}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
Now add the fractions
8 + \(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{6}{10}\)
8 + \(\frac{12}{10}\)
Convert from improper fractions to the mixed fractions.
\(\frac{12}{10}\) = 1 \(\frac{2}{10}\)
8 + 1 \(\frac{2}{10}\) = 9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)
Thus \(\left(3 \frac{4}{10}+5 \frac{2}{10}\right)+\frac{6}{10}\) = 9 \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Question 2.
\(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given
\(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(2 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 3 \(\frac{2}{8}\)) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
2 + 3 = 5
5 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
5 + \(\frac{9}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
6 + \(\frac{10}{8}\) = 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus \(\left(2 \frac{7}{8}+3 \frac{2}{8}\right)+1 \frac{1}{8}\) = 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 3.
\(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\)
______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
1 + \(\frac{3}{5}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + 1 \(\frac{3}{5}\)
1 + 1 + \(\frac{5}{5}\)
1 + 1 + 1 = 3
Thus \(1 \frac{2}{5}+\left(1+\frac{3}{5}\right)\) = 3

Question 4.
\(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
5 + 4 = 9
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{8}{6}\)
5 \(\frac{3}{6}\) + 9 \(\frac{8}{6}\)
5 \(\frac{3}{6}\) + 10 \(\frac{2}{6}\) = 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus \(5 \frac{3}{6}+\left(5 \frac{5}{6}+4 \frac{3}{6}\right)\) = 15 \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 5.
\(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
(1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\)) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
1 + 1 = 2
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Add the whole numbers
2 + 2 = 4
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus \(\left(1 \frac{1}{4}+1 \frac{1}{4}\right)+2 \frac{3}{4}\) = 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
12 + 1 = 13
Add the fraction in the group.
\(\frac{4}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{9}\) + 3 \(\frac{5}{9}\)
= 13 \(\frac{6}{9}\) + 3 \(\frac{5}{9}\)
= 16 \(\frac{11}{9}\)
= 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)
Thus \(\left(12 \frac{4}{9}+1 \frac{2}{9}\right)+3 \frac{5}{9}\) = 17 \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Question 7.
\(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Given,
\(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\)
First add the fractions in the group.
\(\frac{3}{12}\) + \(\frac{8}{12}\) = \(\frac{11}{12}\)
1 \(\frac{11}{12}\) + \(\frac{9}{12}\) = 1 \(\frac{20}{12}\)
= 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus \(\left(\frac{3}{12}+1 \frac{8}{12}\right)+\frac{9}{12}\) = 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Question 8.
\(\left(45 \frac{1}{3}+6 \frac{1}{3}\right)+38 \frac{2}{3}\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 90 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given,
\(\left(45 \frac{1}{3}+6 \frac{1}{3}\right)+38 \frac{2}{3}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
45 + 6 = 51
(51 \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)) + 38 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
51 \(\frac{2}{3}\) + 38 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 89 \(\frac{4}{3}\)
= 90 \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus \(\left(45 \frac{1}{3}+6 \frac{1}{3}\right)+38 \frac{2}{3}\) = 90 \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{2}+\left(103 \frac{1}{2}+12\right)\)
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 116

Explanation:
Given,
\(\frac{1}{2}+\left(103 \frac{1}{2}+12\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
103 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 12 = 115 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
115 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 116
Thus \(\frac{1}{2}+\left(103 \frac{1}{2}+12\right)\) = 116

Question 10.
\(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\)
______

Answer: 25

Explanation:
Given,
\(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\)
First add the whole numbers in the group.
3 + 10 = 13
13 + \(\frac{5}{10}\) + 11 \(\frac{5}{10}\)
Add the whole numbers
13 + 11 = 24
24 + \(\frac{5}{10}\) + \(\frac{5}{10}\) = 25
Thus \(\left(3 \frac{5}{10}+10\right)+11 \frac{5}{10}\) = 25

Question 11.
Pablo is training for a marathon. He ran 5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Friday, 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on Saturday, and 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Sunday. How many miles did he run on all three days?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles

Explanation:
Given,
Pablo is training for a marathon. He ran 5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Friday, 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on Saturday, and 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\) miles on Sunday.
Add all the fractions to find how many miles he runs on all three days.
5 \(\frac{4}{8}\) + 6 \(\frac{5}{8}\) + 7 \(\frac{4}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers
5 + 6 + 7 = 18
18 + \(\frac{4}{8}\) + \(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\)
= 18 + \(\frac{13}{8}\)
= 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles
Therefore Pablo runs 19 \(\frac{5}{8}\) miles on all three days.

Question 12.
At lunchtime, Dale’s Diner served a total of 2 \(\frac{2}{6}\) pots of vegetable soup, 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) pots of chicken soup, and 4 \(\frac{3}{6}\) pots of tomato soup. How many pots of soup were served in all?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) pots

Answer: 10 \(\frac{2}{3}\) pots

Explanation:
Given,
At lunchtime, Dale’s Diner served a total of 2 \(\frac{2}{6}\) pots of vegetable soup, 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) pots of chicken soup, and 4 \(\frac{3}{6}\) pots of tomato soup.
2 \(\frac{2}{6}\) + 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) + 4 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
First add the whole numbers
2 + 3 + 4 = 9
Next add the fractions.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{3}{6}\)
= \(\frac{10}{6}\)
9 + \(\frac{10}{6}\) = 10 \(\frac{2}{3}\) pots
Therefore 10 \(\frac{2}{3}\) pots of soup were served in all.

Use the expressions in the box for 13–14.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 437 Q 13

Question 13.
Which property of addition would you use to regroup the addends in Expression A?
______ property

Answer: Associative Property

Explanation:
The associative property states that you can add or multiply regardless of how the numbers are grouped.
Expression A is \(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\))
The denominators of all three fractions are the same. So, the property for expression A is Associative Property.

Question 14.
Which two expressions have the same value?
________ and _________

Answer: A and C

Explanation:
Expression A is \(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\))
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + (\(\frac{11}{8}\) = \(\frac{12}{8}\)
Expression B is 1/2 + 2
1/2 + 4/2 = 5/2
Expression C is \(\frac{3}{7}\) + (\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{4}{7}\))
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{4}{7}\) = \(\frac{7}{14}\) + \(\frac{8}{14}\) = \(\frac{15}{14}\)
\(\frac{15}{14}\) + \(\frac{3}{7}\) = \(\frac{15}{14}\) + \(\frac{6}{14}\) = \(\frac{21}{14}\)
Thus the expressions A and C has the same value.

Question 15.
Match the equation with the property used.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 437 Q 15
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-437-Q-15

Record Subtraction with Renaming – Page No. 438

Pose a Problem
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 438 Q 16

Question 16.
Costumes are being made for the high school musical. The table at the right shows the amount of fabric needed for the costumes of the male and female leads. Alice uses the expression \(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{4}{8}\) to find the total amount of fabric needed for the costume of the female lead. To find the value of the expression using mental math, Alice used the properties of addition.
\(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{4}{8}=\left(7 \frac{3}{8}+1 \frac{5}{8}\right)+2 \frac{4}{8}\)
Alice added 7 + 1 and was able to quickly add \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\) to the sum of 8 to get 9. She added 2 \(\frac{4}{8}\) to 9, so her answer was 11 \(\frac{4}{8}\).
So, the amount of fabric needed for the costume of the female lead actor is 11 \(\frac{4}{8}\) yards.
Write a new problem using the information for the costume for the male lead actor.
Pose a Problem                     Solve your problem. Check your solution.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Alice used the expressions 1 2/8 + 2 3/8 + 5 6/8 to find the total amount of frabric needed for the costume of the male lead. What is the total amount of fabric needed for the costume?
Answer: Alice wrote the expressions as (1 2/8 + 5 6/8) + 2 3/8 and simplified it by adding the whole number parts and the fraction parts in the parentheses.
Then she added the mixed number: 1 + 5 + 1 + 2 3/8 = 9 3/8.
So, the male leads costume needed 9 3/8 yards of fabric.

Question 16.
Identify Relationships Explain how using the properties of addition makes both problems easier to solve.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The properties make the properties the easier to solve because you can rearrange the mixed numbers so that their fraction parts add to 1.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 439

Use the properties and mental math to find the sum.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 439 Q 1

Question 2.
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
3 + 2 = 5
10 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 5 + \(\frac{5}{8}\) + \(\frac{7}{8}\)
10 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 5 + \(\frac{12}{8}\)
10 + 5 = 15
15 + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{12}{8}\)
15 + \(\frac{13}{8}\)
16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
\(10 \frac{1}{8}+\left(3 \frac{5}{8}+2 \frac{7}{8}\right)\) = 16 \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 3.
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\)
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 3 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + 5 \(\frac{4}{5}\)
3 + 5 = 8
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 8 + \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\)
8 \(\frac{1}{5}\) + 8 + \(\frac{6}{5}\)
8 + 8 = 16
16 + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{6}{5}\)
16 + \(\frac{7}{5}\)
17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
\(8 \frac{1}{5}+\left(3 \frac{2}{5}+5 \frac{4}{5}\right)\) = 17 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 4.
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 4 \(\frac{2}{4}\) + 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\)
4 + 5 = 9
6 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 9 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
6 + 9 = 15
15 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(6 \frac{3}{4}+\left(4 \frac{2}{4}+5 \frac{1}{4}\right)\) = 16 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 5.
\(\left(6 \frac{3}{6}+10 \frac{4}{6}\right)+9 \frac{2}{6}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 26 \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\left(6 \frac{3}{6}+10 \frac{4}{6}\right)+9 \frac{2}{6}\)
6 \(\frac{3}{6}\) + 10 \(\frac{4}{6}\) + 9 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
6 + 10 = 16
16 + \(\frac{3}{6}\) + \(\frac{4}{6}\) + 9 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
16 + \(\frac{7}{6}\) + 9 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
16 + 9 = 25
25 + \(\frac{7}{6}\) + \(\frac{2}{6}\)
25 + \(\frac{9}{6}\)
= 26 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
\(\left(6 \frac{3}{6}+10 \frac{4}{6}\right)+9 \frac{2}{6}\) = 26 \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 6.
\(\left(6 \frac{2}{5}+1 \frac{4}{5}\right)+3 \frac{1}{5}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
\(\left(6 \frac{2}{5}+1 \frac{4}{5}\right)+3 \frac{1}{5}\)
6 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + 1 \(\frac{4}{5}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
6 + 1 = 7
7 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + \(\frac{4}{5}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
7 + \(\frac{6}{5}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{5}\)
7 + 3 = 10
10 + \(\frac{6}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
10 + \(\frac{7}{5}\) = 11 \(\frac{2}{5}\)
Therefore \(\left(6 \frac{2}{5}+1 \frac{4}{5}\right)+3 \frac{1}{5}\) = 11 \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Question 7.
\(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
\(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\)
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 1 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
3 + 1 = 4
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 4 + \(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
7 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 4 +\(\frac{2}{8}\)
7 + 4 = 11
11 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\)
11 + \(\frac{9}{8}\) = 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus \(7 \frac{7}{8}+\left(3 \frac{1}{8}+1 \frac{1}{8}\right)\) = 12 \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 50

Explanation:
\(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 20 \(\frac{2}{10}\) + 15 \(\frac{7}{10}\)
20 + 15 = 35
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 35 + \(\frac{2}{10}\) + \(\frac{7}{10}\)
14 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + 35 \(\frac{9}{10}\)
49 \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{9}{10}\)
49 + 1 = 50
Thus \(14 \frac{1}{10}+\left(20 \frac{2}{10}+15 \frac{7}{10}\right)\) = 50

Question 9.
\(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\)
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\)
13 \(\frac{2}{12}\) + 8 \(\frac{7}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
First add the whole numbers in the bracket.
13 + 8 = 21
21 + \(\frac{2}{12}\) + \(\frac{7}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
21 + \(\frac{9}{12}\) + 9 \(\frac{5}{12}\)
30 + \(\frac{9}{12}\) + \(\frac{5}{12}\) = 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)
Thus \(\left(13 \frac{2}{12}+8 \frac{7}{12}\right)+9 \frac{5}{12}\) = 31 \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Nate’s classroom has three tables of different lengths. One has a length of 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet, another has a length of 4 feet, and a third has a length of 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet. What is the length of all three tables when pushed end to end?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 11

Explanation:
Given,
Nate’s classroom has three tables of different lengths. One has a length of 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet, another has a length of 4 feet, and a third has a length of 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 4 + 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
4 + 4 + 2 = 10
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1
10 + 1 = 11
Therefore the length of all three tables when pushed end to end is 11 feet.

Question 11.
Mr. Warren uses 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags of mulch for his garden and another 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags for his front yard. He also uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) bag around a fountain. How many total bags of mulch does Mr. Warren use?
_______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Mr. Warren uses 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags of mulch for his garden and another 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) bags for his front yard.
He also uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) bag around a fountain.
2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
2 + 4 = 6
6 + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= 7 \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 440

Question 1.
A carpenter cut a board into three pieces. One piece was 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. The second piece was 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet long. The third piece was 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. How long was the board?
Options:
a. 6 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
b. 7 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet
c. 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
d. 8 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet

Answer: c. 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet

Explanation:
Given,
A carpenter cut a board into three pieces. One piece was 2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long. The second piece was 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\) feet long.
The third piece was 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet long.
Add three pieces.
2 \(\frac{5}{6}\) + 3 \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= 5 + \(\frac{6}{6}\)
= 5 + 1 = 6
6 + 1 \(\frac{5}{6}\)
= 7 \(\frac{5}{6}\) feet
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Harry works at an apple orchard. He picked 45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) pounds of apples on Monday. He picked 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds of apples on Wednesday. He picked 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds of apples on Friday. How many pounds of apples did Harry pick those three days?
Options:
a. 132 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
b. 141 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
c. 142 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds
d. 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds

Answer: 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds

Explanation:
Given,
Harry works at an apple orchard. He picked 45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) pounds of apples on Monday.
He picked 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds of apples on Wednesday.
He picked 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\) pounds of apples on Friday.
45 \(\frac{7}{8}\) + 42 \(\frac{3}{8}\) + 54 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Add the whole numbers first
45 + 42 + 54 = 141
141 + \(\frac{7}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
141 + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= 142 \(\frac{3}{8}\) pounds
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There were 6 oranges in the refrigerator. Joey and his friends ate 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges. How many oranges were left?
Options:
a. 2 \(\frac{1}{3}\) oranges
b. 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges
c. 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) oranges
d. 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges

Answer: 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges

Explanation:
Given,
There were 6 oranges in the refrigerator.
Joey and his friends ate 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges.
6 + 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= 9 \(\frac{2}{3}\) oranges
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Darlene was asked to identify which of the following numbers is prime. Which number should she choose?
Options:
a. 2
b. 12
c. 21
d. 39

Answer: 2

Explanation:
A prime number is an integer, or whole number, that has only two factors 1 and itself.
In the above options, all are composite numbers except 2.
Therefore 2 is a prime number.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
A teacher has 100 chairs to arrange for an assembly. Which of the following is NOT a way the teacher could arrange the chairs?
Options:
a. 10 rows of 10 chairs
b. 8 rows of 15 chairs
c. 5 rows of 20 chairs
d. 4 rows of 25 chairs

Answer: 8 rows of 15 chairs

Explanation:
A teacher has 100 chairs to arrange for an assembly.
15 × 8 = 120
So, 8 rows of 15 chairs are not the way to arrange the chairs.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Nic bought 28 folding chairs for $16 each. How much money did Nic spend on chairs?
Options:
a. $196
b. $348
c. $448
d. $600

Answer: c. $448

Explanation:
Given,
Nic bought 28 folding chairs for $16 each.
28 × 16 = 448
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 443

Question 1.
Last week, Sia ran 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles each day for 5 days and then took 2 days off. Did she run at least 6 miles last week? First, model the problem. Describe your model.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
I will model the problem using fraction strips. I need a 1 strip for the whole and a 1/4 part for each of the 5 days. My model has a total of five 1 strops and five 1/4 parts.

Question 1.
Then, regroup the parts in the model to find the number of whole miles Sia ran.
Sia ran ___________ whole miles and ___________ mile.
Finally, compare the total number of miles she ran to 6 miles.
So, Sia ___________ run at least 6 miles last week.
6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles _____ 6 miles

Answer:
Sia ran 6 whole miles and 1/4 mile.
So, Sia did run at least 6 miles last week.
6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) miles > 6 miles

Question 2.
What if Sia ran only \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile each day. Would she have run at least 6 miles last week? Explain.
_____

Answer: No

Explanation:
She would have run \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{15}{4}\) or 3 \(\frac{3}{4}\) miles.

Question 3.
A quarter is \(\frac{1}{4}\) dollar. Noah has 20 quarters. How much money does he have? Explain.
$ _____

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Since each quarter is 1/4 dollar, each group of 4 quarters is 1 dollar. Since 4/4 + 4/4 + 4/4 + 4/4 + 4/4 = 20/4, Noah has 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 5 dollars

Question 4.
How many \(\frac{2}{5}\) parts are in 2 wholes?
_____

Answer: 5

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{5}\)/2 = 5

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 444

Question 5.
A company shipped 15,325 boxes of apples and 12,980 boxes of oranges. How many more boxes of apples than oranges did the company ship?
_____ boxes

Answer: 2345 boxes

Explanation:
Given,
A company shipped 15,325 boxes of apples and 12,980 boxes of oranges.
Subtract 12,980 from 15,325 boxes
15,325 – 12,980 = 2,345 boxes.

Question 6.
Analyze A fair sold a total of 3,300 tickets on Friday and Saturday. It sold 100 more on Friday than on Saturday. How many tickets did the fair sell on Friday?
_____ tickets

Answer: 1700 tickets

Explanation:
Given,
Analyze A fair sold a total of 3,300 tickets on Friday and Saturday. It sold 100 more on Friday than on Saturday.
3,300 – 100 = 3,200 tickets
3200/2 = 1,600 tickets
It sold 1600 tickets on saturday and 1700 tickets on Friday.

Question 7.
Emma walked \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile on Monday, \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile on Tuesday, and \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile on Wednesday. If the pattern continues, how many miles will she walk on Friday? Explain how you found the number of miles.
\(\frac{□}{□}\) miles

Answer: \(\frac{5}{4}\) miles

Explanation:
I made a table that shows each day and the distance she walked. Then I looked for a pattern. The pattern showed that she walked 1/4 mile more each day. I continued the pattern to show she walked 4/4 mile on Thursday and 5/4 miles on Friday.

Question 8.
Jared painted a mug \(\frac{5}{12}\) red and \(\frac{4}{12}\) blue. What part of the mug is not red or blue?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Jared painted a mug \(\frac{5}{12}\) red and \(\frac{4}{12}\) blue.
We have to find What part of the mug is not red or blue that means \(\frac{3}{12}\) part is neither red nor blue.

Question 9.
Choose the number that correctly completes the sentence.
Each day, Mrs. Hewes knits \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the morning and \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the afternoon.
It will take Mrs. Hewes Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 444 Q 9 days to knit 2 scarves.
_____

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Given,
Each day, Mrs. Hewes knits \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the morning and \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a scarf in the afternoon.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus it takes 3 days to knit 2 scarves.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 445

Read each problem and solve.

Question 1.
Each child in the Smith family was given an orange cut into 8 equal sections. Each child ate \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the orange. After combining the leftover sections, Mrs. Smith noted that there were exactly 3 full oranges left. How many children are in the Smith family?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Common Core - New Page No. 445 Q 1

Question 2.
Val walks 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles each day. Bill runs 10 miles once every 4 days. In 4 days, who covers the greater distance?
_________

Answer: Val

Explanation:
Given,
Val walks 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles each day. Bill runs 10 miles once every 4 days.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) × 4
Convert from mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{13}{5}\) × 4 = 10.4
10.4 > 10
Thus Val covers the greater distance.

Question 3.
Chad buys peanuts in 2-pound bags. He repackages them into bags that hold \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound of peanuts. How many 2-pound bags of peanuts should Chad buy so that he can fill the \(\frac{5}{6}\) -pound bags without having any peanuts left over?
_________ 2-pound bags

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Given,
Chad buys peanuts in 2-pound bags. He repackages them into bags that hold \(\frac{5}{6}\) pound of peanuts.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus 5 2-pound bags of peanuts are left.

Question 4.
A carpenter has several boards of equal length. He cuts \(\frac{3}{5}\) of each board. After cutting the boards, the carpenter notices that he has enough pieces left over to make up the same length as 4 of the original boards. How many boards did the carpenter start with?
_________

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Given,
A carpenter has several boards of equal length. He cuts \(\frac{3}{5}\) of each board. After cutting the boards, the carpenter notices that he has enough pieces left over to make up the same length as 4 of the original boards.
4 of the original boards have a summed length of 20 units. 5 x 4 = 20.
Since 2/5 is left from each board, you simply add them until the 2’s add to 20.
So, 2 x 10 = 20. Hence, there are 10 2/5 boards.
That’s just 4 of the boards that the 2/5 make up, but that should also mean that there are 10 3/5 boards as well.
30/5 + 20/5 = 50/5 = 10

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Lesson Check – Page No. 446

Question 1.
Karyn cuts a length of ribbon into 4 equal pieces, each 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet long. How long was the ribbon?
Options:
a. 4 feet
b. 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet
c. 5 feet
d. 5 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Given,
Karyn cuts a length of ribbon into 4 equal pieces, each 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) feet long.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 4
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
\(\frac{5}{4}\) × 4 = 5 feet
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Several friends each had \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bag of peanuts left over from the baseball game. They realized that they could have bought 2 fewer bags of peanuts between them. How many friends went to the game?
Options:
a. 6
b. 5
c. 4
d. 2

Answer: 5

Explanation:
Given,
Several friends each had \(\frac{2}{5}\) of a bag of peanuts left over from the baseball game.
They realized that they could have bought 2 fewer bags of peanuts between them
2 ÷ \(\frac{2}{5}\) = 5
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A frog made three jumps. The first was 12 \(\frac{5}{6}\) inches. The second jump was 8 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches. The third jump was 15 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches. What was the total distance the frog jumped?
Options:
a. 35 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
b. 36 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches
c. 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
d. 38 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches

Answer: 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches

Explanation:
Given,
A frog made three jumps. The first was 12 \(\frac{5}{6}\) inches. The second jump was 8 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches. The third jump was 15 \(\frac{1}{6}\) inches.
First add the whole numbers
12 + 8 + 15 = 35
Next add the fractions,
\(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{3}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = 1 \(\frac{3}{6}\)
35 + \(\frac{3}{6}\) = 36 \(\frac{3}{6}\) inches
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
LaDanian wants to write the fraction \(\frac{4}{6}\) as a sum of unit fractions. Which expression should he write?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
Given,
LaDanian wants to write the fraction \(\frac{4}{6}\) as a sum of unit fractions.
The unit fraction for \(\frac{4}{6}\) is \(\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}+\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Greta made a design with squares. She colored 8 out of the 12 squares blue. What fraction of the squares did she color blue?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Greta made a design with squares. She colored 8 out of the 12 squares blue.
\(\frac{8}{12}\)
= \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
The teacher gave this pattern to the class: the first term is 5 and the rule is add 4, subtract 1. Each student says one number. The first student says 5. Victor is tenth in line. What number should Victor say?
Options:
a. 17
b. 19
c. 20
d. 21

Answer:
given
a=5
d=4-1=3
to find t10
tn=a + (n-1) d
t10=5 + (10-1) 3
t10=5 + 27
t10 = 32
victor is tenth in line,therefore he should say the number 32

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 447

Question 1.
A painter mixed \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{3}{4}\) blue paint to make purple paint.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 447 Q 1
How much purple paint did the painter make?
_____ quart of purple paint

Answer: 1

Explanation:
Given,
A painter mixed \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart of red paint with \(\frac{3}{4}\) blue paint to make purple paint.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{4}\) or 1.

Question 2.
Ivan biked 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) hours on Monday, 2 \(\frac{1}{3}\) hours on Tuesday, and 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) hours on Wednesday. What is the total number of hours Ivan spent biking?
Ivan spen _______ hours biking.
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 6 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Ivan biked 1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) hours on Monday, 2 \(\frac{1}{3}\) hours on Tuesday, and 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\) hours on Wednesday.
1 \(\frac{2}{3}\) + 2 \(\frac{1}{3}\) + 2 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
First add the whole numbers,
1 + 2 + 2 = 5
2/3 + 1/3 + 2/3 = 5/3
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
5/3 = 1 2/3
5 + 1 1/3  = 6 \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 3.
Tricia had 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) yards of fabric to make curtains. When she finished she had 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) yards of fabric left. She said she used 2 \(\frac{2}{8}\) yards of fabric for the curtains. Do you agree? Explain.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
When I subtract 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) and 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\), the answer is not 2 \(\frac{2}{8}\).
The mixed number 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) needs to be regrouped as a mixed number with a fraction greater than 1.
4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 3 \(\frac{9}{8}\)
So, 3 \(\frac{9}{8}\) – 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\) = 1 \(\frac{6}{8}\) or 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 448

Question 4.
Miguel’s class went to the state fair. The fairground is divided into sections. Rides are in \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the fairground. Games are in \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the fairground. Farm exhibits are in \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the fairground.
Part A
Use the model. What fraction of the fairground is rides and games?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 448 Q 4
The fraction of the fairground with games and rides is ______ .
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Miguel’s class went to the state fair. The fairground is divided into sections. Rides are in \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the fairground.
Games are in \(\frac{2}{10}\) of the fairground.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\) = \(\frac{8}{10}\)

Question 4.
Part B
How much greater is the part of the fairground with rides than with farm exhibits? Explain how the model could be used to find the answer.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{10}\)

Explanation:
I could shade 6 sections to represent the section with the rides, and then I could cross out 1 section to represent the farm exhibits. This leaves 5 sections, so the part of the fairground with rides is 5/10 or 1/2 greater than the part with farm exhibits.

Question 5.
Rita is making chili. The recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of tomatoes. How many cups of tomatoes, written as a fraction greater than one, are used in the recipe?
_____ cups

Answer: 11/4 cups

Explanation:
Given,
Rita is making chili. The recipe calls for 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of tomatoes.
Convert from the mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 11/4 cups

Question 6.
Lamar’s mom sells sports equipment online. She sold \(\frac{9}{10}\) of the sports equipment. Select a way \(\frac{9}{10}\) can be written as a sum of fractions. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\)
d. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\)
e. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)
f. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
a. \(\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\) = 6/10 ≠ 9/10
b. \(\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\) = 9/10
c. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}\) = 8/10
d. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = 9/10
e. \(\frac{4}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}\) = 10/10 ≠ 9/10
f. \(\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}\) = 9/10
Thus the suitable answers are b, d, f.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 449

Question 7.
Bella brought \(\frac{8}{10}\) gallon of water on a hiking trip. She drank \(\frac{6}{10}\) gallon of water. How much water is left?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) gallons

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\) gallons

Explanation:
Given,
Bella brought \(\frac{8}{10}\) gallon of water on a hiking trip.
She drank \(\frac{6}{10}\) gallon of water.
To find how much water is left we have to subtract the two fractions.
\(\frac{8}{10}\) – \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{2}{10}\) gallons

Question 8.
In a survey, \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the students chose Saturday and \(\frac{1}{10}\) chose Monday as their favorite day of the week. What fraction shows the students who chose Saturday or Monday as their favorite day?
Part A
Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 449 Q 8
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Explanation:
Given,
In a survey, \(\frac{6}{10}\) of the students chose Saturday and \(\frac{1}{10}\) chose Monday as their favorite day of the week.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) = \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Question 8.
Part B
How are the numerator and denominator of your answer related to the model? Explain.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The numerator shows the number of parts shaded. The denominator shows the size of the parts.

Question 9.
Match the equation with the property used.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 449 Q 9
Type below:
__________________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-449-Q-9

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 450

Question 10.
For numbers 10a–10e, select Yes or No to show if the sum or difference is correct.
(a) \(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{1}{8}=\frac{3}{8}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{1}{8}=\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(b) \(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{1}{5}=\frac{5}{5}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{5}+\frac{1}{5}=\frac{5}{5}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(c) \(\frac{4}{6}+\frac{1}{6}=\frac{5}{12}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, add the numerators.
\(\frac{4}{6}+\frac{1}{6}=\frac{5}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 10.
(d) \(\frac{6}{12}-\frac{4}{12}=\frac{2}{12}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{6}{12}-\frac{4}{12}=\frac{2}{12}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 10.
(e) \(\frac{7}{9}-\frac{2}{9}=\frac{9}{9}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
Denominators are the same but the numerators are different. So, subtract the numerators.
\(\frac{7}{9}-\frac{2}{9}=\frac{5}{9}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 11.
Gina has 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) feet of silver ribbon and 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) of gold ribbon. How much more silver ribbon does Gina have than gold ribbon?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) feet more silver ribbon.

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon.

Explanation:
Given,
Gina has 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) feet of silver ribbon and 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) of gold ribbon.
5 \(\frac{2}{6}\) – 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\)
= \(\frac{32}{6}\) – \(\frac{16}{6}\)
= \(\frac{16}{6}\)
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon
Therefore Gina has 2 \(\frac{4}{6}\) feet more silver ribbon than gold ribbon.

Question 12.
Jill is making a long cape. She needs 4 \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards of blue fabric for the outside of the cape. She needs 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) yards of purple fabric for the lining of the cape.
Part A
Jill incorrectly subtracted the two mixed numbers to find how much more blue fabric than purple fabric she should buy. Her work is shown below.
\(4 \frac{1}{3}-3 \frac{2}{3}=\frac{12}{3}-\frac{9}{3}=\frac{3}{3}\)
Why is Jill’s work incorrect?
Type below:
__________________

Answer:
Jill changed only the whole number parts of the mixed number to thirds. She forgot to add the fraction part of the mixed number.

Question 12.
Part B
How much more blue fabric than purple fabric should Jill buy? Show your work.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
4 \(\frac{1}{3}\) – 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= \(\frac{13}{3}\) – \(\frac{11}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Jill should buy \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard more blue fabric than purple fabric.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 451

Question 13.
Russ has two jars of glue. One jar is \(\frac{1}{5}\) full. The other jar is \(\frac{2}{5}\) full.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 13
Use the fractions to write an equation to find the amount of glue Russ has.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Question 13
Type below:
_________________

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-451-Question-13

Explanation:
Given,
Russ has two jars of glue. One jar is \(\frac{1}{5}\) full.
The other jar is \(\frac{2}{5}\) full.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 14.
Gertie ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile during physical education class. Sarah ran \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile during the same class. How much farther did Gertie run than Sarah? Shade the model to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 14
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given that,
Gertie ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile during physical education class.
Sarah ran \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile during the same class.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 15.
Teresa planted marigolds in \(\frac{2}{8}\) of her garden and petunias in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of her garden. What fraction of the garden has marigolds and petunias?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Teresa planted marigolds in \(\frac{2}{8}\) of her garden and petunias in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of her garden.
Add both the fractions 2/8 and 3/8 to find the fraction of the garden has marigolds and petunias.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 16.
Draw a line to show the mixed number and fraction that have the same value.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 16

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-4-Answer-Key-Chapter-7-Add-and-Subtract-Fractions-Page-No.-451-Q-16

Question 17.
Each day, Tally’s baby sister eats \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of rice cereal in the morning and \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of rice cereal in the afternoon. It will take Tally’s sister Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 451 Q 17 days to eat 2 cups of rice cereal.
Type below:
_________________

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Each day she eats 1/2 cups of rice. But we want to know how long it will take to each 2 cups worth. so lets make an equation.
1/2 × x = 2
x = 4
Thus It will take 4 days to eat 2 cups of rice cereal.

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 452

Question 18.
Three girls are selling cases of popcorn to earn money for a band trip. In week 1, Emily sold 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cases, Brenda sold 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cases, and Shannon sold 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases.
Part A
How many cases of popcorn have the girls sold in all? Explain how you found your answer.
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases

Explanation:
Given,
Three girls are selling cases of popcorn to earn money for a band trip. In week 1, Emily sold 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cases, Brenda sold 4 \(\frac{1}{4}\) cases, and Shannon sold 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases.
First I add the whole numbers 2 + 4 + 3 = 9 cases. Then I add the fractions by combining 3/4 + 1/4 into one whole.
So, 9 + 1 + 1/2 = 10 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cases

Question 18.
Part B
The girls must sell a total of 35 cases in order to have enough money for the trip. Suppose they sell the same amount in week 2 and week 3 of the sale as in week 1. Will the girls have sold enough cases of popcorn to go on the trip? Explain.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
Given,
The girls must sell a total of 35 cases in order to have enough money for the trip.
Suppose they sell the same amount in week 2 and week 3 of the sale as in week 1.
If I add the sales from the 3 weeks, or 10 1/2 + 10 1/2 + 10 1/2, the sum is only 31 1/2 cases of popcorn. Thus is less than 35 cases.

Question 19.
Henry ate \(\frac{3}{8}\) of a sandwich. Keith ate \(\frac{4}{8}\) of the same sandwich. How much more of the sandwich did Keith eat than Henry?
\(\frac{□}{□}\) of the sandwich

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the sandwich

Explanation:
Given,
Henry ate \(\frac{3}{8}\) of a sandwich.
Keith ate \(\frac{4}{8}\) of the same sandwich.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the sandwich

Question 20.
For numbers 20a–20d, choose True or False for each sentence.
a. \(1 \frac{4}{9}+2 \frac{6}{9}\) is equal to 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
\(1 \frac{4}{9}+2 \frac{6}{9}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
First add the whole numbers
1 + 2 = 3
4/9 + 6/9 = 10/9
Convert it into the mixed fractions
10/9 = 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
3 + 1 \(\frac{1}{9}\) = 4 \(\frac{1}{9}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 20.
b. \(3 \frac{5}{6}+2 \frac{3}{6}\) is equal to 5 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
First add the whole numbers
3 + 2 = 5
5/6 + 3/6 = 8/6
Convert it into the mixed fractions
8/6 = 1 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
5 + 1 \(\frac{2}{6}\) = 6 \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 20.
c. \(4 \frac{5}{8}-2 \frac{4}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:
\(4 \frac{5}{8}-2 \frac{4}{8}\)
First subtract the whole numbers
4 – 2 = 2
5/8 – 4/8 = 1/8
= 2 \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is false.

Question 20.
d. \(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\) is equal to 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:
\(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\)
5 – 3 = 2
5/8 – 2/8 = 3/8
= 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(5 \frac{5}{8}-3 \frac{2}{8}\) = 2 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the above statement is true.

Question 21.
Justin lives 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles from his grandfather’s house. Write the mixed number as a fraction greater than one.
4 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{23}{5}\)

Explanation:
Justin lives 4 \(\frac{3}{5}\) miles from his grandfather’s house.
Convert from mixed fractions to an improper fraction.
4 \(\frac{3}{5}\) = \(\frac{23}{5}\)

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 457

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete the equations.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 457 Q 1
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = _ + _ + _
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = _ × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\)
The unit fraction of \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = 3 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the whole number is 3.

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 2.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Answer: 4

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{4}{5}\) is \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{4}{5}\) = 4 × \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Thus the whole number is 4.

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{10}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{3}{10}\) is \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{10}\)
\(\frac{3}{10}\) = 3 × \(\frac{1}{10}\)
Thus the whole number is 3.

Question 4.
\(\frac{8}{3}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: 8

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{8}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{8}{3}\) = 8 × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Thus the whole number is 8.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction.

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/6, 3/6, 4/6, 5/6

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{6}\) is \(\frac{2}{6}\) , \(\frac{3}{6}\) , \(\frac{4}{6}\) , \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/3, 3/3, 4/3, 5/3

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{3}{3}\), \(\frac{4}{3}\) and \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 7.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{5}{6}\) is \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\) = 5 × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the whole number is 5.

Question 8.
\(\frac{9}{4}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: 9

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{9}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{9}{4}\) = 9 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the whole number is 9.

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{100}\) = ______ × \(\frac{1}{100}\)

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The unit fraction for \(\frac{3}{100}\) is \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\) + \(\frac{1}{100}\)
\(\frac{3}{100}\) = 3 × \(\frac{1}{100}\)
Thus the whole number is 3.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction.

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{10}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, 5/10

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{10}\) is 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, 5/10

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ,
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8

Explanation:
The next four multiples of \(\frac{1}{8}\) is 2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8.

Question 12.
Robyn uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blueberries to make each loaf of blueberry bread. Explain how many loaves of blueberry bread she can make with 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of blueberries.
_____ loaves of blueberry bread

Answer: 5 loaves of blueberry bread

Explanation:
Given,
Robyn uses \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of blueberries to make each loaf of blueberry bread.
The unit fraction for 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) is \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
=  5 loaves of blueberry bread

Question 13.
Nigel cut a loaf of bread into 12 equal slices. His family ate some of the bread and now \(\frac{5}{12}\) of the loaf is left. Nigel wants to put each of the leftover slices in its own bag. How many bags does Nigel need?
_____ bags

Answer: 5 bags

Explanation:
Given,
Nigel cut a loaf of bread into 12 equal slices. His family ate some of the bread and now \(\frac{5}{12}\) of the loaf is left.
Nigel wants to put each of the leftover slices in its own bag.
\(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\) + \(\frac{1}{12}\)
= 5 bags

Question 14.
Which fraction is a multiple of \(\frac{1}{5}\)? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{5}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{7}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{9}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\), \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
The multiples of the \(\frac{1}{5}\) is \(\frac{4}{5}\), \(\frac{3}{5}\).

Fractions and Properties of Addition – Page No. 458

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 15.
Whose statement makes sense? Whose statement is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Page No. 458 Q 15
Type below:
_________________

Answer: The boy’s statement makes sense. Because 4/5 is not the multiple of 1/4.

Question 15.
For the statement that is nonsense, write a new statement that makes sense.
Type below:
_________________

Answer: 4/5 is the multiple of 1/5.

Conclusion:

Just click on the links available above and practice the concepts of add and subtract fractions for homework help & standard tests. Help students to practice all chapter 7 questions from Go Math Answer Key to write the answers perfectly. For more questions just go with our Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 7 Add and Subtract Fractions Homework Practice FL pdf article.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review/Test

go-math-grade-4-answer-key-chapter-6-fraction-equivalence-and-comparison-review-test

Improve your subject knowledge and problem-solving skills with the help of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review/Test Pdf. All the questions and answers covered in this HMH Go Math Grade 4 Review/Test Answer Key are prepared by math experts and support students to score good marks in the exam.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review/Test

Students who are searching for the best review/test guide can refer to this helpful Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review/Test. As it includes all the concepts in Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison. So, students can discover the methods to solve the problems easily and can explore the knowledge by giving the question from Review/Test. Click on the respective link and download it for better practice.

Chapter 6: Review/Test

Review/Test – Page No. 261

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review Test img 1

Question 1.
A ________________ is a common multiple of two or more denominators.
________

Answer:
A common denominator is a common multiple of two or more denominators..

Question 2.
A fraction is in _________________ when the numerator and denominator have only 1 as a common factor
________

Answer:
A fraction is in simplest form when the numerator and denominator have only 1 as a common factor.

Question 3.
A ________________ is a known size or amount that helps you understand another size or amount.
________

Answer:
A benchmark is a known size or amount that helps you understand another size or amount.

Write two equivalent fractions.

Question 4.
\(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{9}\) and \(\frac{8}{12}\).

Explanation:
To find equivalent fractions we will multiply its numerator and denominator by the same number. Firstly we will calculate GCF for the given fraction i.e \(\frac{4}{6}\), the GCF for (4,6) is 2. As GCF is not equal to 1, we will divide the numerator and denominator by 2. By dividing with 2 we will get the fraction as \(\frac{2}{3}\). Now we will multiply the numerator and denominator with 3,
So the fraction will be 3(\(\frac{2}{3}\))
= \(\frac{6}{9}\). For the second equivalent fraction, we will multiply numerator and denominator with 4,
So the fraction will be 4(\(\frac{2}{3}\))
= \(\frac{8}{12}\).
So, the two equivalent fractions of \(\frac{4}{6}\) are \(\frac{6}{9}\) and \(\frac{8}{12}\).

Question 5.
\(\frac{6}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{9}{15}\) and \(\frac{12}{20}\).

Explanation:
To find equivalent fractions we will multiply its numerator and denominator by the same number. Firstly we will calculate GCF for the given fraction i.e \(\frac{6}{10}\), the GCF for (6,10) is 2. As GCF is not equal to 1, we will divide the numerator and denominator by 2. By dividing with 2 we will get the fraction as \(\frac{3}{5}\). Now we will multiply the numerator and denominator with 3,
So the fraction will be 3(\(\frac{3}{5}\))
= \(\frac{9}{15}\). For the second equivalent fraction, we will multiply numerator and denominator with 4,
So the fraction will be 4(\(\frac{3}{5}\))
= \(\frac{12}{20}\).
So, the two equivalent fractions of \(\frac{3}{5}\) are \(\frac{9}{15}\) and \(\frac{12}{20}\).

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{12}\) and \(\frac{4}{16}\).

Explanation:
To find equivalent fractions we will multiply its numerator and denominator by the same number. Firstly we will calculate GCF for the given fraction i.e \(\frac{2}{8}\), the GCF for (2,8) is 2. As GCF is not equal to 1, we will divide the numerator and denominator by 2. By dividing with 2 we will get the fraction as \(\frac{1}{4}\). Now we will multiply the numerator and denominator with 3,
So the fraction will be 3(\(\frac{1}{4}\))
= \(\frac{3}{12}\). For the second equivalent fraction, we will multiply numerator and denominator with 4,
So the fraction will be 4(\(\frac{1}{4}\))
= \(\frac{4}{16}\).
So, the two equivalent fractions of \(\frac{2}{8}\) are \(\frac{3}{12}\) and \(\frac{4}{16}\).

Write each pair of fractions as a pair of fractions with a common denominator.

Question 7.
\(\frac{3}{4} \text { and } \frac{7}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) , \(\frac{7}{8}\).

Explanation:
To get the common denominators we will multiply \(\frac{3}{4}\) with 2, so that the fraction will be \(\frac{6}{8}\). As the other fraction is \(\frac{7}{8}\). So the denominators are the same.

Question 8.
\(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{12}\) and \(\frac{3}{12}\).

Explanation:
To get the common denominators we will multiply \(\frac{2}{3}\) with 4 and \(\frac{1}{4}\) with 3, so that the fractions will be \(\frac{8}{12}\) and \(\frac{3}{12}\). So the denominators are same.

Question 9.
\(\frac{7}{10} \text { and } \frac{4}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{10}\) and \(\frac{8}{10}\).

Explanation:
To get the common denominators we will multiply \(\frac{4}{5}\) with 2, so that the fraction will be \(\frac{8}{10}\). As the other fraction is \(\frac{7}{10}\). And the denominators are same.

Compare. Write <, >, or 5.

Question 10.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{5}{12}\).

Explanation:
To compare \(\frac{5}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{12}\) first we will find LCM of 8 and 12.
And the LCM of (8,12) is 24. Now we will multiply \(\frac{5}{8}\) with 3 and \(\frac{5}{12}\) with 2, so the fraction will be \(\frac{15}{24}\) and the other fraction is \(\frac{10}{24}\).
So \(\frac{15}{24}\) is greater than \(\frac{10}{24}\).

Question 11.
\(\frac{10}{12}\) _____ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{10}{12}\) = \(\frac{5}{6}\).

Explanation:
To compare \(\frac{10}{12}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\),first we will find LCM of 12 and 6.
And the LCM of (12,6) is 12. Now we will multiply \(\frac{5}{6}\) with 2, so the fraction will be \(\frac{10}{12}\) and the other fraction is \(\frac{10}{12}\).
So \(\frac{10}{12}\) is equal to \(\frac{10}{12}\).

Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{3}{10}\).

Explanation:
To compare \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{3}{10}\) first we will find LCM of 2 and 10.
And the LCM of (2,10) is 10. Now we will multiply \(\frac{1}{2}\) with 5, so the fraction will be \(\frac{5}{10}\) and the other fraction is \(\frac{3}{10}\).
So \(\frac{5}{10}\) is greater than \(\frac{3}{10}\).

Question 13.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) _____ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{1}{3}\).

Explanation:
To compare \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{3}\) first we will find LCM of 4 and 3.
And the LCM of (4,3) is 12. Now we will multiply \(\frac{1}{4}\) with 3 and \(\frac{1}{3}\) with 4, so the fraction will be \(\frac{3}{12}\) and the other fraction is \(\frac{4}{12}\).
So \(\frac{3}{12}\) is less than \(\frac{4}{12}\).

Write the fractions in order from least to greatest.

Question 14.
\(\frac{2}{3}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)< \(\frac{3}{4}\).

Explanation:
To write the fraction from least to greatest we will find LCM of 3,4,6. And the LCM of (3,4,6) is 12. Now we will multiply
\(\frac{2}{3}\) with 4 and \(\frac{3}{4}\) with 3 and \(\frac{1}{6}\) with 2, so the fraction will be
\(\frac{8}{12}\) and \(\frac{9}{12}\), \(\frac{2}{12}\)
So \(\frac{2}{12}\) is less than \(\frac{8}{12}\) is less than \(\frac{9}{12}\).

Question 15.
\(\frac{7}{10}, \frac{4}{5}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{4}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{12}\) < \(\frac{1}{2}\)< \(\frac{7}{10}\)< \(\frac{4}{5}\).

Explanation:
To write the fraction from least to greatest we will find LCM of 10,5,2,12. And the LCM of (10,5,2,12) is 60. Now we will multiply
\(\frac{7}{10}\) with 6 and \(\frac{4}{5}\) with 12 and \(\frac{1}{2}\) with 30 and \(\frac{4}{12}\) with 5 , so the fraction will be
\(\frac{42}{60}\) and \(\frac{48}{60}\), \(\frac{30}{60}\), \(\frac{20}{60}\)
So \(\frac{20}{60}\) is less than \(\frac{30}{60}\) is less than \(\frac{42}{60}\) is less than
\(\frac{48}{60}\).

Review/Test – Page No. 262

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 16.
Paco needs at least \(\frac{3}{8}\) yard of twine to build a model ship. How much twine could he buy?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{10}\) yard
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) yard
c. \(\frac{3}{5}\) yard
d. \(\frac{1}{8}\) yard

Answer: c.

Explanation:

a) 3/10 yard. As we know that for two rational numbers with the same numerator but with different denominators the number whose denominator is smaller is a greater quantity.
Hence 3/10 < 3/8. And option a is incorrect.

b) 1/4 yard. As to compare to rational numbers we have to either make the numerator equal or their denominator equal. Hence here we multiply and divide 1/4 by 2 to get 8 in the denominator. As 2/8 < 3/8
since the denominator is the same and the number with the same denominator but with different numerators are compared as whose numerator is greater is a greater quantity. And the option b is incorrect.

c) 3/4 yard. As both the numbers have the same numerator but different denominator and we know that for two rational numbers with the same numerator but with different denominators the number whose denominator is smaller is a greater quantity. As 3/8 < 3/4, so option c is correct.

d) 1/8 yard. As both the numbers have the same denominator and we know that for two rational numbers with the same denominator but with the different numerators, the number whose numerator is smaller is a smaller quantity. So 1/8 < 3/8 and the option d is incorrect.

Question 17.
Rachel, Nancy, and Diego were in a fishing competition. Rachel’s fish was \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot long, Nancy’s fish was \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot long, and Diego’s fish was \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot long. What are the lengths of the fish in order from least to greatest?
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot, \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot
c. \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot
d. \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot, \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot, \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot

Answer: d

Explanation:
As Rachel’s fish was \(\frac{7}{8}\) foot long, Nancy’s fish was \(\frac{1}{4}\) foot long, Diego’s fish was \(\frac{1}{2}\) foot long, so to find the lengths of the fish in order from least to greatest we will find the LCM of (8,4,2), so the LCM of (8,4,2) is 8 and we will multiply \(\frac{1}{4}\) with 2 and \(\frac{1}{2}\) with 4, so the fraction will be \(\frac{2}{8}\) and \(\frac{4}{8}\). The lengths of the fish in order from least to greatest are  \(\frac{2}{8}\), latex]\frac{4}{8}[/latex], latex]\frac{7}{8}[/latex]

Question 18.
Amy needs \(\frac{6}{8}\) gallon of fruit juice to make punch. She needs an equal amount of sparkling water. How much sparkling water does she need?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{8}\) gallon
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallon
c. \(\frac{2}{3}\) gallon
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\) gallon

Answer: d

Explanation:
Amy needs \(\frac{6}{8}\) gallon of fruit juice to make punch and she needs an equal amount of sparkling water, so Amy needs \(\frac{6}{8}\) or \(\frac{3}{4}\) gallon.

Question 19.
Gavin is building a model of a kitchen. In the model, \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the floor tiles are white, \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the floor tiles are yellow, and \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the floor tiles are brown. How many floor tiles could be in the model?
Options:
a. 2
b. 5
c. 10
d. 17

Answer: c

Explanation:
As Gavin is building a model of a kitchen and \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the floor tiles are white, \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the floor tiles are yellow, and \(\frac{1}{10}\) of the floor tiles are brown. To find the total number of tiles we will add up all color tiles. For that, we will multiply \(\frac{1}{2}\) with 5 and \(\frac{2}{5}\) with 2 to set the denominators equal. Then the fractions will be \(\frac{5}{10}\) and \(\frac{4}{10}\). Now add all three
\(\frac{5}{10}\)+\(\frac{4}{10}\)+\(\frac{1}{10}\)
= 10.
So the number of floor tiles modeled is 10

Review/Test – Page No. 263

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 20.
Bill has enough money to buy no more than \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of cheese. How much cheese could he buy?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{3}\) pound
b. \(\frac{4}{6}\) pound
c. \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound

Answer: a

Explanation:
As Bill has enough money to buy no more than \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of cheese, so he needs to buy \(\frac{1}{3}\) pounds.

Question 21.
Students planted 6 equal-size gardens on Earth Day. They divided each garden into 3 equal sections and planted herbs in 2 of the 3 sections. What fraction of the gardens did the students plant with herbs?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{6}{18}\)
d. \(\frac{12}{18}\)

Answer: d

Explanation:
As students planted 6 equal-size gardens on Earth Day, and they divided each garden into 3 equal sections and planted herbs in 2 of the 3 sections, so the fraction of the gardens did the students plant with herbs are we need to multiply 6×3 and will get 18 sections in all gardens, then we need to multiply 2×6 and get 12 sections are herbs. So, 12 out of 18 are herbs i.e \(\frac{12}{18}\).

Question 22.
Noah and Leslie live the same distance from school. Which could be the distances they live from school?
Options:
a. \(\frac{7}{100}\) kilometer and \(\frac{7}{10}\) kilometer
b. \(\frac{5}{10}\) kilometer and \(\frac{1}{5}\) kilometer
c. \(\frac{80}{100}\) kilometer and \(\frac{8}{10}\) kilometer
d. \(\frac{6}{10}\) kilometer and \(\frac{2}{5}\) kilometer

Answer: c.

Explanation:
The option c is correct, as \(\frac{80}{100}\) km is equal to \(\frac{8}{10}\) when it is reduced.

Question 23.
Keiko needs \(\frac{8}{12}\) yard of fabric to finish her quilt. What is \(\frac{8}{12}\) written in simplest form?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: b

Explanation:
As Keiko needs \(\frac{8}{12}\) yard of fabric to finish her quilt and the simplest form of \(\frac{8}{12}\) is \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Review/Test – Page No. 264

Question 24.
Sam needs \(\frac{4}{6}\) cup of laundry detergent for his laundry. The cap on top of the laundry detergent holds \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup. He has 1 capful of detergent. Does he have enough? Explain.

Answer: Sam does not have enough.

Explanation:
As Sam needs \(\frac{4}{6}\) cup of laundry detergent for his laundry and the cap holds only \(\frac{1}{3}\) and Sam has 1 capful of detergent, and Sam needs 2 cups instead of 1 cup because \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equivalent to \(\frac{2}{3}\) and Sam only has \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup, so he needs 2 cups.

Question 25.
The table shows the distances of some places in town from the school.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review Test img 2
A. Are any of the places shown in the table closer than \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile to school? Explain how you know.

Answer: Library \(\frac{3}{5}\) mile.

Explanation:
To find which place is closer, we will find the LCM of the denominators i.e (5,2,4,10). And the LCM of (5,2,4,10) is 20, so we will divide \(\frac{3}{5}\) with 4, \(\frac{1}{2}\) with 10, \(\frac{3}{4}\) with 5 and \(\frac{8}{10}\) with 2. So that the fractions will have same denominators and we can find easily which place is closer. And the fractions after multiplying are \(\frac{12}{20}\), \(\frac{10}{20}\), \(\frac{15}{20}\) and \(\frac{16}{20}\). So the places closer than \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile to school are post office which is \(\frac{10}{20}\) mile and next place is library which is \(\frac{12}{20}\) mile.

Question 25.
B. Are any of the places shown in the table the same distance from school? Explain how you know.

Answer: Yes.

Question 25.
C. Which place is farthest from school? Explain.

Answer: Townhall.

Explanation:
Townhall is the farthest from the school as it’s distance is \(\frac{8}{10}\) mile.

Conclusion:

Ace up your preparation with this Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 6 Homework FL in pdf download. Hence, you can practice effectively and score good grades in the exam. Here, we have curated a detailed explanation of questions from ch 6 and provided Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Review/Test. So, We advise students to understand the topics and apply them in the real world.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison

go-math-grade-4-chapter-7-add-and-subtract-fractions-pages-131-153-answer-key

Free PDF Download links of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison are prevailing here for free. Simply refer to them once and make use of the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Answer Key Homework Practice FL to practice all questions covered in the Go Math Grade 4 Chapter 6 Textbook. The biggest goal of preparing these Answer Key Homework Practice FL by our team is to make students understand the concepts and secure well in the exams.

 

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison

Find all step-by-step explanations for every question from these Answer key of grade 4 HMH Go Math Ch 6 Homework Practice FL. Hence, take a look at the list of the toppers recommended HMH Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key for Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison and learn all the basics easily. In Chapter 6 go math HMH grade 4 Solution Key, you will find the topics like Equivalent Fractions, Comparing fractions, pair of fractions as a pair of fractions with a common denominator, and so on.

Lesson: 1 – Equivalent Fractions

Lesson: 2

Lesson: 3

Lesson: 4

Lesson: 5

Lesson: 6

Lesson: 7

Lesson: 8

Lesson: 9

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 113

Equivalent Fractions

Use the model to write an equivalent fraction.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 1
\(\frac{4}{6}=\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
The first image has 4 parts shaded out of 6 parts. Divide 8/10 with 2. You will get 2/3. That means 2 parts are shaded out of 3 parts.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 2
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Explanation:
The first image has 3 parts shaded out of 4 parts. Multiply 8/10 with 2. You will get 6/8. That means 6 parts are shaded out of 8 parts.

Tell whether the fractions are equivalent. Write = or ≠.

Question 3.
\(\frac{8}{10}\) _____ \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{10}\) = \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 4/5 with 2.
8/10 = (2/2) × (4/5)
= 8/10
So, 8/10 = 4/5.

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) _____ \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ≠ \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/2 with 6
1/2 = (6/6) x (1/2)
= (6/12)
So, 1/2 ≠ 7/12

Question 5.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) _____ \(\frac{8}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) ≠ \(\frac{8}{12}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 3/4 with 3.
3/4 = (3/3) × (3/4)
= (9/12)
So, 3/4 ≠ 8/12

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) _____ \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/3 with 2.
2/3 = (2/2) × (2/3)
= 4/6
So, 2/3 = 4/6.

Question 7.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 5/8 with 2
5 / 8 =(2/2) x (5/ 8)
= (10/16)
So, 5/8 ≠ 4/10

Question 8.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{4}{12}\)

Answer:

Question 9.
\(\frac{20}{100}\) _____ \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{20}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
Cross Multiply the 20/100 with 20/20
20/100 = (20/20) x (20/100)
= (1/5)
So, 20/100 = 1/5.

Question 10.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 5/8 with 2
5/8 = (2/2) x (5/8)
= 10/16
So, 5/8 ≠ 9/10

Question 11.
Jamal finished \(\frac{5}{6}\) of his homework. Margaret finished \(\frac{3}{4}\) of her homework, and Steve finished \(\frac{10}{12}\) of his homework. Which two students finished the same amount of homework?
_________

Answer: Jamal and Steve

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Jamal finished work = 5 /6 of his homework
Margaret finished work = 3 /4th of her homework
Steve finished work = 10/12 of his homework
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 5/6 with 2
Then, (2/2) x (5/6) = 10/12
Then, Jamal and Steve finished the same amount of homework.

Question 12.
Sophia’s vegetable garden is divided into 12 equal sections. She plants carrots in 8 of the sections. Write two fractions that are equivalent to the part of Sophia’s garden that is planted with carrots.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 2/3 and 4/6

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Sophia’s vegetable garden is divided into 12 equal sections
She plants carrots in 8 of the sections out of 12 sections = 8/12
By simplifying the 8/12, we will get 4/6
Again simplify the 4 /6 by dividing method, you will get 2 /3
2/3 = (2/2) x (2/3)
= 4/6
Then, the equivalent fractions are 2/3, 4 /6

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 114

Question 1.
A rectangle is divided into 8 equal parts. Two parts are shaded. Which fraction is equivalent to the shaded area of the rectangle?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
A rectangle is divided into 8 equal parts
Two parts are shaded
Then, the shaded area of rectangle = 2/8
By simplifying the 2/8, you will get 1/4
So, the shaded area of rectangle = 1/4
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
Jeff uses 3 fifth-size strips to model \(\frac{3}{5}\). He wants to use tenth-size strips to model an equivalent fraction. How many tenth-size strips will he need?
Options:
a. 10
b. 6
c. 5
d. 3

Answer: 6

Explanation:
From the given data,
Jeff uses 3 fifth –size strips to model = 3 / 5 size strips
If he wants to use tenth – size strips to an equivalent fraction = 1 / 10 size strips
The number of strips = x
(1/10) x = 3/5
x = 30/5
then, the required number of tenth size trips = 6
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 3.
Cassidy places 40 stamps on each of 8 album pages. How many stamps does she place in all?
Options:
a. 300
b. 320
c. 360
d. 380

Answer: 320

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Cassidy places 40 stamps on each of 8 album pages = 8 x 40 = 320
So, totally placed stamps on album pages by Cassidy = 320 stamps
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
Maria and 3 friends have 1,200 soccer cards. If they share the soccer cards equally, how many will each person receive?
Options:
a. 30
b. 40
c. 300
d. 400

Answer: 300

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Maria and 3 friends have 1200 soccer cards
If soccer cards shared equally by four members = 1200/4 = 300
Then, each person received soccer cards = 300
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Six groups of students sell 162 balloons at the school carnival. There are 3 students in each group. If each student sells the same number of balloons, how many balloons does each student sell?
Options:
a. 9
b. 18
c. 27
d. 54

Answer: 9

Explanation:
As per the given, data,
Six groups of students sell 162 balloons at the school carnival
There are 3 students in each group
Then, total number of students in 6 groups = 6 x 3 = 18
If each student sells the same number of balloons = 162 / 18 = 9
Number of balloons sells by each student = 9
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Four students each made a list of prime numbers.
Eric: 5, 7, 17, 23
Maya: 3, 5, 13, 17
Bella: 2, 3, 17, 19
Jordan: 7, 11, 13, 21
Who made an error and included a composite number?
Options:
a. Eric
b. Maya
c. Bella
d. Jordan

Answer: Jordan

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Four students each made a list of prime numbers.
Eric: 5, 7, 17, 23
Maya: 3, 5, 13, 17
Bella: 2, 3, 17, 19
Jordan: 7, 11, 13, 21
21 is not a prime number.
So, An error made by Jordan.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 115

Write two equivalent fractions for each.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 3

Question 2.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4/6 and 8/12

Explanation:
2/3
(2/3) x (2/2) = 4/6
(2/3) x (4/4) = 8/12
Then, the equivalent fractions of 2/3 = 4/6 and 8/12

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 2/4 and 4/8

Explanation:
1/2
(1/2) x (2/2) = 2/4
(1/2) x (4/4) = 4/8
Then, the equivalent fractions of 1/2 = 2/4, 4/8

Question 4.
\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 8/10 and 80/100

Explanation:
4/5
(4/5) x (2/2) = 8/10
(4/5) x (20/20) = 80/100
Then, the equivalent fractions of 4/5 = 8/10 and 80/100

Tell whether the fractions are equivalent. Write # or ≠.

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
1/4
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/4 with 3
Then, (1/4) x (3/3) = 3/12
So, 1/4 = 3/12

Question 6.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) _____ \(\frac{5}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{5}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{10}\)

Explanation:
4/5
Multiply numerator and denominator of 4/5 with 2
(4/5) x (2/2) = 8/10
Then 4/5 ≠ 5/10

Question 7.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) ≠ \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:
3/8 ≠ 2/6

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) _____ \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Explanation:
3/4
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 3/4 with 2
Then, (3/4) x (2/2) = 6/8
So, 3/4 = 6/8

Question 9.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{10}{12}\)

Explanation:
5/6
Multiply the numerator and denominator with 2
(5/6) x (2/2) = 10/12
So, 5/6 = 10/12

Question 10.
\(\frac{6}{12}\) _____ \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:
6/12 ≠ 5/8

Question 11.
\(\frac{2}{5}\) _____ \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Explanation:
2/5
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/5 with 2
(2/5) x (2/2) = 4/10
So, 2/5 = 4/10

Question 12.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\) ≠ \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
2/4
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/4 with 3
(2/4) x (3/3) = 6/12
So, 2/4 ≠ 3/ 12

Question 13.
Jan has a 12-ounce milkshake. Four ounces in the milkshake are vanilla, and the rest is chocolate. What are two equivalent fractions that represent the fraction of the milkshake that is vanilla?
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/3 and 2/6

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Jan has a 12-ounce milkshake
Four ounces in the milkshake are vanilla = 4/12 = 1/3
Then, 8-ounces in milkshake are chocolate = 8/12 = 2/3
4/12 = 1/3
By multiplying 1/3 with 2
(1/3) x (2/2) = 2/6
So, the equivalent fractions of vanilla milkshake are 1/3 and 2/6.

Question 14.
Kareem lives \(\frac{4}{10}\) of a mile from the mall. Write two equivalent fractions that show what fraction of a mile Kareem lives from the mall.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 2/5 and 8/20

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Kareem lives 4/10 of a mile from the mall
To find the equivalent fractions of 4/10
Simplify the 4/10 = 2/5
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/5 with 4
(2/5) x (4/4) = 8/20
Then, the equivalent fraction of a mile Kareem lives from the mall = 2/5 and 8/20

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 116

Question 1.
Jessie colored a poster. She colored \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the poster red. Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{2}{5}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{4}{10}\)
b. \(\frac{7}{10}\)
c. \(\frac{4}{5}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{10}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Jessie colored a poster
She colored 2/5th of the poster red
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/5 with 2
Then, (2/5) x (2/2) = 4 /10
So, the equivalent fraction of 2/5 is 4/10.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
Jessie colored a poster. She colored \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the poster red. Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{1}{4}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{5}, \frac{3}{12}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{12}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{6}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Marcus makes a punch that is 1/4th of cranberry juice
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/4 with 2
Then, (1/4) x (2/2) = 2/8
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/4 with 3
Then, (1/4) x (3/3) = 3/12
Equivalent fractions of 1/4 are 2/8 and 3/12.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 3.
An electronics store sells a large flat screen television for $1,699. Last month, the store sold 8 of these television sets. About how much money did the store make on the television sets?
Options:
a. $160,000
b. $16,000
c. $8,000
d. $1,600

Answer: $16,000

Explanation:
As per the given data,
An electronics store sells a large flat-screen television for $1,699
Last month, the store sold 8 of these television sets = 8 x $1,699 = $13,952. The money is about to $16,000.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
Matthew has 18 sets of baseball cards. Each set has 12 cards. About how many baseball cards does Matthew have in all?
Options:
a. 300
b. 200
c. 150
d. 100

Answer: 200

Explanation:
From the given data,
Matthew has 18 sets of basketball cards
Each set has 12 cards = 12 x 18 = 216
Total number of basketball cards with Matthew = 216.
So, it is near to 200.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Diana had 41 stickers. She put them in 7 equal groups. She put as many as possible in each group. She gave the leftover stickers to her sister. How many stickers did Diana give to her sister?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 6

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Diana has 41 stickers
She put them in 7 equal groups = 41/7
= 5 (remaining 6)
She gave the leftover stickers to her sister
The number of stickers Diana give to her sister = 6
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Christopher wrote the number pattern below. The first term is 8.
8, 6, 9, 7, 10, …
Which is a rule for the pattern?
Options:
a. Add 2, add 3.
b. Add 6, subtract 3.
c. Subtract 6, add 3.
d. Subtract 2, add 3

Answer: Subtract 2, add 3

Explanation:
From the given data,
Christopher wrote the number pattern = 8, 6, 9, 7, 10, …..
The first number in the pattern = 8
8 – 2 = 6 + 3 = 9 – 2 = 7 +3 = 10 ….
So, the rule for the above pattern is to subtract 2, add 3.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 117

Write the fraction in simplest form.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 4

Explanation:
To write the 6/10 in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 6/10 with 2
(6 ÷2)/(10 ÷2) = 3/5
So, the simplest form of 6/10 = 3/5

Question 2.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
To write the 6/8in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 6/8 with 2
(6 ÷2)/(8 ÷2) = 3/4
So, the simplest form of 6/8 = 3/4

Question 3.
\(\frac{5}{5}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{1}\)

Explanation:
To write the 5/5in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 5/5 with 5
(5 ÷5)/(5 ÷5) = 1/1
So, the simplest form of 5/5 = 1

Question 4.
\(\frac{8}{12}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
To write the 8/12in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 8/12 with 4
(8 ÷4)/(12 ÷4) = 2/3
So, the simplest form of 8/12 = 2/3

Question 5.
\(\frac{100}{100}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1

Explanation:
Any number divided by the same number will be always equal to 1.
The simplest form of 100/100 = 1

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
To write the 2/6in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 2/6 with 2
(2 ÷2)/(6 ÷2) = 1/3
So, the simplest form of 2/6 = 1/3

Question 7.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
To write the 2/8in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 2/8 with 2
(2 ÷2)/(8 ÷2) = 1/4
So, the simplest form of 2/8 = 1/4

Question 8.
\(\frac{4}{10}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
To write the 4/10 in a simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 4 /10 with 2
(4 ÷2)/(10 ÷2) = 2/5
So, the simplest form of 4/10 = 2/5

Tell whether the fractions are equivalent. Write = or ≠. (if you dont have ≠on your keyboard, copy and paste this one: ≠ )

Question 9.
\(\frac{6}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
6/12 ≠ 1/12

Question 10.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
3/4 ≠ 5/6

Question 11.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
6/10
Divide the numerator and denominator of 6/10 with 2
(6 ÷ 2)/( 10 ÷ 2) = 3/5
So, 6/10 = 3/5

Question 12.
\(\frac{3}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
3/12 ≠ 1/3

Question 13.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{60}{100}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)

Explanation:
6/10
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 6/10 with 10
(6 x 10)/(10 x 10) = 60/100
So, 6/10 = 60/100

Question 14.
\(\frac{11}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Answer: \(\frac{11}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{9}{10}\)

Explanation:
11/12 ≠ 9/10

Question 15.
\(\frac{2}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{8}{20}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{8}{20}\)

Explanation:
2/5
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 2/5 with 4
(2 x 4)/(5 x 4) = 8/20
So, 2/5 = 8/20

Question 16.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
4/8
Divide the numerator and denominator of 4/8 with 4
(4 x 4)/(8 x 4) = 1/2
So, 4/8 = 1/2

Question 17.
At Memorial Hospital, 9 of the 12 babies born on Tuesday were boys. In simplest form, what fraction of the babies born on Tuesday were boys?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
At the memorial hospital, 9 of the 12 babies born on Tuesday were boys = 9/12
Divide the numerator and denominator of 9/12 with 3
(9 ÷ 3)/(12 ÷ 3) = 3/4
So, in the simplest form
3/4 of the babies born on Tuesday were boys.

Question 18.
Cristina uses a ruler to measure the length of her math textbook. She says that the book is \(\frac{4}{10}\) meter long. Is her measurement in simplest form? If not, what is the length of the book in simplest form?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Cristiana uses a ruler to measure the length of her math textbook
She says that the book is 4/10meter long
It is not in the simplest form
Divide the numerator and denominator of 4/10 with 2
(4÷ 2)/( 10 ÷ 2) = 2/5
The length of the book in the simplest form = 2/5.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 118

Question 1.
Six out of the 12 members of the school choir are boys. In simplest form, what fraction of the choir is boys?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{6}{12}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{12}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Six out of the 12 members of the school choir are boys = 6/12
To write the simplest form of 6/12, divide the numerator and denominator with 6
Then, (6 ÷ 6)/(12 ÷ 6) = 1/2
In the simplest form, 1/2 of the choir is boys.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Six out of the 12 members of the school choir are boys. In simplest form, what fraction of the choir is boys?
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{6}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{10}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
5/6 is in the simplest form
6/8 simplest form = 3/4
8/10 simplest form = 4/5
2/12 simplest form = 1/6
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 3.
Each of the 23 students in Ms. Evans’ class raised $45 for the school by selling coupon books. How much money did the class raise in all?
Options:
a. $207
b. $225
c. $1,025
d. $1,035

Answer: $1,035

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Each of the 23 students in Ms. Evan’s class raised $45 for the school by selling coupon books
= 23 x $45
= $1,035
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Which pair of numbers below have 4 and 6 as common factors?
Options:
a. 12, 18
b. 20, 24
c. 28, 30
d. 36, 48

Answer: 36, 48

Explanation:
36, 48
Here, 36 = 4 x 9
= 2 x 2 x 3 x 3
48 = 6 x 8
= 2 x 3 x 4 x 2
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Bart uses \(\frac{3}{12}\) cup milk to make muffins. Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{3}{12}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Bart uses 3/12 cup milk to make muffins
Divide the fraction with 3
(3 ÷ 3)/(12 ÷ 3) = 1/4
So, the equivalent fraction for 3/12 = 1/4
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Ashley bought 4 packages of juice boxes. There are 6 juice boxes in each package. She gave 2 juice boxes to each of 3 friends. How many juice boxes does Ashley have left?
Options:
a. 24
b. 22
c. 18
d. 12

Answer: 18

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Ashley bought 4 packages of juice boxes
There are 6 juice boxes in each package = 6 x 4 = 24
She gave 2 juice boxes to each of 3 friends = 2 x 3 = 6 juice boxes
So, 24 – 6 = 18
Total number of juice boxes left with Ashley = 18
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 119

Write the pair of fractions as a pair of fractions with a common denominator.

Question 1.
\(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{3}{4}\)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 5

Explanation:
2/3 and 3/4
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, …
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, …
Common multiple of 3 and 4 is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (2 x 12) ÷( 3 x 12) and ( 3 x 12 ) ÷ ( 4 x 12)
So, common pair of fractions = 8/12 and 9/12

Question 2.
\(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 3/4 and 8/12

Explanation:
1/4 and 2/3
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, …
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, …
Common multiple of 4 and 3 is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (1 x 12) ÷( 4 x 12) and ( 2 x 12 ) ÷ ( 3 x 12)
So, common pair of fractions = 3/12 and 8/12

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 3/10 and 5/10

Explanation:
3/10 and 1/2
List the multiples of 10 = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, ….
List the multiples of 2 = 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, ….
Common multiple of 10 and 2 is 10
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (3 x 10) ÷( 10 x 10) and ( 1 x 10 ) ÷ ( 2 x 10)
So, common pair of fractions = 3/10 and 5/10

Question 4.
\(\frac{3}{5} \text { and } \frac{3}{4}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 12/20 and 15/20

Explanation:
3/5 and 3/4
List the multiples of 5 = 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, ….
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, …
Common multiple of 5 and 4 is 20
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (3 x 20) ÷( 5 x 20) and ( 3 x 20 ) ÷ ( 4 x 20)
So, common pair of fractions = 12/20 and 15/20

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{4} \text { and } \frac{7}{8}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4/8 and 7/8

Explanation:
2/4 and 7/8
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, …
List the multiples of 8 = 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, ….
Common multiple of 4 and 8 is 8
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (2 x 8) ÷( 4 x 8) and ( 7 x 8 ) ÷ ( 8 x 8)
So, common pair of fractions = 4/8 and 7/8

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{5}{12}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 8/12 and 5/12

Explanation:
2/3 and 5/12
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, …
List the multiples of 12 = 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, …
Common multiple of 3 and 12 is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (2 x 12) ÷( 3 x 12) and ( 5 x 12 ) ÷ ( 12 x 12)
So, common pair of fractions = 8/12 and 5/12

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{6}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 3/12 and 2/12

Explanation:
1/4 and 1/6
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, …
List the multiples of 6 = 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, …
Common multiple of 4 and 6 is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
That is, (1 x 12) ÷( 4 x 12) and ( 1 x 12 ) ÷ ( 6 x 12)
So, common pair of fractions = 3/12 and 2/12.

Tell whether the fractions are equivalent. Write = or ≠.

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ≠ \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Explanation:
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/2 with 2
(1 x 2) ÷ (2 x 2) = 2/4
So, 1/2 ≠ 2/5

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:
1/2
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/2 with 3
(1 x 3) ÷ (2 x 3) = 3/6
So, 1/2 = 3/6

Question 10.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) ≠ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
3/4 ≠ 5/6

Question 11.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{10}\) = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
6/10
Divide the numerator and denominator of 6/10 with 2
(6 ÷ 2)/(10 ÷2) = 3/5
So, 6/10 = 3/5

Question 12.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
6/8
Divide the numerator and denominator of 6/8 with 2
(6 ÷2)/(8 ÷2) = 3/4
So, 6/8 = 3/4

Question 13.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) ≠ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
3/4 ≠ 2/3

Question 14.
\(\frac{2}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{10}\) ≠ \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
2/10
Divide the numerator and denominator of 2/10 with 8
(8 ÷ 2)/(10 ÷ 2) = 4/5
So, 2/10 ≠ 4/5

Question 15.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
1/4
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 1/4 with 3
(1 x 3)/(4 x 3) = 3/12
So, 1/4 = 3/12

Question 16.
Adam drew two same size rectangles and divided them into the same number of equal parts. He shaded \(\frac{1}{3}\) of one rectangle and \(\frac{1}{4}\) of other rectangle. What is the least number of parts into which both rectangles could be divided?
_________

Answer: 12 parts

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Adam drew two same size rectangles and divided them into the same number of equal parts
He shaded 1/3 of one rectangle
1/4 of another rectangle
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, …
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, …
A common multiple of 3 and 4 is 12
So, the least number of parts which rectangles could be divided = 12 parts

Question 17.
Mera painted equal sections of her bedroom wall to make a pattern. She painted \(\frac{2}{5}\) of the wall white and \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the wall lavender. Write an equivalent fraction for each using a common denominator.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/2 are 4/10 and 5/10

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Mera painted equal sections of her bedroom wall to make a pattern
She painted 2/5 of the wall white and 1/2 of the wall lavender
List the multiples of 5 = 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, …
List the multiples of 2 = 2 ,4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, …
The common denominator of 2/5 and 1/2 = 10
Multiply the 2/5 and 1/2 with 10
(2 x 10)/(5 x 10) and (1 x 10)/(2 x 10)
4/10 and 5/10
So, common fractions of 2/5 and 1/2 are 4/10 and 5/10.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 120

Question 1.
Which of the following is a common denominator of \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\) ?
Options:
a. 8
b. 9
c. 12
d. 15

Answer: 12

Explanation:
The common denominator of 1/4 and 5/6
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, …
List the multiples of 6 = 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, ….
So, the common denominator of 1/4 and 5/6 is 12
The correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Two fractions have a common denominator of 8. Which of the following could be the two fractions?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2} \text { and } \frac{2}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{2} \text { and } \frac{4}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Two fractions have a common denominator of 8
a. 1/2 and 2/3
List the multiples of 2 = 2, 4, 6, 8,10, ….
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, …
There is no common denominator of 8 for 1/2 and 2/3
b. 1/4 and 1 /2
List the multiples of 2 = 2, 4, 6, 8,10, ….
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, …
Here, the common denominator of 1 /4 and 1 /2 is 8
So, the answer is 1/4 and 1/2
The correct answer is option b.

Question 3.
Which number is 100,000 more than seven hundred two thousand, eighty-three?
Options:
a. 703,083
b. 712,083
c. 730,083
d. 802,083

Answer: 802,083

Explanation:
100,000 + 702,083 = 802,083
The correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Aiden baked 8 dozen muffins. How many total muffins did he bake?
Options:
a. 64
b. 80
c. 96
d. 104

Answer: 96

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Aiden baked 8 dozen muffins
1 dozen = 12
then, 8 dozens = 12 x 8 = 96
So, Aiden baked total 96 muffins.
The correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
On a bulletin board, the principal, Ms. Gomez, put 115 photos of the fourthgrade students in her school. She put the photos in 5 equal rows. How many photos did she put in each row?
Options:
a. 21
b. 23
c. 25
d. 32

Answer: 23

Explanation:
As per the given data,
On a bulletin board, the principal, Ms. Gomez, put 115 photos of the fourth-grade students in her school
She put the photos in 5 equal rows
Then, number of photos in each row = 115/5 = 23
So, Ms. Gomez put photos in each row = 23
The correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Judy uses 12 tiles to make a mosaic. Eight of the tiles are blue. What fraction, in simplest form, represents the tiles that are blue?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{5}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{12}{18}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Judy uses 12 tiles to make a mosaic
Eight of the tiles are blue = 8/12
Divide the numerator and denominator of 8/12 with 4
(8 ÷ 4)/(12 ÷ 4) = 2/3
The simplest form of 8/12 is 2/3
The correct answer is option a.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 121

Question 1.
Miranda is braiding her hair. Then she will attach beads to the braid. She wants \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the beads to be red. If the greatest number of beads that will fit on the braid is 12, what other fractions could represent the part of the beads that are red?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 6

Explanation:
Miranda is braiding her hair. Then she will attach beads to the braid. She wants 1/3 of the beads to be red. If the greatest number of beads that will fit on the braid is 12.
1/3 × 2/2 = 2/6
1/3 × 3/3 = 3/9
1/3 × 4/4 = 4/12

Question 2.
Ms. Groves has trays of paints for students in her art class. Each tray has 5 colors. One of the colors is purple. What fraction of the colors in 20 trays is purple?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
Given,
Ms. Groves has trays of paints for students in her art class.
Each tray has 5 colors.
If you have 20 trays that are 100 colors with 20 being purple. 20/ 100 is 1/5.

Question 3.
Miguel is making an obstacle course for field day. At the end of every sixth of the course, there is a tire. At the end of every third of the course, there is a cone. At the end of every half of the course, there is a hurdle. At which locations of the course will people need to go through more than one obstacle?
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/3, 1/2, 2/3 and final locations

Explanation:
We have three fractions with different denominators: sixths, thirds, and halves.
The first step is to make all the denominators equal for 1/6, 1/3, 1/2.
In this case, we want sixths since LCM(2, 3, 6) = 6
since 1/3 = 2/6, and 1/2 = 3/6. Now we can start solving.
1. There are six tires at the following: 1/6, 2/6, 3/6, 4/6, 5/6, and 6/6.
2. There are three cones at the following (G.C.F.): 2/6 (or 1/3), 4/6 (or 2/3), and 6/6 (or 3/3).
3. There are two hurdles at the following (G.C.F.): 3/6 (or 1/2) and 6/6 (or 2/2).
We look for common numbers.
1. On 2/6, there are two obstacles: a tire and a cone.
2. On 3/6, there are two obstacles: a tire and a hurdle.
3. On 4/6, there are two obstacles: a tire and a cone.
4. At 6/6, there are three obstacles: a tire, cone, and a hurdle.
2/6 = 1/3
3/6 = 1/2
4/6 = 2/3
6/6 = 1
The answers are 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, and 1.

Question 4.
Preston works in a bakery where he puts muffins in boxes. He makes the following table to remind himself how many blueberry muffins should go in each box.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 7
How many blueberry muffins should Preston put in a box with 36 muffins?
_________

Answer: 12 blueberry muffins

Explanation:
Preston works in a bakery where he puts muffins in boxes. He makes the following table to remind himself how many blueberry muffins should go in each box.
So, he had 2 blueberry muffins out of 6 muffins.
2/6 × 2/2 = 4/12. 4 blueberry muffins out of 12 muffins.
2/6 × 4/4 = 8/24. 8 blueberry muffins out of 24 muffins.
2/6 × 6/6 = 12/36. 12 blueberry muffins out of 36 muffins.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 122

Question 1.
A used bookstore will trade 2 of its books for 3 of yours. If Val brings in 18 books to trade, how many books can she get from the store?
Options:
a. 9
b. 12
c. 18
d. 27

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A used bookstore will trade 2 of its books for 3 of yours.
If Val brings in 18 books to trade 2/3 × 6/6 = 12/18, she gets 12 books.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour Naomi stretches her neck; every \(\frac{1}{3}\) hour she stretches her legs; and every \(\frac{1}{6}\) hour she stretches her arms. Which parts of her body will Naomi stretch when \(\frac{2}{3}\) of an hour has passed?
Options:
a. neck and legs
b. neck and arms
c. legs and arms
d. none

Answer: legs and arms

Explanation:
Summing \(\frac{1}{2}\)‘s only gives integer values giving 1, 2, 3, 4…or
integer values +\(\frac{1}{2}\) and 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\), 1 \(\frac{1}{2}\), 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\)…
So neck is excluded
Every \(\frac{1}{3}\): \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Legs will be stretched at \(\frac{2}{3}\) hour
Every \(\frac{1}{6}\): \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)
Divide top and bottom by 2 giving:
(4 ÷ 2)/(6 ÷ 2) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Arms will be stretched at \(\frac{2}{3}\) hour.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 3.
At the beginning of the year, the Wong family car had been driven 14,539 miles. At the end of the year, their car had been driven 21,844 miles. How many miles did the Wong family drive their car during that year?
Options:
a. 6,315 miles
b. 7,295 miles
c. 7,305 miles
d. 36,383 miles

Answer: 7,305 miles

Explanation:
If at the beginning of the year, the Wong family’s car had driven 14539 miles and at the end of the year, it had driven 21844 miles, then subtract 14539 from 21844 to determine the difference between the two values, which will tell you how many miles the Wong family drove their car for during the year.
21844 – 14539 = 7305 miles
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Widget Company made 3,600 widgets in 4 hours. They made the same number of widgets each hour. How many widgets did the company make in one hour?
Options:
a. 80
b. 90
c. 800
d. 900

Answer: 900

Explanation:
3,600 widgets in 4 hours therefore 3,600 / 4 for one hour = 900 widgets 900 widgets in one hour.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Tyler is thinking of a number that is divisible by 2 and by 3. By which of the following numbers must Tyler’s number also be divisible?
Options:
a. 6
b. 8
c. 9
d. 12

Answer: 6

Explanation:
The number 6 is divisible by 2 and by 3.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Jessica drew a circle divided into 8 equal parts. She shaded 6 of the parts. Which fraction is equivalent to the part of the circle that is shaded?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{10}{16}\)
d. \(\frac{12}{18}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Jessica drew a circle divided into 8 equal parts. She shaded 6 of the parts.
6/8 = 3/4
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 123

Compare. Write < or > .

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 8

Answer:
18 < 610
Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core Compare Fractions Using Benchmarks img 20

Question 2.
\(\frac{4}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer:
4/12 < 4/6

Explanation:
4/12 and 4/6
4/12 is less than 1/2
4/6 is greater than 1/2
So, 4/12 < 4/6

Question 3.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer:
2/8 < 1/2

Explanation:
2/8 and 1/2
2/8 is less than 1/2
1/2 is equal to 1/2
So, 2/8 < 1/2

Question 4.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{3}\)

Answer:
3/5 < 3/3

Explanation:
3/5 and 3/3
3/5 is greater than 1/2
3/3 is equal to 1
So, 3/5 < 3/3

Question 5.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{10}\)

Answer:
7/8 > 5/10

Explanation:
7/8 and 5/10
7/8 is greater than 1/2
5/10 is equal to 1/2
So, 5/10 < 7/8

Question 6.
\(\frac{9}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer:
9/12 > 1/3

Explanation:
9/12 and 1/3
9/ 12 is greater than 1/2
1/3 is less than 1/2
1/3 < 9/12

Question 7.
\(\frac{4}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Answer:
4/6 < 7/8

Explanation:
4/6 and 7/8
4/6 is greater than 1/2
7/8 is closer to 1
So, 4/6 < 7/8

Question 8.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer:
2/4 < 2/3

Explanation:
2/4 and 2/3
2/4 is equal to 1/2
2/3 is greater than 1/2
So, 2/4 < 2/3

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: 35 > 14

Explanation:
3/5 and 1/4
3/5 is greater than 1/2
1/4 is less than 1/2
So, 1/4 < 3/5

Question 10.
\(\frac{6}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Answer:
6/10 > 2/5

Explanation:
6/10 and 2/5
6/10 is greater than 1/2
2/5 is less than 1/2
So, 2/5 < 6/10

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Answer:
1/8 < 2/10

Explanation:
1/8 and 2/10
1/8 is less than 1/2
2/10 is less than 1/2 but greater than 1/8
So, 1/8 < 2/10

Question 12.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{12}\)

Answer:
2/3 > 5/12

Explanation:
2/3 and 5/12
2/3 is greater than 1/2
5/12 is less than 1/2
So, 5/12 < 2/3

Question 13.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer:
4/5< 5/6

Explanation:
4/5 and 5/6
4/5 is greater than 1/2
5/6 is greater than 1/2
Common denominator is 30
(4×6)/(5×6) and (5×5)/(6×5)
24/30 and 25/30
24/30 < 25/30
So, 4/5 < 5/6

Question 14.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer:
3/5 < 5/8

Explanation:
3/5 and 5/8
3/5 is greater than 1/2
5/8 is greater than 1/2
Common denominator is 40
(3×8)/(5×8) and (5×5)/(8×5)
24/40 and 25/ 40
24/40 < 25/40
3/5 < 5/8

Question 15.
\(\frac{8}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer:
8/8 > 3/4

Explanation:
8/8 and 3/4
8/8 is equal to 1
3/4 is less than 1
3/4 < 8/8

Question 16.
Erika ran \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile. Maria ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Who ran farther?
__________

Answer: Maria

Explanation:
As per the data,
Erika ran 3/8 mile
Maria ran 3/4 mile
Multiply the numerator and denominator of 3/4 with 2
(3×2)/(4×2) = 6/8
3/8 < 6/8
So, 3/8 < 3/4
So, Maria ran faster than Erika

Question 17.
Carlos finished \(\frac{1}{3}\) of his art project on Monday. Tyler finished \(\frac{1}{2}\) of his art project on Monday. Who finished more of his art project on Monday?
__________

Answer:
Tyler

Explanation:
From the given data,
Carlos finished 1/3 of his art project on Monday
Tyler finished ½ of his art project on Monday
1/3 is less than 1/2
1/2 is equal to 1/2
So, 1/3 < 1/2
Then, Tyler finished more of his work on Monday

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 124

Question 1.
Which symbol makes the statement true?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 9
Options:
a. >
b. <
c. =
d. none

Answer:
a. >

Explanation:
4/6 ? 3/8
By comparing 4/6 with 1/2, 4/6 > 1/2
By comparing 3/8 with 1/2, 3/8 < 1/2
So, 4/6 > 3/8
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
Which of the following fractions is greater than \(\frac{3}{4}\)?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: b. 5/6

Explanation:
From the given data,
By comparing the 3/4 with 1/2, 3/4 > 1/2
Same as above, compare the options with ½
a. 1/4 < 1/2
b. 5/6 > 1/2
c. 3/8 < 1/2
d. 2/3 > 1/2
5/6 and 2/3 are greater than the 1/2
So, compare the 5/6 with 2/3
Then, 5/6 > 2/3
So, 5/6 > 3/4
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 3.
Abigail is putting tiles on a table top. She needs 48 tiles for each of 8 rows. Each row will have 6 white tiles. The rest of the tiles will be purple. How many purple tiles will she need?
Options:
a. 432
b. 384
c. 336
d. 48

Answer:
c. 336

Explanation:
As per the given data
Abigail is putting tiles on a table top
Number of rows = 8
She needs 48 tiles for each of row = 48×8 = 384
Number of white tiles per row = 6×8 = 48
The rest of the tiles will be purple = 384 – 48 =336
So, the total number of purple color tiles = 336
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Each school bus going on the field trip holds 36 students and 4 adults. There are 6 filled buses on the field trip. How many people are going on the field trip?
Options:
a. 216
b. 240
c. 256
d. 360

Answer:
b. 240

Explanation:
From the given data,
Each school bus going on the field trip holds 36 students and 4 adults
There are 6 filled buses on the field trip
6 x (36 + 4) = 6 x 40 = 240
So, the total number of people on the field trip = 240
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Noah wants to display his 72 collector’s flags. He is going to put 6 flags in each row. How many rows of flags will he have in his display?
Options:
a. 12
b. 15
c. 18
d. 21

Answer:
a. 12

Explanation:
As mentioned in the data,
Noah wants to display his 72 collector’s flag
He is going to put 6 flags in each row = 6x = 72
X = 12
So, a total 12 number of rows of flags will have in his display.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Julian wrote this number pattern on the board:
3, 10, 17, 24, 31, 38.
Which of the numbers in Julian’s pattern are composite numbers?
Options:
a. 3, 17, 31
b. 10, 24, 38
c. 10, 17, 38
d. 17, 24, 38

Answer:
b. 10, 24, 38

Explanation:
As per the given information
Julian wrote his number pattern on the board =3, 10, 17, 24, 31, 38
Factors of 3 = 1,3
Factors of 10 = 1,2,5,10
Factors of 17 = 1, 17
Factors of 24 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
Factors of 31 = 1, 31
Factors of 38 = 1, 2, 19, 38
So, the composite number is 10, 24, and 38, which numbers have more than 2 factors.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 125

Compare. Write <, >, or =

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 10
Answer:
1/5 < 2/10

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core Compare Fractions img 26

Question 2.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{10}\)

Answer:
1/5 = 2/10

Explanation:
1/5 and 2/10
Think: 10 is a common denominator
1/5 = (1×2) / (5×2) = 2/10
2/10 = 2/10
So, 1/5 = 2/10

Question 3.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{5}\)

Answer:
2/4 > 2/5

Explanation:
2/4 and 2/5
20 is a common denominator
2/4 = (2×5)/(4×5) = 10/20
2/5 = (2×4)/(5×4) = 8/20
10/20 > 8/20
So, 2/4 > 2/5

Question 4.
\(\frac{3}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{7}{10}\)

Answer:
3/5 < 7/10

Explanation:
3/5 and 7/10
10 is a common denominator
3/5 = (3×2)/(5×2) = 6/10
7/10
6/10 < 7/10
So, 3/5 < 7/10

Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer:
4/12 > 1/6

Explanation:
4/12 and 1/6
12 is a common denominator
4/12
1/6 = (1×2)/(6×2) = 2/12
4/12 > 2/12
So, 4/12 > 1/6

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer:
2/6 = 1/3

Explanation:
2/6 and 1/3
6 is a common denominator
2/6
1/3 = (1×2)/(3×2) = 2/6
So, 2/6 =2/6
So, 2/6 = 1/3

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer:
1/3 < 2/4

Explanation:
1/3 and 2/4
12 is a common denominator
1/3 = (1×4)/(3×4) = 4/12
2/4 = (2×3)/(4×3) = 6/12
4/12 < 6/12
So, 1/3 < 2/4

Question 8.
\(\frac{2}{5}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Answer:
2/5 < 1/2

Explanation:
2/5 and 1/2
10 is a common denominator
2/5 = (2×2)/(5×2) = 4/10
1/2 = (1×5)/(2×5) = 5/10
4/10 < 5/10
So, 2/5 < 1/2

Question 9.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer:
4/8 = 2/4

Explanation:
4/8 and 2/4
8 is a common denominator
4/8
2/4 = (2×2)/(4×2) = 4/8
2/4 = 4/8
So, 4/8 = 2/4

Question 10.
\(\frac{7}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer:
7/12 < 2/4

Explanation:
7/12 and 2/4
12 is a common denominator
7/12
2/4 = (2×3)/(4×3) = 6/12
7/12 < 6/12
So, 7/12 < 2/4

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer:
1/8 < 3/4

Explanation:
1/8 and 3/4
8 is a common denominator
1/8
3/4 = (3×2)/(4×2) = 6/8
1/8 < 6/8
So, 1/8 < 3/4

Question 12.
A recipe uses \(\frac{2}{3}\) of flour and \(\frac{5}{8}\) cup of blueberries. Is there more flour or more blueberries in the recipe?
more _________

Answer: flour

Explanation:
From the given data,
A recipe uses 2/3 of flour and 5/8 cup of blueberries
The common denominator is 24
2/3 = (2×8)/(3×8) = 16/24
5/8 = (5×3)/(8×3) = 15/24
16/24 > 15/24
So, 2/3 > 5/8
So, flour is more in the recipe

Question 13.
Peggy completed \(\frac{5}{6}\) of the math homework and Al completed \(\frac{4}{5}\) of the math homework. Did Peggy or Al complete more of the math homework?
_________

Answer:
Peggy completed more work than Al

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Peggy completed 5/6 of the math homework
A1 completed 4/5 of the math homework
30 is a common denominator
5/6 = (5×5)/(6×5) = 25/30
4/5 = (4×6)/(5×6) =24/30
25/30 > 24/30
So, 5/6 > 4/5
So, Peggy completed more work than Al

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 126

Question 1.
Pedro fills a glass \(\frac{2}{4}\) full with orange juice. Which of the following fractions is greater than \(\frac{2}{4}\)?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{12}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer:
b. 46

Explanation:
46 > 24
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Today Ian wants to run less than \(\frac{7}{12}\) mile. Which of the following distances is less than \(\frac{7}{12}\) mile?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile
b. \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile
c. \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile
d. \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile

Answer:
d. 2/4 mile

Explanation:
2/4 is less than 7/12
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 3.
Ms. Davis traveled 372,645 miles last year on business. What is the value of 6 in 372,645?
Options:
a. 6
b. 60
c. 600
d. 6,000

Answer:
c. 600

Explanation:
Ms. Davis traveled 372, 645 miles last year on business
The value of 6 in 372,645 is 600.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
One section of an auditorium has 12 rows of seats. Each row has 13 seats. What is the total number of seats in that section?
Options:
a. 25
b. 144
c. 156
d. 169

Answer:
c. 156

Explanation:
From the given information
One section of an auditorium has 12 rows of seats
Each row has 13 seats = 13×12 = 156 seats
So, the total number of seats in the auditorium = 156 seats
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Sam has 12 black-and-white photos and 18 color photos. He wants to put the photos in equal rows so each row has either black-and-white photos only or color photos only. In how many rows can Sam arrange the photos?
Options:
a. 1, 2, 3, or 6 rows
b. 1, 3, 6, or 9 rows
c. 1, 2, or 4 rows
d. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 9 rows

Answer:
a. 1, 2, 3, or 6 rows

Explanation:
As per the given information
Sam has 12 black and white photos 18 color photos
He wants to put the photos in equal rows
So each row has either black and white photos only or color photos only
H.C.F of 12 and 18 is 6
Rows of 6.
2 rows of black equal 12.
3 rows of white equals 18.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
The teacher writes \(\frac{10}{12}\) on the board. He asks students to write the fraction in the simplest form. Who writes the correct answer?
Options:
a. JoAnn writes \(\frac{10}{12}\)
b. Karen writes \(\frac{5}{12}\)
c. Lynn writes \(\frac{6}{5}\)
d. Mark writes \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer:
d. Mark writes 56

Explanation:
As per the given data,
The teacher writes 10/12 on the board
He asks students to write the fraction in simplest form
For the simplest form of 10/12, divide the 10/12 with 2
(10÷2)/(12÷2) = 5/6
5/6 is the simplest form of 10/12
So, Mark writes the correct answer.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 127

Write the fractions in order from least to greatest.

Question 1.
\(\frac{5}{8}, \frac{2}{12}, \frac{8}{10}\)
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 11

Answer:
2/12, 5/8, 8/10

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core Compare and Order Fractions img 29

Question 2.
\(\frac{1}{5}, \frac{2}{3}, \frac{5}{8}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
1/5, 5/8, 2/3

Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image4
1/5, 2/3, 5/8
1/5 is closer to 0
2/3 is greater than 1/2
5/8 greater than 1/2
1/5 < 5/8 < 2/3

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{2}{5}, \frac{6}{10}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
2/5, 1/2, 6/10

Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image5
1/2, 2/5, 6/10
1/2 is equal to 1/2
2/5 is less than 1/2
6/10 is greater than 1/2

Question 4.
\(\frac{4}{6}, \frac{7}{12}, \frac{5}{10}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
5/10 < 7/12 < 4/6

Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image6
4/6, 7/12, 5/10
4/6 is closer to 1
7/12 is greater than 1/2
5/10 is equal to 1/2

Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{4}, \frac{3}{6}, \frac{1}{8}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
18 < 14 < 36

Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image7
1/4, 3/6, 1/8
1/4 is less than 1/2
3/6 is equal to 1/2
1/8 is closer to 0

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{8}, \frac{3}{6}, \frac{7}{12}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
1/8 < 7/12 < 3/6

Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image8
1/8, 3/6, 7/12
1/8 is closer to 0
3/6 is equal to 1/2
7/12 is greater than 1/2

Question 7.
\(\frac{8}{100}, \frac{3}{5}, \frac{7}{10}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
8/100 < 3/5 < 7/10

Explanation:

chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image9
8/100, 3/5, 7/10
8/100 is closer to 0
3/5 is greater than 1/2
7/10 is closer to 1

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{4}, \frac{7}{8}, \frac{1}{5}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
15 < 34 < 78
Explanation:
chapter 6 - compare fractions and order fractions- image10
3/4, 7/8, 1/5
3/4 is greater than 1/2
7/8 is closer to 1
1/5 is closer to 0

Question 9.
Amy’s math notebook weighs \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound, her science notebook weighs \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound, and her history notebook weighs \(\frac{3}{4}\) pound. What are the weights in order from lightest to heaviest?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
12 pound, 34 pound, 78 pound

Explanation:
From the given data,
Amy’s math notebook weighs 1/2 pound
Science notebook weighs 7/8 pound
History notebook weighs 3/4 pound
7/8 is closer to 1
3/4 is greater than 1/2
1/2 < 3/4 < 7/8
So, Amy’s math notebook weight < history notebook weight < science notebook

Question 10.
Carl has three picture frames. The thicknesses of the frames are \(\frac{4}{5}\) inch, \(\frac{3}{12}\) inch, and \(\frac{5}{6}\) inch. What are the thicknesses in order from least to greatest?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
3/12 inch, 4/5 inch, 5/6 inch

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Carl has three picture frames
The thickness of the frames are 4/5 inch, 3/12 inch, 5/6 inch
4/5 is greater than 1/2
3/12 is less than 1/2
5/6 is closer to 1
3/12 < 4/5 < 5/6

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 128

Question 1.
Juan’s three math quizzes this week took him \(\frac{1}{3}\) hour, \(\frac{4}{6}\) hour, and \(\frac{1}{5}\) hour to complete. Which list shows the lengths of time in order from least to greatest?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{3} hour, \frac{4}{6} hour, \frac{1}{5} hour\)
b. \(\frac{1}{5} hour, \frac{1}{3} hour, \frac{4}{6} hour\)
c. \(\frac{1}{3} hour, \frac{1}{5} hour, \frac{4}{6} hour\)
d. \(\frac{4}{6} hour, \frac{1}{3} hour, \frac{1}{5} hour\)

Answer:
b. 1/5 hour, 1/3 hour, 4/6 hour

Explanation:
From the given information
Juan’s three math quizzes this week took him 1/3 hour, 4/6 hour, and 1/5 hour
Compare 1/3 and 1/2
1/3 is less than 1/2
4/6 is greater than 1/2
1/5 is closer to 0
1/5 < 1/3 < 4/6
So, Juan’s math quizzes times from least to greatest is 1/5, 1/3, 4/6
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
On three days last week, Maria ran \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile, \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile, and \(\frac{3}{5}\) mile. What are the distances in order from least to greatest?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{4} mile, \frac{7}{8} mile, \frac{3}{5} mile\)
b. \(\frac{3}{5} mile, \frac{3}{4} mile, \frac{7}{8} mile\)
c. \(\frac{7}{8} mile, \frac{3}{4} mile, \frac{3}{5} mile\)
d. \(\frac{7}{8} mile, \frac{3}{5} mile, \frac{3}{4} mile\)

Answer:
b. 3/5 mile, 3/4 mile, 7/8 mile

Explanation:
As per the information
On three days last week, Maria ran 3/4 mile, 7/8 mile, and 3/5 mile
3/4 is greater than 1/2
7/8 is closer to 1
3/5 is greater than 1/2
Compare 3/5 and 3/4
3/4 is greater than 3/5
So, 3/5 < 3/4 < 7/8
Distance from least to greatest is 3/5, 3/4 , 7/8
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 3.
Santiago collects 435 cents in nickels. How many nickels does he collect?
Options:
a. 58
b. 78
c. 85
d. 87

Answer:
d. 87

Explanation:
As per the given data,
Santiago collects 435 cents in nickels
1 nickel worth is 5 cents
Then, nickels per 435 cents = 435/5 = 87
So, Santiago collects 87 nickels.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Lisa has three classes that each last 50 minutes. What is the total number of minutes the three classes last?
Options:
a. 15 minutes
b. 150 minutes
c. 153 minutes
d. 156 minutes

Answer:
b. 150 minutes

Explanation:
From the given data,
Lisa has three classes that each last 50 minutes
The total number of minutes the three classes last = 3×50 =150 minutes.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Some students were asked to write a composite number. Which student did NOT write a composite number?
Options:
a. Alicia wrote 2.
b. Bob wrote 9.
c. Arianna wrote 15.
d. Daniel wrote 21.

Answer:
a. Alicia wrote 2.

Explanation:
As per the information
Some students were asked to write a composite number
a. Alicia wrote 2
Factors of 2 is 1 and 2
b. Bob wrote 9
Factors of 9 is 1, 3, 9
c. Arianna wrote 15
Factors of 15 is 1, 3, 5, 15
d. Daniel wrote 21
Factors of 21 is 1,3,7,21
So, Alicia did not write a composite number.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Mrs. Carmel serves \(\frac{6}{8}\) of a loaf of bread with dinner. Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{6}{8}\) ?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{9}{16}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{3}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: d. 3/4

Explanation:
As per the given information
Mrs. Carmel serves 6/8 of a loaf of bread with dinner
To find the equivalent fraction of 6/8, simplify the 6/8 by dividing with the 2
(6÷2)/(8÷2) = 3/4
So, the equivalent fraction of 6/8 is 3/4
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 129

Lesson 6.1

Tell whether the fractions are equivalent. Write = or ≠.

Question 1.
\(\frac{5}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Divide \(\frac{5}{10}\) by 2
\(\frac{5}{10}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, \(\frac{5}{10}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) ≠ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:
The fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) is not equal to \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Divide \(\frac{6}{8}\) by 2.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So, \(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{7}{12}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{12}\) ≠ \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:
The fraction \(\frac{7}{12}\) is not equal to \(\frac{4}{6}\).

Lesson 6.2

Write two equivalent fractions for each.

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4/6 and 8/12

Explanation:
2/3
(2/3) x (2/2) = 4/6
(2/3) x (4/4) = 8/12
Then, the equivalent fractions of 2/3 = 4/6 and 8/12

Question 6.
\(\frac{5}{10}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/2

Explanation:
\(\frac{5}{10}\) × 2/2 = 10/20
\(\frac{5}{10}\) ÷ 5 = 1/2

Question 7.
\(\frac{4}{12}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 1/3

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{12}\) ÷ 3 = 1/3
\(\frac{4}{12}\) × 3/3 = 4/12

Question 8.
\(\frac{4}{5}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer:
8/10 and 80/100

Explanation:
4/5
(4/5) x (2/2) = 8/10
(4/5) x (20/20) = 80/100
Then, the equivalent fractions of 4/5 = 8/10 and 80/100

Lesson 6.3

Write the fraction in simplest form.

Question 9.
\(\frac{6}{12}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
1/2

Explanation:
6/12 in simplest form
Divide the 6/12 with 6
(6/6)/(12/6) = 1/2
So, the simplest form of 6/12 is 1/2

Question 10.
\(\frac{2}{10}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
1/5

Explanation:
2/10 in simplest form
Divide the 2/10 with 2
(2/2)/(10/2) = 1/5
So, the simplest form of 2/10 is 1/5

Question 11.
\(\frac{4}{6}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
2/3

Explanation:
4/6 in simplest form
Divide the 4/6 with 2
(4/2)/(6/2) = 2/3
So, the simplest form of 4/6 is 2/3

Question 12.
\(\frac{3}{12}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 1/4

Explanation:
3/12 in the simplest form
Divide 3/12 with 3.
3/12 ÷ 3 = 1/4
So the simplest form of \(\frac{3}{12}\) is \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 13.
\(\frac{6}{10}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 3/5

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{10}\) in the simplest form.
Divide the \(\frac{6}{10}\) with 2
\(\frac{6}{10}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Lesson 6.4

Write the pair of fractions as a pair of fractions with a common denominator.

Question 14.
\(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{5}{6}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 8/12 and 10/12

Explanation:
The common denominator of \(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{5}{6}\)
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21,….
List the multiples of 6 = 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, ….
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{5}{6}\) is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, common pair of fractions = 8/12 and 10/12

Question 15.
\(\frac{3}{5} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 6/10 and 5/10

Explanation:
Common denominator of \(\frac{3}{5} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\)
List the multiples of 5 = 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, …..
List the multiples of 2 = 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20….
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{3}{5} \text { and } \frac{1}{2}\) is 10.
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, the common pair of fractions = 6/10 and 5/10.

Question 16.
\(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{5}{12}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 3/12 and 5/12

Explanation:
The common denominator of \(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{5}{12}\)
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, . . .
List the multiples of 12 = 12, 24, 36, 48…
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{1}{4} \text { and } \frac{5}{12}\) is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, common pair of fractions = 3/12 and 5/12.

Question 17.
\(\frac{7}{8} \text { and } \frac{3}{4}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 7/8 and 6/8

Explanation:
Common denominator of \(\frac{7}{8} \text { and } \frac{3}{4}\)
List the multiples of 8 = 8, 16, 24, 32, . . . .
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16,….
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{7}{8} \text { and } \frac{3}{4}\) is 8
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, the common pair of fractions = 7/8 and 6/8

Question 18.
\(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{1}{5}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: \(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{2}{10}\)

Explanation:
Common denominator of \(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{1}{5}\)
List the multiples of 5 = 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, …..
List the multiples of 10 = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 ….
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{1}{5}\) is 10
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, the common pair of fractions = \(\frac{3}{10} \text { and } \frac{2}{10}\)

Question 19.
\(\frac{3}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{3}\)
Type below:
_________

Answer: 9/12 and 4/12

Explanation:
The common denominator of \(\frac{3}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{3}\)
List the multiples of 3 = 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, ….
List the multiples of 4 = 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, . . .
Then, the common denominator of \(\frac{3}{4} \text { and } \frac{1}{3}\) is 12
For the Common pair of fractions, multiply the common denominator with fractions
So, the common pair of fractions = 9/12 and 4/12

Common Core – Fraction Equivalence and Comparison – Page No. 130

Lesson 6.5

Question 1.
Mr. Renner is decorating a bulletin board with groups of shapes. Each group has 3 shapes, and \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the shapes are snowflakes. If Mr. Renner is using 4 groups of shapes, how many snowflakes will he need? Complete the table to find the fraction of the shapes for each number of group that are
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison Common Core - Fraction Equivalence and Comparison img 12
How many snowflake shapes will Mr. Renner use?
_______ snowflakes shapes

Answer: 8 snowflakes shapes

Explanation:
Given,
Mr. Renner is decorating a bulletin board with groups of shapes.
Each group has 3 shapes, and \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the shapes are snowflakes.
There are 4 groups and in every group, there are 2 snowflakes so in total there are 8. because 4 × 2=8
Mr. Renner uses 8 snowflakes shapes.

Question 2.
Nell made a pizza. She cut the pizza into fourths. Then she cut each fourth into four pieces. Nell and her friends ate 6 of the smaller pieces of the pizza.
What fraction of the pizza did Nell and her friends eat?
What fraction of the pizza did Nell and her friends NOT eat?

Answer:
okay so four is slice, and then do it again. the answer is at the bottom,

pizza: 16 pieces
Nell and her friends ate 6 smaller pizza
3/8 is the answer.

Lesson 6.6 – 6.7

Compare. Write <,>, or =.

Question 3.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) is less than \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So, \(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is greater than \(\frac{1}{4}\)
So, \(\frac{6}{8}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\) is greater than \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So, \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{12}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{12}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{12}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac{1}{6}\) and \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Here the numerators are same so we have to compare the denominators.
The denominator with the smallest number will be the greatest fraction.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) is greater than \(\frac{1}{8}\)
So, \(\frac{1}{6}\) > \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{6}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{10}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{10}\) > \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac{3}{10}\) and \(\frac{3}{12}\)
Here the numerators are same so we have to compare the denominators.
The denominator with the smallest number will be the greatest fraction.
Thus \(\frac{3}{10}\) > \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{4}\) = 1
1 is greater than \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Thus \(\frac{7}{8}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Lesson 6.8

Write the fractions in order from least to greatest.

Question 12.
\(\frac{1}{2}, \frac{1}{4}, \frac{5}{8}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: 1/4, 5/8 and 1/2

Explanation:
1/4 × 2/2 = 2/8
5/8 × 1/1 = 5/8
1/2 × 4/4 = 4/8
Compare the numerators of the above fractions.
The numerator with the largest number will be the greatest fraction.
The fraction from least to greatest is 1/4, 5/8 and 1/2

Question 13.
\(\frac{2}{3}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{9}{10}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: 1/6, 2/3 and 9/10

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{9}{10}\)
2/3 × 10/10 = 20/30
1/6 × 5/5 = 5/30
9/10 × 3/3 = 27/30
Compare the numerators of the above fractions.
The numerator with the largest number will be the greatest fraction.
The fraction from least to greatest is 1/6, 2/3 and 9/10.

Question 14.
\(\frac{3}{5}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{3}{8}\)
Type below:
__________

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}, \frac{3}{5}, \frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:
Given the fractions \(\frac{3}{5}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{3}{8}\)
Here the numerators are the same so we have to compare the denominators.
The denominator with the smallest number will be the greatest fraction.
Thus the fractions from least to greatest are \(\frac{3}{8}, \frac{3}{5}, \frac{3}{4}\).

Conclusion:

I think the explained answers provided in this chapter are important for all 4th-grade students. Make sure to share these pdf links with our friends and assist them while practicing mathematical concepts. In case, do you feel anything is missing in Homework Practice FL, you can refer to the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 6 Fraction Equivalence and Comparison. Try solving these chapter problems and enhance your subject knowledge.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions

go-math-grade-3-chapter-9-compare-fractions-answer-key

In Order to attempt the 3rd Grade Exam, you need to have strong fundamentals. Download Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions free of cost and get the homework help you need. Attempt the Mid Chapter Checkpoint Test to know your preparation level within the Chapter. Practice as much as you can using the 3rd Grade Go Math Solution Key and clear the exam with better grades.

3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions

You will have topics like Comparing Fractions with the Same Numerator and Denominators, Equivalent Fractions, Compare and order fractions, and so on. You will not feel the Concept of Comparing Fractions difficult anymore with our HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions. Make the most out of the 3rd Grade Go Math Solution Key Chapter 9 and solve various questions in it and master the subject.

Lesson 1: Compare Fractions 

Lesson 2: Problem Solving • Compare Fractions 

Lesson 3: Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator 

Lesson 4: Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator 

Lesson 5: Compare Fractions 

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 6: Compare and Order Fractions

Lesson 7: Model Equivalent Fractions 

Lesson 9.7 – Page No. 548

Lesson 9: Equivalent Fractions 

Review/ Test

Compare Fractions – Page No. 509

Share and Show

Question 1.
At the park, people can climb a rope ladder to its top. Rosa climbed \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the way up the ladder. Justin climbed \(\frac{2}{6}\) of the way up the ladder. Who climbed higher on the rope ladder?
First, what are you asked to find?
Type below:
____________

Answer: Justin climbed higher on the rope ladder.

Explanation:

Given,
Rosa climbed \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the way up the ladder
Justin climbed \(\frac{2}{6}\) of the way up the ladder
We are asked to find who climbed higher on the rope ladder
By comparing the denominators we can say that Justin Climbed higher than Rosa on the rope ladder.

Question 2.
Then, model and compare the fractions.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 9 Answer Key Compare fractions solution img_1

Question 3.
Last, find the greater fraction.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Explanation:

When comparing fractions such as \(\frac{2}{8}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\), you could also convert the fractions (if necessary) so they have the same denominator and then compare which numerator is larger.

Question 4.
___________ climbed higher on the rope ladder

Answer: Justin climbed higher on the rope ladder.

Question 5.
What if Cara also tried the rope ladder and climbed \(\frac{2}{4}\) of the way up? Who climbed highest on the rope ladder: Rosa, Justin, or Cara? Explain how you know.
___________

Answer: If Cara also tried the rope ladder and climbed \(\frac{2}{4}\) of the way up then Cara would be climbed highest on the rope ladder.
Because comparing fractions \(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\) Cara climbed high among the three. The fraction \(\frac{2}{4}\) is the greater than other 2 fractions. So by seeing this we can say that Cara climbed hhighest on the rope ladder.

Compare Fractions – Page No. 510

Use the table for 4–5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions img 1

Question 1.
Suri is spreading jam on 8 biscuits for breakfast. The table shows the fraction of biscuits spread with each jam flavor. Which flavor did Suri use on the most biscuits?
___________

Answer: Raspberry

Explanation:

The above table shows the fraction of jam frosted on the biscuits.
First, check the denominators to compare the fractions.
The denominators are the same. So, Compare with the numerators. The numerator of Raspberry is larger than other two flavors. So, Suri used Raspberry flavor on the most biscuits.

Question 2.
What’s the Question? The answer is strawberry
Type below:
___________

Answer:

Suri is spreading jam on 8 biscuits for breakfast. The table shows the fraction of biscuits spread with each jam flavor. She frosted \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the biscuits with peach jam, \(\frac{4}{8}\) with raspberry jam, and \(\frac{1}{8}\) with strawberry jam. Which flavor of jam did Suri use least on the biscuits?

Question 3.
Suppose Suri had also used plum jam on the biscuits. She frosted \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the biscuits with peach jam, \(\frac{1}{4}\) with raspberry jam, \(\frac{1}{8}\) with strawberry jam, and \(\frac{1}{8}\) with plum jam. Which flavor of jam did Suri use on the most biscuits?
___________

Answer: Peach

Explanation:

The fraction of peach jam is greater than raspberry jam, strawberry jam, and plum jam.
So, the answer is the peach jam.

Question 4.
Ms. Gordon has many snack bar recipes. One recipe uses \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup oatmeal, \(\frac{1}{4}\) vcup of milk, and \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup flour. Which ingredient will Ms. Gordon use the most of?
___________

Answer: flour

\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\)
So, by comparing fractions we can say that Ms. Gordon use the most of flour for snack bar recipes.

Question 5.
Rick lives \(\frac{4}{6}\) mile from school. Noah lives \(\frac{3}{6}\) mile from school. Use the fractions and symbols to show which distance is longer.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions img 2
\(\frac{4}{6}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

First of all, compare the denominators. If the denominators are the same then check the numerators.
Here 4 is greater than 3. So, \(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Problem Solving Compare Fractions – Page No. 511

Solve.

Question 1.
Luis skates \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile from his home to school. Isabella skates \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile to get to school. Who skates farther?
Think: Use fraction strips to act it out.
Luis

Answer: Luis

Explanation:

Given,
Luis skates \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile from his home to school.
Isabella skates \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile to get to school.
To find Who stakes farther we have to compare the fractions.
\(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The numerator of both the fractions is the same and the denominators are different.
So, first, make the denominators equal.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{8}{12}\)
\(\frac{2}{4}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{6}{12}\)
Now denominators are same.
Compare fractions \(\frac{8}{12}\) and \(\frac{6}{12}\)
8 is greater than 6. So, \(\frac{8}{12}\) > \(\frac{6}{12}\)
Therefore Luis Skates farther to school.

Question 2.
Sandra makes a pizza. She puts mushrooms on \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the pizza. She adds green peppers to \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the pizza. Which topping covers more of the pizza?
___________

Answer: Green Peppers

Explanation:

Sandra makes a pizza. She puts mushrooms on \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the pizza.
She adds green peppers to \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the pizza.
Compare the fractions of mushrooms and green peppers.
\(\frac{2}{8}\), \(\frac{5}{8}\)
The denominators are the same. So compare the numerators.
2 is lesser than 5. Thus \(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Thus Green Peppers covers more of the pizza.

Question 3.
The jars of paint in the art room have different amounts of paint. The green paint jar is \(\frac{4}{8}\) full. The purple paint jar is \(\frac{4}{6}\) full. Which paint jar is less full?
The _______ paint jar

Answer: The green paint jar

Explanation:

The jars of paint in the art room have different amounts of paint.
The green paint jar is \(\frac{4}{8}\) full.
The purple paint jar is \(\frac{4}{6}\) full.
The numerators of both the fractions are the same.
Compare the denominators of green paint and purple paint jars.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
Therefore \(\frac{4}{8}\) < \(\frac{4}{6}\)
Thus green paint jar is less full.

Question 4.
Jan has a recipe for bread. She uses \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of flour and \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup of chopped onion. Which ingredient does she use more of, flour or onion?
_______

Answer: Flour

Explanation:

Jan has a recipe for bread. She uses \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of flour and \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup of chopped onion.
Compare the fraction of flour and onion.
The denominators of both the fractions are the same. So, compare the numerators.
2 is greater than 1. Thus \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\)
That means Jan used more flour for bread.

Question 5.
Edward walked \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile from his home to the park. Then he walked \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile from the park to the library. Which distance is shorter?
_______

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile

Explanation:

Edward walked \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile from his home to the park.
Then he walked \(\frac{2}{4}\) mile from the park to the library.
To find the shorter distance we have to compare the fractions of Edward from home to park and from park to library.
\(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The denominators of both the fractions are the same.
So compare the numerators.
3 is greater than 2. Thus \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)
Thus the distance from the park to the library is shorter.

Problem Solving Compare Fractions – Page No. 512

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Ali and Jonah collect seashells in identical buckets. When they are finished, Ali’s bucket is \(\frac{2}{6}\) full and Jonah’s bucket is \(\frac{3}{6}\) full. Which of the following correctly compares the fractions?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

Given that, Ali and Jonah collect seashells in identical buckets.
When they are finished, Ali’s bucket is \(\frac{2}{6}\) full and Jonah’s bucket is \(\frac{3}{6}\) full
Compare fractions \(\frac{2}{6}\) and \(\frac{3}{6}\)
We observe that the denominators are the same. So, compare the numerators of both the fractions.
3 is greater than 2.
Thus \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
So, the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
Rosa paints a wall in her bedroom. She puts green paint on \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the wall and blue paint on \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the wall. Which of the following correctly compares the fractions?
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{8}\) > \(\frac{5}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

Given:
Rosa paints a wall in her bedroom.
She puts green paint on \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the wall and blue paint on \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the wall.
The denominators are same so compare the numerators of both the fractions.
5 is greater than 3. So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Dan divides a pie into eighths. How many equal parts are there?
Options:
a. 3
b. 6
c. 8
d. 10

Answer: 8

Dan divides a pie into eighths.
Eighths are nothing but the name of the parts. Eighths is equal to 8.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Which shows equal parts?
a. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 3
b. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 4
c. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 5
d. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 6

Answer:

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 4

Explanation:

Among all the figures circle is equally divided into 6 parts.
So, the answer is option B.

Question 5.
Charles places 30 pictures on his bulletin board in 6 equal rows. How many pictures are in each row?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 5

Explanation:

Given, Charles places 30 pictures on his bulletin board in 6 equal rows.
Number of pictures in each row = x
x × 6 = 30
x = 30/6 = 5
Therefore there are 5 pictures in each row.

Question 6.
Which of the following describes a pattern in the table?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Problem Solving Compare Fractions img 7
Options:
a. Add 1.
b. Add 4.
c. Multiply by 2.
d. Multiply by 5.

Answer: Multiply by 5

Explanation:

The above table shows that number of tables is multiplied by 5.
So, the correct answer is option D.

Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator – Page No. 517

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator img 8

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators of the two fractions are the same.
Here the denominators of \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{1}{4}\) are same. So compare the numerators.
3 is greater than 1.
Therefore, \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{0}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{0}{6}\)

Explanation:

First, check whether the denominators of the two fractions are the same or not.
After that compare the numerators.
3 > 0
So, \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{0}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:

First, compare fractions with the same denominators.
If both are the same, then compare the numerators of both fractions.
The denominators and numerators are same for \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Explanation:

Compare the denominators of the fractions
The denominators of \(\frac{5}{6}\) and \(\frac{6}{6}\)
Now compare the numerators of the fractions.
5 < 6
So, \(\frac{5}{6}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are the same or not.
The denominator of \(\frac{7}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\) are same.
Now check the numerators 7 > 5.
Thus \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Compare the denominators of 2 fractions.
Here numerators and denominators are the same.
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{8}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{0}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{8}\) > \(\frac{0}{8}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are the same. Now compare the numerators of two fractions.
8 > 0.
So, \(\frac{8}{8}\) > \(\frac{0}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

When the denominators are the same, the whole is divided into the same size pieces. Now compare the numerators of both the fractions.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are the same. If same that means the whole is divided into the same size pieces.
The denominators of \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\)
Now compare the numerators of both fractions.
3 is greater than 2.
Thus \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are the same. If same that means the whole is divided into the same size pieces.
The denominators of \(\frac{1}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Now check the numerators 1 is less than 2.
Therefore, \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{0}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{0}{2}\)

Explanation:

When the denominators are same, the whole is divided into the same pieces. Now check the numerators.
1 is greater than 0
Thus \(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{0}{2}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

Check the denominators of two fractions. If both are equal then compare the numerators.
The numerators of both fractions are equal.
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Question 13.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare fractions with the same denominators.
The denominators of \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{4}{4}\) are same.
Compare numerators 1 and 4.
1 is less than 4.
Thus \(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Question 14.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are the same or not.
Now compare the numerators.
5 is greater than 4.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) > \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Question 15.
\(\frac{4}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators of both the fractions are the same or not.
The denominators of \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{6}{6}\) are the same.
Now compare the numerators 4 and 6.
4 is lesser than 6. So, \(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Problem Solving

Question 16.
Ben mowed \(\frac{5}{6}\) of his lawn in one hour. John mowed \(\frac{4}{6}\) of his lawn in one hour. Who mowed less of his lawn in one hour?
___________

Answer: John

Explanation:

Given,
Ben mowed \(\frac{5}{6}\) of his lawn in one hour.
John mowed \(\frac{4}{6}\) of his lawn in one hour.
Compare the denominators of both the fractions.
As the denominators are the same compare the numerators of the fractions.
4 is less than 5.
\(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{5}{6}\)
So, John mowed less of his lawn in one hour.

Question 17.
Darcy baked 8 muffins. She put blueberries in \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the muffins. She put raspberries in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the muffins. Did more muffins have blueberries or raspberries?
___________

Answer: Blueberries

Explanation:

Given,
Darcy baked 8 muffins.
She put blueberries in \(\frac{5}{8}\) of the muffins.
She put raspberries in \(\frac{3}{8}\) of the muffins.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) is greater than \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus there are more blueberries in muffins.

Compare Fractions with the Same Denominator – Page No. 518

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Julia paints \(\frac{2}{6}\) of a wall in her room white. She paints more of the wall green. Which fraction could show the part of the wall that is green?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{0}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

First compare the denominators of given options and then compare the numerators
A. \(\frac{3}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)
B. \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)
C. \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
D. \(\frac{0}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)
So, the answer is option C.

Question 2.
Liam is comparing fraction circles. Which of the following statements is true?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{4}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:

Check whether the denominators are same. If both are same then compare the numerators.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Option A is the correct answer.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mr. Edwards buys 2 new knobs for each of his kitchen cabinets. The kitchen has 9 cabinets. How many knobs does he buy?
Options:
a. 20
b. 18
c. 16
d. 12

Answer: 18

Explanation:

Given, Mr. Edwards buys 2 new knobs for each of his kitchen cabinets.
The kitchen has 9 cabinets.
Number of knobs he buys = x
x = 9 × 2 = 18
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Allie builds a new bookcase with 8 shelves. She can put 30 books on each shelf. How many books can the bookcase hold?
Options:
a. 30
b. 38
c. 240
d. 300

Answer: 240

Explanation:

Given that Allie builds a new bookcase with 8 shelves.
She can put 30 books on each shelf.
Let the number of books can the bookcase hold = y
y = 30 × 8
y = 240
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
The Good Morning Café has 28 customers for breakfast. There are 4 people sitting at each table. How many tables are filled?
Options:
a. 8
b. 7
c. 6
d. 4

Answer: 7

Explanation:

The Good Morning Café has 28 customers for breakfast.
There are 4 people sitting at each table.
Number of tables be t
t ×4 = 28
t = 28/4 = 4
Thus the number of tables filled = 7

Question 6.
Ella wants to use the Commutative Property of Multiplication to help find the product 5 × 4. Which number sentence can she use?
Options:
a. 5 + 4 = 10
b. 5 × 5 = 25
c. 5 − 4 = 1
d. 4 × 5 = 20

Answer: 4 × 5 = 20

Explanation:

According to the commutative property of multiplication, changing the order of the numbers we are multiplying, does not change the product.
a × b = b × a
5 × 4 = 4 × 5 = 20
So, the correct answer is option D.

Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator – Page No. 523

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator img 9

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

When comparing fractions with the same numerator, the fraction with the smaller denominator is greater.
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The numerators of both the fractions are the same. So compare the denominators.
The fraction with the smaller denominator is greater
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Compare \(\frac{2}{8}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\)
When comparing fractions with the same numerator, the fraction with the smaller denominator is greater.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{3}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{3}{6}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The numerators are the same and the denominators are different.
The number with the smallest number will be the greatest.
So, \(\frac{3}{6}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

When comparing fractions with the same numerator, the fraction with the smaller denominator is greater.
2 is greater than 6.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:

We observe that numerators are the same and the denominators are different.
The fraction with the smallest number will be the greatest.
So, \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:

The numerators and denominators of both the fractions are the same.
So, \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{6}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{6}{8}\) and \(\frac{6}{6}\)
We observe that numerators are the same and the denominators are different.
So, \(\frac{6}{8}\) < \(\frac{6}{6}\)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Javier is buying food in the lunch line. The tray of salad plates is \(\frac{3}{8}\) full. The tray of fruit plates is \(\frac{3}{4}\) full. Which tray is more full?
The tray of ______ plates

Answer: The fruit plate tray

Explanation:

Javier is buying food in the lunch line. The tray of salad plates is \(\frac{3}{8}\) full.
The tray of fruit plates is \(\frac{3}{4}\) full.
Compare the fraction of salad plates and fruit plates.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The numerators are same. So compare the denominators.
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) <\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus the fruit plate tray is more full than salad plate tray.

Question 11.
Rachel bought some buttons. Of the buttons, \(\frac{2}{4}\) are yellow and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are red. Rachel bought more of which color buttons?
More _______ buttons

Answer: Yellow

Explanation:

Rachel bought some buttons. Of the buttons, \(\frac{2}{4}\) are yellow and \(\frac{2}{8}\) are red.
Compare \(\frac{2}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\)
The fraction with the smaller denominator is greater.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) >\(\frac{2}{8}\)
Therefore there are more yellow buttons.

Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator – Page No. 524

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which symbol makes the statement true?
\(\frac{3}{4}\) O \(\frac{3}{8}\)
a. >
b. <
c. =
d. none

Answer: >

Explanation:

In the above statement, the fractions are of the same numerators. So, we need to check the denominators.
The number with the highest number will be the least fraction.
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Which symbol makes the statement true?
\(\frac{2}{4}\) O \(\frac{2}{3}\)
a. >
b. <
c. =
d. none

Answer: <

Explanation:

The fractions are of the same numerators. So, we need to see the denominators.
The number with the highest number will be the least fraction.
So, \(\frac{2}{4}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)
So, the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Anita divided a circle into 6 equal parts and shaded 1 of the parts. Which fraction names the part she shaded?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{5}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{1}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

Given that, Anita divided a circle into 6 equal parts and shaded 1 of the parts.
So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
Which fraction names the shaded part of the rectangle?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions with the Same Numerator img 10
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{6}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Explanation:

The rectangle is divided into 8 equal parts. Out of 8 two parts are shaded.
So, the fraction name of the shaded part is \(\frac{2}{8}\)
The correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Chip worked at the animal shelter for 6 hours each week for several weeks. He worked for a total of 42 hours. Which of the following can be used to find the number of weeks Chip worked at the animal shelter?
Options:
a. 6 + 42
b. 42 − 6
c. 42 ÷ 6
d. 42 × 6

Answer: 42 ÷ 6

Explanation:

Chip worked at the animal shelter for 6 hours each week for several weeks.
Number of hours he worked = 42 hours
Number of weeks he worked at the animal shelter = x
x × 6 = 42
x = 42 ÷ 6
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Mr. Jackson has 20 quarters. If he gives 4 quarters to each of his children, how many children does Mr. Jackson have?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer: 5

Explanation:

Given, Mr. Jackson has 20 quarters.
If he gives 4 quarters to each of his children
Number of children Mr. Jackson have = y
y × 4 = 20
y = 20/4 = 5
Therefore, Mr. Jackson has 5 children.

Compare Fractions – Page No. 529

Compare. Write <, >, or =. Write the strategy you used.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions img 11

Answer: Same Numerator

Question 2.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) ______ \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Missing pieces

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The numerators and denominators are different here.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{16}{24}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{21}{24}\)
16 is less than 24.
So, \(\frac{16}{24}\) < \(\frac{21}{24}\)
That means \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

The Denominator is the same here. So compare the numerators.
\(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{1}{4}\)
3 is greater than 1.
Thus \(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Name a fraction that is less than or greater than the given fraction. Draw to justify your answer.

Question 4.
greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Chapter 9 Answer Key Grade 3 Compare fractions image_5

\(\frac{2}{3}\) is greater than \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 5.
less than \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Solution Key Grade 3 Chapter 9 solution image_6

\(\frac{2}{4}\) is less than \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Problem Solving

Question 6.
At the third-grade party, two groups each had their own pizza. The blue group ate \(\frac{7}{8}\) pizza. The green group ate \(\frac{2}{8}\) pizza. Which group ate more of their pizza?
The _______ group

Answer: The blue group

Explanation:

Given,
At the third-grade party, two groups each had their own pizza.
The blue group ate \(\frac{7}{8}\) pizza.
The green group ate \(\frac{2}{8}\) pizza.
Compare the fractions of the blue group and green group.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\)
The denominators are the same here. So compare the numerators.
The numerator with the greatest number will be the greatest fraction.
Therefore \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)
So, the blue group ate more pizza.

Question 7.
Ben and Antonio both take the same bus to school. Ben’s ride is \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile. Antonio’s ride is \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile. Who has a longer bus ride?
___________

Answer: Ben

Explanation:

Ben and Antonio both take the same bus to school.
Ben’s ride is \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile.
Antonio’s ride is \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile.
Compare the fractions \(\frac{7}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Make the denominators equal to compare the fractions.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{24}{32}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{28}{32}\)
\(\frac{28}{32}\) > \(\frac{24}{32}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Thus Ben has longer bus ride.

Compare Fractions – Page No. 530

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which statement is correct?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{7}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{7}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:

A. \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Here the numerator of one fraction is greater than the numerator of the other fraction.
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) is not greater than \(\frac{7}{8}\)
B. \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Here the numerator of one fraction is greater than the numerator of the other fraction.
2 is less than 7.
Thus the statement \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\) is true.
Option B is the answer.

Question 2.
Which symbol makes the statement true?
\(\frac{2}{4}\) O \(\frac{2}{6}\)
a. >
b. <
c. =
d. none

Answer: >

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{4}\) & \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The numerator of both the fractions are the same.
So we need to compare the denominators.
The denominator with the greater number will the smallest fraction.
Therefore, \(\frac{2}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Cam, Stella, and Rose each picked 40 apples. They put all their apples in one crate. How many apples are in the crate?
Options:
a. 40
b. 43
c. 120
d. 123

Answer: 120

Explanation:

Given that, Cam, Stella, and Rose each picked 40 apples.
They put all their apples in one crate.
That means each person picked 40 apples = 40 + 40 + 40 = 120 apples
Therefore there are 120 apples in the crate.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Each shape is 1 whole. Which fraction is represented by the shaded part of the model?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare Fractions img 12
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{1}\)

Answer: \(\frac{8}{4}\)

Explanation:

From the figure we observe that there are 2 squares.
Each square is divided into 4 equal parts.
Total number of shaded parts = 4
So, the fraction of 1 whole shaded part is \(\frac{8}{4}\)
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Which related multiplication fact can you use to find
16 ÷ ■ = 2?
Options:
a. 4 × 4 = 16
b. 8 × 2 = 16
c. 8 × 1 = 8
d. 4 × 2 = 8

Answer: 8 × 2 = 16

Explanation:

16 ÷ ■ = 2
■ = 16/2 = 8
So, the related multiplication fact of 16 ÷ ■ = 2 is 8 × 2 = 16.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 6,
What is the unknown factor?
9 × ■ = 36
Options:
a. 7
b. 6
c. 4
d. 3

Answer: 4

Explanation:

■ is the unknown factor
9 × ■ = 36
■ = 36/9 = 4
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 531

Concepts and Skills

Question 1.
When two fractions refer to the same whole, explain why the fraction with a lesser denominator has larger pieces than the fraction with a greater denominator.
Type below:
___________

Answer: If two fractions have the same numerator but different denominators the fraction with greater denominator is smaller.
Example: Let us consider an apple that is divided into equal parts.
If the apple is divided among 2 people.
Then each get \(\frac{1}{2}\) part of the apple.
If the apple is divided among 4 people.
Then each get \(\frac{1}{4}\) part of an apple.
Hence, in the first case, people get more amount of apple than the second.
Hence, if as a whole the denominator is less the fraction is greater.

Question 2.
When two fractions refer to the same whole and have the same denominators, explain why you can compare only the numerators
Type below:
___________

Answer: If the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
Example:
Let us consider a pizza which is cut into 4 parts.
One person ate 3 pieces then the fraction is \(\frac{3}{4}\)
And the other person ate 1 piece then the fraction is \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Now compare the fractions \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
First person ate 2 pieces more than the second person.
Hence the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction.

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{4}\)
In this case the numerators are same and the denominators are different.
We know that the two fractions have the same numerator but different denominators the fraction with greater denominator is smaller.
So, \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{1}{8}\) & \(\frac{1}{8}\)
The numerators and the denominators are same here. Thus these are the equivalent fractions.
Hence, \(\frac{1}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{8}\) & \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The numerators are same and denominators are different.
As we know the denominators with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{4}{2}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:

Compare both the fractions \(\frac{4}{2}\) and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
In this case, the denominators are the same but the numerators are different.
So compare the numerators.
4 is greater than 1.
Thus \(\frac{4}{2}\) > \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

Comparing the fractions \(\frac{7}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{8}\)
The denominators are same but the numerators are different.
We know that the denominators are the same, then the fraction with the greater numerator is the greater fraction. The fraction with the lesser numerator is the lesser fraction.
7 is greater than 3.
So, \(\frac{7}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{5}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\)
In this case the numerators and the denominators are different.
So, we have to make the denominators equal.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{15}{18}\)
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{6}{6}\) = \(\frac{12}{18}\)
Now the denominators are same. So compare the numerators 15 is greater than 12.
So, \(\frac{15}{18}\) > \(\frac{12}{18}\)
That means \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

The denominators are the same. So compare the fractions with the numerators.
2 is less than 3.
So, \(\frac{2}{4}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 10.
\(\frac{6}{6}\) ______ \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{6}\) > \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Explanation:

Here the numerators are same but the denominators are different.
We know that denominators with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
Therefore, \(\frac{6}{6}\) > \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Question 11.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ______ \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The numerators and denominators are different.
So, we have to make the denominators equal.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{24}{32}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{28}{32}\)
Now the denominators are equal. So compare the numerators of both the fractions.
\(\frac{24}{32}\) < \(\frac{28}{32}\)
Therefore \(\frac{3}{4}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Name a fraction that is less than or greater than the given fraction. Draw to justify your answer.

Question 12.
greater than \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)
\(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Question 13.
less than \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 532

Question 14.
Two walls in Tiffany’s room are the same size. Tiffany paints \(\frac{1}{4}\) of one wall. Roberto paints \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the other wall. Who painted a greater amount in Tiffany’s room?
___________

Answer: Tiffany

Explanation:

Given that, Two walls in Tiffany’s room are the same size. Tiffany paints \(\frac{1}{4}\) of one wall.
Roberto paints \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the other wall.
The numerators are the same and the denominators are different here.
So, we have to make the denominators same.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{8}{32}\)
\(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{32}\)
Now compare the fractions \(\frac{8}{32}\) and \(\frac{4}{32}\)
8 is greater than 4.
\(\frac{8}{32}\) > \(\frac{4}{32}\)
Therefore, Tiffany painted greater amount than Roberto.

Question 15.
Matthew ran \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile during track practice. Pablo ran \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile. Who ran farther?
___________

Answer: Pablo

Explanation:

Given,
Matthew ran \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile during track practice.
Pablo ran \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile.
Compare the fractions \(\frac{5}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Numerators are the same and denominators are different.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
Thus \(\frac{5}{8}\) < \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Pablo ran farther than Matthew.

Question 16.
Mallory bought 6 roses for her mother. Two-sixths of the roses are red and \(\frac{4}{6}\) is yellow. Did Mallory buy fewer red roses or yellow roses?
___________

Answer: Red Roses

Explanation:

Mallory bought 6 roses for her mother.
Two-sixths of the roses are red and \(\frac{4}{6}\) is yellow.
Compare fractions \(\frac{4}{6}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The denominators of both the fractions are the same and numerators are different.
4 is greater than 2. So, \(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Therefore Mallory buys fewer red roses.

Question 17.
Lani used \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of raisins, \(\frac{3}{8}\) cup of cranberries, and \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of oatmeal to bake cookies. Which ingredient did Lani use the least amount of?
___________

Answer: Cranberries

Explanation:

Lani used \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of raisins, \(\frac{3}{8}\) cup of cranberries, and \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of oatmeal to bake cookies.
Compare the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The numerators and denominators are different in this case.
The denominator with the highest number will be the smallest fraction.
Therefore Lani used the least amount of cranberries.

Compare and Order Fractions – Page No. 537

Write the fractions in order from greatest to least.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare and Order Fractions img 13

Question 2.
\(\frac{2}{8}\), \(\frac{5}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{5}{8}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:

The denominators of three fractions are same. So compare the numerators of the fractions.
5 is greater than 2 is greater than 1.
Thus the order of the fraction is \(\frac{5}{8}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

Compare the three fractions \(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We observe that the numerators of the fractions are same and the denominators are different.
We know that the denominators with the smallest number will be the greater fraction.
Therefore, \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Explanation:

Comparing the fractions \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\)
The numerators are the same but the denominators are different.
We know that the denominators with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
3 is greater than 6 is greater than 8.
So, the order of the fraction is \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Write the fractions in order from least to greatest.

Question 5.
\(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{4}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Explanation:

The denominators are same but the numerators are different.
So compare the numerators of three fractions.
2 < 3 < 4
\(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{4}{4}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{4}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{4}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{4}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The denominators are same but the numerators are different.
So compare the numerators of the three fractions.
The order of fractions from least to greatest is \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{4}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{7}{8}\), \(\frac{0}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{0}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{7}{8}\), \(\frac{0}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)
The numerators of the fractions are different. But the denominators are same.
0 < 3 < 7
The order from least to greatest is \(\frac{0}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

Compare the fractions \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)
The numerators are same but the denominators of the three fractions are different.
So, compare the denominators.
The denominators with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
So, the order of fractions from least to greatest is \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Problem Solving

Question 9.
Mr. Jackson ran \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile on Monday. He ran \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile on Wednesday and \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile on Friday. On which day did Mr. Jackson run the shortest distance?
On ___________

Answer: Wednesday

Explanation:

Mr. Jackson ran \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile on Monday.
He ran \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile on Wednesday and \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile on Friday
The denominators of the fractions are the same. So, compare the numerators.
Compare to all Mr. Jackson run the shortest distance on Wednesday.

Question 10.
Delia has three pieces of ribbon. Her red ribbon is \(\frac{2}{4}\) foot long. Her green ribbon is \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot long. Her yellow ribbon is \(\frac{2}{6}\) foot long. She wants to use the longest piece for a project. Which color ribbon should Delia use?
The _______ ribbon

Answer: Green

Explanation:

Delia has three pieces of ribbon. Her red ribbon is \(\frac{2}{4}\) foot long.
Her green ribbon is \(\frac{2}{3}\) foot long.
Her yellow ribbon is \(\frac{2}{6}\) foot long.
Compare the fractions to know which color should Delia use.
\(\frac{2}{4}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The numerators of the three fractions are the same but the denominators are different.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) is longest among all.
so, the answer is Green ribbon.

Compare and Order Fractions – Page No. 538

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which list orders the fractions from least to greatest?
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:

When the numerators are the same, think about the denominators to compare and order fractions.
The denominator with the greatest number is the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{1}{6}\) < \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So, the order is \(\frac{1}{8}\), \(\frac{1}{6}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 2.
Which list orders the fractions from greatest to least?
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

If the numerators are the same, think about the denominators to compare and order fractions.
The denominators with the smallest number will be the greatest fraction.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Thus the fractions from greatest to least are \(\frac{3}{4}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What fraction of the group of cars is shaded?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Compare and Order Fractions img 14
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
c. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:

Total number of cars = 8
Number of shaded cars among those 8 cars = 3
So, the fraction of the shaded cars = 3/8
Thus the answer is option A.

Question 4.
Wendy has 6 pieces of fruit. Of these, 2 pieces are bananas. What fraction of Wendy’s fruit is bananas?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

Given that, Wendy has 6 pieces of fruit.
Of these, 2 pieces are bananas.
The fraction of Wendy’s fruit is 2/6
Thus the correct answer is \(\frac{2}{6}\) i.e., option A.

Question 5.
Toby collects data and makes a bar graph about his classmates’ pets. He finds that 9 classmates have dogs, 2 classmates have fish, 6 classmates have cats, and 3 classmates have gerbils. Which pet will have the longest bar on the bar graph?
Options:
a. dog
b. fish
c. cat
d. gerbil

Answer: dog

Explanation:

Number of classmates who have dogs = 9
Number of classmates who have fish = 2
Number of classmates who have cats = 6
Number of classmates who have gerbils = 3
So, dogs will have the longest bar on the bar graph.

Question 6.
The number sentence is an example of which multiplication property?
6 × 7 = (6 × 5) + (6 × 2)
Options:
a. Associative
b. Commutative
c. Distributive
d. Identity

Answer: Distributive

Explanation:

6 × 7 = (6 × 5) + (6 × 2)
Here 7 is distributed into 5 + 2
According to the distributive property, multiplying the sum of two or more addends by a number will give the same result as multiplying each addend individually by the number and then adding the products together.
So, the answer is option C.

Model Equivalent Fractions – Page No. 543

Shade the model. Then divide the pieces to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 15

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Explanation:

The figure shows that there are 8 equal parts and 4 of them are shaded.
The Fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Thus, \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 16
\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{■}{6}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 3 Key Chapter 9 Review solution image 7

There are 6 equal parts in which 2 parts are shaded. Now the fraction for the shaded part is \(\frac{2}{6}\)

\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Use the number line to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 17
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{■}{4}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

HMH Go Math Answer Grade 3 Chapter 9 Review Solution image_8

The fraction \(\frac{1}{2}\) and \(\frac{2}{4}\) lies on the same point.

Therefore, \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 18
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{■}{8}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Go Math Grade 3 Compare fractions key review solution image_9

The above figure shows that the point \(\frac{6}{8}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\) lies on the same point on the number line.

Thus \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Mike says that \(\frac{3}{3}\) of his fraction model is shaded blue. Ryan says that \(\frac{6}{6}\) of the same model is shaded blue. Are the two fractions equivalent? If so, what is another equivalent fraction?
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{2}\)

Explanation:

Mike says that \(\frac{3}{3}\) of his fraction model is shaded blue.
Ryan says that \(\frac{6}{6}\) of the same model is shaded blue.
The two fractions are equivalent.
\(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{6}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\)

Question 6.
Brett shaded \(\frac{4}{8}\) of a sheet of notebook paper. Aisha says he shaded \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the paper. Are the two fractions equivalent? If so, what is another equivalent fraction?
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)
So, the two fractions are equivalent.
The another equivalent fraction is \(\frac{2}{4}\).

Model Equivalent Fractions – Page No. 544

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Find the fraction equivalent to \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 19
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{2}\)
b. \(\frac{4}{6}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Compare fractions review solution image_10

\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Question 2.
Find the fraction equivalent to \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 20
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Explanation:

The fugure shows that the \(\frac{1}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{8}\) lies on the same point.
So, the equivalent fraction of \(\frac{1}{4}\) is \(\frac{2}{8}\)
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Eric practiced piano and guitar for a total of 8 hours this week. He practiced the piano for \(\frac{1}{4}\) of that time. How many hours did Eric practice the piano this week?
Options:
a. 6 hours
b. 4 hours
c. 3 hours
d. 2 hours

Answer: 2 hours

Explanation:

Eric practiced piano and guitar for a total of 8 hours this week.
He practiced the piano for \(\frac{1}{4}\) of that time.
To find how many hours did Eric practice the piano this week
You need to multiply the total number of hours with a fraction of the time he practiced.
8 ×  \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 hours
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Kylee bought a pack of 12 cookies. One-third of the cookies are peanut butter. How many of the cookies in the pack are peanut butter?
Options:
a. 9
b. 6
c. 4
d. 3

Answer: 4

Explanation:

Given,
Kylee bought a pack of 12 cookies.
One-third of the cookies are peanut butter.
To find the number of cookies in the pack is peanut butter.
Multiply number of cookies with a fraction of cookies are peanut butter
12 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 4
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
There are 56 students going to the game. The coach puts 7 students in each van. Which number sentence can be used to find how many vans are needed to take the students to the game?
Options:
a. 56 + 7 = ■
b. ■ + 7 = 56
c. ■ × 7 = 56
d. 56 − 7 = ■

Answer: ■ × 7 = 56

Explanation:

There are 56 students going to the game.
The coach puts 7 students in each van.
Let ■ be the number of vans
56 ÷ 7 = ■
■ × 7 = 56
■ = 8
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Which number sentence can be used to describe the picture?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Model Equivalent Fractions img 21
Options:
a. 2 + 4 = 6
b. 4 − 2 = 2
c. 4 × 1 = 4
d. 8 ÷ 2 = 4

Answer: 8 ÷ 2 = 4

Explanation:

Number of counters = 8
Number of equal groups = 4
Number in each group = 2
The division equation is 8 ÷ 2 = 4
So, the answer is option D.

Lesson 9.7 – Page No. 548

Question 13.
Christy bought 8 muffins. She chose 2 apple, 2 banana, and 4 blueberry. She and her family ate the apple and banana muffins for breakfast. What fraction of the muffins did they eat? Write an equivalent fraction. Draw a picture.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Explanation:

Given:
Christy bought 8 muffins.
She chose 2 apple, 2 banana, and 4 blueberries. She and her family ate the apple and banana muffins for breakfast.
They had 2 apples and 2 banana muffins for their breakfast.
Only 4 blueberries are left out of 8 muffins.
The fraction of the muffins they ate = \(\frac{4}{8}\) or \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
After dinner, \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the cornbread is left. Suppose 4 friends want to share it equally. What fraction names how much of the whole pan of corn bread each friend will get? Use the model on the right. Explain your answer.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Lesson 9.7 img 22
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

To know the fraction of the whole pan of cornbread that each friend get. I divide each third into 2 equal pieces to get 4 pieces in all.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{6}\)
That means each friend gets \(\frac{1}{6}\) of cornbread of whole pan.

Question 15.
There are 16 people having lunch. Each person wants \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a pizza. How many whole pizzas are needed? Draw a picture to show your answer.
______ pizzas

Answer: 4 pizzas

Explanation:

Given that, There are 16 people having lunch.
Each person wants \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a pizza.
Multiply the total number of people with fraction of each pizza for one person.
= 16 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 16/4 = 4
Therefore 4 pizzas are needed for 16 people.

Question 16.
Lucy has 5 oatmeal bars, each cut in half. What fraction names all of the oatmeal bar halves?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Lesson 9.7 img 23
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{10}{2}\)

Explanation:

Lucy has 5 oatmeal bars, each cut in half.
Total number of oatmeal bars = 5
5 oatmeal bars are divided into halves = 5 + 5 = 10
So. the fraction name for all of the oatmeal bar halves = \(\frac{10}{2}\)

Question 16.
What if Lucy cuts each part of the oatmeal bar into 2 equal pieces to share with friends? What fraction names all of the oatmeal bar pieces now?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{10}{2}\)

Explanation:

The above figure shows that there are 5 oatmeal bars.
And each oatmeal bar is divided into halves = 5 × 2 = 10
The fraction for the all of the oatmeal bar halves = \(\frac{10}{2}\)
The equivalent fraction of \(\frac{10}{2}\) is \(\frac{20}{4}\)

Question 17.
Mr. Peters made a pizza. There is \(\frac{4}{8}\) of the pizza left over. Select the fractions that are equivalent to the part of the pizza that is left over. Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Lesson 9.7 img 24
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

Mr. Peters made a pizza. There is \(\frac{4}{8}\) of the pizza left over.
The equivalent fraction of \(\frac{4}{8}\) is \(\frac{2}{4}\)
So, the correct answer is option C.

Equivalent Fractions – Page No. 549

Each shape is 1 whole. Shade the model to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 25

Answer: \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

The circle is divided into 6 equal groups. Each group is \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the whole circle.
There are 3 shaded parts in the circle.
So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{3}{6}\).
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 26
\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{■}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Explanation:

The square is divided into 8 equal parts. Each group is \(\frac{1}{8}\) of the whole square.
There are 6 shaded parts in the square.
Thus the fraction of the shaded part is 6/8
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Circle equal groups to find the equivalent fraction.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 27
\(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{■}{2}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:

Rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts. The fraction of each group is 1/4.
There are 2 shaded parts out of 4 = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
latex]\frac{2}{4}[/latex] = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 4
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 28
\(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{■}{3}\)
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

The figure shows that the rectangle is divided into 6 equal parts and 4 are shaded among them.
The fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{4}{6}\)
We can also write it as \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus, \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Problem Solving

Question 5.
May painted 4 out of 8 equal parts of a poster board blue. Jared painted 2 out of 4 equal parts of a same-size poster board red. Write fractions to show which part of the poster board each person painted.
Type below:
____________

Answer: May \(\frac{4}{8}\); Jared \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:

Given that, May painted 4 out of 8 equal parts of a poster board blue.
4 parts are shaded out of 8 parts. So, the fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{4}{8}\)
Jared painted 2 out of 4 equal parts of a same-size poster board red.
The fraction of the shaded part is \(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 6.
Are the fractions equivalent? Draw a model to explain.
____________

Answer: Yes

Equivalent Fractions – Page No. 550

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{6}{8}\)?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 29
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 9 Answer Key Review solution_1

\(\frac{6}{8}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{1}{3}\) ?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 30
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{2}{8}\)
c. \(\frac{2}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Explanation:

Go Math Grade 3 Key Chapter 9 Review solution image_4

\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which number sentence is shown by the array?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Equivalent Fractions img 31
Options:
a. 8 − 2 = 6
b. 8 × 1 = 8
c. 2 + 8 = 10
d. 16 ÷ 2 = 8

Answer: 16 ÷ 2 = 8

Explanation:

Number of counters = 16
Number of rows = 2
Divide Number of counters by number of rows
= 16 ÷ 2 = 8
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Cody put 4 plates on the table. He put 1 apple on each plate. Which number sentence can be used to find the total number of apples on the table?
Options:
a. 4 + 1 = 5
b. 4 − 1 = 3
c. 4 × 1 = 4
d. 4 ÷ 2 = 2

Answer: 4 × 1 = 4

Explanation:

Cody put 4 plates on the table.
He put 1 apple on each plate.
The total number of apples on each table = 4 × 1 = 4
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Which number sentence is a related fact to 7 × 3 = 21?
Options:
a. 7 + 3 = 10
b. 7 − 3 = 4
c. 7 × 2 = 14
d. 21 ÷ 3 = 7

Answer: 21 ÷ 3 = 7

Explanation:

The related division fact of 7 × 3 = 21 is 21 ÷ 3 = 7
The correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Find the quotient.
4)\(\bar{3 6}\)
Options:
a. 9
b. 8
c. 7
d. 6

Answer: 9

Explanation:

36 ÷ 4 = 9
4 divides 36 nine times. So the quotient is 9.
So, the correct answer is option A.

Review/Test – Page No. 551

Question 1.
Alexa and Rose read books that have the same number of pages. Alexa’s book is divided into 8 equal chapters. Rose’s book is divided into 6 equal chapters. Each girl has read 3 chapters of her book.
Write a fraction to describe what part of the book each girl read. Then tell who read more pages. Explain.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: Rose read more pages than Alexa

Explanation:

Given that,
Alexa and Rose read books that have the same number of pages.
Alexa’s book is divided into 8 equal chapters.
Rose’s book is divided into 6 equal chapters.
Each girl has read 3 chapters of her book.
The fraction of Alexa’s book = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
The fraction of Rose’s book = \(\frac{3}{6}\)
Now, compare the fractions to find who read more pages.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) & \(\frac{3}{6}\)
The numerators of the two fractions are the same. So compare the denominators.
The denominator of the greater number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{6}\)
By this, we can say that Rose read more pages than Alexa.

Question 2.
David, Maria, and Simone are shading same-sized index cards for a science project. David shaded \(\frac{2}{4}\) of his index card. Maria shaded \(\frac{2}{8}\) of her index card and Simone shaded \(\frac{2}{6}\) of her index card.
For 2a–2d, choose Yes or No to indicate whether the comparisons are correct.
a. \(\frac{2}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

\(\frac{2}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\)
The denominators with the smallest number will be the greatest fraction.
Thus the statement \(\frac{2}{4}\) > \(\frac{2}{8}\) is true.

Question 2.
b. \(\frac{2}{8}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

\(\frac{2}{8}\) > \(\frac{2}{6}\)
The numerators are same so compare the denominators.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{2}{6}\)
Thus the statement is false.

Question 2.
c. \(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{4}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes

Explanation:

\(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The numerators are same so compare the denominators.
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
\(\frac{2}{6}\) < \(\frac{2}{4}\)
Thus the statement is correct.

Question 2.
d. \(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:

\(\frac{2}{8}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The numerators and denominators are different.
So, \(\frac{2}{8}\) is not equal to \(\frac{2}{4}\)
The statement is false.

Question 3.
Dan and Miguel are working on the same homework assignment. Dan has finished \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the assignment. Miguel has finished \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the assignment. Which statement is correct? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. Miguel has completed the entire assignment.
b. Dan has not completed the entire assignment.
c. Miguel has finished more of the assignment than Dan.
d. Dan and Miguel have completed equal parts of the assignment.

Answer: B & C are the correct statements.

Explanation:

Given, Dan and Miguel are working on the same homework assignment.
Dan has finished \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the assignment.
Miguel has finished \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the assignment.
A. Miguel has completed the entire assignment.
Miguel has finished \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the assignment. So the statement is false.
B. Dan has not completed the entire assignment.
Dan has finished \(\frac{1}{4}\) of the assignment. So the statement is true.
C. Miguel has finished more of the assignment than Dan.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) > \(\frac{1}{4}\)
So, the statement is true.
D. Dan and Miguel have completed equal parts of the assignment.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is not equal to \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Thus the statement is false.
So the correct answer is B & C.

Review/Test – Page No. 552

Question 4.
Bryan cut two peaches that were the same size for lunch. He cut one peach into fourths and the other into sixths. Bryan ate \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the first peach. His brother ate \(\frac{5}{6}\) of the second peach. Who ate more peach? Explain the strategy you used to solve the problem.
___________

Answer: Bryan’s brother

Explanation:

Given that,
Bryan cut two peaches that were the same size for lunch.
He cut one peach into fourths and the other into sixths.
Bryan ate \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the first peach.
His brother ate \(\frac{5}{6}\) of the second peach.
Compare the fractions \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{5}{6}\)
The numerators and denominators are different.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{6}{6}\) = \(\frac{18}{24}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\) × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{15}{24}\)
\(\frac{15}{24}\) < \(\frac{18}{24}\)
By this we can say that Bryan’s brother ate more peach.

Question 5.
A nature center offers 2 guided walks. The morning walk is \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile. The evening walk is \(\frac{3}{6}\) mile. Which walk is shorter? Explain how you can use the model to find the answer.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 32
___________

Answer: Evening walk

Explanation:

Given, The morning walk is \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile
The evening walk is \(\frac{3}{6}\) mile.
The shorter among both is \(\frac{3}{6}\) i.e, evening walk

HMH Go math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 9 Review solution image_3

\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{3}{6}\)

Question 6.
Chun lives \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile from school. Gail lives \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile from school. Use the fractions and symbols to show which distance is longer.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 33
\(\frac{□}{□}\) mile

Answer: \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:

Given,
Chun lives \(\frac{3}{8}\) mile from school.
Gail lives \(\frac{5}{8}\) mile from school.
Denominators are the same so we have to compare the numerators.
3 is less than 5. \(\frac{3}{8}\) < \(\frac{5}{8}\)

Review/Test – Page No. 553

Question 7.
Mrs. Reed baked four pans of lasagna for a family party. Use the rectangles to represent the pans.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 34
Part A
Draw lines to show how Mrs. Reed could cut one pan of lasagna into thirds, one into fourths, one into sixths, and one into eighths.
Type below:
___________

Answer:

Mrs. Reed could cut one pan of lasagna into thirds:

Go Math Solution Key Grade 3 Chapter 9 Review solution image_ 2a

Mrs. Reed could cut one pan of lasagna into fourths:

Compare fractions Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Review solution Image_ 2b

Mrs. Reed could cut one pan of lasagna into sixths:

HMH Go Math Key Grade 3 Chapter 9 Review Solution Image_2c

Mrs. Reed could cut one pan of lasagna into eighths:

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 9 Key Review Solution Image_2d

Question 7.
Part B
At the end of the dinner, equivalent amounts of lasagna in two pans were left. Use the models to show the lasagna that might have been left over. Write two pairs of equivalent fractions to represent the models.
Type below:
___________

Answer:

Answer Key for Go Math Grade chapter 9 Review solution image_2e

\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{2}{6}\)

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 9 key review solution image_2f

\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\)

Question 8.
Tom rode his horse for \(\frac{4}{6}\) mile. Liz rode her horse for an equal distance. What is an equivalent fraction that describes how far Liz rode? Use the models to show your work.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 35
\(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{4}{6}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:

The above figure shows that the fraction of the first figure \(\frac{4}{6}\) is equal to the fraction of the second figure i.e., \(\frac{2}{3}\).

Question 9.
Avery prepares 2 equal-size oranges for the bats at the zoo. One dish has \(\frac{3}{8}\) of an orange. Another dish has \(\frac{1}{4}\) of an orange. Which dish has more orange? Show your work. \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: First, we need to find an equivalent fraction to \(\frac{1}{4}\) so it would have the same denominator as \(\frac{3}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\) – equivalent fractions
Now we can compare the fractions:
\(\frac{2}{8}\) < \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Therefore \(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{3}{8}\)
So, the answer is \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Review/Test – Page No. 554

Question 10.
Jenna painted \(\frac{1}{8}\)of one side of a fence. Mark painted \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the other side of the same fence. Use >, =, or < to compare the parts that they painted.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ______ \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:

Jenna painted \(\frac{1}{8}\)of one side of a fence.
Mark painted \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the other side of the same fence.
The numerators of both fractions are the same. So compare the denominators.
\(\frac{1}{8}\) & \(\frac{1}{6}\)
The denominator with the greatest number will be the smallest fraction.
So, \(\frac{1}{8}\) < \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
Bill used \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup of raisins and \(\frac{2}{3}\) cup of banana chips to make a snack. For 11a–11d, select True or False for each comparison.
a. \(\frac{1}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{3}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

The denominators are the same here. So check the numerators.
1 is less than 2.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) > \(\frac{2}{3}\)
The statement is false.

Question 11.
b. \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: False

Explanation:

The denominators and numerators are not equal in this equation.
So, the statement is false.

Question 11.
c. \(\frac{1}{3}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The denominators of both the fractions are the same.
Compare the numerators. 1 is less than 2.
So, \(\frac{1}{3}\) < \(\frac{2}{3}\).
The statement is true.

Question 11.
d. \(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\)
i. True
ii. False

Answer: True

Explanation:

The denominators of both the fractions are the same.
Compare the numerators. 2 is greater than 1.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) > \(\frac{1}{3}\)
The statement is true.

Question 12.
Jorge, Lynne, and Crosby meet at the playground. Jorge lives \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile from the playground. Lynne lives \(\frac{4}{6}\) mile from the playground. Crosby lives \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile from the playground.
Part A
Who lives closer to the playground, Jorge or Lynne?
Explain how you know.
_____

Answer: Lynne

Explanation:

Jorge lives \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile from the playground.
Lynne lives \(\frac{4}{6}\) mile from the playground.
The denominators are the same. So, compare the numerators.
5 is greater than 4. So, \(\frac{5}{6}\) > \(\frac{4}{6}\)
Therefore, Lynne lives closer to the playground.

Question 12.
Part B
Who lives closer to the playground, Jorge or Crosby?
Explain how you know.
_____

Answer: Jorge

Explanation:

Jorge lives \(\frac{5}{6}\) mile from the playground.
Crosby lives \(\frac{7}{8}\) mile from the playground.
Compare the fraction of the both Jorge and Crosby.
\(\frac{5}{6}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{40}{48}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{6}{6}\) = \(\frac{42}{48}\)
\(\frac{40}{48}\) < \(\frac{42}{48}\)
Therefore, Jorge lives closer to the playground.

Review/Test – Page No. 555

Question 13.
Ming needs \(\frac{1}{2}\) pint of red paint for an art project. He has 6 jars that have the following amounts of red paint in them. He wants to use only 1 jar of paint. Mark all of the jars of paints that Ming could use.
Options:
a. \(\frac{2}{3}\) pint
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\) pint
c. \(\frac{4}{6}\) pint
d. \(\frac{3}{4}\) pint
e. \(\frac{3}{8}\) pint
f. \(\frac{2}{6}\) pint

Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\) pint, \(\frac{3}{4}\) pint, \(\frac{4}{6}\) pint

Explanation:

We have to find all the jars that have an amount of paint greater than \(\frac{1}{2}\)
A. \(\frac{2}{3}\) pint > \(\frac{1}{2}\)
B. \(\frac{1}{4}\) pint < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
C. \(\frac{4}{6}\) pint > \(\frac{1}{2}\)
D. \(\frac{3}{4}\) pint < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
E. \(\frac{3}{8}\) pint < \(\frac{1}{2}\)
F. \(\frac{2}{6}\) pint < \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
There are 12 people having lunch. Each person wants \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a sub sandwich. How many whole sub sandwiches are needed? Use the models to show your answer.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 36
______ sub sandwiches

Answer: 4 sub sandwiches

Explanation:

Given that, There are 12 people having lunch.
Each person wants \(\frac{1}{3}\) of a sub sandwich.
Multiply the number of people with Each person wants of a sub sandwich.
12 × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
3 divides 12 four times. So, the answer is 4 sub sandwiches.

Question 15.
Mavis mixed \(\frac{2}{4}\) quart of apple juice with \(\frac{1}{2}\) quart of cranberry juice. Compare the fractions. Choose the symbol that makes the statement true.
\(\frac{2}{4}\) Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 37 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
______

Answer:  \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 16.
Pat has three pieces of fabric that measure \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\), and \(\frac{2}{6}\) yards long. Write the lengths in order from least to greatest.
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{2}{6}\), \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:

The denominators of \(\frac{3}{6}\), \(\frac{5}{6}\), and \(\frac{2}{6}\) are same. So, Compare the numerators 2 < 3, 5

Review/Test – Page No. 556

Question 17.
Cora measures the heights of three plants. Draw a line to match each height on the left to the word on the right that describes its place in the order of heights.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 38
Type below:
___________

Answer:

Chapter 9 Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Review solution image_1

Explanation:

\(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)
\(\frac{4}{8}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\)
\(\frac{4}{6}\) > \(\frac{4}{8}\)
The numerators are same. So, compare the denominators. The greatest fraction will have the lesser denominator.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) < \(\frac{4}{6}\) < \(\frac{4}{4}\).

Question 18.
Danielle drew a model to show equivalent fractions.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 39
Use the model to complete the number sentence.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\) = \(\frac{□}{□}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Total number of boxes are 4 and each are grouped into 2 = 8
Out of 4 boxes 2 boxes are shaded = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
\(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Next out of 8 grouped squares 4 are shaded = \(\frac{4}{8}\)
\(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore the equivalent fractions are \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)

Question 19.
Floyd caught a fish that weighed \(\frac{2}{3}\) pound. Kira caught a fish that weighed \(\frac{7}{8}\) pound. Whose fish weighed more? Explain the strategy you used to solve the problem.
_____

Answer: Kira

Explanation:

We need to find equivalent fractions with the same denominator:
So Make the denominators of \(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{7}{8}\) equal.
\(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{8}{8}\) = \(\frac{16}{24}\)
\(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{3}{3}\) = \(\frac{21}{24}\)
\(\frac{16}{24}\) < \(\frac{21}{24}\)
Therefore \(\frac{2}{3}\) < \(\frac{7}{8}\)

Question 20.
Sam went for a ride on a sailboat. The ride lasted \(\frac{3}{4}\) hour.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Review/Test img 40
What fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{3}{4}\)?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Explanation:

Total number of boxes are 4 and each is grouped into 2 = 8
Out of 4 boxes 3 boxes are shaded = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Next out of 8 grouped squares 6 are shaded = \(\frac{6}{8}\)
Thus the fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{6}{8}\)

Conclusion

Learn the Go Math Answer Key for Grade 3 Chapter 9 Compare Fractions provided and improve your math as well as problem-solvingskills. You can acheieve greater heights and fall in love with Math with our Go Math Grade 3 Ch 9 Compare Fractions. To solve more such similar kinds of questions access Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 9 Compare Fractions Extra Practice

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure

go-math-grade-5-chapter-10-convert-units-of-measure-answer-key

Students can get Simple and Easy Tricks to Solve the Problems on Convert Units of Measure from Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure. Utilize the Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key to score better grades and stand out from the crowd. Download the Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure free of cost and become a pro in the concepts underlying. Unlike other sources available out there we have mentioned the Solutions for all the Problems related to Converting Units of Measurement.

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure

You can use the HMH Go Math Solution Key Grade Chapter 10 to get Answers for all the Problems in Chapter Test, Review Test, Cumulative Practice, etc. Convert Units of Measure has topics related to Customary Length, Weight, Customary Capacity, Metric Measure, etc. Thus Students are Advised to click on the below available links to find solutions along with the step by step explanation for the problems.

Chapter 10 – Lesson 1: Customary Length

Chapter 10 – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity 

Chapter 10 – Lesson 3: Weight

Chapter 10 – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement

Chapter 10 – Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Chapter 10 – Lesson 5: Metric Measures

Chapter 10 – Lesson 6: Problem Solving • Customary and Metric Conversions

Chapter 10 – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time

Chapter 10 – Review/Test

Share and Show – Lesson 1: Customary Length – Page No. 587

Convert.

Question 1.
2 mi = ______ yd

Answer: 3520 yards

Explanation:
Am changing the smaller unit into the larger unit.
We know that,
1 mile = 1760 yards
2 miles = 2 × 1760 yards = 3520 yards
Thus 2 miles = 3520 yards

Question 2.
6 yd = ______ ft

Answer: 18 feet

Explanation:
Am changing the smaller unit into the larger unit.
We know that,
1 yard = 3 feet
6 yards = 6 × 3 feet = 18 feet
6 yd = 18 ft.

Question 3.
90 in. = ______ ft ______ in.

Answer: 7 feet 6 in.
Am changing the larger unit into the smaller unit.
Convert inches to feet
1 feet = 12 inches
90 inches = 84 inches + 6 inches
84/12 = 7 feet
Thus 90 in. = 7 ft 6 in.

On Your Own

Convert.

Question 4.
57 ft = ______ yd

Answer: 19 yard

Explanation:
Convert the smaller unit to the larger unit.
We know that
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
57 × 1/3 = 19
Thus 57 feet = 19 yards
57 ft = 19 yd

Question 5.
13 ft = ______ in.

Answer: 156 inches

Explanation:
1 feet = 12 inches
13 feet = 13 × 12 inches = 156 inches
13 ft = 156 in.

Question 6.
240 in. = ______ ft

Answer: 20 feet

Explanation:
Convert the smaller unit to the larger unit.
1 feet = 12 inches
1 inch = 1/12 feet
240 inches = 240 × 1/12 feet = 20 feet
240 in. = 20 ft

Question 7.
6 mi = ______ ft

Answer: 31680 feet

Explanation:
1 mile = 5280 feet
6 miles = 6 × 5280 feet = 31680 feet
Thus 6 mi. = 31680 ft.

Question 8.
96 ft = ______ yd

Answer: 32 yard

Explanation:
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 1/3 yard
96 feet = 96 × 1/3 yard = 32 yard
96 feet = 32 yard

Question 9.
75 in. = ______ ft ______ in

Answer: 6 feet 3 inches

Explanation:
1 feet = 12 inches
1 inch = 1/12 feet
75 inches = 75 × 1/12 feet = 6 feet + 3 inches
75 in. = 6 ft. 3 in.

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 10.
60 in. = ■ ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 5 feet

Explanation:
Convert inches into feet
1 feet = 12 inches
■ be the unknown number.
60 in = ■ ft
60 inches × 1/12 = 5 feet
60 in = 5 feet

Question 11.
■ ft = 7 yd 1 ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 22 feet

Explanation:
■ ft = 7 yd 1 ft
1 yard = 3 feet
7 yard = 7 × 3 feet = 21 feet
21 ft + 1 ft = 22ft
■ = 22 feet

Question 12.
4 mi = ■ yd
■ = ______ yd

Answer: 7040 yard

Explanation:
We know that,
1 mile = 1760 yard
4 miles = 4 × 1760 yard = 7040 yard
4 mi. = 7040 yard

Question 13.
125 in. = ■ ft ■ in.
125 in. = ______ ft ______ in.

Answer: 10 ft 5 in.

Explanation:
Convert inches to feet.
12 inches = 1 feet
1 inch = 1/12 feet
120 × 1/12 = 10 feet
125 inches = 10 feet + 5 inches
Thus, 125 in. = 10 ft 5 in.

Question 14.
46 ft = ■ yd ■ ft
46 ft = ______ yd ______ ft

Answer: 15 yd 1 ft

Explanation:
We know that,
Converting the Larger unit into the smaller units
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
46 feet = 1/3 × 46 = 15 yard + 1 feet
Thus 46 ft = 15 yd 1 ft

Question 15.
42 yd 2 ft = ■ ft
■ = ______ ft

Answer: 128 feet

Explanation:
Converting larger unit into the smaller units
We know that,
1 yard = 3 feet
42 yard = 42 × 3 feet = 126 feet
42 yd 2 ft = 126 + 2 = 128 feet
Thus ■ = 128 ft
42 yd 2 ft = 128 ft

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 16.
8 ft ______ 3 yd

Answer: 8 ft < 3 yd

Explanation:
1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
8 is less than 9
Thus, 8 ft < 3 yd

Question 17.
2 mi ______ 10,500 ft

Answer: 2 mi > 10,500 ft

Explanation:
1 mile = 5280 feet
2 miles = 2 × 5280 = 10,560 feet
10,560 ft is greater than 10,500 feet
Thus, 2 mi > 10,500 ft

Question 18.
108 in. ______ 166 in.

Answer: 108 in. < 166 in.

Explanation:
108 is less than 166
Therefore, 108 in. < 166 in.

Problem Solving – Lesson 1: Customary Length – Page No. 588

Question 19.
Javon is helping his dad build a tree house. He has a piece of trim that is 13 feet long. How many pieces can Javon cut that are 1 yard long? How much of a yard will he have left over?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 1: Customary Length img 1
Type below:
__________

Answer: 4 pieces, 4 yard 1 foot long

Explanation:

Javon is helping his dad build a tree house. He has a piece of trim that is 13 feet long.
Converting from feet into yards
We know that,
1 foot = 1/3 yard
13 feet = 12 feet + 1 foot
13 feet = 4 yard 1 foot
Javon can cut into 4 pieces.

Question 20.
Test Prep Katy’s driveway is 120 feet long. How many yards long is Katy’s driveway?
Options:
a. 60 yards
b. 40 yards
c. 20 yards
d. 10 yards

Answer: 40 yards

Explanation:
Katy’s driveway is 120 feet long.
Converting from feet into yards
We know that,
1 yard = 3 feet
1 foot = 1/3 yard
120 feet = 120 × 1/3 yard = 40 yard
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Compare and Contrast

When you compare and contrast, you tell how two or more things are alike and different. You can compare and contrast information in a table. Complete the table below. Use the table to answer the questions.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 1: Customary Length img 2

Question 21.
How are the items in the table alike? How are they different?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The table is the conversion from yards to feet and inches.
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-10-Convert-Units-of-Measure-img-2

Question 22.
What do you notice about the relationship between the number of larger units and the number of smaller units as the length increases?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Converting the larger unit to the smaller unit.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 12 × 3 = 36 inches
1 yard = 36 inches
The above table shows the conversion from yards to inches.

Share and Show – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 593

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 3

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete the statements and convert 3 quarts to pints.
a. 1 quart = ______ pints

Answer: 2 pints

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
We know that,
1 quart = 2 pints

Question 1.
b. 1 quart is ______ than 1 pint.

Answer: bigger

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
The unit quarts is greater than pints
1 quart is bigger than 1 pint.

Question 1.
c. 3 qt __________ pt in 1 qt = ____ pt
Type below:
__________

Answer: 6 pint

Explanation:
Convert the unit quarts to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
3 quarts = 3 × 2 pints = 6 pints
So, 3 qt 6 pt in 1 qt = 2 pt

Convert.

Question 2.
3 gal = ______ pt

Answer: 24 pt

Explanation:

Convert gallons to pints
We know that,
1 gallon = 8 pints
3 gallons = 3 × 8 pints = 24 pints
Thus 3 gal = 24 pt

Question 3.
5 qt = ______ pt

Answer: 10 pt

Explanation:

Convert the unit quarts to pints
1 quart = 2 pints
5 quarts = 5 × 2 pints = 10 pints
So, 5 qt = 10 pt

Question 4.
6 qt = ______ c

Answer: 24 c

Explanation:
Convert quarts to cups
1 quart = 4 cups
6 quarts = 6 × 4 cups = 24 cups
6 qt = 24 c

On Your Own – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 594

Convert.

Question 5.
38 c = ______ pt

Answer: 19 pt

Explanation:
Convert pints to cups
1 pint = 2 cups
1 cup = 1/2 pint
38 c = 1/2 × 38 = 19 pints
Thus, 38 c = 19 pints

Question 6.
36 qt = ______ gal

Answer: 9 gal

Explanation:
Convert Quarts to Gal
1 gal = 4 quarts
1 quart = 1/4 gallon
36 quarts = 1/4 × 36 = 9 gallons
So, 36 qt = 9 gal

Question 7.
104 fl oz = ______ c

Answer: 13 c

Explanation:
Convert fluid ounces to cups
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
1 fluid ounces = 1/8 cups
104 fluid ounces = 1/8 × 104 = 13 cups
104 fl oz = 13 c

Question 8.
4 qt = ______ c

Answer: 16 c

Explanation:

Convert quarts to cups
1 quart = 4 cups
4 quarts = 4 × 4 cups
4 quarts = 16 cups
4 qt = 4 c

Question 9.
7 gal = ______ pt

Answer: 56 pt

Explanation:
Convert gallon to pints
1 gal = 8 pints
7 gallons = 7 × 8 pints = 56 pints
7 gal = 56 pt

Question 10.
96 fl oz = ______ pt

Answer: 6 pt

Explanation:
Convert fluid ounces into pints.
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
1 fluid ounces = 1/16 pint
96 fluid ounces = 1/16 × 96 = 6
96 fl oz = 6 pt

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 11.
200 c = ______ qt

Answer: 50 qt

Explanation:
Convert cups to quarts
1 quart = 4 cups
1 cup = 1/4 quart
200 cups = 1/4 × 200 = 50 qt
200 c = 50 qt

Question 12.
22 pt = ______ fl oz

Answer: 352 fl oz

Explanation:
Convert pints to fluid ounces
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
22 pints = 16 × 22 = 352 fluid ounces
So, 22 pt = 352 fl oz

Question 13.
8 gal = ______ qt

Answer: 32 qt

Explanation:
Convert gallon to quarts.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
8 gallons = 8 × 4 quarts = 32 quarts
8 gal = 32 qt

Question 14.
72 fl oz = ______ c

Answer: 9 c

Explanation:
Convert fluid ounces to cups
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
1 fluid ounce = 1/8 cup
72 fluid ounces = 1/8 cup × 72 = 9 cups
72 fl oz = 9 c

Question 15.
2 gal = ______ pt

Answer: 16 pt

Explanation:
Convert gallon to pints
1 gal = 8 pints
2 gal = 2 × 8 pints = 16 pints
2 gal = 16 pt

Question 16.
48 pt = ______ gal

Answer: 6 gal

Explanation:
Convert pints to gallons
1 gal = 8 pints
1 pint = 1/8 gal
48 pints = 1/8 × 48 pint = 6 gal
48 pint = 6 gal

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 17.
28 c ______ 14 pt

Answer: 28 c = 14 pt

Explanation:
Convert cups to a pint
1 pint = 2 cups
14 pints = 14 × 2 cups = 28 cups
28 cups = 14 pints
Thus, 28 c = 14 pt

Question 18.
25 pt ______ 13 qt

Answer: 25 pt < 13 qt

Explanation:
Convert pints to quarts
1 quart = 2 pints
13 quarts = 13 × 2 pints = 26 pints
25 pints is less than 26 pints
So, 25 pt < 13 qt

Question 19.
20 qt ______ 80 c

Answer: 20 qt = 80 c

Explanation:
1 quart = 4 cups
20 quarts = 20 × 4 cups = 80 cups
20 qt = 80 c

Question 20.
12 gal ______ 50 qt

Answer: 12 gal < 50 qt

Explanation:
1 gal = 4 quarts
12 gal = 12 × 4 quarts = 48 quarts
12 gal = 48 quarts
48 quarts is less than 50 quarts
So, 12 gal < 50 qt

Question 21.
320 fl oz ______ 18 pt

Answer: 320 fl oz > 18 pt

Explanation:
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
320 fluid ounces = 320 × 1/16 fluid ounces = 20 pints
20 is greater than 18 pints
320 fl oz > 18 pt

Question 22.
15 qt ______ 63 c

Answer: 15 qt < 63 c

Explanation:
Convert quarts to cups
1 quart = 4 pints
15 quarts = 4 × 15 = 60 cups
60 cup is less than 63 cups
So, 15 qt < 63 c

Question 23.
Which of exercises 17–22 could you solve mentally? Explain your answer for one exercise.

Problem Solving – Lesson 2: Customary Capacity – Page No. 4120

Show your work. For 24–26, use the table.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 4

Question 24.
Complete the table, and make a graph showing the relationship between pints and quarts. Draw a line through the points to make the graph.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 2: Customary Capacity img 5

Answer:
Go-Math-Grade-5-Answer-Key-Chapter-10-Convert-Units-of-Measure-img-5

Question 25.
Describe any pattern you notice in the pairs of numbers you graphed. Write a rule to describe the pattern.
Type below:
__________

Answer: I observed a straight line in the pair of numbers.

Question 26.
Explain how you can use your graph to find the number of quarts equal to 5 pints.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The number of quarts for 5 pints is 3.5
The point lies between 3 and 4.
The X-axis is 5 and Y-axis is 3.5

Question 27.
Test Prep Shelby made 5 quarts of juice for a picnic. How many cups of juice did Shelby make?
Options:
a. 1 cup
b. 5 cups
c. 10 cups
d. 20 cups

Answer: 20 cups

Explanation:
Shelby made 5 quarts of juice for a picnic.
1 quarts = 4 cups
5 quarts = 5 × 4 cups = 20 cups
5 quart = 20 cups
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Share and Show – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 599

Question 1.
Use the picture to complete each equation.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 6
a. 1 pound = ______ ounces

Answer: 16 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces

Question 1.
b. 2 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 32 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces
2 pounds = 32 ounces

Question 1.
c. 3 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 48 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
So, 3 pounds = 48 ounces

Question 1.
d. 4 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 64 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 4 × 16 ounces = 64 ounces
4 pounds = 64 ounces

Question 1.
e. 5 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 80 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
5 pounds = 5 × 16 ounces = 80 ounces
5 pounds = 80 ounces

Convert.

Question 2.
15 pounds = ______ ounces

Answer: 240 ounces

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
15 pounds = 15 × 16 ounces = 240 ounces
15 pounds = 240 ounces

Question 3.
3 T = ______ lb

Answer: 6,000 lb

Explanation:
1 ton = 2,000 lb
3 ton = 3 × 2,000 lb = 6,000 lb
3 T = 6000 lb

Question 4.
320 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 20 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to lb.
1 lb = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 lb
320 oz = 1/16 × 320 = 20 lb
320 oz = 20 lb

On Your Own – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 600

Convert.

Question 5.
5 T = ______ lb

Answer: 10,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert Ton to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
5 T = 5 × 2,000 lb = 10,000 lb
5 T = 10,000 lb

Question 6.
19 T = ______ lb

Answer: 38,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert Ton to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
19 T = 19 × 2000 lb = 38,000 lb
19 T = 38,000 lb

Question 7.
16,000 lb = ______ T

Answer: 8 T

Explanation:
Convert Ton to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
1 lb = 1/2000 T
16000 lb = 16000 × 1/2000 = 8T
16,000 lb = 8T

Question 8.
192 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 12 lb

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
192 ounces = 192 × /16 = 12 lb
192 oz = 12 lb

Question 9.
416 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 26 lb

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 lb
416 oz = 416 × 1/16 = 26 lb
416 oz = 26 lb

Question 10.
24 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 384 oz

Explanation:
Convert ouncers to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
24 lb = 24 × 16 ounces = 384 oz
24 lb = 384 oz

Practice: Copy and Solve Convert.

Question 11.
23 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 368 oz

Explanation:
Convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
23 lb = 23 × 16 oz = 368 ounces
23 lb = 368 oz

Question 12.
6 T = ______ lb

Answer: 12,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
6 T = 6 × 2,000 lb = 12,000 lb
6 T = 12,000 lb

Question 13.
144 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 9 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to pounds
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 oz= 1/16 lb
144 oz = 144 × 1/16 = 9 lb
Thus, 144 oz = 9 lb

Question 14.
15 T = ______ lb

Answer: 30,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
15 T = 15 × 2,000 lb = 30,000 lb
15 T = 30,000 lb

Question 15.
352 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 22 lb

Explanation:
Convert ounces to the pound
1 lb = 16 oz
1 oz = 1/16 lb
352 oz = 352 × 1/16 = 22 lb
352 oz = 22 lb

Question 16.
18 lb = ______ oz

Answer: 288 oz

Explanation:
1 lb = 16 oz
18 lb = 18 × 16 oz = 288 oz
18 lb = 288 oz

Compare. Write >, >, or =.

Question 17.
130 oz ______ 8 lb

Answer: 130 oz > 8 lb

Explanation:
First convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
8 lb = 8 × 16 oz = 128 oz
8 lb = 128 oz
128 oz is less than 130 oz
So, 130 oz > 8 lb

Question 18.
34 lb ______ 544 oz

Answer: 34 lb = 544 oz

Explanation:
First convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
34 lb = 34 × 16 oz = 544 oz
So, 34 lb = 544 oz

Question 19.
14 lb ______ 229 oz

Answer: 14 lb < 229 oz

Explanation:
First convert lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
14 lb = 14 × 16 oz = 224 oz
14 lb = 224 oz
224 oz is less than 229
So, 14 lb < 229 oz

Question 20.
16 T ______ 32,000 lb

Answer: 16 T = 32,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert ton to pounds
1 Ton = 2,000 lb
16 T = 16 × 2,000 lb = 32,000 lb
16 T = 32,000 lb

Question 21.
5 lb ______ 79 oz

Answer: 5 lb > 79 oz

Explanation:
Convert lb to oz
1 lb = 16 oz
5 lb = 5 × 16 oz = 80 oz
80 is greater than 76
Thus, 5 lb > 79 oz

Question 22.
85,000 lb ______ 40 T

Answer: 85,000 lb > 40 T

Explanation:
Convert ton to pounds
1 Ton = 2,000 lb
40 T = 40 × 2000 = 80,000 lb
80,000 lb is less than 85,000 lb
Thus, 85,000 lb > 40 T

Problem Solving

Question 23.
Explain how you can use mental math to compare 7 pounds to 120 ounces.
7 pounds ______ 120 ounces.

Answer: 7 pounds < 120 ounces.

Explanation:
Convert pounds to ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
7 Pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces
112 ounces is less than 120 ounces
7 pounds < 120 ounces.

Question 24.
Test Prep Carlos used 32 ounces of walnuts in a muffin recipe. How many pounds of walnuts did Carlos use?
Options:
a. 8 pounds
b. 4 pounds
c. 2 pounds
d. 1 pound

Answer: 2 pounds

Explanation:
Given that, Carlos used 32 ounces of walnuts in a muffin recipe.
1 pound = 16 ounces
2 pounds = 2 × 16 oz = 32 ounces
32 oz = 2 pounds
Thus the answer is option C.

Problem Solving – Lesson 3: Weight – Page No. 4160

Pose a Problem
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 7

Question 25.
Kia wants to have 4 pounds of munchies for her party. She has 36 ounces of popcorn and wants the rest to be pretzel sticks. How many ounces of pretzel sticks
does she need to buy?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 3: Weight img 8
64 – 36 =
So, Kia needs to buy ____ ounces of pretzel sticks.
Write a new problem using different amounts of snacks. Some weights should be in pounds and others in ounces. Make sure the amount of snacks given is less than the total amount of snacks needed.
Pose a Problem                 Draw a bar model for your problem.
Then solve.
• Write an expression you could use to solve your problem.
Explain how the expression represents the problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Kia wants to have 3 pounds of munchies for her party. She has 20 ounces of popcorn and wants the rest to be pretzel sticks. How many ounces of pretzel sticks does she need to buy?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 img-1
48 oz – 20 oz = 28 oz
She needs to buy 28 ounces of pretzel sticks.

Share and Show – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 605

Solve.

Question 1.
After each soccer practice, Scott runs 4 sprints of 20 yards each. If he continues his routine, how many practices will it take for Scott to have sprinted a total of 2 miles combined?
Scott sprints _____ yards each practice. Since there are _____ yards in 2 miles, he will need to continue his routine for _____ practices.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Multiply 20 yard × 4 = 80 yards
Now convert from yards to miles
1 mile = 1760 yard
x = 1760 × 2 = 3520 yards
p = 3520 yards/80 yard = 44
Thus he will need to do 44 practices.

Question 2.
A worker at a mill is loading 5-lb bags of flour into boxes to deliver to a local warehouse. Each box holds 12 bags of flour. If the warehouse orders 3 Tons of flour, how many boxes are needed to fulfill the order?
_____ bags

Answer: 100 bags

Explanation:
A worker at a mill is loading 5-lb bags of flour into boxes to deliver to a local warehouse.
Each box holds 12 bags of flour.
Pounds of flour per box
x = 12 × 5 lb = 60 lb
We need to multiply by the conversion rule
1 T = 2000 lb
Find out how many pounds are in 3 tons. Pounds of flour in the warehouse.
y = 3 T × 2000 lb = 6,000 lb
Divide by the number of pounds per box. 100 boxes are needed.
b = 6000/60 = 100 boxes.

Question 3.
Cory brings five 1-gallon jugs of juice to serve during parent night at his school. If the paper cups he is using for drinks can hold 8 fluid ounces, how many drinks can Cory serve for parent night?
_____ drinks

Answer: 80 drinks

Explanation:
First, convert from gallons to quarts
We are converting larger unit to the smaller unit.
1 gal = 4 qt
We need to multiply by the conversion rule.
x = 5 gal × 4 qt
x = 20 qt
Next, convert from quarts to pints.
2 pt = 1 qt
We need to multiply by the conversion rule.
y = 20 qt × 2 pt = 40 pt
Next, convert from pints to cups.
We are converting from a larger unit to a smaller unit.
1 pt = 2 cups
y = 40 pt × 2 c = 80 c
Now convert from cups to ounces
1 c = 8 oz
y = 80 c × 8 oz = 640 oz
d = 640 oz/ 8 oz = 80 drinks
Cory can serve 80 drinks for parent night.

On Your Own – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 606

Solve.

Question 4.
A science teacher needs to collect lake water for a lab she is teaching. The lab requires each student to use 4 fluid ounces of lake water. If 68 students are participating, how many pints of lake water will the teacher need to collect?
_____ pints

Answer: 1 pint

Explanation:
Find the total number of ounces the students use.
s = 68 × 4 oz = 272 oz
First, convert from ounces to cups.
1 c = 8 oz
Find how many cups are in 272 ounces
y = 272 oz ÷ 8 oz = 34 c
Now from cups to pints
1 pt = 2 c
Find how mant pints are in 34 cups
x = 34 c ÷ 2 c = 17 pt
18 pt – 17 pt = 1 pt
Thus 1 pint is leftover.

Question 5.
A string of decorative lights is 28 feet long. The first light on the string is 16 inches from the plug. If the lights on the string are spaced 4 inches apart, how many lights are there on the string?
_____ lights

Answer: 81 lights

Explanation:
There are no lights for the first 12 inches
After that, each of the remaining 27 feet is composed of
3 sets of:
4 inches with no light
27 feet × 3 = 81 lights

Question 6.
When Jamie’s car moves forward such that each tire makes one full rotation, the car has traveled 72 inches. How many full rotations will the tires need to make for Jamie’s car to travel 10 yards?
_____ rotations

Answer: 5 rotations

Explanation:
When Jamie’s car moves forward such that each tire makes one full rotation, the car has traveled 72 inches.
Convert from a smaller unit to the larger unit.
Convert from inches to yards.
36 in = 1 yard
x = 72 in/ 36 in = 2 yards
Find out how many rotations are needed.
y = 10 yard/ 2 yard = 5 yard
The tired need to make 5 rotations for Jame’s car to travel 10 yards.

Question 7.
A male African elephant weighs 7 Tons. If a male African lion at the local zoo weighs \(\frac{1}{40}\) of the weight of the male African elephant, how many pounds does the lion weigh?
_____ lb

Answer: 350 lb

Explanation:
Convert from Tons to pounds
1 T = 2,000 lb
Find out how many pounds are in 7 Tons.
y = 7 T × 2000 lb = 14,000 lb
The weight of the elephant is 14,000 lb
Find the weight of the lion
l = 14,000 × 1/40 = 350 lb
Therefore the weight of the lion is 350 pounds.

Question 8.
An office supply company is shipping a case of wooden pencils to a store. There are 64 boxes of pencils in the case. If each box of pencils weighs 2.5 ounces, what is the weight, in pounds, of the case of wooden pencils?
_____ pounds

Answer: 10 pounds

Explanation:
First, we need to find the total weight of the case of pencils
w = 64 boxes × 2.5 oz = 160 oz
Now convert from ounces to pounds
We are converting from a smaller unit to a larger unit.
1 lb = 16 oz
y = 160 oz/16 oz = 10 lb
Thus total is 10 pounds.

Question 9.
A gallon of unleaded gasoline weighs about 6 pounds. About how many ounces does 1 quart of unleaded gasoline weigh?
HINT: 1 quart = \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a gallon
_____ ounces

Answer: 24 ounces

Explanation:
A gallon of unleaded gasoline weighs about 6 pounds.
Convert from pounds to ounces.
1 lb = 16 ounces
y = 6 × 16 ounces = 96 ounces
The weight of a quart of unleaded gasoline
qw = 96 × 1/4 = 24 oz

UNLOCK the Problem – Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems – Page No. 4200

Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 4: Multistep Measurement Problems img 9

Question 10.
At a local animal shelter there are 12 small-size dogs and 5 medium-size dogs. Every day, the small-size dogs are each given 12.5 ounces of dry food and the medium-size dogs are each given 18 ounces of the same dry food. How many pounds of dry food does the shelter serve in one day?
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
___________

Answer: We are asked to find how many pounds of dry food does the shelter serves in one day

Question 10.
b. What information will you use?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
I will use the information about the dry food given to the small size dogs and medium size dogs.

Question 10.
c. What conversion will you need to do to solve the problem?
Type below:
___________

Answer: We need to convert from ounces to pounds.

Question 10.
d. Show the steps you use to solve the problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
First, convert from ounces to pounds.
The total amount of food given to the small size and medium size dogs = 12.5 ounces + 18 ounces = 30.5 ounces
1 ounce = 0.625 pounds
32.5 ounces = 30.5 × 0.625 = 1.906 pounds

Question 10.
e. Complete the sentences.
The small-size dogs eat a total of ___ ounces of dry food each day.
The medium-size dogs eat a total of ___ ounces of dry food each day.
The shelter serves ___ ounces, or ___ pounds, of dry food each day.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The small-size dogs eat a total of 12.5 ounces of dry food each day.
The medium-size dogs eat a total of 18 ounces of dry food each day.
The shelter serves 30.5 ounces, or 1.906 pounds, of dry food each day.

Question 11.
Test Prep For a class assignment, students are asked to record the total amount of water they drink in one day. Melinda records that she drank four 8-fluid ounce glasses of water and two 1-pint bottles. How many quarts of water did Melinda drink during the day?
Options:
a. 2 quarts
b. 4 quarts
c. 6 quarts
d. 8 quarts

Answer: 2 quarts

Explanation:
Given that,
Melinda records that she drank four 8-fluid ounce glasses of water and two 1-pint bottles
Convert from fluid ounces to quarts.
1 quart = 32 fluid ounces
2 1-pint bottles = 2 pints
1 pint = 16 fluid ounces
2 pints = 32 fluid ounces
We know that,
32 fluid ounces = 1 quart
1 quart + 1 quart = 2 quarts.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 609

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Mid-Chapter Checkpoint img 10

Question 1.
The _______ of an object is how heavy the object is.
___________

Answer: Weight

Question 2.
The _______ of a container is the amount the container can hold.
___________

Answer: Capacity

Concepts and Skills

Convert.

Question 3.
5 mi = _____ yd

Answer: 8800 yd

Explanation:

Convert from miles to yards.
1 mile = 1760 yard
5 miles = 5 × 1760 yard = 8800 yard
5 mi = 8800 yd

Question 4.
48 qt = _____ gal

Answer: 12 gal

Explanation:
Convert from quart to gal
1 gal = 4 quart
1 quart = 1/4
48 qt = 48 × 1/4 = 12 gal
48 qt = 12 gal

Question 5.
9 T = _____ lb

Answer: 18,000 lb

Explanation:
Convert from tons to lb
1 T = 2,000 lb
9 T = 9 × 2,000 lb = 18,000 lb
9  = 18,000 lb

Question 6.
336 oz = _____ lb

Answer: 21 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to pound
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 oz = 1/16 lb
336 oz = 336 × 1/16 lb = 21 lb
336 oz = 21 lb

Question 7.
14 ft = _____ yd _____ ft

Answer: 4 yard 2 ft

Explanation:
Convert from feet to yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 1/3 yard
12 feet = 1/3 × 12 ft = 4 yard
14 ft = 4 yard 2 ft

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 9.
96 fl oz _____ 13 c

Answer: 96 fl oz < 13 c

Explanation:
Convert from Cups to fluid ounces
1 cup = 8 oz
13 c = 13 × 8 oz = 104 oz
96 oz is less than 104 oz
Thus, 96 fl oz < 13 c

Question 10.
25 lb _____ 384 oz

Answer: 25 lb > 384 oz

Explanation:
Convert from lb to ounces
1 lb = 16 oz
25 lb = 25 × 16 oz = 400 oz
400 oz is greater than 384 oz
So, 25 lb > 384 oz

Question 11.
8 yd _____ 288 in.

Answer: 8 yd = 288 in.

Explanation:
Convert from yards to inches
1 yard = 36 inches
8 yard = 8 × 36 inches = 288 inches
8 yard = 288 inches

Solve.

Question 12.
A standard coffee mug has a capacity of 16 fluid ounces. If Annie needs to fill 26 mugs with coffee, how many total quarts of coffee does she need?
_____ qt

Answer: 13 qt

Explanation:
Find the number of ounces.
s = 16 oz × 26 = 416 oz
Next, convert from ounces to cups.
1 c = 8 oz
Find how many cups are in 104 ounces.
y = 416 oz ÷ 8 oz = 52 c
Next, convert from cups to pints.
1 pt = 2 c
y = 52 c ÷ 2 c = 26 pt
Convert from pints to quarts
1 qt = 2 pints
y = 26 pint ÷ 2 pint = 13 qt
y = 13 qt
Thus she need 13 quarts of coffee.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Vocabulary – Page No. 610

Question 13.
The length of a classroom is 34 feet. What is this measurement in yards and feet?
_____ yd _____ ft

Answer: 11 yard 1 foot

Explanation:
Given that, The length of a classroom is 34 feet.
Convert from feet from the yard
1 yard = 3 feet
34 feet = 33 feet + 1 foot
1 feet = 1/3 yard
33 feet = 33 × 1/3 = 11 yard
34 feet = 11 yard 1 foot

Question 14.
Charlie’s puppy, Max, weighs 8 pounds. How many ounces does Max weigh?
_____ oz

Answer: 128 ounces

Explanation:
Convert from pounds from ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
8 pounds = 8 × 16 oz = 128 ounces
8 pounds = 128 oz

Question 15.
Milton purchases a 5-gallon aquarium for his bedroom. To fill the aquarium with water, he uses a container with a capacity of 1 quart. How many times will Milton fill and empty the container before the aquarium is full?
_____ times

Answer: 20 times

Explanation:
Convert from gallon to quart
1 gallon = 4 quart
5 gallon = 5 × 4 quart = 20 quart
5 gallon = 20 quart

Question 16.
Sarah uses a recipe to make 2 gallons of her favorite mixed berry juice. Two of the containers she plans to use to store the juice have a capacity of 1 quart. The rest of the containers have a capacity of 1 pint. How many pint-sized containers will Sarah need?
_____ pint-sized container

Answer: 12 pint-sized container

Explanation:
Sarah uses a recipe to make 2 gallons of her favorite mixed berry juice.
Two of the containers she plans to use to store the juice have a capacity of 1 quart.
1 gallon = 4 quart
Find how many quarts are in 2 gals.
y = 8 qt – 2 qt = 6 qt
Next, convert from quarts to pints.
2 pt = 1 qt
y = 6 qt × 2 pt
y = 12 pint
She will need 12 pint sized container.

Question 17.
The average length of a female white-beaked dolphin is about 111 inches. What is this length in feet and inches?
_____ ft _____ in.

Answer: 9 ft 3 in.

Explanation:
The average length of a female white-beaked dolphin is about 111 inches.
Convert from inches to feet.
1 feet = 12 inch
111 inch = 108 in. + 3 in
9 feet = 108 inches
111 inches = 9 feet 3 inches

Share and Show – Lesson 5: Metric Measures – Page No. 613

Complete the equation to show the conversion.

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 10 = _____ dL

Answer: 8.47 L × 10 = 84.7 dL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from liter to deciliter.
84.7 L × 10 = 8.47 dL

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 100 = _____ cL

Answer: 8.47 L × 100 = 847 cL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Convert from liter to centiliter.
8.47 L × 100 = 847 centiliter

Question 1.
8.47 L _____ 1,000 = _____ mL

Answer: 8.47 L × 1,000 = 8,470 mL

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Convert the liter to the milliliter.
8.47 L × 1000 = 8470 mL

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 10 = _____ g

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 982.4 g

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to gram
1 gram = 10 decigram
1 decigram = 1/10 gram
To convert 9824 dg to g we have to divide by 10.
9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 9824 × 1/10 = 982.4 grams
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 10 = 982.4 g

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 100 = _____ dag

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 100 = 98.24 dag

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to dekagrams.
We know that,
1 dg = 0.01 dag
1 dg = 1/100 dag
9824 ÷ 100 = 9824 × 1/00 = 98.24 dag
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 100 = 98.24 dag

Question 2.
9,824 dg _____ 1,000 = _____ hg

Answer: 9,824 dg ÷ 1,000 = 9.824 hg

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Determine the operation to be used.
Now convert from decigram to dekagrams.
1 dg = 0.001 hg
1 dg = 1/000 hg
9,824 dg = 9824 × 1/1000 = 9824 ÷ 1000 = 9.824 hg
Thus, 9,824 dg ÷ 1,000 = 9.824 hg

Convert.

Question 3.
4,250 cm = _____ m

Answer: 42.50 m

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from centimeters to meters.
1 cm = 0.01 m
1 cm = 1/100 m
4250 cm = 4250 × 1/100 = 4250/100 = 42.50 meters
So, 4,250 cm = 42.50 m

Question 4.
6,000 mL = _____ L

Answer: 6 L

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from milliliters to liters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
1 milliliter = 1/1000 L
6000 mL = 6000 × 1/1000 L = 6 L
6,000 mL = 6 L

Question 5.
4 dg = _____ cg

Answer: 40 cg

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from decigram to the centigram
We know that,
1 dg = 10 cg
4 dg = 4 × 10 cg = 40 cg
4 dg = 40 cg

On Your Own

Convert.

Question 6.
8 kg = _____ g

Answer: 8000 g

Explanation:
Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from kilograms to grams.
1 kg = 1000 grams
8 kg = 8 × 1000 grams = 8000 grams
8 kg = 8000 g

Question 7.
5 km = _____ m

Answer: 5000 m

Explanation:

Find the relationships between the units.
Converting from kilometers to meters
1 km = 1000 meters
5 km = 5 × 1000 meters = 5000 meters
5 km = 5000 m

Question 8.
40 mm = _____ cm

Answer: 4 cm

Explanation:
Converting from millimeters to centimeters
1 cm = 10 mm
1 mm = 1/10 cm
40 mm = 40 × 1/10 cm = 4 cm
40 mm = 4 cm

Question 9.
7 g = _____ mg

Answer: 7000 mg

Explanation:
Converting from grams to milligrams
1 gram = 1000 mg
7 g = 7 × 1000 mg = 7000 mg
7 g = 7000 mg

Question 10.
6,000 g = _____ kg

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Converting from grams to kilograms.
1 kg = 1000 grams
1 gram = 1/1000 kg
6000 grams = 6000 × 1/1000 = 6 kg
6000 grams = 6 kg

Question 11.
1,521 mL = _____ L

Answer: 1.521 L

Explanation:
Convert from liter to milliliters.
1 Liter = 1000 milliliters
1 milliliter = 1/1000 liter
1521 = 1521 × 1/1000 = 1.521 L
1521 mL = 1.521 L

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 12.
32 hg _____ 3.2 kg

Answer: 32 hg = 3.2 kg

Explanation:
Converting from hectogram to kilogram
1 hg = 0.1 kg
32 hg = 32 × 0.1 kg = 3.2 kg
32 hg = 3.2 kg

Question 13.
6 km _____ 660 m

Answer: 6 km > 660 m

Explanation:
1 kilometer = 1000 meters
6 kilometer = 6 × 1000 meter = 6000 meters
6000 meters is greater than 600 m
6 km > 600 m

Question 14.
525 mL _____ 525 cL

Answer: 525 mL < 525 cL

Explanation:
Converting from milliliters to centiliters.
1 mL = 0.1 cL
525 mL = 525 × 0.1 = 52.5 mL
525 mL is less than 52.5 mL
Thus, 525 mL < 525 cL

Problem Solving – Lesson 5: Metric Measures – Page No. 614

For 15–16, use the table.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 5: Metric Measures img 11

Question 15.
Kelly made one batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix. How many grams does she need to add to the snack mix to make 2 kilograms?
_____ g

Answer: 575 grams

Explanation:
Kelly made one batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix.
From the above figure, we can see that batch of peanut and pretzel snack mix is 1425 grams
To find how many grams she needs to add to the snack mix to make 2 kilograms
We have to subtract 1425 grams from 2 kgs
1 kg = 1000 grams
2 kg = 2000 grams
2000 g – 1425 g = 575 grams
Thus she needs to add 575 grams to make 2 kilograms.

Question 16.
Kelly plans to take juice on her camping trip. Which will hold more juice, 8 cans or 2 bottles? How much more?
__________

Answer: 2 bottles

Explanation:
Kelly plans to take the juice on her camping trip.
The capacity of the bottle is more than a bottle. Thus 2 bottles can hold more juice.

Question 17.
Erin’s water bottle holds 600 milliliters of water. Dylan’s water bottle holds 1 liter of water. Whose water bottle has the greater capacity? How much greater?
__________

Answer: Dylan

Explanation:
Erin’s water bottle holds 600 milliliters of water.
Dylan’s water bottle holds 1 liter of water.
First, convert from liter to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
By this, we can say that Dylan’s water bottle has a greater capacity.

Question 18.
Liz and Alana each participated in the high jump at the track meet. Liz’s high jump was 1 meter. Alana’s high jump was 132 centimeters. Who jumped higher? How much higher?
Type below:
__________

Answer: Alana

Explanation:
Liz and Alana each participated in the high jump at the track meet.
Liz’s high jump was 1 meter.
Alana’s high jump was 132 centimeters.
Convert from centimeters to meter.
1 meter = 100 cm
132 cm = 132 ÷ 100 meter
132 cm = 1.32 m
1 m is less than 1.32 m
Alana jumped higher than Liz.

Question 19.
Are there less than 1 million, exactly 1 million, or greater than 1 million milligrams in 1 kilogram? Explain how you know.
__________ milligrams

Answer: Exactly 1 million

Explanation:
Convert 1 kilogram to milligrams.
multiply by 6 powers of 10, which equals one million.
Thus 1 kg = 1,000,000 mg
There are exactly 1 million milligrams in 1 kilogram.

Question 20.
Test Prep Monica has 426 millimeters of fabric. How many centimeters of fabric does Monica have?
Options:
a. 4,260 centimeters
b. 42.6 centimeters
c. 4.26 centimeters
d. 0.426 centimeters

Answer: 42.6 centimeters

Explanation:
Converting from millimeters to centimeters.
1 millimeter = 0.1 cm
426 mm = 426 × 0.1 = 42.6 cm
Monica has 42.6 cm of fabric.
Thus the correct answer is option B

Share and Show – Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions – Page No. 619

Question 1.
Edgardo has a drink cooler that holds 10 gallons of water. He is filling the cooler with a 1-quart container. How many times will he have to fill the quart container to fill the cooler?
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions img 12
First, make a table to show the relationship between gallons and quarts. You can use a conversion table to find how many quarts are in a gallon.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions img 13
Then, look for a rule to help you complete your table. number of gallons × ____ = number of quarts
Finally, use the table to solve the problem.
Edgardo will need to fill the quart container ____ times.
____ times

Answer:

gal 1 2 3 4 10
qt 4 8 12 16 40

Edgardo will need to fill the quart container 40 times.

Question 2.
What if Edgardo only uses 32 quarts of water to fill the cooler. How can you use your table to find how many gallons that is?
____ gallons

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Convert from quarts to gallons.
1 gallon = 4 quarts
1 quart = 1/4 gal
32 quart = 32 × 1/4 = 8 gallons

Question 3.
If Edgardo uses a 1-cup container to fill the cooler, how will that affect the number of times he has to fill a container to fill the cooler? Explain.
Type below:
__________

Answer: Multiply by 16

gal 1 2 3 4 10
cups 16 32 48 64 160

On Your Own – Lesson 6: Problem Solving Customary and Metric Conversions – Page No. 620

Question 4.
Jeremy made a belt that was 6.4 decimeters long. How many centimeters long is the belt Jeremy made?
____ cm

Answer: 64 cm

Explanation:
Jeremy made a belt that was 6.4 decimeters long.
Converting from decimeters to centimeters.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeter
6.4 decimeter = 6.4 × 10 cm = 64 cm
Jeremy made 64 cm long belt.

Question 5.
Dan owns 9 DVDs. His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has. Their sister, Marsha, has more DVDs than either of her brothers. Together, the three have 35 DVDs. How many DVDs does Marsha have?
____ DVDs

Answer: 14 DVDs

Explanation:
Given that,
Dan owns 9 DVDs.
His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has.
Their sister, Marsha, has more DVDs than either of her brothers.
Together, the three have 35 DVDs.
His brother Mark has 3 more DVDs than Dan has.
That means Mark has 9 + 3 = 12 DVDs
Total number of DVDs = 35 – 9 – 12 = 14 DVDs
Thus Marsha has 14 DVDs.

Question 6.
Kevin is making a picture frame. He has a piece of trim that is 4 feet long. How many 14-inch-long pieces can Kevin cut from the trim? How much of a foot will he have left over?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 1/2 ft

Explanation:
Kevin is making a picture frame. He has a piece of trim that is 4 feet long.
Converting from feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
x = 4 × 12 = 48 inches
Calculate how many 14 inch pieces. He can cut 3 (14 inch) pieces
y = 48 ÷ 14 = 3
48 – 42 = 6 inches
Feet leftover
6 in/12 in = 1/2 feet
Thus 1/2 foot will be left over.

Question 7.
Explain how you could find the number of cups in five gallons of water.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
There are 16 cups in a gallon.
To convert gallons to cups, multiply the gallon value by 16.
1 gal = 16 cups
5 gallons = 5 × 16 cups = 80 cups

Question 8.
Carla uses 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of sugar in her cookie recipe. How many cups does she use in all?
_____ \(\frac{□}{□}\) cups

Answer: 4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Explanation:
Given:
Carla uses 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) cups of flour and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\) cups of sugar in her cookie recipe.
Add 2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) and 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 \(\frac{3}{4}\) + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
2 + 1 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 + \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{3}{8}\)
3 + \(\frac{9}{8}\)
3 + 1\(\frac{1}{8}\)
3 + 1 + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
4 \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups

Question 9.
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces. He has a piece of chain that is 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet long. How much chain will he have left after making the necklaces?
Options:
a. 6 inches
b. 12 inches
c. 18 inches
d. 24 inches

Answer: 6 inches

Explanation:
Given that,
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces.
He has a piece of chain that is 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet long.
Converting from feet to inches.
1 foot = 12 inches
4 feet = 12 × 4 = 48 inches
1/2 feet = 6 inches
48 + 6 = 54 inches
Tony needs 16-inch-long pieces of gold chain to make each of 3 necklaces.
16 × 3 = 48
54 inches – 48 inches = 6 inches
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Share and Show – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time – Page No. 625

Convert.

Question 1.
540 min = _____ hr

Answer: 9 hr

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 1/60 hour
540 min = 540 × 1/60 hour = 9 hour
540 min = 9 hr

Question 2.
8 d = _____ hr

Answer: 192 hr

Explanation:
Convert from days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
8 days = 8 × 24 hr = 192 hr
8 d = 192 hr

Question 3.
110 hr = _____ d _____ hr

Answer: 4 d 14 hr

Explanation:
Convert from hours to days.
110 hr = 96 hr + 14 hr
1 day = 24 hour
96 hours = 96/24 = 4 days
110 hour = 4 d 14 hr

Find the end time.

Question 4.
Start time: 9:17 A.M.
Elapsed time: 5 hr 18 min
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 7: Elapsed Time img 14
End time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 2:35 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
Add the hours to the start time.
10:17 A.M
11:17 A.M.
12:17 A.M.
1:17 A.M.
2:17 A.M.
Next, add the minutes.
x = 2:17 P.M. + 0:18 min = 2:35 P.M
Thus the end time is 2:35 P.M

On Your Own

Convert.

Question 5.
3 min = _____ sec

Answer: 180 sec

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to seconds.
1 min = 60 sec
3 min = 3 × 60 sec = 180 sec
3 min = 180 sec

Question 6.
240 min = _____ hr

Answer: 4 hr

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 1/60 hr
240 min = 240 × 1/60 = 4 hour
240 min = 4 hour

Question 7.
1 hr = _____ sec

Answer: 3600 sec

Explanation:
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 60 sec
60 min = 60 × 60 sec = 3600 sec
1 hour = 3600 sec

Question 8.
3 yr = _____ d

Answer: 1095 d

Explanation:
Convert from years to days.
1 year = 365 days
3 years = 3 × 365 = 1095 days
So, 3 yr = 1095 d

Question 9.
208 wk = _____ yr

Answer: 4 yr

Explanation:
Convert weeks to years.
1 year = 52 weeks
1 week = 1/52 yr
208 wk = 208 × 1/52 yr = 4 yr
208 wk = 4 yr

Question 10.
350 min = _____ hr _____ min

Answer: 5 hr 50 min

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
60 min = 1 hour
1 min = 1/60 hour
Add hours
60 min =1 hr
120 min = 2 hr
180 min = 3 hr
240 min = 4 hr
300 min = 5 hr
360 min = 6 hr
350 min = 300 min + 50 min
350 min = 5 hr 50 min

Find the start, elapsed, or end time.

Question 11.
Start time: 11:38 A.M.
Elapsed time: 3 hr 10 min
End time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 2:48 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
Add the hours to the start time.
12:38 pm
1:38 pm
2:38 pm
Add the minutes next.
x = 2:38 pm + 10 min = 2:48 pm
Thus the end time is 2:48 P.M.

Question 12.
Elapsed time: 2 hr 37 min
End time: 1:15 P.M.
Start time: _____ : _____ A.M.

Answer: 10:38 A.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 0:15 min – 0:37 min
x = -0:22 min
y = 60 min – 22 min = 38 min
time = 12:38 pm
Next subtract the hours from the time.
11:38 am
10:38 am
Thus the start time is 10:38 A.M.

Question 13.
Elapsed time: 2 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hr
End time: 5:30 P.M.
Start time: _____ : _____ P.M.

Answer: 3:15 P.M.

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 30 min – 15 min = 15 min
time 5:30
subtract the hours
5:30 pm
4:30 pm
3:30 pm
y = 3:30 pm – 15 min = 3:15 P.M
Thus the start time is 3:15 P.M.

Question 14.
Start time: 7:41 P.M.
End time: 8:50 P.M.
Elapsed time: _____ hr _____ min

Answer: 1 hr 9 min

Explanation:
You can use a number line or a clock to find the end time.
x = 50 min – 41 min = 9 min
subtract the hours
8 – 7 = 1 hour
1 hour 9 min
Elapsed time: 1 hour 9 min

Problem Solving – Lesson 7: Elapsed Time – Page No. 626

For 15–17, use the graph.
Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 10 Convert Units of Measure Lesson 7: Elapsed Time img 15

Question 15.
Which Internet services downloaded the podcast in less than 4 minutes?
_________
_________

Answer:
Groove Box
Internet -C

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can observe that the Internet services downloaded the podcast in less than 4 minutes is Groove Box and Internet -C
Groove box took 173 sec and Internet-C took 196 seconds.
Convert from minutes to seconds
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec= 1/60 min
173 sec = 2 min 53 sec
196 sec = 180 sec + 16 sec = 3 min 16 sec

Question 16.
Which service took the longest to download the podcast? How much longer did it take than Red Fox in minutes and seconds?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Top Hat

Explanation:
The figure shows that Top Hat took the longest time to download the podcast.
It took 1050 sec to download the podcast.
Convert from minutes to seconds
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec= 1/60 min
1050 sec = 1020 sec 30 sec
1020 sec = 1020 × 1/60 min = 17 min
1050 sec = 17 min 30 sec.
To find how much time it took than Red Fox, we need to subtract the time from red fox and top hat.
1050 sec – 310 sec = 740 sec
Convert from seconds to minutes.
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec = 1/60 min
740 sec = 720 + 20 sec
720 sec = 720 × 1/60 = 12 min
740 sec = 12 min 20 sec

Question 17.
Which service was faster, Red Fox or Internet-C? How much faster in minutes and seconds?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Internet-C

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that Internet-C is faster than Red Fox.
Internet-C took 196 sec
Red Fox took 310 sec
310 sec – 196 sec = 114 sec
Convert from seconds to minutes.
1 min = 60 sec
1 sec = 1/60 min
114 sec = 60 sec + 54 sec
114 sec = 1 min 54 sec

Question 18.
Explain how you could find the number of seconds in a full 24-hour day. Then solve.
Type below:
_________

Answer:
Convert from hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 min
24 hour = 24 × 60 min = 1440 min
Now convert from minutes to seconds.
1 min = 60 sec
1440 min = 1440 × 60 = 86400 sec
Thus a day has 86400 seconds.

Question 19.
Test Prep Samit and his friends went to a movie at 7:30 P.M. The movie ended at 9:55 P.M. How long was the movie?
Options:
a. 2 hours 25 minutes
b. 2 hours 5 minutes
c. 1 hour 25 minutes
d. 1 hour 5 minutes

Answer: 2 hours 25 minutes

Explanation:
Samit and his friends went to a movie at 7:30 P.M. The movie ended at 9:55 P.M.
Subtract the starting time and ending time of the movie.
9 hour 55 min
-7 hour 30 min
2 hour 25 min
Therefore the movie is 2hr 25 min long.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Vocabulary – Page No. 4350

Choose the best term from the box.

Question 1.
A metric unit of mass that is equal to \(\frac{1}{1,000}\) of a gram is called a ________.
___________

Answer: Milligram
A metric unit of mass that is equal to \(\frac{1}{1,000}\) of a gram is called a Milligram.

Question 2.
A metric unit for measuring length that is equal to 10 meters is called a _________.
___________

Answer: Dekameter
A metric unit for measuring length that is equal to 10 meters is called a Dekameter.

Concepts and Skills

Convert.

Question 3.
96 oz = ______ lb

Answer: 6 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to pounds.
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 pound
96 oz = 96 × 1/16 lb = 6 lb
96 oz = 16 lb

Question 4.
5 kg = ______ g

Answer: 5000 g

Explanation:
Convert from kg to grams.
1 kg = 1000 g
5 kg = 5 × 1000 g = 5000 g
5 kg = 5000 g
Thus 5 kg = 5000 grams

Question 5.
500 min = ______ hr ______ min

Answer: 8 hr 20 min

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to hours.
1 hour = 60 min
1 min = 1/60 hour
500 min = 500 × 1/60
500 min = 480 min + 20 min
That means 480 × 1/60 + 20 min
= 8 hour 20 min
500 min = 8 hour 20 min

Question 6.
65 yd 2 feet = ______ ft

Answer: 197 ft

Explanation:
65 yd 2 feet
Convert from yard to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
65 yard = 65 × 3 feet = 195 feet + 2 feet = 197 feet
65 yd 2 feet = 197 feet

Compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 7.
7 wk ______ 52 d

Answer: 7 wk < 52 d

Explanation:
First, convert from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
7 weeks = 7 × 7 = 49 days
49 is less than 52 days
Thus 7 wk < 52 d

Question 8.
4 L ______ 3,000 mL

Answer: 4 L > 3,000 mL

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters.
1 L = 1000 mL
4 L = 4 × 1000 mL = 4000 mL
4000 mL is greater than 3000 mL
Thus, 4 L > 3,000 mL

Question 9.
72 in. ______ 2 yd

Answer: 72 in. = 2 yd

Explanation:
Convert from inches to yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 in. = 36 in.
2 yards = 2 × 36 in. = 72 in.
Thus, 72 in. = 2 yd

Solve.

Question 10.
A girl walks 5,000 meters in one hour. If the girl walks at the same speed for 4 hours, how many kilometers will she have walked?
______ km

Answer: 20 km

Explanation:
A girl walks 5,000 meters in one hour.
Convert from meters to kilometers.
1000 m = 1 km
5000 m = 5 km
If the girl walks at the same speed for 4 hours,
Then multiply 5 km × 4 = 20 km
Therefore, she will walk 20 km for 4 hours.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4360

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 11.
Howard cuts 54 centimeters off a 1-meter board. How much of the board does Howard have left?
Options:
a. 53 centimeters
b. 53 meters
c. 46 meters
d. 46 centimeters

Answer: 46 centimeters

Explanation:
Given that,
Howard cuts 54 centimeters off a 1-meter board.
We know that,
1 meter = 100 cm
100 cm – 54 cm = 46 cm
Therefore, 46 centimeters of the board is left.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 12.
Joe’s dog has a mass of 28,000 grams. What is the mass of Joe’s dog in kilograms?
Options:
a. 2,800 kilograms
b. 280 kilograms
c. 28 kilograms
d. 2.8 kilograms

Answer: 28 kilograms

Explanation:
Joe’s dog has a mass of 28,000 grams.
Convert from grams into the kilograms
1 kg = 1000 g
1 g = 1/1000 kg
28000 g = 28000 × 1/1000 = 28 kg
The mass of Joe’s dog is 28 kg.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 13.
Cathy drank 600 milliliters of water at school and another 400 milliliters at home. How many liters of water did Cathy drink?
Options:
a. 1,000 liters
b. 100 liters
c. 10 liters
d. 1 liter

Answer: 1 liter

Explanation:
Cathy drank 600 milliliters of water at school and another 400 milliliters at home.
600 milliliters + 400 milliliters = 1000 milliliters
We know that,
1 litre = 1000 milliliters
Therefore Cathy drink 1 liter of water.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 14.
Mr. Banks left work at 5:15 P.M. It took him 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours to drive home. At what time did Mr. Banks arrive home?
Options:
a. 6:15 P.M.
b. 6:30 P.M.
c. 6:45 P.M.
d. 7:30 P.M.

Answer: 6:30 P.M.

Explanation:
Mr. Banks left work at 5:15 P.M. It took him 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours to drive home.
1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours = 1:15 hour
Add 5:15 P.M. with 1:15 hour
5 hour 15 mins
1 hour 15 mins
6 hour 30 mins
Therefore, Mr. Banks arrives home at 6:30 P.M.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4370

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 15.
A turtle walks 12 feet in one hour. How many inches does the turtle walk in one hour?
Options:
a. 12 inches
b. 24 inches
c. 124 inches
d. 144 inches

Answer: 144 inches

Explanation:
Given that, A turtle walks 12 feet in one hour.
Convert from 1 foot to inches.
1 foot = 12 inches
12 feet = 12 × 12 inches = 144 inches
The turtle walks 144 inches in an hour.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 16.
Jason and Doug competed in the long jump at a track meet. Jason’s long jump was 98 inches. Doug’s long jump was 3 yards. How much longer was Doug’s jump than Jason’s jump?
Options:
a. 1 inch
b. 10 inches
c. 12 inches
d. 20 inches

Answer: 10 inches

Explanation:
Jason and Doug competed in the long jump at a track meet.
Jason’s long jump was 98 inches.
Doug’s long jump was 3 yards.
1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 9 feet
9 feet = 9 × 12 = 108 inches
108 inches – 98 inches = 10 inches
Doug’s jump 10 inches longer than Jason’s jump.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 17.
Sarita used 54 ounces of apples to make an apple pie. How many pounds and ounces of apples did Sarita use?
Options:
a. 2 pounds 6 ounces
b. 3 pounds 6 ounces
c. 4 pounds 6 ounces
d. 8 pounds 6 ounces

Answer: 3 pounds 6 ounces

Explanation:
Sarita used 54 ounces of apples to make an apple pie.
Converting from ounces to pounds
We know that,
1 pound = 16 ounces
1 ounce = 1/16 pound
48 ounce + 6 ounce = 56 ounces
48 ounces = 48 × 1/16 pound = 3 pound
3 pound 6 ounces
Sarita uses 3 pounds 6 ounces of apples.
Therefore the correct answer is option B.

Question 18.
Morgan measures the capacity of a juice glass to be 12 fluid ounces. If she uses the glass to drink 4 glasses of water throughout the day, how many pints of water does Morgan drink?
Options:
a. 3 pints
b. 6 pints
c. 24 pints
d. 48 pints

Answer: 3 pints

Explanation:
3 pints because 12× 4 is 48 and 48 divided by 8 is 6 so then there are 6 cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
So, 6 cups = 3 × 2 pints
6 cups make 3 pints.
Thus Morgan drinks 3 pints of water.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 4380

Constructed Response

Question 19.
Louisa needs 3 liters of lemonade and punch for a picnic. She has 1,800 milliliters of lemonade. How much punch does she need? Explain how you found your answer.
______ mL

Answer: 1200 mL

Explanation:
Given:
Louisa needs 3 liters of lemonade and punch for a picnic.
She has 1,800 milliliters of lemonade.
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 L = 1000 milliliters
3 L = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3000 mL
3000 mL – 1800 mL = 1200 mL
Therefore, she need 1200 mL punch.

Question 20.
Maddie bought 10 quarts of ice cream. How many gallons and quarts of ice cream did Maddie buy? Explain how you found your answer.
______ gallons ______ quarts of ice cream

Answer: 2 gal 2 quarts of ice cream

Explanation:
Maddie bought 10 quarts of ice cream.
Convert quarts to gallons.
1 gal = 4 quarts
2 gal = 2 × 4 quarts = 8 quarts
2 gal 2 quart
Thus, Maddie buys 2 gal 2 quart of ice cream.

Performance Task

Question 21.
The Drama Club is showing a video of their recent play. The first showing began at 2:30 P.M. The second showing was scheduled to start at 5:25 P.M. with a \(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break between the showings.
A). How long is the video in hours and minutes?
______ hours and ______ minutes

Answer: 2 hour 25 minutes

Explanation:
The Drama Club is showing a video of their recent play.
The first showing began at 2:30 P.M.
The second showing was scheduled to start at 5:25 P.M. with a \(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break between the showings.
5 hour 25 minutes
2 hour 30 minutes

4 hour 85 minutes
2 hour 30 minutes
2 hour 55 minutes
\(\frac{1}{2}\)-hour break
2 hour 55 minutes
– 0 hour 30 minutes
2 hour 25 minutes

Question 21.
B). Explain how you can use a number line to find the answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Question 21.
C). The second showing started 20 minutes late. Will the second showing be over by 7:45 P.M.? Explain why your answer is reasonable.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
If the show starts 20 minutes late that means at 5:45 P.M then it will not end at 7:45 P.M.
5:45 P.M + 2:25 = 8:15 P.M.
So, the answer is no.

Conclusion

I wish the knowledge shared in this article on Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 10 Answer Key Convert Units of Measure has helped you a lot. Assess your preparation level by solving problems from Mid Chapter Checkpoint and Review Test. Refer to the Detailed Solutions Provided and understand where you are lagging.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities

go-math-grade-7-chapter-7-writing-and-solving-one-step-inequalities-answer-key

Quick and easy learning is possible with Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities. The answers in Go Math Grade 7 are prepared by the concerned subject experts. Go Math Answer Key helps the students of 7th grade to prove their best in the exams. So, Download Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities and kickstart your preparation.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities

It is important to gain knowledge along with the marks. Go Math Answer Key team’s main aim is to provide quality education for students of all grades. You can learn the basics of Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities in Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 7 Answer key. Check out the topics before you start practicing. Only practice will help you to score the best marks in the exams. Refer to our Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities while doing your homework and also during exam preparation. You can know how to draw the number line with the help of Go Math 7th Grade Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities.

Chapter 7 – Lesson 1:

Chapter 7 – Lesson: 2

Chapter 7 – Lesson: 3

Chapter 7 – Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities Lesson: 4

Chapter 7 – Lesson: 5

Chapter 7 – Performance Tasks

Guided Practice – Page No. 208

Write the resulting inequality.

Question 1.
−5 ≤ −2; Add 7 to both sides
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2 ≤ 5

Explanation:
Add 7 to both sides of the inequality.
-5 + 7 ≤ -2 + 7
2 ≤ 5

Question 2.
−6 < −3; Divide both sides by -3
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2 > 1

Explanation:
Divide both sides by -3. switch the inequality sign since you are dividing by a negative number.
-6/-3 > -3/-3
2 > 1

Question 3.
7 > −4; Subtract 7 from both sides
Type below:
___________

Answer: 0 > -11

Explanation:
7 – 7 > -4 – 7
Subtract 7 from both sides
0 > -11

Question 4.
−1 ≥ −8; Multiply both sides by -2
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2 ≤ 16

Explanation:
Multiply both sides by -2 switch the inequality sign since you are multiplying by a negative number.
-1(-2) ≤ -8(-2)
2 ≤ 16

Solve each inequality. Graph and check the solution.

Question 5.
n−5 ≥ −2
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
Solve the inequality first:
n – 5 ≥ -2
n – 5 + 5 ≥ -2 + 5
n ≥ 3
The number opposite the variable is 3, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would look like the one below:

Question 6.
3 + x < 7
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
Solve the inequality first:
3 + x < 7
3 – 3 + x < 7 – 3
x < 4
The number opposite the variable is 4, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would look like the one below:

Question 7.
−7y ≤ 14
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
Solve the inequality first:
−7y ≤ 14
-7y/-7 ≤ 14/-7
y ≥ -2
The number opposite the variable is -2, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would look like the one below:

Question 8.
\(\frac{b}{5}\) > −1
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
Solve the inequality first:
\(\frac{b}{5}\) > −1
Multiply 5 on both sides.
(5)\(\frac{b}{5}\) > −1(5)
b > -5
The number opposite the variable is -5, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is >, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would look like the one below:

Question 9.
For a scientific experiment, a physicist must make sure that the temperature of a metal at 0 °C gets no colder than -80 °C. The physicist changes the metal’s temperature at a steady rate of -4 °C per hour. For how long can the physicist change the temperature?
a. Let t represent the temperature in degrees Celsius. Write an inequality. Use the fact that the rate of change in temperature times the number of hours equals the final temperature.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
We need to use the fact that the final temperature is equal to the rate of change in temperature times the number of hours.
We are given that the rate of change is -4°C per hour so the final temperature is -4 times the number of hours.
Let t represent the number of hours. The final temperature is then -4t degrees Celsius after t hours.
If the temperature must be no colder than -80°C, then the final temperature must be greater than or equal to -80.
The inequality is then -4t ≥ -80.

Question 9.
b. Solve the inequality in part a. How long can the physicist change the temperature of the metal?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To solve the inequality for t, we need to divide both sides by -4. Remember to switch the inequality symbol since you are dividing by a negative number.
Dividing both sides by -4 then gives:
-4t/-4 ≤ -80/-4
t ≤ 20
The number of hours that the physicist can change the temperature of the metal is then at most 20 hours.

Question 9.
c. The physicist has to repeat the experiment if the metal gets cooler than -80 °C. How many hours would the physicist have to cool the metal for this to happen?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
From part (b), we know that the physicist can change the temperature for at most 20 hours to keep the temperature no colder than -80°C. This means the temperature will reach a temperature cooler than -80°C if he cools the metal for more than 20 hours.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 10.
Suppose you are solving an inequality. Under what circumstances do you reverse the inequality symbol?
Type below:
___________

Answer: You must reverse the inequality sign any time you multiply or divide both sides of the inequality by a negative number.

Page No. 209

In 11–16, solve each inequality. Graph and check the solution.

Question 11.
x − 35 > 15
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
x − 35 > 15
Add 35 on both sides
x – 35 + 35 > 15 + 35
x > 50
The number opposite the variable is 50, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is >, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 12.
193 + y ≥ 201
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
193 + y ≥ 201
193 + y – 193 ≥ 201 – 193
y ≥ 8
The number opposite the variable is 8, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 13.
−\(\frac{q}{7}\) ≥ −1
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−\(\frac{q}{7}\) ≥ −1
Multiply both sides by -7
(-7)−\(\frac{q}{7}\) ≥ −1(-7)
q ≤ 7
The number opposite the variable is 7, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≤, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 14.
−12x < 60
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−12x < 60
Divide both sides by -12
-12x/12 < 60/-12
x > -5
The number opposite the variable is -5, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is >, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 15.
5 > z − 3
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
5 > z − 3
Add both sides by 3
5 + 3 > z – 3 + 3
8 > z
z < 8
The number opposite the variable is 8, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 16.
0.5 ≤ \(\frac{y}{8}\)
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
0.5 ≤ \(\frac{y}{8}\)
Multiply both sides by 8
(8)0.5 ≤ \(\frac{y}{8}\)(8)
4 ≤ y
y ≥ 4
The number opposite the variable is 4, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 17.
The vet says that Lena’s puppy will grow to be at most 28 inches tall. Lena’s puppy is currently 1 foot tall. How many more inches will the puppy grow?
Type below:
___________

Answer: not more than 16 inches

Explanation:
Let x be the additional inches the puppy can grow remember 1 foot is 12 inches so the height of the puppy is 12 + x
12 + x ≤ 28
x ≤ 16

Question 18.
In a litter of 7 kittens, each kitten weighs less than 3.5 ounces. Find all the possible values of the combined weights of the kittens.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
All of the kittens must weigh more than 0 ounces so the smallest combined weight is more than 0 ounces. Since there are 7 kittens, each kitten weights less than 3.5 ounces, and 7 × 3.5 = 24.5, then the combined weights of the kittens must be less than 24.5 ounces.
This gives the inequality 0 < w < 24.5
where w is the combined weight of the kittens in ounces.

Question 19.
Geometry
The sides of the hexagon shown are equal in length. The perimeter of the hexagon is at most 42 inches. Find the possible side lengths of the hexagon.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 1
Type below:
___________

Answer: 0 < s ≤ 7

Explanation:
Let s be the side lengths of the hexagon since its sides are all equal in length.
The side lengths of the hexagon must be greater than 0 since lengths can’t be negative or 0 so s > 0.
The perimeter of the figure is the sum of its side lengths so the perimeter of the hexagon must be 6s since it has 6 sides that are all s inches long.
The perimeter is at most 42 inches so 6s ≤ 42.
Dividing both sides by 6 then gives s ≤ 7.
Combining the inequalities s > 0 and s ≤ 7 then gives possible side lengths of 0 < s ≤ 7.

Question 20.
To get a free meal at his favorite restaurant, Tom needs to spend $50 or more at the restaurant. He has already spent $30.25. How much more does Tom need to spend to get his free meal?
Type below:
___________

Answer: at least $ 19.75

Explanation:
Let x be the additional amount he needs to spend. subtract 30.25 on both sides to solve for x.
x + 30.25 ≥ 50
x ≥ 19.75

Question 21.
To cover a rectangular region of her yard, Penny needs at least 170.5 square feet of sod. The length of the region is 15.5 feet. What are the possible widths of the region?
Type below:
___________

Answer: at least 11 feet

Explanation:
Area is the length times width so let w be the width.
Divide both sides by 15.5 to solve for w.
15.5w ≥ 170.5
w ≥ 11

Question 22.
Draw Conclusions
A submarine descends from sea level to the entrance of an underwater cave. The elevation of the entrance is -120 feet. The rate of change in the submarine’s elevation is no greater than -12 feet per second. Can the submarine reach the entrance to the cave in less than 10 seconds? Explain.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
No. Since the rate of descent is less than -12 feet per second and the submarine is descending for less than 10 seconds, the submarine elevation will still be greater than -120. The submarine would have to descend at a rate greater than -12 feet per second to reach the entrance in less than 10 seconds or descend for more than 10 seconds at a rate less than -12 feet per second to reach the entrance.

Page No. 210

The sign shows some prices at a produce stand.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 2

Question 23.
Selena has $10. What is the greatest amount of spinach she can buy?
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) pounds

Explanation:
Let x be the number of pounds of spinach. divide both sides by 3 to solve for x.
3x ≤ 10
x ≤ \(\frac{10}{3}\)
x ≤ 3 \(\frac{1}{3}\) pounds

Question 24.
Gary has enough money to buy at most 5.5 pounds of potatoes. How much money does Gary have?
Type below:
___________

Answer: $2.75

Explanation:
Let x be the amount of money he has
Multiply the price per pound of potatoes by the number of pounds.
5.5(0.50) ≤ x
2.75 ≤ x

Question 25.
Florence wants to spend no more than $3 on onions. Will she be able to buy 2.5 pounds of onions? Explain.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Since each pound of onions costs $1.25, then 2.5 pounds of onions cost $1.25 × 2.5 ≈ 3.13.
Since $3.13 is greater than $3, she will not have enough money if she wants to spend no more than $3.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 26.
Counterexamples
John says that if one side of an inequality is 0, you don’t have to reverse the inequality symbol when you multiply or divide both sides by a negative number. Find an inequality that you can use to disprove John’s statement. Explain your thinking.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
A possible counterexample is -2x ≤ 0. Solving this correctly gives x ≥ 0 which means the inequality is true for all non-negative values. If you don’t switch the inequality sign you would get x ≤ 0 which means the inequality would be true for all non-positive numbers
x = -3 is a possible value for x ≤ 0 but -2x = -2(-3) = 6 which is not less than or equal to 0.

Question 27.
Look for a Pattern
Solve x + 1 > 10, x + 11 > 20, and x + 21 > 30. Describe a pattern. Then use the pattern to predict the solution of x + 9,991 > 10,000.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
x + 1 > 10
x > 9
Subtract both sides by 11
x + 11 > 20
x > 9
Subtract both sides by 21.
x + 21 > 30
x > 9
The pattern is that when the number on the left side of the inequality is 9 less than the number on the right side of the inequality, the answer is x > 9.
Since 9991 is 9 less than 10000, x + 9991 > 10,000 ha the solution x > 9

Question 28.
Persevere in Problem Solving
The base of a rectangular prism has a length of 13 inches and a width of \(\frac{1}{2}\) inch. The volume of the prism is less than 65 cubic inches. Find all possible heights of the prism. Show your work.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 0 < h < 10

Explanation:
Let h be the height of the prism. It is given that the prism has a length of 13 inches and a width of 1/2 inches.
Using the formula v = lbh
13(1/2) h< 65
Multiply 2/13 on both sides
2/13 (13/2)h< 2/13 × 65
h < 2 × 5
h < 10
Since the height must be a positive number, then h > 0. Combining h > 0 and h < 10 then gives the final answer of 0 < h < 10.

Guided Practice – Page No. 214

Draw algebra tiles to model each two-step inequality.

Question 1.
4x − 5 < 7
Type below:
___________

Answer:
On the left side, draw 4 positive rectangles to model 4x and 5 negative squares to represent -5. On the right side, draw 7 positive squares to represent 7. then draw < in the middle.
Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 6 answer key solution img-3

Question 2.
−3x + 6 > 9
Type below:
___________

Answer:
On the left side, draw 3 negative rectangles to model -3x and 6 positive squares to represent 6. On the right side, draw 9 positive squares to represent 9. then draw > in the middle.
Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 6 answer key solution img-4

Question 3.
The booster club needs to raise at least $7,000 for new football uniforms. So far, they have raised $1,250. Write an inequality to find the average amounts each of the 92 members can raise to meet the club’s objective.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 1250 + 92a ≥ 7000

Explanation:
The amount to be raised is $7000. The amount already raised is $1250. The number of members is 92.
The inequality is then of the form: amount already raised + number of members × amount each member raises ≥ target amount.
The inequality is then:
1250 + 92a ≥ 7000

Question 4.
Analyze what each part of 7x − 18 ≤ 32 means mathematically.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
x is the variable so it is the solution. 7x is the solution multiplied by 7. -18 means 7x is subtracted by 18. ≤ 32 means the result is no more than 32.

Question 5.
Write a real-world problem to represent 7x − 18 ≤ 32.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
A real-world problem could be: The temperature of a metal is currently at -18°C. A scientist will warm the metal at a rate of 7°C per hour until the temperature is 32°C. How many hours will it take to warm up the metal?

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
Describe the steps you would follow to write a two-step inequality you can use to solve a real-world problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The first step is to translate the words into an algebraic expression.
The next step is to determine the target amount.
The third step is to determine what inequality sign to use by determining if you need to be greater than, greater than or equal to, less than, less than, or equal to the target amount to write the inequality. Then solve the inequality sign, and target amount to write the inequality.
Then solve the inequality for the unknown value. Finally, interpret the solution in the context of the problem.

Independent Practice – Page No. 215

Question 7.
Three friends earned more than $200 washing cars. They paid their parents $28 for supplies and divided the rest of the money equally. Write an inequality to find possible amounts each friend earned. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3x + 28 > 200

Explanation:
Let x be the amount each friend received. Since there are 3 friends, then 3x is the amount of money they split evenly.
The amount of money they split evenly was the amount left over after paying their parent’s $28.
Therefore 3x + 28 is the total amount they earned.
3x + 28 > 200

Question 8.
Nick has $7.00. Bagels cost $0.75 each, and a small container of cream cheese costs $1.29. Write an inequality to find the numbers of bagels Nick can buy. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 0.75x + 1.29 ≤ 7

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of bagels he can buy.
Then 0.75x is the total cost of the bagels and 0.75x + 1.29 is the total cost of his purchase.

Question 9.
Chet needs to buy 4 work shirts, all costing the same amount. After he uses a $25 gift certificate, he can spend no more than $75. Write an inequality to find the possible costs for a shirt. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 4x – 25 ≤ 75

Explanation:
Let x represent the cost of each skirt the 4x is the total costs of the shirts. Since he has a $25 gift card, the total amount he is spending is 4x – 25.
4x – 25 ≤ 75

Question 10.
Due to fire laws, no more than 720 people may attend a performance at Metro Auditorium. The balcony holds 120 people. There are 32 rows on the ground floor, each with the same number of seats. Write an inequality to find the numbers of people that can sit in a ground-floor row if the balcony is full. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 32x + 120 ≤ 720

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of people that can sit in each ground floor row. then 32x is the total number of people sitting in the ground floor.
Since 120 people are sitting in the balcony, the total number of people is 32x + 120.

Question 11.
Liz earns a salary of $2,100 per month, plus a commission of 5% of her sales. She wants to earn at least $2,400 this month. Write an inequality to find amounts of sales that will meet her goal. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 2100 + 0.05x ≥ 2400

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of sales then 0.05x is the amount she earns in commission and 2100 + 0.05x is her total earnings.
2100 + 0.05x ≥ 2400

Question 12.
Lincoln Middle School plans to collect more than 2,000 cans of food in a food drive. So far, 668 cans have been collected. Write an inequality to find numbers of cans the school can collect on each of the final 7 days of the drive to meet this goal. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 7x + 668 > 2000

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of cans collected each day. Then 7x is the total number of cans collected on the final 7 days of the drive.
Since they have collected 668 cans already, the total number of cans collected is 7x + 668.
They want to collect more than 2000 cans, so the inequality is:
7x + 668 > 2000

Question 13.
Joanna joins a CD club. She pays $7 per month plus $10 for each CD that she orders. Write an inequality to find how many CDs she can purchase in a month if she spends no more than $100. Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 7 + 10x ≤ 100

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of CDs then 10x is the total amount spent on CDs and 7 + 10x is the total purchase amount for the month.
7 + 10x ≤ 100

Question 14.
Lionel wants to buy a belt that costs $22. He also wants to buy some shirts that are on sale for $17 each. He has $80. What inequality can you write to find the number of shirts he can buy? Identify what your variable represents.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 22 + 17x ≤ 80

Explanation:
Let x represent the number of shirts he can buy then 17x is the total cost of the shirts and 22 + 17x is the total cost
22 + 17x ≤ 80

Page No. 216

Question 15.
Write a situation for 15x − 20 ≤ 130 and solve.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
You are given in the inequality 15x − 20 ≤ 130 and need to write a situation that is represented by this inequality. A possible situation could be:
You are going shopping to buy some shirts. The shirts cost $15 each. You have a $20 gift card and $130 in cash. How many shirts can you buy?
This solution is modeled by the inequality 15x − 20 ≤ 130 because if we let x be the number of shirts you buy, then 15x is the cost of the shirts before you use the gift card since each shirt is $15. The total cost after using the $20 gift card would then be 15x – 20 dollars. Since you have $130 in cash, you can spend at most $130 so the total cost of 15x – 20 must then be less than or equal to 130.
Therefore, 15x − 20 ≤ 130.
Solving this gives:
15x − 20 ≤ 130
Add 20 on both sides
15x ≤ 130
Divide both sides by 15.
x ≤ 10

Analyze Relationships

Write >, <, ≥, or ≤ in the blank to express the given relationship.

Question 16.
m is at least 25
______

Answer: m ≥ 25

Explanation:
m is at least 25 means m ≥ 25 since at least means it can equal or needs to be bigger.

Question 17.
k is no greater than 9
______

Answer: k ≤ 9

Explanation:
k is no greater than 9 means k ≤ 9 since no greater means it can equal or must be smaller.

Question 18.
p is less than 48
______

Answer: p < 48

Explanation:
p is less than 48 means p < 48 since the < symbol in words is “less than”.

Question 19.
b is no more than -5
______

Answer: b ≤ -5

Explanation:
b is no more than -5 means b ≤ -5 since no more means it can equal or must be smaller.

Question 20.
h is at most 56
______

Answer: h ≤ 56

Explanation:
h is at most 56 means h ≤ 56 since at most means it can equal or must be smaller.

Question 21.
w is no less than 0
______

Answer: w ≥ 0

Explanation:
w is no less than 0 means w ≥ 0 since no less than means it can equal or is bigger.

Question 22.
Critical Thinking
Marie scored 95, 86, and 89 on three science tests. She wants her average score for 6 tests to be at least 90. What inequality can you write to find the average scores that she can get on her next three tests to meet this goal? Use s to represent the lowest average score.
Type below:
______

Answer: (95 + 86 + 89 + 3s)/6 ≥ 90

Explanation:
Let s be the average score on the remaining 3 tests. Then 3s is the sum of these 3 remaining tests. Since averages are found by adding up all the members, which gives 95 + 86 + 89 + 3s, and dividing by the total amount of numbers, which is 6, the inequality to the left can be used to find the lowest average she can get to have minimum total average of 90.
(95 + 86 + 89 + 3s)/6 ≥ 90

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 23.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Write an inequality that expresses the reason the lengths 5 feet, 10 feet, and 20 feet could not be used to make a triangle. Explain how inequality demonstrates that fact.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
A side of a triangle must be greater than the difference of the other two sides and smaller than the sum of the other two sides.
Since 20 > 5 +10, the side with length 20 is not less than the sum of the other two sides.

Question 24.
Analyze Relationships
The number m satisfies the relationship m < 0. Write an inequality expressing the relationship between -m and 0. Explain your reasoning.
Type below:
__________

Answer: Multiplying both sides of m < 0 by -1 gives -m > 0 since you must switch the inequality sign when you multiply by a negative number.

Question 25.
Analyze Relationships The number n satisfies the relationship n > 0. Write three inequalities to express the relationship between n and \(\frac{1}{n}\).
Type below:
__________

Answer: 0 < n < 1: n < \(\frac{1}{n}\), n = 1: n = \(\frac{1}{n}\), n > 1: n > \(\frac{1}{n}\)

Explanation:
Since n is positive, there are three cases for the value of n to consider when comparing n and \(\frac{1}{n}\).
0 < n < 1: In case, n is a fraction smaller than 1 such as \(\frac{1}{4}\). Its reciprocal is the n bigger than 1, such as 1/\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 4.
Therefore, n < \(\frac{1}{n}\)
n = 1: If n = 1, then the reciprocal is also 1 so n = \(\frac{1}{n}\)
n > 1: If n is a value greater than 1, such as \(\frac{3}{2}\), then the reciprocal is smaller than 1, such as 1/\(\frac{3}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\).
Therefore n > \(\frac{1}{n}\)

Page No. 220

Question 1.
Describe how to solve the inequality 3x + 4 < 13 using algebra tiles.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 3
Type below:
__________

Answer:
First, remove 4 positive squares from each side. This leaves 9 positive squares on the right side.
Then divide each side into 3 equal groups.
Each group would then have 3 positive squares on the left side. since the rectangles on the left are positive, the answer would be x < 3.

Solve each inequality. Graph and check the solution.

Question 2.
5d − 13 < 32
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
5d − 13 < 32
Add 13 on both sides
5d – 13 + 13 < 32 + 13
5d < 45
Divide 5 on both sides
5d/5 < 45/5
d < 9
The number opposite to the variable is 9, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 3.
−4b + 9 ≤ −7
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−4b + 9 ≤ −7
Subtract 9 on both sides
-4b + 9 – 9 ≤ −7 – 9
-4b ≤ −16
Divide -4 by both sides
-4b/-4 ≤ −16/-4
b ≥ 4
The number opposite to the variable is 4, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Circle any given values that make the inequality true.

Question 4.
2m + 18 > −4
m = −12; m = −11; m = −10
Type below:
__________

Answer: m = -10

Explanation:
m = -12
2m + 18 > −4
2(-12)  + 18 = -24 + 18 = -6 > -4 not true
m = -11
2m + 18 > −4
2(-11) + 18 > -4
-22 + 18 > -4
-4 > -4 not true
m = -10
2m + 18 > −4
2(-10) + 18 > -4
-20 + 18 > -4
-2 > -4 true

Question 5.
−6y + 3 ≥ 0
y = 1; y = \(\frac{1}{2}\); y = 0
Type below:
__________

Answer: y = \(\frac{1}{2}\); y = 0

Explanation:
y = 1
−6y + 3 ≥ 0
-6(1) + 3 ≥ 0
-6 + 3 ≥ 0 not true
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
−6y + 3 ≥ 0
−6(\(\frac{1}{2}\)) + 3 ≥ 0
-3 + 3 ≥ 0
0 ≥ 0 true
y = 0
−6y + 3 ≥ 0
-6(0) + 3 ≥ 0
3 ≥ 0 true

Question 6.
Lizzy has 6.5 hours to tutor 4 students and spend 1.5 hours in a lab. She plans to tutor each student the same amount of time. The inequality 6.5 − 4t ≥ 1.5 can be used to find t, the amount of time in hours Lizzy could spend with each student. Solve the inequality. Graph and interpret the solution. Can Lizzy tutor each student for 1.5 hours? Explain.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
6.5 − 4t ≥ 1.5
Subtract both sides by 6.5
6.5 − 4t – 6.5 ≥ 1.5 – 6.5
− 4t ≥ 1.5
Divide both sides by -4 remember to switch the inequality sign since you are dividing by a negative number.
t ≤ 1.25
Since the inequality sign has an equal sign, draw a closed circle at 1.25. Since the inequality is less than, draw an arrow to the left the interpretation of this problem is that she can tutor each student no more than 1.25 hours.
Since 1.5 hours is more than 1.25 hours, she cannot tutor each student for 1.5 hours.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 7.
How do you solve a two-step inequality?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To solve a two-step inequality you must use inverse operations.
Use subtraction to get rid of addition, and addition to get rid of subtraction for any terms that are being added or subtracted to the term that contains the variable. Use multiplication to get rid of any coefficient on the variable if it is a fraction and use division to get rid of any coefficient on the variable if its an integer. If the coefficient is negative, make sure to switch the inequality sign if you multiply or divide by a negative number.

Independent Practice – Page No. 221

Solve each inequality. Graph and check the solution.

Question 8.
2s + 5 ≥ 49
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
2s + 5 ≥ 49
Subtract 5 on both sides
2s + 5 – 5 ≥ 49 – 5
2s ≥ 44
Divide both sides by 2.
s ≥ 22
The number opposite to the variable is 22, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 9.
−3t + 9 ≥ −21
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−3t + 9 ≥ −21
Subtract 9 on both sides
-3t + 9 – 9 ≥ −21 – 9
-3t ≥ −30
Divide by -3 on both sides
t ≤ 10
The number opposite to the variable is 10, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≤, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 10.
55 > −7v + 6
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
55 > −7v + 6
Subtract 6 on both sides
55 – 6 > −7v + 6 – 6
49 > -7v
Divide -7 on both sides
-7 < v
v > -7
The number opposite to the variable is -7, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is >, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 11.
41 > 6m − 7
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
41 > 6m − 7
Add 7 on both sides
41 + 7 > 6m – 7 + 7
48 > 6m
Divide by 6 on both sides
8 > m
m < 8
The number opposite to the variable is 8, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 12.
\(\frac{a}{-8}\) + 15 > 23
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
\(\frac{a}{-8}\) + 15 > 23
Subtract 15 on both sides
\(\frac{a}{-8}\) + 15 – 15 > 23 – 15
(-8)\(\frac{a}{-8}\) > (8)(-8)
a < -64
The number opposite to the variable is -64, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 13.
\(\frac{f}{2}\) − 22 < 48
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
\(\frac{f}{2}\) − 22 < 48
Add 22 on both sides
\(\frac{f}{2}\) − 22 + 22 < 48 + 22
\(\frac{f}{2}\) < 70
Multiply 2 on both sides
(2)\(\frac{f}{2}\) < 70(2)
f < 140
The number opposite to the variable is 140, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 14.
−25 + \(\frac{t}{2}\) ≥ 50
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−25 + \(\frac{t}{2}\) ≥ 50
Add 25 on both sides
−25 + \(\frac{t}{2}\) + 25 ≥ 50 + 25
\(\frac{t}{2}\) ≥ 75
Multiply 2 on both sides
(2)\(\frac{t}{2}\) ≥ 75 (2)
t ≥ 150
The number opposite to the variable is 150, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 15.
10 + \(\frac{g}{-9}\) > 12
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
10 + \(\frac{g}{-9}\) > 12
Subtract 10 on both sides
10 + \(\frac{g}{-9}\) -10 > 12 – 10
\(\frac{g}{-9}\) > 2
Divide both sides by -9
g < -18
The number opposite to the variable is -18, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is <, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 16.
25.2 ≤ − 1.5y + 1.2
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
25.2 ≤ − 1.5y + 1.2
Subtract 1.2 on both sides
25.2 – 1.2 ≤ − 1.5y + 1.2 – 1.2
24 ≤ -1.5y
Divide both sides by 1.5
-16 ≥ y
y ≤ -16
The number opposite to the variable is -16, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≤, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 17.
−3.6 ≥ −0.3a + 1.2
Type below:
__________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
−3.6 ≥ −0.3a + 1.2
Subtract 1.2 on both sides
−3.6 – 1.2 ≥ −0.3a + 1.2 – 1.2
-4.8 ≥ −0.3a
Divide both sides by -0.3
16 ≤ a
a ≥ 16
The number opposite to the variable is 16, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≥, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 18.
What If?
The perimeter of a rectangle is at most 80 inches. The length of the rectangle is 25 inches. The inequality 80 − 2w ≥ 50 can be used to find w, the width of the rectangle in inches. Solve the inequality and interpret the solution. How will the solution change if the width must be at least 10 inches and a whole number?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
The perimeter of a rectangle is at most 80 inches. The length of the rectangle is 25 inches. The inequality 80 − 2w ≥ 50 can be used to find w, the width of the rectangle in inches.
Subtract 80 on both sides
-2w ≥ -30
Divide -2 on both sides
w ≤ 15
The interpretation of this solution is that width must be a positive real number that is at most 15 inches.
If the width must be at least 10 inches and a whole number, then the solution would be the whole number lengths such that 10 ≤ w ≤ 15 which is 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15 inches.

Page No. 222

Question 19.
Interpret the Answer
Grace earns $7 for each car she washes. She always saves $25 of her weekly earnings. This week, she wants to have at least $65 in spending money. How many cars must she wash? Write and solve an inequality to represent this situation. Interpret the solution in context.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Let x represent the number of cars she must wash then 7x is the total amount she makes from washing cars. Since she is saving $25 of her earnings, 7x – 25 is the amount of earnings she will have to spend.
7x – 25 ≥ 65
Add 25 on both sides
7x – 25 + 25 ≥ 65 + 25
7x ≥ 90
Divide both sides by 7.
x ≥ 90/7 ≈ 13

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 20.
Critical Thinking
Is there any value of x with the property that x < x – 1? Explain your reasoning.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Subtracting x on both sides of x < x – 1 gives x – x < x – 1 -x
0 < -1.
Since this not a true statement, inequality is not true for any value of x.

Question 21.
Analyze Relationships A compound inequality consists of two simple equalities joined by the word “and” or “or.” Graph the solution sets of each of these compound inequalities. a. x > 2 and x < 7
Type below:
__________

Answer: Since the two inequalities are joined by “and”, we need to satisfy both inequalities. Therefore, we need all values greater than 2 but also we need values less than 7. Hence we can place a hollow dot on 2 and shade the line going to the right until another hollow dot on 7.

Question 21.
b. x < 2 or x > 7
Type below:
__________

Answer: Since the two inequalities are joined by “or”, we need to satisfy either of the inequalities. Therefore, we need all values less than 2 but also we need to graph the values greater than 7. Hence we can place a hollow dot on 2 and shade the line going to the left and another hollow dot on 7 and shade the line going to the right.

Question 21.
c. Describe the solution set of the compound inequality x < 2 and x > 7.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The solution set for x > 2 and x < 7 sould be 2 < x < 7.

Question 21.
d. Describe the solution set of the compound inequality x > 2 or x < 7.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The solution set for x < 2 and x > 7 sould be (-∞, 2) ∪ (7, ∞).

Question 22.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Joseph used the problem-solving strategy Work Backward to solve the inequality 2n + 5 < 13. Shawnee solved the inequality using the algebraic method you used in this lesson. Compare the two methods.
Type below:
__________

Answer: Both involve using the same operations. The only difference is that working backward is done mostly mentally while algebraically is done on paper. It is easier to determine which direction the inequality is pointing when using the algebraic method.

7.1 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities – Page No. 223

Solve each inequality.

Question 1.
n + 7 < −3
Type below:
__________

Answer: n < -10

Explanation:
Subtract 7 on both sides
n + 7 – 7 < −3 – 7
n < -10

Question 2.
5p ≥ −30
Type below:
__________

Answer: p ≥ -6

Explanation:
5p ≥ −30
Divide by 5 on both sides
p ≥ -6

Question 3.
14 < k + 11
Type below:
__________

Answer: 3 < k

Explanation:
14 < k + 11
Subtract 11 on both sides
14 – 11 < k + 11 – 11
3 < k

Question 4.
\(\frac{d}{-3}\) ≤ −6
Type below:
__________

Answer: d ≥ 18

Explanation:
\(\frac{d}{-3}\) ≤ −6
Multiply both sides by -3 remember to switch the inequality sign since you are multiplying both sides by a negative number.
d ≥ 18

Question 5.
c − 2.5 ≤ 2.5
Type below:
__________

Answer: c ≤ 5

Explanation:
c − 2.5 ≤ 2.5
Add 2.5 on both sides
c − 2.5 + 2.5 ≤ 2.5 + 2.5
c ≤ 5

Question 6.
12 ≥ −3b
Type below:
__________

Answer: -4 ≤ b

Explanation:
12 ≥ −3b
Divide by -3 on both sides
-4 ≤ b

Question 7.
Jose has scored 562 points on his math tests so far this semester. To get an A for the semester, he must score at least 650 points. Write and solve an inequality to find the minimum number of points he must score on the remaining tests in order to get an A.
Type below:
__________

Answer: x + 562 ≥ 650

Explanation:
Let x represent the score he must receive on the remaining tests. Then x + 562 is his total score for the semester.
x + 562 ≥ 650
Subtract 562 on both sides
x ≥ 88

7.2 Writing Two-Step Inequalities

Question 8.
During a scuba dive, Lainey descended to a point 20 feet below the ocean surface. She continued her descent at a rate of 20 feet per minute. Write an inequality you could solve to find the number of minutes she can continue to descend if she does not want to reach a point more than 100 feet below the ocean surface.
Type below:
__________

Answer:
Let x represent the number of minutes. Since she is descending 20 feet per minute, then -20x represents her altitude. It is negative since descending means her altitude is decreasing.
Since she started at 20 feet below the ocean surface, she started at -20 feet. Its negative since an altitude below the ocean surface must be represented by a negative number.
Her ending position is the sum of how far she has descended and her initial position so her ending position is -20 + (-20x) = -20 – 20x
She doesn’t want to travel more than 100 feet below the ocean surface so she needs to be higher than -100 feet.
The inequality is then -20 -20x ≥ -100.

7.3 Solving Two-Step Inequalities

Solve.

Question 9.
2s + 3 > 15
Type below:
__________

Answer: s > 6

Explanation:
2s + 3 > 15
Subtract 3 on both sides
2s + 3 – 3 > 15 – 3
2s > 12
Divide by 2 on both sides
s > 6

Question 10.
−\(\frac{d}{12}\) − 6 < 1
Type below:
__________

Answer: d > -84

Explanation:
−\(\frac{d}{12}\) − 6 < 1
Add 6 on both sides
−\(\frac{d}{12}\) − 6 + 6 < 1 + 6
d > -84

Question 11.
−6w − 18 ≥ 36
Type below:
__________

Answer: w ≤ -9

Explanation:
−6w − 18 ≥ 36
Add 18 on both sides
−6w − 18 + 18 ≥ 36 + 18
-6w ≥ 54
Divide by -6
w ≤ -9

Question 12.
\(\frac{z}{4}\) + 22 ≤ 38
Type below:
__________

Answer: z ≤ 64

Explanation:
Subtract 22 on both sides
\(\frac{z}{4}\) + 22 – 22 ≤ 38 – 22
\(\frac{z}{4}\) ≤ 16
z ≤ 64

Question 13.
\(\frac{b}{9}\) − 34 < −36
Type below:
__________

Answer: b < -18

Explanation:
\(\frac{b}{9}\) − 34 < −36
Add 34 on both sides
\(\frac{b}{9}\) − 34 + 34 < −36 + 34
\(\frac{b}{9}\) < -2
b < -18

Question 14.
−2p + 12 > 8
Type below:
__________

Answer: p < 2

Explanation:
−2p + 12 > 8
Subtract 12 on both sides
-2p + 12 – 12 > 8 – 12
-2p > -4
p < 2

Essential Question

Question 15.
How can you recognize whether a real-world situation should be represented by an equation or an inequality?
Type below:
__________

Answer:
You use an equation when the situation involves finding an exact answer. You use an inequality when the solution can have more than one value. Problems that require the use of inequalities have phrases in them such as “at least”, “no more”, “at most” and “no less than”.

Selected Response – Page No. 224

Question 1.
Which graph models the solution of the inequality −6 ≤ −3x?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 4
b. Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 5
c. Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 6
d. Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 7

Answer: Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 6
Dividing both sides of −6 ≤ −3x by -3 gives 2 ≥ x.
Rewriting this so x is on the left side gives x ≤ 2. The graph must have a closed circle at 2 since the inequality has an equal sign and must be shaded to the left since its <.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
A taxi cab costs $1.75 for the first mile and $0.75 for each additional mile. You have $20 to spend on your ride. Which inequality could be solved to find how many miles you can travel, if n is the number of additional miles?
Options:
a. 1.75n + 0.75 ≥ 20
b. 1.75n + 0.75 ≤ 20
c. 0.75n + 1.75 ≥ 20
d. 0.75n + 1.75 ≤ 20

Answer: 1.75n + 0.75 ≤ 20

Explanation:
Let n represent the number of additional miles. Then 0.75n is the cost of the additional miles which gives a total cost of 1.75 + 0.75n. You can spend a maximum of $20 so the inequality is ≤.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 3.
The inequality \(\frac{9}{5}\)C + 32 < −40 can be used to find Celsius temperatures that are less than -40° Fahrenheit. What is the solution of the inequality?
Options:
a. C < 40
b. C < −\(\frac{40}{9}\)
c. C < −40
d. C < −\(\frac{72}{5}\)

Answer: C < −40

Explanation:
\(\frac{9}{5}\)C + 32 < −40
Subtract 32 on both sides.
\(\frac{9}{5}\)C + 32 – 32 < −40 – 32
\(\frac{9}{5}\)C < -72
c < -40
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
The 30 members of a choir are trying to raise at least $1,500 to cover travel costs to a singing camp. They have already raised $600. Which inequality could you solve to find the average amounts each member can raise that will at least meet the goal?
Options:
a. 30x + 600 > 1,500
b. 30x + 600 ≥ 1,500
c. 30x + 600 < 1,500
d. 30x + 600 ≤ 1,500

Answer: 30x + 600 ≥ 1,500

Explanation:
Given,
The 30 members of a choir are trying to raise at least $1,500 to cover travel costs to a singing camp. They have already raised $600.
Let x represent the average amount each member raises.
There are 30 members so the members raise a combined amount of 30x.
Since they have already raised $600, the total amount raised 30x + 600 they need to raise at least $1500 so the inequality is ≥.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Which represents the solution for the inequality 3x − 7 > 5?
Options:
a. x < 4
b. x ≤ 4
c. x > 4
d. x ≥ 4

Answer: x > 4

Explanation:
Add 7 on both sides
3x − 7 > 5
3x − 7 + 7> 5 + 7
3x > 12
x > 4
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Which inequality has the following graphed solution?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 8
Options:
a. 3x + 8 ≤ 2
b. 4x + 12 < 4
c. 2x + 5 ≤ 1
d. 3x + 6 < 3

Answer: 4x + 12 < 4

Explanation:
4x + 12 < 4
Subtract 12 on both sides
4x + 12 – 12 < 4 – 12
4x < -8
x < -2
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 7.
Divide: −36 ÷ 6.
Options:
a. 30
b. 6
c. -6
d. -30

Answer: -6

Explanation:
6 divides 36 six times
−36 ÷ 6 = -6
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 8.
Eleni bought 2 pounds of grapes at a cost of $3.49 per pound. She paid with a $10 bill. How much change did she get back?
Options:
a. $3.02
b. $4.51
c. $6.51
d. $6.98

Answer: $3.02

Explanation:
Given,
Eleni bought 2 pounds of grapes at a cost of $3.49 per pound. She paid with a $10 bill.
We have to find the total amount paid for the grapes
2 × 3.49 = 6.98
10 – 6.98 = 3.02
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 9.
In golf, the lower your score, the better. Negative scores are best of all. Teri scored +1 on each of the first three holes at a nine-hole miniature golf course. Her goal is a total score of -9 or better after she has completed the final six holes.
a. Let h represent the score Teri must average on each of the last six holes in order to meet her goal. Write a two-step inequality you can solve to find h.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 3 +6h ≤ -9

Explanation:
If h is her average score for the last 6 holes, then 6h is her total score for the last 6 holes.
She currently has a score of 3 so ger total score for all 9 holes is 3 + 6h.
She wants a score of -9 or better and since smaller scores are better, the inequality is ≤.

Question 9.
b. Solve the inequality.
Type below:
_____________

Answer: h ≤ -2

Explanation:
6h ≤ -12
Divide by 6 on both sides
h ≤ -2

EXERCISES – Page No. 226

Simplify each expression.

Question 1.
\(\left(2 x+3 \frac{2}{5}\right)+\left(5 x-\frac{4}{5}\right)\)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 7x + 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Explanation:
We are given  the expression,
\(\left(2 x+3 \frac{2}{5}\right)+\left(5 x-\frac{4}{5}\right)\)
Group the like terms
(2x + 5x) + (3\(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{4}{5}\))
7x + 2 \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Question 2.
(−0.5x − 4) − (1.5x + 2.3)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: -2x – 6.3

Explanation:
(−0.5x − 4) − (1.5x + 2.3)
(−0.5x − 4) − 1.5x – 2.3
Combine the lilke terms
-0.5x – 1.5x – 4 – 2.3
-2x – 6.3

Question 3.
9(3t + 4b)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 27t + 36b

Explanation:
9(3t + 4b)
9 × 3t + 9 × 4b
27t + 36b

Question 4.
0.7(5a − 13p)
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 3.5a – 9.1p

Explanation:
0.7(5a − 13p)
0.7 × 5a – 0.7 × 13p
3.5a – 9.1p

Factor each expression.

Question 5.
8x + 56
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 8(x + 7)

Explanation:
Since 56 ÷ 8 = 7 and 8 ÷ 8 = 1, factor out 8 from both terms
8x + 56 = 8(x + 7)

Question 6.
3x + 57
Type below:
_____________

Answer: 3(x + 19)

Explanation:
Since 3 ÷ 3 = 1 and 57 ÷ 3 = 19 factor out 3 from both terms.
3x + 57 = 3(x + 19)

Question 7.
1.6 + y = −7.3
_______

Answer: y = -8.9

Explanation:
subtract 1.6 on both sides
1.6 + y – 1.6 = -7.3 – 1.6
y = -8.9

Question 8.
−\(\frac{2}{3}\) n = 12
_______

Answer: n = -18

Explanation:
−\(\frac{2}{3}\) n = 12
n = −\(\frac{3}{2}\)(12)
n = -3 × 6
n = -18

Question 9.
The cost of a ticket to an amusement park is $42 per person. For groups of up to 8 people, the cost per ticket decreases by $3 for each person in the group. Marcos’s ticket cost $30. Write and solve an equation to find the number of people in Marcos’s group.
_______ people

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Given that,
The cost of a ticket to an amusement park is $42 per person.
For groups of up to 8 people, the cost per ticket decreases by $3 for each person in the group. Marcos’s ticket cost $30.
Let x represent the number of people in his group then the ticket price has changed by -3x dollars.
The original price is $42 so the discount price is 42 – 3x
42 – 3x = 30
-3x = 30 – 42
-3x = -12
Divide both sides by -3
x = 4
Thus there are 4 people in Marcos’s group.

Question 10.
8x − 28 = 44
_______

Answer:
To plot a point, starting from 0, count the number of units going to the left or right.
Given equation is
8x − 28 = 44
Add 28 on both sides
8x – 28 + 28 = 44 + 28
8x = 72
Divide by 8 on both sides
x = 9
To plot 9 on a number line, from 0, we move 9 units to the right.

Question 11.
−5z + 4 = 34
_______

Answer:
To plot a point, starting from 0, count the number of units going to the left or right.
Given equation is
−5z + 4 = 34
Subtract 4 on both sides
-5z + 4 – 4 = 34 – 4
-5z = 30
Divide both sides by -5
z = -6
To plot -6 on the number line, from 0, we move 6 units to the left.

EXERCISES – Page No. 227

Question 1.
Prudie needs $90 or more to be able to take her family out to dinner. She has already saved $30 and wants to take her family out to eat in 4 days.
a. Suppose that Prudie earns the same each day. Write an inequality to find how much she needs to earn each day.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Let x be the amount she makes each day then 4x is the amount she will make in the 4 days before she takes her family out to eat and 4x + 30 is the total amount she will have saved.
4x + 30 ≥ 90

Question 1.
b. Suppose that Prudie earns $18 each day. Will she have enough money to take her family to dinner in 4 days? Explain.
_______

Answer:
4(18) + 30 = 72 + 30 = 102
She will have saved $102 in total if she earns $18 each day so she will have enough money.

Solve each inequality. Graph and check the solution.

Question 2.
11 − 5y < −19
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
11 − 5y < −19
Subtract 11 on both sides
11 – 5y – 11 < −19 – 11
-5y < -30
Divide by -5 on both sides
y > 6
The number opposite to the variable is 6, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is >, we use a hollow dot and shade the line going to the right. Its graph would like the one below:

Question 3.
7x − 2 ≤ 61
Type below:
___________

Answer:
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
From here, shade the line going to the left if the inequality is either ≤ or < and shade the line going to the right if the inequality is either ≥ or >.
First, solve the inequality:
7x − 2 ≤ 61
Add 2 on both sides
7x – 2 + 2 ≤ 61 + 2
7x ≤ 63
Divide by 7 into both sides
x ≤ 9
The number opposite to the variable is 9, we look for this in the number line. Since the inequality is ≤, we use a closed dot and shade the line going to the left. Its graph would like the one below:

Unit 3 Performance Tasks – Page No. 228

Question 1.
Mechanical Engineer
A mechanical engineer is testing the amount of force needed to make a spring stretch by a given amount. The force y is measured in units called Newtons, abbreviated N. The stretch x is measured in centimeters. Her results are shown in the graph.
a. Write an equation for the line. Explain, using the graph and then using the equation, why the relationship is proportional.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 9
Type below:
___________

Answer: The graph is linear and passes through the origin so the relationship is proportional. find k by using the formula k = y/x where (x, y) is a point on the line then plug k into the equation of a line y = kx.

Question 1.
b. Identify the rate of change and the constant of proportionality.
Type below:
___________

Answer: k = 8

Explanation:
Observe part a the units N/cm since the units for y are N and the units for x are cm and the units for k must be the units for y divided by the units for x.
8 N/ cm
k = 8

Question 1.
c. What is the meaning of the constant of proportionality in the context of the problem?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Since the rate of change is 8 N/ cm this means that for every 1 cm stretch in the spring, the force required in Newton increases by 8 N.

Question 1.
d. The engineer applies a force of 41.6 Newtons to the spring. Write and solve an equation to find the corresponding stretch in the spring.
______ cm

Answer:
y = 8x
41.6 = 8x
x = 41.6/8
x = 5.2 cm

Question 2.
A math tutor charges $30 for a consultation, and then $25 per hour. An online tutoring service charges $30 per hour.
a. Does either service represent a proportional relationship? Explain.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The math tutor charges $30 initially but has a constant rate of $25 per hour after. This means that it still is a proportional relationship. The online tutoring charges a constant rate of $30 per hour and thus is also a proportional relationship.

Question 2.
b. Write an equation for the cost c of h hours of tutoring for either service. Which service charges less for 4 hours of tutoring? Show your work.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Using y as the total cost and x as the number of hours, we can represent each tutoring service. For Math tutor, we can write this as y = 30 + 25x while for the online tutoring, we can write this as y = 30x.
Substituting x = 4, we can see that:
For Math tutor:
y = 30 + 25x
y = 30 + 25(4)
y = 30 + 100
y = 130
For Online tutoring:
y = 30x
y = 30(4)
y = 120
Therefore, the online tutoring service charge less at $120.

Selected Response – Page No. 229

Question 1.
Which expression is equivalent to (9x − 3 \(\frac{1}{8}\)) − (7x + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\))?
Options:
a. 2x − 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. 16x−4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
c. 2x − 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)
d. 16x − 1 \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer: 2x − 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
(9x − 3 \(\frac{1}{8}\)) − (7x + 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\))
9x − 3 \(\frac{1}{8}\)− 7x – 1 \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Combine the lilke terms
2x – 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
Timothy began the week with $35. He bought lunch at school, paying $2.25 for each meal. Let x be the number of meals he bought at school and y be the amount of money he had left at the end of the week. Which equation represents the relationship in the situation?
Options:
a. y = 2.25x + 35
b. y = 35 − 2.25x
c. x = 35 − 2.25y
d. y = 2.25x − 35

Answer: y = 35 − 2.25x

Explanation:
Let x be the number of meals he buys means 2.25x is the amount of money he has spent on meals. The money he has left is then 35 – 2.25x
The expression is y = 35 – 2.25x
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 3.
Which expression factors to 8(x + 2)?
Options:
a. 8x + 2
b. 8x + 10
c. 16x
d. 8x + 16

Answer: 8x + 16

Explanation:
Given the expression
8(x + 2)
8x + 8(2)
8x + 16
Thus the correcr answer is option D.

Question 4.
Ramón’s toll pass account has a value of $32. Each time he uses the toll road, $1.25 is deducted from the account. When the value drops below $10, he must add value to the toll pass. Which inequality represents how many times Ramón can use the toll road without having to add value to the toll pass?
Options:
a. 10 − 1.25t ≥ 0
b. −1.25t + 32 < 10
c. 32 − 1.25t ≥ 10
d. 32 − 10t ≥ 1.25

Answer: 32 − 1.25t ≥ 10

Explanation:
Let t represent the number of times he uses the toll road then 1.25t is the amount deducted from his account. the remaining balance is then 32 – 1.25t.
Since his balance must be at least $10 for him to not have to add value, the inequality sign is ≥
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
A taxi costs $1.65 for the first mile and $0.85 for each additional mile. Which equation could be solved to find the number x of additional miles traveled in a taxi given that the total cost of the trip is $20?
Options:
a. 1.65x + 0.85 = 20
b. 0.85x + 1.65 = 20
c. 1.65x − 0.85 = 20
d. 0.85x − 1.65 = 20

Answer: 0.85x + 1.65 = 20

Explanation:
Let x be the number of additional miles means 0.85x is the cost of the additional miles the total cost is then 1.65 + 0.85x
1.65 + 0.85x = 20
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
A sales tax of 6% is added to the price of an item. If Marisa buys an item, which expression indicates how much she will pay in all?
Options:
a. n + 0.06
b. 0.06n
c. n + 0.06n
d. 0.06 + 0.06n

Answer: n + 0.06n

Explanation:
The total cost she will pay is the cost of the item n plus the cost of tax 0.06n.
The expression is n + 0.06n
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 7.
Which equation has the solution x = 12?
Options:
a. 4x + 3 = 45
b. 3x + 6 = 42
c. 2x − 5 = 29
d. 5x −8 = 68

Answer: 3x + 6 = 42

Explanation:
a. 4x + 3 = 45
Substitute x = 12 in the above equation.
4(12) + 3 = 45
48 + 3 = 45
51 ≠ 45
b. 3x + 6 = 42
Substitute x = 12 in the above equation.
3(12) + 6 = 42
36 + 6 = 42
42 = 42
c. 2x − 5 = 29
Substitute x = 12 in the above equation.
2(12) – 5 = 29
24 – 5 = 29
19 ≠ 29
d. 5x −8 = 68
Substitute x = 12 in the above equation.
5(12) – 8 = 68
60 – 8 = 68
52 ≠ 68
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 8.
The 23 members of the school jazz band are trying to raise at least $1,800 to cover the cost of traveling to a competition. The members have already raised $750. Which inequality could you solve to find the amount that each member should raise to meet the goal?
Options:
a. 23x + 750 > 1,800
b. 23x + 750 ≥ 1,800
c. 23x + 750 < 1,800
d. 23x + 750 ≤ 1,800

Answer: 23x + 750 ≥ 1,800

Explanation:
Let x represent the amount each member raises means 23x is the amount the members raise individually.
The total amount raised is then 23x + 750 since they have already raised $750.
Since they are trying to raise at least $1800, the inequality is ≥
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Page No. 230

Question 9.
What is the solution of the inequality 2x − 9 < 7?
Options:
a. x < 8
b. x ≤ 8
c. x > 8
d. x ≥ 8

Answer: x < 8

Explanation:
Given the inequality 2x − 9 < 7
Add 9 on both sides 2x – 9 + 9 < 7 + 9
2x < 16
Divide by 2 on both sides
2x/2 < 16/2
x < 8
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 10.
Which inequality has the solution n < 5?
Options:
a. 4n + 11 > −9
b. 4n + 11 < −9
c. −4n + 11 < −9
d. −4n + 11 > −9

Answer: −4n + 11 > −9

Explanation:
Given the inequality n < 5
To graph inequalities, locate the number opposite the variable of the inequality on a number line. If the inequality is either a ≤ or a ≥, we use a closed dot, meaning the number is a solution as well. If the inequality is either a > or a <, use an open dot, indicating that the number is not a solution.
a. 4n + 11 > −9
4n + 11 – 11 > -9 – 11
4n/4 > -20/4
n  -5
b. 4n + 11 < −9
4n + 11 – 11 < -9 – 11
4n < -20
4n/4 < -20/4
n < -5
c. −4n + 11 < −9
-4n + 11 – 11 < -9 – 11
-4n < -20
-4n/-4 < -20/-4
n > 5
d. −4n + 11 > −9
-4n + 11 – 11 > -9 – 11
-4n > -20
-4n/-4 > -20/-4
n < 5
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 11.
Which inequality has the solution shown?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 7 Writing and Solving One-Step Inequalities img 10
Options:
a. 3x + 5 < 2
b. 4x + 12 < 4
c. 2x + 5 ≤ 1
d. 3x + 6 ≤ 3

Answer: 3x + 6 ≤ 3

Explanation:
The graph shows the inequality x ≤ -1 so the possible answers are C and D since A and B have < as the inequality signs. Solve C and D for x to see which one has x ≤ -1 as the solution.
c. 2x + 5 ≤ 1
2x + 5 – 5 ≤ 1 – 5
2x ≤ -4
x ≤ -2
d. 3x + 6 ≤ 3
3x + 6 – 6 ≤ 3 – 6
3x ≤ -3
x ≤ -1
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 12.
On a 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour trip, Leslie drove \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the time. For how many hours did Leslie drive?
Options:
a. 3 hours
b. 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) hours
c. 3 \(\frac{2}{3}\) hours
d. 3 \(\frac{5}{6}\) hours

Answer: 3 hours

Explanation:
Given that,
On a 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour trip, Leslie drove \(\frac{2}{3}\) of the time.
Multiply the two fractions by first writing 4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) as an improper fraction then cancel the 2s and then simplifying the division.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\)(\(\frac{2}{3}\)) = \(\frac{9}{2}\) × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 3
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 13.
During a sale, the price of a sweater was changed from $20 to $16. What was the percent of decrease in the price of the sweater?
Options:
a. 4%
b. 20%
c. 25%
d. 40%

Answer:

Mini-Task

Question 14.
Max wants to buy some shorts that are priced at $8 each. He decided to buy a pair of sneakers for $39, but the total cost of the shorts and the sneakers must be less than $75.
a. Write an inequality to find out how many pairs of shorts Max can buy.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 39 + 8x < 75

Explanation:
Let x be the number of shorts he buys then 8x is the total cost of the shorts and 8x + 39 is the total cost of the shorts and sneakers his total must be less than $75 so the inequality is <.
39 + 8x < 75

Question 14.
b. Suppose that Max wants to buy 6 pairs of shorts. Will he have enough money? Explain.
______

Answer: No

Explanation:
Find the total amount he will spend buying 6 pairs of shorts this is more than the $75 he has so he will not have enough.
39 + 8(6) = 39 + 48 = 87

Question 14.
c. Solve the inequality to find the greatest number of pairs of shorts that Max can buy. Show your work.
______ pairs of shoes

Answer: 4 pairs of shoes

Explanation:
Use the above inequality,
39 + 8x < 75
Subtract 39 on both sides and then divide both sides by 8. Since you can’t buy a fraction of a pair of shorts the most pairs he can buy is 4.
39 + 8x – 39 < 75 – 39
8x < 36
x < 4.5

Summary:

We wish the solutions given in this article are satisfactory for all the students of the 7th class. This Go Math Answer Key of Grade 7 helps teachers to know the easy tricks to explain the problems to the students. Feel free to clarify your doubts by posting your questions in the below comment box. We will answer them as early as possible.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality

go-math-grade-7-chapter-4-rates-and-proportionality-answer-key

Students who are in search of the HMH Go Math Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Answer Key can get them on this page. With the help of the Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key 4th Chapter Rates and Proportionality parents can teach simple methods to solve the problems to their children. So, Download Go Math Grade 7 Rates and Proportionality Chapter 4 pdf for free of cost.

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality

It is important for the students to learn the concepts given in Go Math Grade 7 Chapter 4 Answer Key to score the highest marks in the exams. The quick way of solving the problems will help you to save time in the exam. The topics covered in this chapter are Unit rates, Constant Rates of Change, Proportional Relationships, and Graphs. Click on the below-provided links and go through all the questions and answers.

Chapter 4 – Unit Rates

Chapter 4 – Constant Rates of Change

Chapter 4 – Proportional Relationships and Graphs

Chapter 4 – Module 4

Unit Rates – Guided Practice – Page No. 120

Question 1.
Brandon enters bike races. He bikes 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) miles every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour. Complete the table to find how far Brandon bikes for each time interval
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 1: Unit Rates img 1
Type below:
____________

Answer:
1 hour: 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 17
1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour: 17 + 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 25 \(\frac{1}{2}\)
2 hour: 25 \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 34
2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour: 34 + 8 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 42 \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-1

Find each unit rate.

Question 2.
Julio walks 3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) miles in 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours.
________ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation:
Divide the number of miles by the number of hours to find the unit rate in miles per hour.
3 \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 1 \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\)/\(\frac{5}{4}\)
\(\frac{7}{2}\) × \(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{14}{5}\)
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{14}{5}\) = 2 \(\frac{4}{5}\) miles per hour

Question 3.
Kenny reads \(\frac{5}{8}\) page in \(\frac{2}{3}\) minute.
________ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{15}{16}\)

Explanation:
Divide the number of pages by the number of minutes to find the unit rate in pages per minute.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) ÷ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= \(\frac{5}{8}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\) = \(\frac{15}{16}\)
Thus Kenny read \(\frac{15}{16}\) pages per minute.

Question 4.
A garden snail moves \(\frac{1}{6}\) foot in \(\frac{1}{3}\) hour.
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
Given that,
A garden snail moves \(\frac{1}{6}\) foot in \(\frac{1}{3}\) hour.
Divide the number of feet by the number of hours to find the unit rate in feet per hour.
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore A garden snail moves \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet per hour.

Question 5.
A fertilizer covers \(\frac{5}{8}\) square foot in \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour.
________ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) square feet per hour

Explanation:
Given,
A fertilizer covers \(\frac{5}{8}\) square foot in \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour.
Divide the number of square feet, which is \(\frac{5}{8}\) by the number of hours, which is \(\frac{1}{4}\), to find the unit rate in square feet per hour.
\(\frac{5}{8}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
\(\frac{5}{8}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\) =\(\frac{5}{2}\)
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) square feet per hour
Thus A fertilizer covers 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) square feet per hour.

Find each unit rate. Determine which is lower.

Question 6.
Brand A: 240 mg sodium for \(\frac{1}{3}\) pickle or Brand B: 325 mg sodium for \(\frac{1}{2}\) pickle.
____________

Answer:
Find the unit rates in mg per pickle for each brand by dividing the number of mg by the number of pickles.
Brand A: 240 mg ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 240 × 3 = 720
Brand B: 325 mg ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 325 × 2 = 650
650 is less than 720 so Brand B has a lower unit rate.

Question 7.
Ingredient C: \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup for \(\frac{2}{3}\) serving or Ingredient D: \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup for \(\frac{3}{4}\) serving.
____________

Answer: Find the unit rates in cups per serving by dividing the number of cups by the number of servings.
Ingredient C: \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Ingredient D: \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{4}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{9}\)
\(\frac{3}{8}\) is less than \(\frac{4}{9}\), ingredient C has a lower unit rate.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 8.
How can you find a unit rate when given a rate?
Type below:
____________

Answer: To find a unit rate when given a rate such as 25 miles per 5 minutes, divide the first quantity by the second quantity.
In the example I gave, this would mean the unit rate is 25 ÷ 5 = 5 miles per minute.

Unit Rates – Independent Practice – Page No. 121

Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 1: Unit Rates img 2

Question 9.
The information for two pay-as-you-go cell phone companies is given.
a. What is the unit rate in dollars per hour for each company?
On Call: ____________ dollars per hour
Talk Time: ____________ dollars per hour

Answer:
Divide the cost by the number of hours for each company to find the unit rates.
On Call: 10 ÷ 3.5 = 2 \(\frac{6}{7}\) ≈ 2.86
Talk Time: 1.25 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2.50

Question 9.
b. Analyze Relationships
Which company offers the best deal? Explain your answer.
____________

Answer: Talk time has the lowest unit rate so it offers the best deal.

Question 9.
c. What If?
Another company offers a rate of $0.05 per minute. How would you find the unit rate per hour?
____________ dollars per hour

Answer:
Since there are 60 minutes in 1 hour, $.0.05 per minute is
60 × 0.05 = $3 per hour.
Thus the unit rate per hour is $3.

Question 9.
d. Draw Conclusions
Is the rate in part c a better deal than On Call or Talk Time? Explain.
____________

Answer:
The unit rate in part c is greater than the unit rates from part a so it is not a better deal than the other two companies.

Question 10.
Represent Real-World Problems
Your teacher asks you to find a recipe that includes two ingredients with a rate of \(\frac{2 \text { units }}{3 \text { units }}\).
a. Give an example of two ingredients in a recipe that would meet this requirement.
Type below:
____________

Answer: A rate of 2/3 units means that there need to be 2 units of 1 ingredient for every 3 units of a second ingredient.
One example could then be 2 eggs per 3 cups of flour.
Another example could 2 teaspoons of vanilla per 3 teaspoons of sugar.

Question 10.
b. If you needed to triple the recipe, would the rate change? Explain.
____________

Answer: No, the rate would not change. Using the example I gave in
part a) of 2 eggs per 3 cups of flour, tripling the recipe would require using 3(2 eggs) = 6 eggs
3(3 cups of sugar) = 9 cups of flour.
Since 6 eggs/9 cups of flour = 2 eggs/3 cups of flour, the rate is still the same.

Question 11.
A radio station requires DJs to play 2 commercials for every 10 songs they play. What is the unit rate of songs to commercials?
____________ songs per commercials

Answer: 10 ÷ 2 = 5
Divide the number of songs by the number of commercials.
Thus the radio requires 5 songs per commercial.

Question 12.
Multistep
Terrance and Jesse are training for a long-distance race. Terrance trains at a rate of 6 miles every half hour and Jesse trains at a rate of 2 miles every 15 minutes.
a. What is the unit rate in miles per hour for each runner?
Terrance: ____________ mi per hour
Jesse: ____________ mi per hour

Answer:
Find the unit rates for each runner by dividing the number of miles by the number of hours. Remember that 15 minutes is 1/4 of an hour since there are 60 minutes in an hour
15 ÷ 60 = 1/4
a) Terrance: 6 ÷ 1/2 = 6 × 2 = 12 miles per hour.
Jesse: 2 ÷ 1/4 = 2 × 4 = 8 miles per hour.

Question 12.
b. How long will each person take to run a total of 50 miles at the given rates?
Terrance: ______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)
Jesse: ______ \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Divide the number of miles by the unit rates found in part a to find the time.
Terrance: 50 ÷ 12 = 50/12 = 4 \(\frac{1}{6}\) hours
Jesse: 50 ÷ 8 = 50/8 = 6 \(\frac{1}{4}\) hours

Question 12.
c. Sandra runs at a rate of 8 miles in 45 minutes. How does her unit rate compare to Terrance’s and to Jesse’s?
______ \(\frac{□}{□}\) mi per hour

Answer:
We need to find the unit rate for Sandra by dividing the number of miles by the number of hours.
Remember that 45 minutes is 3/4 of an hour.
Since 45/60 = 3/4.
Sandra’s unit rate is smaller than Terrance’s but larger than Jesse’s.

Unit Rates – Page No. 122

Question 13.
Analyze Relationships
Eli takes a typing test and types all 300 words in \(\frac{1}{10}\) hour. He takes the test a second time and types the words in \(\frac{1}{12}\) hour. Was he faster or slower on the second attempt? Explain.
____________

Answer:
We need to find the unit rates for each time he took the test.
1st time: 300 ÷ 1/10 = 300 × 10 = 3000
2nd time: 300 ÷ 1/12 = 300 × 12 = 3600
The second time has a faster unit rate since 3600 > 3000.

Question 14.
Justify Reasoning
An online retailer sells two packages of protein bars.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 1: Unit Rates img 3
a. Which package has the better price per bar?
____________

Answer:
Find the unit rates per bar by dividing the costs by the number of bars. the 12 pack has the better price per bar.
10-pack: 15.37 ÷ 10 = 1.537 ≈ 1.54
12-pack: 15.35 ÷ 12 ≈ 1.30

Question 14.
b. Which package has the better price per ounce?
____________

Answer:
First, find the total number of ounces by multiplying the number of bars times the number of ounces per bar. then find the unit rates per ounce by dividing the costs by the total number of ounces the 10-pack has the better price per ounce.
10-pack: 10 × 2.1 = 21 ounces
12-pack: 12 × 1.4 = 16.8 ounces
10-pack: 15.37 ÷ 21 ≈ 0.73
12-pack: 15.35 ÷ 16.8 ≈ 0.91

Question 14.
c. Which package do you think is a better buy? Justify your reasoning.
____________

Answer:
The 10-pack is a better deal since the price per ounce is a better measure to use than price per bar. The number of bars doesn’t tell you how you are actually buying since the bars can be very small meaning the number of ounces you are actually buying is small.

Question 15.
Check for Reasonableness
A painter painted about half a room in half a day. Coley estimated the painter would paint 7 rooms in 7 days. Is Coley’s estimate reasonable? Explain.
____________

Answer:
If a painter can paint half a room in a half day, then he can paint 1 room in 1 day.
This would be equivalent to painting 7 rooms in 7 days so his estimate is reasonable.
7 rooms ÷ 7 days = 1/2 room ÷ 1/2 days

Question 16.
Communicate Mathematical
Ideas If you know the rate of a water leak in gallons per hour, how can you find the number of hours it takes for 1 gallon to leak out? Justify your answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer: If you know the rate in gallons per hour, then the rate in hours per gallon is the reciprocal of the rate in gallons per hour.
Example:
If water is leaking at a rate of 5 gallons per hour, then it is leaking at 1/5 hour per gallon.

Constant Rates of Change – Guided Practice – Page No. 126

Question 1.
Based on the information in the table, is the relationship between time and the number of words typed a proportional relationship?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 2: Constant Rates of Change img 4
The relationship ____________ proportional

Answer: is proportional

Explanation:
Since 45 ÷ 1 = 45, 90 ÷ 2 = 45, 135 ÷ 3 = 45 and 180 ÷ 4 = 45, the relationship is proportional.
Thus the relationship for the above table is proportional.

Find the constant of proportionality k. Then write an equation for the relationship between x and y.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 2: Constant Rates of Change img 5
k = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The equation is of the form y = kx so k = y/x.
Substituting values of x and y from the table gives k = 10/2 = 5.
Plugging this value into y = kx gives the equation y = 5x.
The relationship between x and y is y = 5x.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 2: Constant Rates of Change img 6
k = \(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: k = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
The equation is of the form y = kx so k = y/x.
Substituting values of x and y from the table gives k = 2/8 = \(\frac{1}{4}\).
Plugging this value into y = kx gives the equation y = \(\frac{1}{4}\)x.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 4.
How can you represent a proportional relationship using an equation?
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = kx

Explanation:
A proportional relationship can always be represented by an equation of the form y = kx
where ks is the constant of proportionality and represents the rate of the change in the y quantity in relation to the x quantity.

Constant Rates of Change – Page No. 127

Information on three car-rental companies is given.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 2: Constant Rates of Change img 7

Question 5.
Write an equation that gives the cost y of renting a car for x days from Rent-All.
y = _______ x

Answer: 18.50

Explanation:
Find the constant of proportionality by dividing the total costs by the number of days.
k = 55.50/3 = 18.50
The equation is y = 18.50x

Question 6.
What is the cost per day of renting a car from A-1?
$ _______ per day

Answer: $21.98

Explanation:
Since the cost of each half day is $10.99, the cost for each day is 2 × 10.99 = 21.98
The cost per day of renting a car from A-1 is $21.98

Question 7.
Analyze Relationships
Which company offers the best deal? Why?
The company that offers the best deal is ____________

Answer: Rent all

Explanation:
The costs per day were $18.50 for Rent-All, $21.98 for A-1 Rentals, and $19.25 for Car Town so Reant All offers the best deal since it offers the lowest cost per day.
Thus the company that offers the best deal is Rent-All.

Question 8.
Critique Reasoning
A skydiver jumps out of an airplane. After 0.8 second, she has fallen 100 feet. After 3.1 seconds, she has fallen 500 feet. Emtiaz says that the skydiver should fall about 187.5 feet in 1.5 seconds. Is his answer reasonable? Explain.
_______

Answer: No. He assumed the rate of descent was proportional but the rate is increasing as time increases.

Explanation:
Since 100 ÷ 0.8 = 125 the skydiver fell at a speed of 125 ft per second for the first 0.8 second.
Since 500 ÷ 3.1 = 161, the skydiver fell at a speed of about 161 ft per second for the first 3.1 seconds.
The rate of descent is then increased as time increases and is not proportional since 125 ≠ 161.
Since 187.5 ÷ 1.5 = 125, he assumed the rate of descent was proportional. His estimate is then not reasonable. The actual rate of descent should be between 125 and 161.3 since 1.5 seconds is between 0.8 and 3.1 seconds.

Steven earns extra money babysitting. He charges $31.25 for 5 hours and $50 for 8 hours.

Question 9.
Explain why the relationship between how much Steven charges and time is a proportional relationship.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The relationship is proportional since the ratios are equal.

Explanation:
Since 31.25 ÷ 5 = 6.25 and 50 ≈ 8 = 6.25 the relationship is proportional since the ratios are equal.

Question 10.
Interpret the Answer
Explain what the constant rate of change means in the context.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The rate of change means he charges $6.25.

Explanation:
The constant rate of change of 6.25 means he charges $6.25 per hour since the rate was found by dividing the charge by the number of hours.
The rate of change means he charges $6.25.

Question 11.
Write an equation to represent the relationship. Tell what the variables represent.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The equation is y = 6.25x
where x is the number of hours and ys is the total charge.

Explanation:
The rate of change is 6.25 so k = 6.25.
This gives an equation of y = 6.25x where x is the number of hours and y is the total charge.

Question 12.
How much would Steven charge for 3 hours?
$ _______

Answer: $18.75

Explanation:
y = 6.25 × 3 = 18.75
Thus Steve charges $18.75 for 3 hours.

Constant Rates of Change – Page No. 128

A submarine dives 300 feet every 2 minutes, and 6,750 feet every 45 minutes.

Question 13.
Find the constant rate at which the submarine dives. Give your answer in feet per minute and in feet per hour.
____________ feet per minute
____________ feet per hour

Answer: 150 feet per minute, 9000 feet per hour

Explanation:
Since 300 ÷ 2 = 150, the submarine is diving at 150 feet per minute.
Since 45 minutes = 3/4 of an hour and 6750 ÷ 3/4 = 9000, the submarine is diving at a rate of 9000 feet per hour.

Question 14.
Let x represent the time of the dive. Let y represent the depth of the submarine. Write an equation for the proportional relationship using the rate in feet per minute.
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = 150x

Explanation:
The submarine was diving at a rate of 150 feet per minute so k = 150.
The equation is then y = 150x.

Question 15.
Draw Conclusions
If you wanted to find the depth of a submarine during a dive, would it be more reasonable to use an equation with the rate in feet per minute or feet per hour? Explain your reasoning.
____________

Answer: Feet per minute

Explanation:
Since a submarine would only dive for a few minutes at a time and not dive for hours at a time, it is more reasonable to use the rate in feet per minute.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 16.
Make a Conjecture
There is a proportional relationship between your distance from a thunderstorm and the time from when you see lightning and hear thunder. If there are 9 seconds between lightning and thunder, the storm is about 3 kilometers away. If you double the amount of time between lightning and thunder, do you think the distance in kilometers also double? justify your reasoning.
_______

Answer: Yes the distance will also double. If the relationship is proportional then distance/time = k
where k is the constant of proportionality.
Since the time was 9 seconds for 3km, then for 18 seconds the distance would be 6 km since 3/9 = 6/18.
6 is double 3 so the distance doubles when the time doubles.

Question 17.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
A store sells 3 ears of corn for $1. They round prices to the nearest cent as shown in the table. Tell whether you would describe the relationship between cost and number of ears of corn as a proportional relationship. Justify your answer.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 2: Constant Rates of Change img 8
_______

Answer:
Since 0.33 ÷ 1 = 0.33, 0.67 ÷ 2 = 0.335, 1.00 ÷ 3 = 0.33.., 1.34 ÷ 4 = 0.335, the relationship is approximately proportional since all the ratios are approximately equal. The difference in the ratios com from rounding the amount charged to the nearest cent.

Question 18.
Jack is 12 and his sister Sophia is 16. Jack says that the relationship between his age and Sophia’s age is proportional and the constant of proportionality is \(\frac{12}{16}\) Do you agree? Explain.
____________

Answer:
Given that current age of Jack = 12 years
Given that current age of Sophia = 16 years
Jack says that the relationship between his age and Sophia‘s is proportional
If Jack’s age is represented by y and Sophia’s age by x then we can write y=kx as they are in proportion
where k is called constant of proportion
Now let’s plug given ages of each that is y=12 and x=16 into y=kx to find the constant of proportionality
12=k×16
12/16=k
Which is the same as the given value of the constant of proportionality?
Hence Jack is right about his statement.
But if you think about practical life situation then the age of both will not be in proportion
For example, after 1 year Jack’s age will be 13 and Sophie’s age will be 17
then constant of proportionality using new values will be 13/17
Clearly 12/16 and 13/17 are not same.
So in practical life, the age of both will not in proportion.

Question 19.
Luke’s turkey chili recipe calls for 1.5 pounds of ground turkey for every 6 servings. How many servings can he make if he has 5 pounds of ground turkey? Show your work.
____________ servings

Answer: 20 servings

Explanation:
Given,
Luke’s turkey chili recipe calls for 1.5 pounds of ground turkey for every 6 servings.
So if 1.5 pounds of turkey can get you 6 servings
1.5 = 6
3 = 12
4.5 = 18
5 =?
to find what 5 pounds are equal to we must do 1.5/6 to find the unit rate of 0.25. We then add 0.25 to 18.25 servings or if you round you can get about 18 servings.
18 + 0.25 × 8 = 18 + 2 = 20

Proportional Relationships and Graphs – Guided Practice – Page No. 132

Complete each table. Tell whether the relationship is a proportional relationship. Explain why or why not.

Question 1.
A student reads 65 pages per hour.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 9
____________

Answer:
Given that,
A student reads 65 pages per hour.
3 hours: 3 × 65 = 195 pages
5 hours: 5 × 65 = 325 pages
10 hours: 10 × 65 = 650 pages
We need to find the number of hours for 585 pages by dividing the number of pages by 65 since the students read 65 pages per hour:
585 pages: 585 ÷ 65 = 9 hours
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-9
A relationship is proportional if the quotient of each ordered pair is constant. Since the student is reading at a constant rate of 65 pages per hour, and the quotient of each ordered pair in the table is 65, the relationship is proportional.

Question 2.
A babysitter makes $7.50 per hour.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 10
____________

Answer:
2 hours = 2 × 7.50 = 15
22.50 = 22.50 ÷ 7.50 = 3 hours
5 hours = 5 × 7.50 = 37.50
6. = 60 ÷ 7.50 = 8 hours
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-10

Tell whether the relationship is a proportional relationship. Explain why or why not.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 11
____________

Answer:
The relationship has the points (2, 4) and (8, 10).
Since 4 ÷ 2 = 2 and 10 ÷ 8 = 1.25, the relationship is not proportional since the ratios are not equal.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 12
____________

Answer:
The relationship appears to be proportional since the points appear to form a line that goes through the origin. That line would go through the points (1,2), (2, 4), (5, 10), and (8, 16).
Since 2 ÷ 1 = 2, 4 ÷ 2 = 2, 10 ÷ 5 = 2, and 16 ÷ 8 = 2, the relationship is proportional since all the ratios are equal.

Write an equation of the form y = kx for the relationship shown in each graph.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 13
y = ____________ x

Answer: y = 3.5x

Explanation:
One of the points is (8, 28) so k = 28/8 = 7/2. The equation is the y = 7/2 = 3.5x

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 14
y = ____________ x

Answer: y = 0.25x

Explanation:
One of the points is (8,2) so k = 2/8 = 1/4.
The equation is the ya = 1/4x = 0.25 x.

Essential Question Check-In

Question 7.
How does a graph show a proportional relationship?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
A proportional relationship between two variables, x and y, exists if y = kx.
This equation is a line that passes through the origin and has a slope of k. The slope can be positive or negative. Therefore is the points lie on a line that goes through the origin, the graph shows a proportional relationship. If the points lie on a line that does not go through the origin, that is, has a non zero y-intercept, then the relationship is not proportional.

Proportional Relationships and Graphs – Guided Practice – Page No. 133

For Exercises 8–12, the graph shows the relationship between time and distance run by two horses.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 15

Question 8.
Explain the meaning of the point (0,0).
Type below:
____________

Answer: The point (0, 0) represents a distance of 0 miles in 0 min.

Question 9.
How long does it take each horse to run a mile?
Horse A runs 1 mile in ____________ minutes
Horse B runs 1 mile in ____________ minutes

Answer: Horse A: 4 min per mile.
Horse B: 2.5 min per mile

Explanation:
Line A goes through the point (8, 2) which gives a rate of 8/2 = 4 min per mile. Line B goes through the point (10, 4) which gives a rate of 10/4 = 2.5 min per mile.

Question 10.
Multiple Representations
Write an equation for the relationship between time and distance for each horse.
For Horse A : y = ____________ x
For Horse B : y = ____________ x

Answer: A: y = 1/4x, B: y = 2/5x

Explanation:
The graph has x representing the time in minutes and y representing the distance in miles so the slope of the line has units of miles per minute.
Since horse A runs 4 min per mile, it runs at a rate of 1/4 mi per min.
This gives the equation y = 1/4x.
Since horse B runs at a rate of 2.5 min per mi, it runs at a rate of 1/2.5 = 2/5 miles per min.
The equation is then y = 2/5x.

Question 11.
Draw Conclusions
At the given rates, how far would each horse run in 12 minutes?
Horse A will run ____________ miles
Horse B will run ____________ miles

Answer: Horse A will run 3 miles.
Horse B will run 4.8 miles.

Explanation:
Multiply the rates in mi per min from the above problem by the number of minutes.
A: 1/4 mi per min × 12 min = 3 miles
B: 2/5 mi per min × 12 min = 4.8 miles

Question 12.
Analyze Relationships
Draw a line on the graph representing a horse than runs faster than horses A and B.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
To have a line representing at the rate of the horse faster than horses A and B, the line should be a little bit steeper than the other two lines. This can be represented in the graph as:
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-img-1

Question 13.
A bullet train can travel at 170 miles per hour. Will a graph representing the distance in miles compared to the time in hours show a proportional relationship? Explain.
____________

Answer: Yes
Since the train is travelling at a constant rate, a graph representing distance in miles compared to time in hours will show a proportional relationship.

Question 14.
Critical Thinking
When would it be more useful to represent a proportional relationship with a graph rather than an equation?
Type below:
____________

Answer: It is more useful to represent a proportional relationship with a graph when comparing different and various situations.

Question 15.
Multiple Representations
Bargain DVDs cost $5 each at Mega Movie.
a. Graph the proportional relationship that gives the cost y in dollars of buying x bargain DVDs.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 16
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Since each DVD is $5 each, make sure to graph a line that corresponds to this rate.
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-16

Question 15.
b. Give an ordered pair on the graph and explain its meaning in the real world context.
Type below:
____________

Answer: An ordered pair in the graph is (3, 15) and this means that three DVDs cost $15.

Proportional Relationships and Graphs – Page No. 134

The graph shows the relationship between distance and time as Glenda swims.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 17

Question 16.
How far did Glenda swim in 4 seconds?
______ feet

Answer: 8 ft

Explanation:
The graph goes through the point (4, 8) so she swam 8 ft in 4 sec.

Question 17.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Is this a proportional relationship? Explain your reasoning.
____________

Answer: The relationship is proportional since the points lie on a line and the line connecting the points goes through the origin.

Question 18.
Multiple Representations
Write an equation that shows the relationship between time and distance.
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = 2x

Explanation:
The line goes through the point (4, 8) which means k = 8/4 = 2.
This give an equation of y = 2x.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 19.
Make a Conjecture
If you know that a relationship is proportional and are given one ordered pair that is not (0,0), how can you find another pair?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
If you are given a point (a, b) that is not (0, 0) and that the relationship is proportional, then you can find k since k = y/x = b/a.
Then you can write the equation as y = b/ax. From there, you can plug in any value for x to find the corresponding y-coordinate.

The tables show the distance traveled by three cars.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality Lesson 3: Proportional Relationships and Graphs img 18

Question 20.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Which car is not traveling at a constant speed? Explain your reasoning.
____________

Answer:
Since 120 ÷ 2 = 180 ÷ 3 = 300 ÷ 5 = 360 ÷ 6 = 60, Car 1 is travelling at a constant speed.
Since 200 ÷ 5 = 400 ÷ 10 = 600 ÷ 15 = 800 ÷ 20 = 40, Car 2 is travelling at a constant speed.
Since 65 ÷ 1 ≠ 85 ÷ 2, Car 3 is not traveling at a constant speed.

Question 21.
Make a Conjecture
Car 4 is traveling at twice the rate of speed of car 2. How will the table values for car 4 compare to the table values for car 2?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
From problem 20, car 2 is traveling at 40 miles per hour. If car 4 is traveling twice that rate, then it is traveling at 80 miles per hour. This means all the values for the distances for car 4 will be double the values for the distances for car 2.

MODULE QUIZ – 4.1 Unit Rates – Page No. 135

Find each unit rate. Round to the nearest hundredth, if necessary.

Question 1.
$140 for 18 ft2
$ ______

Answer: $7.78 per ft2

Explanation:
Divide the cost of $140 by the number of square feet, 18 sq. ft, using a calculator:
140 ÷ 18 ≈ $7.78 per sq. ft.
If you are required by your teacher to do the division by hand, divide to three decimal points as shown below:
Since the dollar amounts must be rounded to two decimal places, then $7.77.. ≈ $7.78 so the cost per square foot is $7.78 sq. ft.

Question 1.
14 lb for $2.99
$ ______

Answer: $0.21 per lb

Explanation:
Divide the cost by the number of pounds.
2.99 ÷ 14 = $0.21

Circle the better deal in each pair. Then give the unit rate for the better deal.

Question 3.
\(\frac{\$ 56}{25 \text { gal }} or \frac{\$ 32.05}{15 \text { gal }}\)
____________

Answer:
Better deal: $32.05/15 gal
Unit rate: $2.14 per gal

Explanation:
Find the unit rates by dividing the cost by the number of gallons:
$56/25 gal = $2.24 per gal
$32.05/15 gal ≈ $2.14 per gal
Since 2.14 < 2.24, then the better deal is $32.25/15 gal.

Question 4.
\(\frac{\$ 160}{5 \mathrm{g}} \text { or } \frac{\$ 315}{9 \mathrm{g}}\)
____________

Answer:
Better deal: $160/5g
Unit rate: $32 per gram

Explanation:
Find the unit rates by dividing the cost by the number of grams:
$160/5 g = $32 per gram
$315/9 g = $35 per gram
Since 32 < 35, then the better deal is $160/5 g.

4.2 Constant Rates of Change

Question 5.
The table shows the amount of money Tyler earns for mowing lawns. Is the relationship a proportional relationship? Why or why not?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality MODULE QUIZ img 19
____________

Answer: not proportional

Explanation:
Since 15 ÷ 1 = 15 but 48 ÷ 3 = 16, the relationship is not proportional.

Question 6.
On a recent day, 8 euros were worth $9 and 24 euros were worth $27. Write an equation of the form y = kx to show the relationship between the number of euros and the value in dollars.
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = \(\frac{9}{8}\)x

Explanation:
k = \(\frac{value in dollars}{number of euros}\) = \(\frac{9}{8}\)
so, the equation is y = \(\frac{9}{8}\)x

4.3 Proportional Relationships and Graphs

Question 7.
The graph shows the number of servings in different amounts of frozen yogurt listed on a carton. Write an equation that gives the number of servings y in x pints.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality MODULE QUIZ img 20
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = \(\frac{5}{2}\)x

Explanation:
The graph goes through the point (2, 5) so k = \(\frac{5}{2}\).
This gives an equation of y = \(\frac{5}{2}\)x

Question 8.
A refreshment stand makes 2 large servings of frozen yogurt from 3 pints. Add the line to the graph and write its equation.
Type below:
____________

Answer: y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x

Explanation:
If the situation states that 2 servings of frozen yogurt can be made from 3 pints, then we can say that k = \(\frac{2}{3}\), and therefore the equation of the line is y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x. The graph of the line is shown below.
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-img-2

Essential Question

Question 9.
How can you use rates to determine whether a situation is a proportional relationship?
Type below:
____________

Answer: If the rate is constant, then the situation is a proportional relationship. If the rate is not constant, the situation cannot be a proportional relationship.

MIXED REVIEW – Selected Response – Page No. 136

Question 1.
Kori spent $46.20 on 12 gallons of gasoline. What was the price per gallon?
Options:
a. $8.35
b. $3.85
c. $2.59
d. $0.26

Answer: $3.85

Explanation:
Given that,
Kori spent $46.20 on 12 gallons of gasoline.
Divide the cost by the number of gallons to find the price per gallon.
46.20/12 = 3.85
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
A rabbit can run short distances at a rate of 35 miles per hour. A fox can run short distances at a rate of 21 miles per half hour. Which animal is faster, and by how much?
Options:
a. The rabbit; 7 miles per hour
b. The fox; 7 miles per hour
c. The rabbit; 14 miles per hour
d. The fox; 14 miles per hour

Answer: The fox; 7 miles per hour

Explanation:
Given that,
A rabbit can run short distances at a rate of 35 miles per hour. A fox can run short distances at a rate of 21 miles per half hour.
If a fox runs 21 miles for half an hour then it can 42 miles per hour.
42 – 35 = 7 miles per hour
The fox is faster by 7 miles per hour.
Therefore the correct answer is option B.

Question 3.
A pet survey found that the ratio of dogs to cats is 25. Which proportion shows the number of dogs if the number of cats is 140?
Options:
a. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dogs}}{5 \mathrm{cats}}=\frac{140 \mathrm{dogs}}{350 \mathrm{cats}}\)
b. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dogs}}{5 \mathrm{cats}}=\frac{140 \mathrm{cats}}{350 \mathrm{dogs}}\)
c. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dogs}}{5 \mathrm{cats}}=\frac{28 \mathrm{dogs}}{140 \mathrm{cats}}\)
d. \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dogs}}{5 \mathrm{cats}}=\frac{56 \mathrm{dogs}}{140 \mathrm{cats}}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2 \mathrm{dogs}}{5 \mathrm{cats}}=\frac{56 \mathrm{dogs}}{140 \mathrm{cats}}\)

Explanation:
Given,
A pet survey found that the ratio of dogs to cats is 25.
Since 5 × 25 = 140 and
2 × 28 = 56
= 56/140
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
What is the cost of 2 kilograms of flour if 3 kilograms cost $4.86 and the unit price for each package of flour is the same?
Options:
a. $0.81
b. $2.86
c. $3.24
d. $9.72

Answer: $3.24

Explanation:
We need to find the unit price.
4.86/3 = 1.62
multiply the unit price by 2 to find the cost of 2 kg
1.62 × 2 = 3.24
Therefore the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
One gallon of paint covers about 450 square feet. How many square feet will 1.5 gallons of paint cover?
Options:
a. 300ft2
b. 451.5ft2
c. 675ft2
d. 900ft2

Answer: 675ft2

Explanation:
Given,
One gallon of paint covers about 450 square feet.
We need to find how many square feet will 1.5 gallons of paint cover.
For that, we have to multiply the number of gallons by the number of square feet covered by each gallon.
1.5 × 450 = 675 sq. ft.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
The graph shows the relationship between the late fines the library charges and the number of days late.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality MIXED REVIEW img 21
Options:
a. y = 0.25x
b. y = 0.40x
c. y = 0.50x
d. y = 0.75x

Answer: y = 0.25x

Explanation:
The graph shows the relationship between the late fines the library charges and the number of days late
One of the points is (2, 0.5) so k = 0.5/2 = 0.25.
This gives an equation of y = 0.25x
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Mini-Task

Question 7.
School is 2 miles from home along a straight road. The table shows your distance from home as you walk home at a constant rate.
a. Is the relationship in the table proportional?
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality MIXED REVIEW img 22
___________

Answer: no
Since 1.5/10 = 0.15 and 1/20 = 0.05, the relationship is not proportional since the ratios are not equal.

Question 7.
b. Find your distance from school for each time in the table.
Type below:
___________

Answer: Since the distance between school and home is 2 mi, the distance from school when the distance from home is 1.5 mi is 2 – 1.5 = 0.5 mi, for 1 mi its 2 – 1 = 1 mi, and for 0.5 mi its 2 – 0.5 = 1.5 mi.

Question 7.
c. Write an equation representing the relationship between the distance from school and time walking.
Type below:
___________

Answer: y = -0.05 x + 2

Explanation:
At time t = 0, you are 2 mi from home since the distance from home to school is 2 mi. This means the y-intercept, b is 2.
To find the slope of the line, find the rate of change:
m = (y2 – y1)/(x2 – x1) = (1 – 1.5)/(20 – 10) = -0.5/10 = -0.05
The line is then y = mx + b
y = 0.5x  + 2.

Module 4 – Page No. 161

EXERCISES

Question 1.
Steve uses \(\frac{8}{9}\) gallon of paint to paint 4 identical birdhouses. How many gallons of paint does he use for each birdhouse?
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer: \(\frac{2}{9}\) gallons

Explanation:
Given that,
Steve uses \(\frac{8}{9}\) gallon of paint to paint 4 identical birdhouses.
Divide the number of gallons by the number of birdhouses.
\(\frac{8}{9}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{8}{9}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{2}{9}\) gallons
Thus Steve uses \(\frac{2}{9}\) gallons of paint for each birdhouse.

Question 2.
Ron walks 0.5 mile on the track in 10 minutes. Stevie walks 0.25 mile on the track in 6 minutes. Find the unit rate for each walker in miles per hour. Who is the faster walker?
Ron: ___________ miles per hour
Stevie: ___________ miles per hour
___________ is the faster walker.

Answer: Ron

Explanation:
Given,
Ron walks 0.5 miles on the track in 10 minutes.
Stevie walks 0.25 miles on the track in 6 minutes.
We can find each unit rate by dividing the number of miles by the number of minutes then multiply by 60 to get the number of miles per hour.
Ron: 0.5 ÷ 10 = 0.05 miles = 3 miles per hour
Stevie: 0.25/6 = 1/24 mi per min = 2.5 mi per hour

Question 3.
The table below shows the proportional relationship between Juan’s pay and the hours he works. Complete the table. Plot the data and connect the points with a line.
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality img 23
Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality img 24
Type below:
____________

Answer:
First, find the constant of proportionality.
Let y represents pay and x represents the number of hours worked.
The constant of proportionality = y/x = 40/2 = 20
Hence, for 1 hour of work, he earns $20.
To find how many hours he needs to work $80, we divide 80 by the constant of proportionality.
80/20 = 4
For 1 hour he earns $20, so for 5 hours he earns 5 × 20 = $100.
For 1 hour he earns $20, so for 6 hours he earns 6 × 20 = $120.
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-23
Go-Math-Grade-7-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Rates-and-Proportionality-img-24

Conclusion:

After the preparation of  Go Math Grade 7 Answer Key Chapter 4 Rates and Proportionality, we suggest the students solve the questions given in the Module Quiz. Test yourself by solving the questions given at the end of this chapter. By this, you can enhance your math skills and secure good marks in the exams. If you have any doubts regarding the solutions you can post your comment in the below comment section.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test

go-math-grade-4-chapter-10-two-dimensional-figures-review-test-answer-key

Want to test your level of preparation and subject knowledge? Then, Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test is the best option. Just download the 4th grade Go Math ch 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test solution key pdf for free from this page & practice well. Students will find a detailed explanation for all the questions in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test. So, practice the problems from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures & improve your math skills.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test

By preparing the number of questions from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test helps you score well in the exams. With the help of Review Test questions, You can test your knowledge and enhance your skills. Follow the questions and verify your answers in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review/Test. Simply hit on the available links and download the answers.

Review/Test – Page No. 411

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence. 
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 1

Question 1.
A ____________ is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.
________

Answer: Trapezoid
A Trapezoid is a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 2.
A shape has _____________ if it can be folded about a line so that its two parts match exactly.
________

Answer: Line Symmetry
A shape has Line Symmetry if it can be folded about a line so that its two parts match exactly.

Question 3.
A ____________ has one endpoint and continues without end in one direction.
________

Answer: Ray
A Ray has one endpoint and continues without end in one direction.

Tell if the blue line appears to be a line of symmetry.
Write yes or no.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 2
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are the same size and shape.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 3
_____

Answer: No

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are not of the same size and shape.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 4
_____

Answer: Yes

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape into two parts that are the same size and shape.

Use Figure A for 7–9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 5

Question 7.
Name a pair of perpendicular lines.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\overleftrightarrow { AB } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { BF } \)

Explanation:
The pair of perpendicular lines in the above figure is \(\overleftrightarrow { AB } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { BF } \)

Question 8.
Name a pair of intersecting lines that are not perpendicular.
Type below:
________

Answer: \(\overleftrightarrow { AG } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { GD } \)

Explanation:
The pair of intersecting lines that are not perpendicular lines in the above figure is \(\overleftrightarrow { AG } \) and \(\overleftrightarrow { GD } \).

Question 9.
Classify ∠AGD. Write acute, right, or obtuse.
________

Answer: Acute

Explanation:
The angle ∠AGD is less than 90° thus the figure is an acute angle.

Review/Test – Page No. 412

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 10.
Which describes the shape?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 6
Options:
a. zero lines of symmetry
b. 1 line of symmetry
c. 2 lines of symmetry
d. more than 2 lines of symmetry

Answer: 1 line of symmetry

Explanation:
The trapezoid has only a vertical line of symmetry.
Thus the above shape is a trapezoid and it has one line of symmetry.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 11.

Which figure does not have two pairs of parallel sides?
Options:
a. parallelogram
b. trapezoid
c. rhombus
d. square

Answer: parallelogram

Explanation:
The parallelogram has no lines of symmetry.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 12.
How many right angles can be in an obtuse triangle?
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer: 1

Explanation:
An obtuse triangle is a triangle with one obtuse angle greater than 90°.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 13.
Which is the correct label for a right angle in the figure?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 7
Options:
a. ∠XYZ
b. ∠XYW
c. ∠ZXY
d. ∠ZYX

Answer: ∠ZXY

Explanation:
The right angle is at point X. So, the correct label for a right angle in the figure is ∠ZXY.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 14.
Which of the following letters of the alphabet has line symmetry?
Options:
a. S
b. F
c. H
d. N

Answer: H

Explanation:
The line of symmetry divides a shape H into two parts that are the same size and shape.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Review/Test – Page No. 413

Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer.

Question 15.
Which statement is true?
Options:
a. A trapezoid can never have a right angle.
b. A parallelogram can never have a right angle.
c. A rhombus is a type of trapezoid.
d. A square is a type of parallelogram.

Answer: A square is a type of parallelogram.
Square – A parallelogram with four sides of equal length and angles of equal size.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 16.
Which lines appear parallel?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 8
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 10
d. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 11

Answer: Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9

Explanation:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 8
It has 2 intersecting lines so the lines are not parallel.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 9
The lines are not intersecting. So the lines are parallel.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 17.
Norris drew the pattern below.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 12
Which is the missing figure in the pattern?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 13
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 14
c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 15
d. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 16

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 13

Explanation:
By seeing the above pattern we can guess the missing figure.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Review/Test – Page No. 414

Describe a pattern. Write a rule using numbers to find the number of squares in any figure in the pattern.

Question 18.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 17
Type below:
________

Answer: 2, 4, 6, 8

Question 19.
Classify the figure as many ways as possible. Write quadrilateral, trapezoid, parallelogram, rhombus, rectangle, or square.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 18
________

Answer: Parallelogram
The above figure is a parallelogram.

Question 20.
Evie’s birthday is the 18th day of May. Since May is the 5th month, Evie wrote the date like this:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures Review Test img 19
A. Evie says all the numbers she wrote have line symmetry. Is she correct? Explain your thinking.
Type below:
________

Answer: No
All the numbers that Evie wrote are not symmetrical because 5 will not be divided into equal parts and shapes.

Question 20.
B. Choose one of the numbers Evie wrote. Using a straightedge, draw a line of symmetry.
Type below:
________

Answer: 8
Go math Grade 4 Key Chapter 10 Review Test Img_2

Question 20.
C. Using the same format as Evie, write a date for which all the numbers have line symmetry.
Type below:
________

Answer:
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Review Test Img_1
The above figure has line symmetry for all the numbers.

Conclusion:

We hope the data given here is helpful for all 4th Grade Students. For more questions, you can also refer to the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures. Moreover, check the homework practice FL Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 10 Two-Dimensional Figures and Practice well to score good grades in the standard test & exams.

Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships

go-math-grade-8-chapter-3-proportional-relationships-answer-key

Who doesn’t love the best learning? HMH Grade 8 Go Math Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships is the perfect guide for students who love maths. Pupils can habituate practice maths if they start their practice with Go Math 8th Grade Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Solution Key. The Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key includes an explanation for all the questions where students can easily understand the methods in an easy manner.

Go Math Grade 8 Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Answer Key

Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships offers the best way to practice math with simple techniques. The students can download and practice the questions from Go Math Grade 8 Text Book for free. The HMH Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key is provided will help the students to score the highest marks in the exams.

Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships

Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope

Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope

Lesson 4: Representing Proportional Relationships – Model Quiz

Mixed Review

Guided Practice – Representing Proportional Relationships – Page No. 74

Question 1.
Vocabulary
A proportional relationship is a relationship between two quantities in which the ratio of one quantity to the other quantity is/is not constant.
______ constant

Answer:
is constant

Explanation:
The rent would be proportional so therefore it is.

Question 2.
Vocabulary
When writing an equation of a proportional relationship in the form y = kx, k represents the __________________________.
______________

Answer:
constant of proportionality

Explanation:
When writing an equation of a proportional relationship in the form y = kx, k represents the constant of proportionality.

Question 3.
Write an equation that describes the proportional relationship between the number of days and the number of weeks in a given length of time.
a. Complete the table.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 1
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 1

Question 3.
b. Let x represent _____.
Let y represent _____.
The equation that describes the relationship is _____.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Let x represent the time in weeks.
Let y represent the time in days.
The equation that describes the relationship is y = 7x.

Each table or graph represents a proportional relationship. Write an equation that describes the relationship.

Question 4.
Physical Science
The relationship between the numbers of oxygen atoms and hydrogen atoms in water.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 2
Type below:
______________

Answer:
y = 2x
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 2

Explanation:
x represents the Oxygen atoms
y represents the Hydrogen atoms
For every point of the x-axis, the y-axis is varying with 2x times.
y = 2x

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 3
Type below:
______________

Answer:
y = 30x

Explanation:
x represents the Distance in inches
y represents the Actual Distance in miles
For every point of the x-axis, the y-axis is varying with 30x times.
y = 30x

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
If you know the equation of a proportional relationship, how can you draw the graph of the equation?
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Use the equation to make a table with x-values and y-values. Then graph the points (x, y) and draw a line through the points.

Independent Practice – Representing Proportional Relationships – Page No. 75

The table shows the relationship between temperatures measured on the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 4

Question 7.
Is the relationship between the temperature scales proportional? Why or why not?
______________

Answer:
No. The ratios of the numbers in each column are not equal.

Explanation:
Fahrenheit Temperature/Celsius Temperature = 50/10 = 5
86/30 = 2.87
122/50 = 2.44
The relationship is not propotional as the ratio is not constant.

Question 8.
Describe the graph of the Celsius-Fahrenheit relationship.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
A line starting at (0, 32) and slanting upward to the right.

Explanation:
The graph is a straight line with a y-intercept of 32.

Question 9.
Analyze Relationships
Ralph opened a savings account with a deposit of $100. Every month after that, he deposited $20 more.
a. Why is the relationship described not proportional?
Type below:
______________

Answer:
The account had a balance of $100, to begin with.

Question 9.
b. How could the situation be changed to make the situation proportional?
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Have Ralph open the account with no money, to begin with, and then put $20 every month.

Question 10.
Represent Real-World Problems
Describe a real-world situation that can be modeled by the equation y = \(\frac{1}{20}\)x. Be sure to describe what each variable represents.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
If x is the number of nickels you have, y = \(\frac{1}{20}\)x is the amount of money you have in dollars.

Look for a Pattern

The variables x and y are related proportionally.

Question 11.
When x = 8, y = 20. Find y when x = 42.
_______

Answer:
y = 105

Explanation:
x = 8, y = 20
y/x = 20/8
y = 20x/8
when x = 42
y = (20 × 42)/8
y = 105

Question 12.
When x = 12, y = 8. Find x when y = 12.
_______

Answer:
x = 18

Explanation:
x/y = 12/8
x = 12y/8
when y = 12
x = (12 × 12)/8
x = 18

Representing Proportional Relationships – Page No. 76

Question 13.
The graph shows the relationship between the distance that a snail crawls and the time that it crawls.
a. Use the points on the graph to make a table.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 5
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 6
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 10

Question 13.
b. Write the equation for the relationship and tell what each variable represents.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
y = 1/10 x, where y is the time in minutes and x is the distance in inches

Question 13.
c. How long does it take the snail to crawl 85 inches?
_______ minutes

Answer:
8.5 minutes

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 14.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Explain why all of the graphs in this lesson show the first quadrant but omit the other three quadrants.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
All of the graphs represent real-world data for which both x and y take on only nonnegative values, which graph in the first quadrant or on the axes. If either x or y or both could be negative, then other quadrants would be needed.

Question 15.
Analyze Relationships
Complete the table.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 1: Representing Proportional Relationships img 7

Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 10
a. Are the length of a side of a square and the perimeter of the square related proportionally? Why or why not?
______________

Answer:
Yes. The ratio of the perimeter of a square to its side length is always 4.

Question 15.
b. Are the length of a side of a square and the area of the square related proportionally? Why or why not?
______________

Answer:
No. The ratio of the area of a square to its side length is not constant

Question 16.
Make a Conjecture
A table shows a proportional relationship where k is the constant of proportionality. The rows are then switched. How does the new constant of proportionality relate to the original one?
Type below:
______________

Answer:
It is the reciprocal of the original constant of proportionality

Guided Practice – Rate of Change and Slope – Page No. 80

Tell whether the rates of change are constant or variable.

Question 1.
building measurements _____
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 8
______________

Answer:
constant

Explanation:
Input variable: Feet
Output variable: Yard
For every point of the Yard, the Feet is increasing 3 times.
So, the answer is constant.

Question 2.
computers sold _____
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 9
______________

Answer:
variable

Explanation:
Identify the input and output variables
Input variable: Week
Output variable: The number sold
x-axis and y-axis points are not varying constantly. So, the answer is variable.

Question 3.
distance an object falls _____
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 10
______________

Answer:
variable

Explanation:
Identify the input and output variables
Input variable: Time
Output variable: Distance
x-axis and y-axis points are not varying constantly. So, the answer is variable.

Question 4.
cost of sweaters _____
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 11
______________

Answer:
constant

Explanation:
Identify the input and output variables
Input variable: Number
Output variable: Cost
x-axis and y-axis points are varying constantly. So, the answer is constant.

Erica walks to her friend Philip’s house. The graph shows Erica’s distance from home over time.

Question 5.
Find the rate of change from 1 minute to 2 minutes.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 12
\(\frac{\text { change in distance }}{\text { change in time }}=\frac{400-?}{2-?}=\frac{?}{?}=?\) ft per min
________ feet per minute

Answer:
200 feet per minute

Explanation:
(400 – 200)/(2 – 1)
200/1
200 feet per minute

Question 6 (request help)
Find the rate of change from 1 minute to 4 minutes.
______ feet per minute

Answer:
200 ft per min

Explanation:
change in distance/change in time
(800 – 200)/(4 – 1)
600/3 = 200 ft per min

Find the slope of each line.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 13
slope = _____
________

Answer:
slope = -2

Explanation:
From the given image, the x-axis is separated with 1 unit.
the y-axis is separated with 1 unit.
For every 1 unit of the x-axis, the slope is taken -2 units on the y-axis
The slope of the line is -2

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 14
slope = _____
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
\(\frac{3}{2}\)

Explanation:
From the given image, the slope is 3/2

Essential Question Check-In

Question 9.
If you know two points on a line, how can you find the rate of change of the variables being graphed?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Find the coordinates of two points on the line. Then divide the change in y-values from one point to the next by the change in x-values.

Independent Practice – Rate of Change and Slope – Page No. 81

Question 10.
Rectangle EFGH is graphed on a coordinate plane with vertices at E(-3, 5), F(6, 2), G(4, -4), and H(-5, -1).
a. Find the slopes of each side.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Slope EF = 1/3
slope FG = 3
slope GH = -1/3
slope HE =3

Question 10.
b. What do you notice about the slopes of opposite sides?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
They are the same.

Question 10.
c. What do you notice about the slopes of adjacent sides?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
They are negative reciprocals of one another.

Question 11.
A bicyclist started riding at 8:00 A.M. The diagram below shows the distance the bicyclist had traveled at different times. What was the bicyclist’s average rate of speed in miles per hour?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 15
_______ miles per hour

Answer:
15 miles per hour

Explanation:
Total distance traveled by bicyclist = 4.5 mile + 7.5 mile = 12 mile
Total time taken by bicyclist = (8:48 A.M – 8:00 A.M) = 48 min = 0.8 hr
conversion used : ( 1 hour = 60 minute)
Average rate of speed = total distance/total time = 15 mile/hr

Question 12.
Multistep
A line passes through (6, 3), (8, 4), and (n, -2). Find the value of n.
_______

Answer:
n = -4

Explanation:
A line passes through (6, 3), (8, 4), and (n, -2).
From the given information, for every 2 points on x-axis, the y-values are changing one point.
(4, 2), (2, 1), (0, 0), (-2, -1), (-4, -2)

Question 13.
A large container holds 5 gallons of water. It begins leaking at a constant rate. After 10 minutes, the container has 3 gallons of water left.
a. At what rate is the water leaking?
_______ gallons per minute

Answer:
1 gallon every 5 minutes, or 0.2 gal/min

Explanation:
Rate = (5 – 3)/(0 – 10)
= 2/-10
= -0.2
The rate of water leaking is 1 gallon every 5 minutes, or 0.2 gal/min

Question 13.
b. After how many minutes will the container be empty?
_______ minutes

Answer:
25 minutes

Explanation:
Number of minutes = 5/0.2 = 25
It will take 25 minutes for the container to be empty.

Question 14.
Critique Reasoning
Billy found the slope of the line through the points (2, 5) and (-2, -5) using the equation \(\frac{2-(-2)}{5-(-5)}=\frac{2}{5}\). What mistake did he make?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
He used the change in x over the change in y instead of the change in y over the change in x.

Rate of Change and Slope – Page No. 82

Question 15.
Multiple Representations
Graph parallelogram ABCD on a coordinate plane with vertices at A(3, 4), B(6, 1), C(0, -2), and D(-3, 1).
a. Find the slope of each side.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 2: Rate of Change and Slope img 16
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
slope AB = -1;
slope BC = 1/2
slope CD = -1;
slope DA = 1/2

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 5

Question 15.
b. What do you notice about the slopes?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
The slopes of the opposite sides are the same.

Question 15.
c. Draw another parallelogram on the coordinate plane. Do the slopes have the same characteristics?
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
Yes; opposite sides still have the same slope.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 16.
Communicate Mathematical Ideas
Ben and Phoebe are finding the slope of a line. Ben chose two points on the line and used them to find the slope. Phoebe used two different points to find the slope. Did they get the same answer? Explain.
_____________

Answer:
Yes. The slope of a line is constant. Therefore, the slope that you calculate will be the same no matter which two points you choose.

Question 17.
Analyze Relationships
Two lines pass through the origin. The lines have slopes that are opposites. Compare and contrast the lines.
Type below:
_____________

Answer:
One line has a positive slope and one has a negative slope. The lines are equally steep, but one slants upward left to right while the other slants downward left to right. The lines cross at the origin.

Question 18.
Reason Abstractly
What is the slope of the x-axis? Explain.
_____________

Answer:
Zero. The rise along the x-axis is zero, while the run along the x-axis is not zero. The slope zero/run or zero.

Guided Practice – Interpreting the Unit As Slope – Page No. 86

Give the slope of the graph and the unit rate.

Question 1.
Jorge: 5 miles every 6 hours
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 17
\(\frac{□}{□}\) miles per hour

Answer:
\(\frac{5}{6}\) miles per hour

Explanation:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 11
Slope = rise/run = 5/6
The unit rate a the distance traveled and the slope a the graph of the relationship is equal, 5/6 miles per hour
Calculate miles PER hour
5/6

Question 2.
Akiko
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 18
\(\frac{□}{□}\) miles per hour

Answer:
\(\frac{5}{4}\) miles per hour

Explanation:
Calculate miles PER hour
5 miles/4hours = 5/4 miles per hour

Question 3.
The equation y = 0.5x represents the distance Henry hikes, in miles, over time, in hours. The graph represents the rate that Clark hikes. Determine which hiker is faster. Explain.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 19
___________

Answer:
Clark is faster.

Explanation:
From the equation, Henry’s rate is equal to 0.5, or 1/2 mile per hour. Clark’s rate is the slope of the line, which is 3/2 or 1.5 miles per hour.

Write an equation relating the variables in each table.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 20
Type below:
___________

Answer:
y = 15x

Explanation:
y/x = 15/1
y = 15x
Multiply 15 with the x values to get the y values.
y = 15x

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 21
Type below:
___________

Answer:
y = 3/8 x

Explanation:
y/x = 6/16
y/x = 3/8
y = 3/8 x

Essential Question Check-In

Question 6.
Describe methods you can use to show a proportional relationship between two variables, x and y. For each method, explain how you can find the unit rate and the slope.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The ratio of y to x gives the unit rate and slope.

Explanation:
If the equation can be written as y = mx, then m is the unit rate and the slope. Graph: When the line passes through the origin, then the value of r at the point (1, r) is the unit rate and the slope.

Independent Practice – Interpreting the Unit As Slope – Page No. 87

Question 7.
A Canadian goose migrated at a steady rate of 3 miles every 4 minutes.
a. Fill in the table to describe the relationship.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 22
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 6

Explanation:
Canadian goose migrated at a steady rate of 3 miles every 4 minutes
y/x = 3/4; x/y = 4/3
y = 3/4 x; x = 4/3 y
If x = 8, y = 3/4 × 8 = 6
If y = 9, x = 4/3 × 9 = 12
If y = 12, x = 4/3 × 12 = 16
If x = 20, y = 3/4 × 20 = 15

Question 7.
b. Graph the relationship.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 23
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 7

Explanation:
The points are (4, 3), (8, 6), (12, 9), (16, 12), (20, 15)

Question 7.
c. Find the slope of the graph and describe what it means in the context of this problem.
Slope: \(\frac{□}{□}\) miles per minute

Answer:
Slope: \(\frac{3}{4}\) miles per minute

Explanation:
The unit rate of migration of the goose and the slope of the graph both equal 3/4 mi/min

Question 8.
Vocabulary
A unit rate is a rate in which the first quantity / second quantity in the comparison is one unit.
___________

Answer:
second quantity

Explanation:
A unit rate is a rate in which the “second quantity” in the comparison is one unit

Question 9.
The table and the graph represent the rate at which two machines are bottling milk in gallons per second.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 24
a. Determine the slope and unit rate of each machine.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
Machine 1: slope = unit rate = 0.6/1 = 0.6 gal/s
Machine 2: slope = unit rate = 3/4 = 0.75 gal/s

Question 9.
b. Determine which machine is working at a faster rate.
___________

Answer:
Machine 2 is working at a faster rate since 0.75 > 0.6

Interpreting the Unit As Slope – Page No. 88

Question 10.
Cycling
The equation y = \(\frac{1}{9}\) x represents the distance y, in kilometers, that Patrick traveled in x minutes while training for the cycling portion of a triathlon. The table shows the distance y Jennifer traveled in x minutes in her training. Who has the faster training rate?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 25
___________

Answer:
Jennifer has a faster training rate

Explanation:
Patrick’s rate is 1/9 kilometer per minute. Jennifer’s rate is 1/8 kilometer per minute. 1/9 < 1/8. So, Jennifer has a faster training rate.

H.O.T.

Focus on Higher Order Thinking

Question 11.
Analyze Relationships
There is a proportional relationship between minutes and dollars per minute, shown on a graph of printing expenses. The graph passes through the point (1, 4.75). What is the slope of the graph? What is the unit rate? Explain.
______ dollars per minute

Answer:
$4.75/min

Explanation:
slope = unit rate = 4.75.
If the graph of a proportional relationship passes through the point (1, r), then r equals the slope and the unit rate, which is $4.75/min.

Question 12.
Draw Conclusions
Two cars start at the same time and travel at different constant rates. A graph for Car A passes through the point (0.5, 27.5), and a graph for Car B passes through (4, 240). Both graphs show distance in miles and time in hours. Which car is traveling faster? Explain.
___________

Answer:
Car B

Explanation:
The slope and unit rate of speed of Car A is (27.5 – 0)/(0.5 – 0) = 27.5/0.5 = 55 mi/h.
The slope and unit rate of speed of Car B is (240 – 0)/(4 – 0) = 240/4 = 60 mi/h.
60 > 55, so Car B is traveling faster.

Question 13.
Critical Thinking
The table shows the rate at which water is being pumped into a swimming pool. Use the unit rate and the amount of water pumped after 12 minutes to find how much water will have been pumped into the pool after 13 \(\frac{1}{2}\) minutes. Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Lesson 3: Interpreting the Unit As Slope img 26
______ gallons

Answer:
243 gallons

Explanation:
The unit rate is 36/2 = 18gal/min.
So, 1 1/2 minutes after 12 minutes, an additional 18 × 1 1/2 = = 27 gallons will be pumped in.
So, the total is 216 + 27 = 243 gal.

3.1 Representing Proportional Relationships – Model Quiz – Page No. 89

Question 1.
Find the constant of proportionality for the table of values.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Model Quiz img 27
______

Answer:
1.5

Explanation:
constant of proportionality
k = y/x = 3/2 = 1.5
k = y/x = 4.5/3 = 1.5
k = y/x = 6/4 = 1.5
k = y/x = 7.5/5 = 1.5

Question 2.
Phil is riding his bike. He rides 25 miles in 2 hours, 37.5 miles in 3 hours, and 50 miles in 4 hours. Find the constant of proportionality and write an equation to describe the situation.
Type below:
___________

Answer:
The constant of proportionality is 12.5 miles per hour.

Explanation:
The equation is d = 12.5 × t
25 miles ÷ 2 hours = 12.5 miles/hour
A direct proportionality d = 12.5 × t

3.2 Rate of Change and Slope

Find the slope of each line.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Model Quiz img 28
______

Answer:
Slope = 3

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Model Quiz img 29
______

Answer:
Slope = -5

3.3 Interpreting the Unit Rate as Slope

Question 5.
The distance Train A travels is represented by d = 70t, where d is the distance in kilometers and t is the time in hours. The distance Train B travels at various times is shown in the table. What is the unit rate of each train? Which train is going faster?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Model Quiz img 30
____________

Answer:
Train A: 70 km per hour; Train B: 75 km per hour; Train B is faster.

Explanation:
The distance Train A travels is represented by d = 70t
where d is the distance in kilometers and t is the time in hours
The speed of train A is 70 kilometer per hour
To find the speed of train B use the table
Slope = (300 – 150)/(4 – 2) = 75
The speed of train B is 75 km per hour
The speed of train B is more

Essential Question

Question 6.
What is the relationship among proportional relationships, lines, rates of change, and slope?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The relationship between the x-axis and y-axis of any graph is a proportional Relationship which is defined by slope i.e. calculating the rate of change of the plotted line.
1) Here proportional change and rate of change are algebraic quantities which specify how one quantity changes with respect to another.
2) Line and Slope are geometric quantities which describe the graph of any equation.

Selected Response – Mixed Review – Page No. 90

Question 1.
Which of the following is equivalent to 5-1?
Options:
a. 4
b. \(\frac{1}{5}\)
c. −\(\frac{1}{5}\)
d. -5

Answer:
b. \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
5-1
1/5

Question 2.
Prasert earns $9 an hour. Which table represents this proportional relationship?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Mixed Review img 31
Options:
a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D

Answer:
a. A

Explanation:
a. 36/4 = 9; 54/6 = 9; 72/8 = 9
b. 36/4 = 9; 45/6 = 7.5; 54/8 = 6.75
c. 9/2 = 4.5
d. 18/2 = 9; 27/3 = 9; 54/4 = 13.5

Question 3.
A factory produces widgets at a constant rate. After 4 hours, 3,120 widgets have been produced. At what rate are the widgets being produced?
Options:
a. 630 widgets per hour
b. 708 widgets per hour
c. 780 widgets per hour
d. 1,365 widgets per hour

Answer:
c. 780 widgets per hour

Explanation:
A factory produces widgets at a constant rate. After 4 hours, 3,120 widgets have been produced.
3,120/4 = 780 widgets per hour

Question 4.
A full lake begins dropping at a constant rate. After 4 weeks it has dropped 3 feet. What is the unit rate of change in the lake’s level compared to its full level?
Options:
a. 0.75 feet per week
b. 1.33 feet per week
c. -0.75 feet per week
d. -1.33 feet per week

Answer:
c. -0.75 feet per week

Explanation:
A full lake begins dropping at a constant rate. After 4 weeks it has dropped 3 feet.
(-3 ft)/(4 weeks) = -3/4 ft/wk = -0.75 ft/wk

Question 5.
What is the slope of the line below?
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Mixed Review img 32
Options:
a. -2
b. −\(\frac{1}{2}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
d. 2

Answer:
c. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
(-1.5, 1.5) & (1.5, 0)
(0 – 1..5)/(1.5 – (-1.5))
1.5/3
= 1/2

Question 6.
Jim earns $41.25 in 5 hours. Susan earns $30.00 in 4 hours. Pierre’s hourly rate is less than Jim’s, but more than Susan’s. What is his hourly rate?
Options:
a. $6.50
b. $7.75
c. $7.35
d. $8.25

Answer:
b. $7.75

Explanation:
Jim earns $41.25 in 5 hours.
$41.25/5 = 8.25
Jim’s unit rate is $8.25 per hour
30/4 = 7.5
Pierre’s hourly rate is is less than $8.25 but more than $7.50
$7.75

Mini-Task

Question 7.
Joelle can read 3 pages in 4 minutes, 4.5 pages in 6 minutes, and 6 pages in 8 minutes.
a. Make a table of the data.
Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships Mixed Review img 33
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 8

Explanation:
Joelle can read 3 pages in 4 minutes,
y/x = 3/4
y = 3/4 x
If x = 6, y = 3/4 × 6 = 4.5
If x = 8, y = 3/4 × 8 = 6

Question 7.
b. Use the values in the table to find the unit rate.
_______ pages per minute

Answer:
0.75 pages per minute

Explanation:
3/4 = 0.75
4.5/6 = 0.75
6/8 = 0.75
The unit rate is 0.75 pages per minute

Question 7.
c. Graph the relationship between minutes and pages read.
Type below:
______________

Answer:
Grade 8 Chapter 3 image 9

Conclusion:

I wish the info prevailed regarding the Go Math Grade 8 Answer Key Chapter 3 Proportional Relationships PDF is beneficial for you. Share this pdf with your besties in order to help them to overcome the difficulties in maths. Students can definitely score good marks in the exam with the help of the Go Math 8th Grade Ch 3 Proportional Relationships Solution Key.All the Best!!!

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers is the most important learning guide to learn the subject properly. It is a quick preparation & practice purpose material for students and educators. So, We have provided the solutions for all the questions with a brief explanation in this Go Math HMH Grade 4 Chapter 4 Answer Key. All these solutions are prepared by the Math Experts. Students and parents are suggested to Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers pdf from here for free.

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Avail all detailed solutions to the questions via Go Math Answer Key of grade 4 chapter 4 and aid while doing homework and also while preparing for the exams. Just tap on the respective lesson link from chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and solve the questions. Along with the exercise and homework problems, we have also listed the answers for the mid-chapter checkpoint and review test in the Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers.

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 1

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 2

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 3

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 4

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 5

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 6

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 7

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 8

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 9

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 10

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 11

Mid Chapter Checkpoint

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 12

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 13

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 14

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 15

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 16

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 17

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 18

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 19

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 20

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 21

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 22

Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers – Lesson: 23

Chapter 4 – Review/Test

Common Core – Page No. 201

Estimate Quotients Using Multiples

Find two numbers the quotient is between. Then estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
175 ÷ 6
Think: 6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. Since 175 is closer to 180 than to 120, the quotient is about 30.
between 20 and 30
about 30

Answer: About 30

Explanation:
6 × 20 = 120 and 6 × 30 = 180. 175 is between 120 and 180. 175 ÷ 6 is closest to 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 is between 20 and 30. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 30.

Question 2.
53 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 18

Explanation:
17 × 3= 51 and 18 × 3 = 54. 53 is between 51 and 54. 53 ÷ 3 is closest to 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 is between 17 and 18. So, 53 ÷ 3 will be about 18.

Question 3.
75 ÷ 4
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 19

Explanation:
18 × 4= 72 and 19 × 4= 76. 75 is between 72 and 76. 75 ÷ 4 is closest to 18 and 19. So, 75÷ 4 is between 18 and 19. So, 75 ÷ 4 will be about 19.

Question 4.
215 ÷ 9
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 24

Explanation:
23 × 9= 207 and 24 × 9 = 216. 24 is between 207 and 216. 215 ÷ 9 is closest to 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 is between 23 and 24. So, 215 ÷ 9 will be about 24.

Question 5.
284 ÷ 5
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 57

Explanation:
56 × 5 = 280 and 57 × 5 = 285. 284 is between 280 and 285. 284 ÷ 5 is closest to 56 and 57. So, 284 ÷ 5 is between 56 and 57. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 57.

Question 6.
191 ÷ 3
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 64

Explanation:
63 × 3 = 189 and 64 × 3 = 192. 191 is between 189 and 192. 191 ÷ 3 is closest to 63 and 64. So, 191 ÷ 3 is between 63 and 64. So, 175 ÷ 6 will be about 64.

Question 7.
100 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 14

Explanation:
14 × 7 = 98 and 15 × 7 = 105. 100 is between 98 and 105. 100 ÷ 7 is closest to 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 is between 14 and 15. So, 100 ÷ 7 will be about 14.

Question 8.
438 ÷ 7
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 63

Explanation:
63 × 7 = 441 and 62 × 7 = 434. 438 is between 434 and 441. 438 ÷ 7 is closest to 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 is between 62 and 63. So, 438 ÷ 7 will be about 63.

Question 9.
103 ÷ 8
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 13

Explanation:
13 × 8 = 104 and 12 ×8 = 96. 103 is between 96 and 104. 103 ÷ 8 is closest to 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 is between 12 and 13. So, 103 ÷ 8 will be about 13.

Question 10.
255 ÷ 9
between ______ and
about ______

Answer: About 28

Explanation:
28 × 9 = 252 and 29 × 9 = 261. 255 is between 252 and 261. 255 ÷ 9 is closest to 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 is between 28 and 29. So, 255 ÷ 9 will be about 28.

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Joy collected 287 aluminum cans in 6 hours. About how many cans did she collect per hour?
about ______ cans

Answer: About 48 cans

Explanation:
47 × 6 = 282 and 48 × 6 = 288. 287 is between 282 and 288. 287 ÷ 6 is closest to 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷ 6 is between 47 and 48. So, 287 ÷6 will be about 48.

Question 12.
Paul sold 162 cups of lemonade in 5 hours. About how many cups of lemonade did he sell each hour?
about ______ cups

Answer: About 32 cups of lemonade he sold in each hour

Explanation:
32 × 5 = 160 and 33 × 5 = 165. 162 is between 160 and 165. 162 ÷ 5 is closest to 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 is between 32 and 33. So, 162 ÷ 5 will be about 32.

Common Core – Page No. 202

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Abby did 121 sit-ups in 8 minutes. Which is the best estimate of the number of sit-ups she did in 1 minute?
Options:
a. about 12
b. about 15
c. about 16
d. about 20

Answer: b. About 15

Explanation:
15 × 8 = 120 and 16 × 8 = 128. 121 is between 120 and 128. 121 ÷ 8 is closest to 120 and 128. So, 121 ÷ 8 is between 15 and 16. So, 121 ÷ 8 will be about 15.

Question 2.
The Garibaldi family drove 400 miles in 7 hours. Which is the best estimate of the number of miles they drove in 1 hour?
Options:
a. about 40 miles
b. about 57 miles
c. about 60 miles
d. about 70 miles

Answer: b. About 57 miles

Explanation:
57 × 7 = 399 and 58 × 7 = 406. 400 is between 399 and 406. 400 ÷ 7 is closest to 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 is between 57 and 58. So, 400 ÷ 7 will be about 57.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Twelve boys collected 16 aluminium cans each. Fifteen girls collected 14 aluminium cans each. How many more cans did the girls collect than the boys?
Options:
a. 8
b. 12
c. 14
d. 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Number of aluminium cans boys had= 12× 16=192
Number of aluminium cans girls had = 15× 14=210
Girls collected more cans compared to boys,
Number of more cans collected by girls= 210-192=18

Question 4.
George bought 30 packs of football cards. There were 14 cards in each pack. How many cards did George buy?
Options:
a. 170
b. 320
c. 420
d. 520

Answer: c. 420

Explanation:
Number of packs of football cards= 30
Number of cards in each pack= 14
Total number of cards George bought=30×14=420

Question 5.
Sarah made a necklace using 5 times as many blue beads as white beads. She used a total of 30 beads. How many blue beads did Sarah use?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 24
d. 25

Answer: d. 25

Explanation:
Let the number of white beads be x while the number of blue beads are 5x.
Total number of beads in the necklace=30 beads
According to the problem,
5x+x=30
6x=30
x=30/6=5
Therefore the number of blue beads in the necklace are 5x= 5×5=25

Question 6.
This year, Ms. Webster flew 145,000 miles on business. Last year, she flew 83,125 miles on business. How many more miles did Ms. Webster fly on business this year?
Options:
a. 61,125 miles
b. 61,875 miles
c. 61,985 miles
d. 62,125 miles

Answer: b. 61,875 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in this year= 145,000 miles
Number of miles Ms Webster flew in the last year=83,125 miles
Number of more miles travelled by Ms Webster =145,000-83,125=61,875

Page No. 205

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
10 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 10 counters to represent the 10 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of counters formed = quotient of 10 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles equally filled are 3, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 10 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
28 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of groups of  counters formed = quotient of  28÷ 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 5, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 3, or 5 r3.

Question 3.
15 ÷ 6
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 15 counters to represent the 15 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 28 ÷ 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 28 ÷ 6, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 3, or 2 r3.

Question 4.
11 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient:3 Remainder:2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 11 counters to represent the 3 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of  circles filled = quotient of 11 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 11 ÷ 3, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 2, or 3 r2.

Question 5.
29 ÷ 4
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:7  Remainder:1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled = quotient of 29 ÷ 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 29 ÷ 3, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 1, or 7 r1.

Question 6.
34 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient: 6 Remainder: 4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 34 counters to represent the 34 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled = quotient of 34 ÷ 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 34 ÷ 5, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 4, or 6 r4.

Question 7.
25 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer:Quotient: 8 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25  counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of  25 ÷ 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 25 ÷ 3, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 1, or 8 r1.

Question 8.
7)\(\overline { 20 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient:2 Remainder:6

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 7 qw20

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
4)\(\overline { 35 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder:3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of \(\overline { 35 } \)=8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Question 10.
23 ÷ 8
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 2 Remainder: 7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 23 counters to represent the 23 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 23 ÷ 8 = 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

Question 11.
Explain how you use a quick picture to find the quotient and remainder.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quick pictures can be used to find the quotient and the remainder visually and accurately.

Explanation:
Example: 39÷ 5.
Use 39 counters.
Share the counters equally among 5 groups. The number of counters left over is the remainder.
For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 2, or 7 r2.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.

Question 12.
Alyson has 46 beads to make bracelets. Each bracelet has 5 beads. How many more beads does Alyson need so that all the beads she has are used? Explain.
_____ more beads

Answer: 4 beads

Explanation:
Number of beads Alyson has= 46
Number of beads each bracelet needs=5
The number of bracelets which can be made = 46÷5

Since, the remainder is one we can say that one bead is leftover after making 9 bracelets.
Therefore, 4 beads should be added to 1 so that all the beads are used up.

Question 13.
For 13a–13d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division expression has a remainder.
a. 36 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. 23 ÷ 3
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. 82 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. 28 ÷ 7
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Page No. 206

Question 14.
Macy, Kayley, Maddie, and Rachel collected 13 marbles. They want to share the marbles equally. How many marbles will each of the 4 girls get? How many marbles will be left over?
Oscar used a model to solve this problem. He says his model represents 4)\(\overline { 13 } \). What is his error?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 1
Look at the way Oscar solved this problem. Find and describe his error.
_________________________________________________________
Draw a correct model and solve the problem.
So, each of the 4 girls will get _______ marbles and _______ marble will be left over.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Quotient: 3 Remainder: 1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 13 ÷ 4 = 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1
Therefore each girl will get 3 marbles.

Common Core – Page No. 207

Remainders

Use counters to find the quotient and remainder.

Question 1.
13 ÷ 4
3 r1

Answer: 3 r1

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 13 counters to represent the 13 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 13 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 1

For 13 ÷ 4, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 1, or 3 r1.

Question 2.
24 ÷ 7
_____ R ______

Answer: 3 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 24 counters to represent the 24 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 24 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 3 counters, therefore, the quotient is 3

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 24 ÷ 7, the quotient is 3 and the remainder is 3, or 3 r3.

Question 3.
39 ÷ 5
_____ R ______

Answer: 7 r4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 39 counters to represent the 39dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient 39 ÷ 5
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 39 ÷ 5, the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 4, or 7 r4.

Question 4.
36 ÷ 8
_____ R ______

Answer: 4 r4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 36 counters to represent the 36 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 36 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

For 36 ÷ 8, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4, or 4 r4.

Question 5.
6)\(\overline { 27 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 4 r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 27 counters to represent the 27 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 27 ÷6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 27 ÷ 6, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 3, or 4 r3.

Question 6.
25 ÷ 9
_____ R ______

Answer: 2 r7

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 25 counters to represent the 25 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 25 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 2 counters, therefore, the quotient is 2

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 7

For 25 ÷ 7, the quotient is 2 and the remainder is 7, or 2 r7.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 17 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 17 counters to represent the 17 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 17 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 17 ÷ 3, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 8.
26 ÷ 4
_____ R ______

Answer: 6 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 26 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 26 ÷ 4, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 9.
14 ÷ 3
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 14 counters to represent the 14 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 14 ÷ 3 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 10.
5)\(\overline { 29 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 5 Remainder: 4

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 29 counters to represent the 29 dominoes. Then draw 5 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 29 ÷ 5 = 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 4

Problem Solving

Question 11.
What is the quotient and remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 2
_____ R ______

Answer: quotient:6  remainder2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 20 counters to represent the 20 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 20 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 20 ÷ 3, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 2, or 6 r2.

Question 12.
Mark drew the following model and said it represented the problem 21 ÷ 4. Is Mark’s model correct? If so, what is the quotient and remainder? If not, what is the correct quotient and remainder?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 3
_____ ; _____ r

Answer: 4 r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 21 counters to represent the 21 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 21 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 21 ÷ 4, the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 5, or 4 r5.

Common Core – Page No. 208

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the quotient and remainder for 32 ÷ 6?
Options:
a. 4 r3
b. 5 r1
c. 5 r2
d. 6 r1

Answer: c. 5 r2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 32 counters to represent the 32 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 5 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 32 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

For 32 ÷ 6, the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 2, or 5 r2.

Question 2.
What is the remainder in the division problem modeled below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 4
Options:
a. 8
b. 4
c. 3
d. 1

Answer: c. 3

Explanation:
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the remainder.
The number of counters that are left  = remainder = 3

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Each kit to build a castle contains 235 parts. How many parts are in 4 of the kits?
Options:
a. 1,020
b. 940
c. 920
d. 840

Answer: b. 940

Explanation:
Number of parts used to build a castle in each kit=235 parts
Number of kits= 4
Total number of parts in 4 of the kits= 235 x 4=940 parts

Question 4.
In 2010, the population of Alaska was about 710,200. What is this number written in word form?
Options:
a. seven hundred ten thousand, two
b. seven hundred twelve thousand
c. seventy-one thousand, two
d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Answer: d. seven hundred ten thousand, two hundred

Explanation:
The ones and tens place of the number are zeroes, so the next place which is hundreds is considered and the value is 7 so, it can be written as seven hundred and in the thousands period it can be written as seven hundred ten thousand.

Question 5.
At the theater, one section of seats has 8 rows with 12 seats in each row. In the center of the first 3 rows are 4 broken seats that cannot be used. How many seats can be used in the section?
Options:
a. 84
b. 88
c. 92
d. 96

Answer: c. 92

Explanation:
Number of rows at the theatre = 8
Number of seats each row= 12
Number of seats broken and that cannot be used to sit= 4
Total number of seats that can be used= 12 x 8-4=96-4=92

Question 6.
What partial products are shown by the model below?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 5
Options:
a. 300, 24
b. 300, 600, 40, 60
c. 300, 60, 40, 24
d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Answer: d. 300, 180, 40, 24

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 10=300
Area of green rectangle= 4 x 10 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 6 x 30= 180
Area of blue rectangle= 4 x 6= 24

Common Core – Page No. 211

Question 1.
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread to be sliced for snacks at a craft fair. She will place an equal number of loaves in 6 different locations. How many loaves will be at each location?
a. Divide to find the quotient and remainder.
□ r □
6)\(\overline { 53 } \)
_____ R ______

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

Therefore, there will be 8 loaves at each location.

Question 1.
b. Decide how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
Type below:
____________

Answer:

The quotient is used to determine the number of loaves at each location, while the remainder gives us the information about the number of loaves left after placing in different locations.

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 53 counters to represent the 53 dominoes. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6  groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 53 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 8 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5
Therefore, there will be 8 mini loaves at each location.

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 2.
What if Olivia wants to put only whole loaves at each location? How many loaves will be at each location?
_______ whole loaves

Answer: Since there are 8 mini loaves at each location. Then there will be 4 whole loaves.

Explanation:
Olivia baked 53 mini-loaves of banana bread

Question 3.
Ed carves 22 small wooden animals to sell at the craft fair. He displays them in rows with 4 animals in a row. How many animals will not be in equal rows?
_______ animals

Answer: 2

Explanation:
Total number of small wooden animals=22
Number of animals in each row=4
Number of rows= 22÷4 =5
The total number of animals in the rows= 5 x 4=20
Number of animals which are not in a row= 22-20=2

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 4.
Myra has a 17-foot roll of crepe paper to make 8 streamers to decorate for a party. How long will each streamer be if she cuts the roll into equal pieces?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 2 foot

Explanation:
Length of the crepe paper = 17 foot
Number of streamers in the party=8
Length of each part if they are cut into equal pieces = 17 ÷ 8

Question 5.
Juan has a piano recital next month. Last week he practiced for 8 hours in the morning and 7 hours in the afternoon. Each practice session is 2 hours long. How many full practice sessions did Juan complete?
_______ full practice sessions

Answer: 7 full practice sessions

Explanation:
Number of hours he practiced in the morning= 8 hours
Each practice session is 2 hours long
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the morning= 8÷2=4
Number of hours he practiced in the afternoon= 7 hours
Number of full practice sessions attended by Juan in the evening= 7÷2=3

Question 6.
A total of 25 students sign up to be hosts on Parent’s Night. Teams of 3 students greet parents. How many students cannot be on a team? Explain.
_______ student

Answer: 1 student

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of students in each group = 3
The number of students who cannot be in the group= remainder obtained when 25÷3= 1

Page No. 212

Use the picture for 7–9.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 6

Question 7.
Teresa is making sock puppets just like the one in the picture. If she has 53 buttons, how many puppets can she make?
_______ sock puppets

Answer: 17 sock puppets

Explanation:
Total number of buttons Teresa has=53
Number of buttons each puppet needs= 3
Number of sock puppets made= Quotient of 53÷3=17 sock puppets

Question 8.
Write a question about Teresa and the sock puppets for which the answer is 3. Explain the answer.
Type below:
____________

Answer: How many buttons did Teresa use for one sock puppet?

Explanation:
Total number of sock puppets made= 17
Number of buttons used for making 17 sock puppets = 52
then,
Number of buttons used for one sock puppet= Quotient of 52÷17= 3 buttons

Question 9.
Interpret a Result How many more buttons will Teresa need if she wants to make 18 puppets? Explain.
_______ buttons

Answer: 1 button

Explanation:
After preparing 17 puppets there was 2 buttons leftover then on the addition of 1 button gives 3 buttons which can be used to prepare another puppet.

Question 10.
A total of 56 students signed up to play in a flag football league. If each team has 10 students, how many more students will need to sign up so all of the students can be on a team?
_______ students

Answer: 4 students

Explanation:
Total number of students in the football league= 56
Number of students in each group= 10
then,
Number of groups= Quotient of 56÷10=5 groups
Remainder= 6
By the addition of 4 students, the group of 6 gets completed by 10
Therefore, 4 students should be added so that all students can be on a team.

Question 11.
A teacher plans for groups of her students to eat lunch at tables. She has 34 students in her class. Each group will have 7 students. How many tables will she need? Explain how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question.
_______ tables

Answer: She needs 3 tables

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 34 counters to represent the 34 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 34 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 6
The quotient is used to indicate the number of groups
Therefore, there will be 4 tables.
While the remainder is used to determine the number of students in the incomplete group.

Common Core – Page No. 213

Interpret the Remainder

Interpret the remainder to solve.

Question 1.
Hakeem has 100 tomato plants. He wants to plant them in rows of 8. How many full rows will he have?
Think: 100 ÷ 8 is 12 with a remainder of 4. The question asks “how many full rows,” so use only the quotient.
12 full rows

Answer: 12 full rows

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 100 counters to represent the 100 dominoes. Then draw 8 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 100 ÷ 8
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 12 counters, therefore, the quotient is 12
Therefore, the tomatoes placed in full rows are 12

Question 2.
A teacher has 27 students in her class. She asks the students to form as many groups of 4 as possible. How many students will not be in a group?
_______ students

Answer: 3 students will not be the group

Explanation:
Total number of students in the class= 27
Number of students who make a group=4
Number of groups that can be made =Quotient of 27÷ 4=6
Number of students who do not come under a group= Remainder of 27÷ 4=3

Question 3.
A sporting goods company can ship 6 footballs in each carton. How many cartons are needed to ship 75 footballs?
_______ cartons

Answer: 12 full cartons and 0.5 or 1/2 carton to ship all the 75 footballs

Explanation:
Total number of footballs that should be shipped= 75
Number of footballs placed in each carton = 6
Number of cartons required=Quotient of 75÷ 6=12


Since each carton carries 6 balls, half carton contains 3 balls because 6÷3=2, therefore, each half of the carton contains 3 balls.

Question 4.
A carpenter has a board that is 10 feet long. He wants to make 6 table legs that are all the same length. What is the longest each leg can be?
_______ foot

Answer: The length of the longest leg=4 foot-long

Explanation:
According to the question,
Length of the board the carpenter has= 10 foot long
Number of table legs that are to be made = 6
Length of the 6 table legs are equal
then,
Length of each table leg= Quotient of 10÷6=1 foot
Length of the longest table leg= Remainder of 10÷6= 4 foot.

Question 5.
Allie wants to arrange her flower garden in 8 equal rows. She buys 60 plants. What is the greatest number of plants she can put in each row?
_______ plants

Answer: 7

Explanation:
Total number of plants Allie bought= 60
Number of rows= 8
Number of plants in each row= Quotient of 60÷8=7

Problem Solving

Question 6.
Joanna has 70 beads. She uses 8 beads for each bracelet. She makes as many bracelets as possible. How many beads will Joanna have left over?
_______ beads

Answer: 6 beads

Explanation:
Total number of beads Joanna has= 70 beads
Number beads used for each bracelet= 8 beads
Number of bracelets made with these beads= Quotient of 70÷8= 7 bracelets
then,
The number of beads leftover= Remainder of 70÷8= 6 beads

Question 7.
A teacher wants to give 3 markers to each of her 25 students. Markers come in packages of 8. How many packages of markers will the teacher need?
_______ packages

Answer: 10 packages

Explanation:
Total number of students= 25
Number of markers each student got= 3
Total number of markers the teacher needs to distribute= 25 x 3= 75
Number of markers in each package= 8
Number of packages the teacher required= Quotient of 75÷8=9
While the remainder= 3
Therefore the total number packages=10

Common Core – Page No. 214

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marcus sorts his 85 baseball cards into stacks of 9 cards each. How many stacks of 9 cards can Marcus make?
Options:
a. 4
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: d. 10

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards=85
Number of cards in each stack=9
Number of stacks sorted= Quotient of 85÷9=9
While the remainder=4
So the total number of stacks required= 10

Question 2.
A minivan can hold up to 7 people. How many minivans are needed to take 45 people to a basketball game?
Options:
a. 3
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
A minivan can hold up to 7 people.
Total number of people who want to hire the minivan= 45 people
Number of minivans required= Quotient of 45÷7= 6 vans
While the remainder is 3.
Total number of minivans required to take the people to the baseball game= 7 minivans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mrs. Wilkerson cut some oranges into 20 equal pieces to be shared by 6 friends. How many pieces did each person get and how many pieces were left over?
Options:
a. 2 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover
c. 3 pieces with 4 pieces leftover
d. 4 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Answer: b. 3 pieces with 2 pieces leftover

Explanation:
Total number of orange pieces= 20
Number of friends= 6
Number of pieces each friend got= Quotient of 20÷6= 3 pieces
Number of pieces leftover= Remainder of 20÷6= 2 pieces

Question 4.
A school bought 32 new desks. Each desk cost $24. Which is the best estimate of how much the school spent on the new desks?
Options:
a. $500
b. $750
c. $1,000
d. $1,200

Answer: b. $750

Explanation:
Total number of desks= 32
Cost of each desk= $24
Total cost spent on the desks= 32 x 24=$768

So the estimated value can be $768

Question 5.
Kris has a box of 8 crayons. Sylvia’s box has 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box. How many crayons are in Sylvia’s box?
Options:
a. 48
b. 42
c. 36
d. 4

Answer: 48 crayons

Explanation:
Number of crayons in Kris box=8
Number of crayons in Sylvia’s box= 6 times as many crayons as Kris’s box= 6 x 8=48

Question 6.
Yesterday, 1,743 people visited the fair. Today, there are 576 more people at the fair than yesterday. How many people are at the fair today?
Options:
a. 1,167
b. 2,219
c. 2,319
d. 2,367

Answer: c. 2,319

Explanation:
Number of people in the fair yesterday= 1,743
Number of more people at the fair than yesterday= 576
Total number of people in the fair today=2,319

Page No. 216

Question 1.
Divide. 2,800 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
2,800 = 28 ___________
28 hundreds ÷ 7 = ___________
2,800 ÷ 7 = ___________
Type below:
___________

Answer: 400

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 4 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400

Question 2.
Divide. 280 ÷ 7
What basic fact can you use? ___________
280 = 28 ___________
28 tens ÷ _____ = 4 ___________
280 ÷ 7 = _____
Type below:
___________

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 4 tens
280 ÷ 7 = 40

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 3.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Question 4.
2,000 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 20 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,000 = 20 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 20 hundreds ÷ 5 = 4 hundreds
2,000 ÷ 5 = 400

Question 5.
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Question 6.
560 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 70

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 56 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 560 = 56 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 56 tens ÷ 8 = 7 tens
560 ÷ 8 = 70

Question 7.
6,400 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 64 ÷ 8
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,400 =64 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 64 hundreds ÷ 8 = 8 hundreds
6,400 ÷ 8 = 800

Question 8.
3,500 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 35 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,500 = 35 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 35 hundreds ÷ 7 = 5 hundreds
3,500 ÷ 7 = 500

Use Patterns Algebra Find the unknown number.

Question 9.
420 ÷ ______ = 60

Answer: 7

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 420 with 60

Therefore the quotient of 420 ÷ 60= The missing number=7

Question 10.
______ ÷ 4 = 30

Answer: 120

Explanation:
To find the dividend (the missing number) we must multiply the divisor and the quotient.
Therefore the dividend is 30 x 4=120.

Question 11.
810 ÷ ______ = 90

Answer: 9

Explanation:
To find the divisor (the missing number) divide 810 with 90

Therefore the quotient of 810 ÷ 90= The missing number=9

Question 12.
Divide 400 ÷ 40. Explain how patterns and place value can help.
______

Answer: 10

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 40 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 400 = 40 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 40 tens ÷ 4 = 1 tens
400 ÷ 40 = 10

Question 13.
Eileen collected 98 empty cans to recycle, and Carl collected 82 cans. They packed an equal number of cans into each of three boxes to take to the recycling center.
How many cans were in each box?
______ cans

Answer: 60 cans

Explanation:
Total number of cans = 98+82=180 cans
Number of boxes= 3
Number of cans in each box= 180 ÷3=60 cans

Question 14.
It costs a baker $18 to make a small cake. He sells 8 small cakes for $240. How much more is the selling price of each cake than the cost?
$ ______

Answer: $96

Explanation:
Cost of each cake= $18
Number of cakes baked= 8
The actual cost of the cakes = $18 x $8=$144
The selling price of the cakes=$240
Amount gained on the cakes= $240-$144=$96

Page No. 217

Question 15.
Jamal put 600 pennies into 6 equal rolls. How many pennies were in each roll?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 7
______ pennies

Answer: 100 pennies

Explanation:
Total number of pennies= 600
Number of rolls= 6
The number of pennies= Quotient of 600 ÷ 6=100

Question 16.
Sela has 6 times as many coins now as she had 4 months ago. If Sela has 240 coins now, how many coins did she have 4 months ago?
______ coins

Answer: 60 coins

Explanation:
Let the number of coins four months ago be x coins.
According to the question,
Number of coins Sela has at present = 4x
4x=240
x= 240 ÷ 4=60
Therefore the number of coins Sela has=60

Question 17.
Chip collected 2,090 dimes. Sue collected 1,910 dimes. They divided all their dimes into 8 equal stacks. How many dimes are in each stack?
______ dimes

Answer:

Explanation:
Number of dimes Chip collected= 2,090
Number of dimes Sue collected= 1,910
Total number of dimes= 2,090+1,910= 4100
Number of stacks= 8
Number of dimes in each stack = Quotient of 4100 ÷8=512

Question 18.
Communicate Mr. Roberts sees a rare 1937 penny. The cost of the penny is $210. If he saves $3 each week, will Mr. Roberts have enough money to buy the penny in one year? Explain.
______

Answer: No Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Explanation:
Amount saved in each week= $3
Number of weeks in a year= 52
The total amount saved= 52 x 3=$156
Cost of the penny=$210
Therefore Mr. Roberts cannot buy the penny in one year.

Question 19.
Mrs. Fletcher bought 5 coins for $32 each. Later, she sold all the coins for $300. How much more did Mrs. Fletcher receive for each coin than she paid? Explain.
$ ______

Answer:$60

Explanation:
Number of coins=5
Cost of each coin = $32
Total cost of the coins= $32 x 5=$160
She sold the coins for $300
Cost of each coin= $300 ÷ 5= $60

Page No. 218

Question 20.
Which quotients are equal to 20? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 600 ÷ 2
b. 1,200 ÷ 6
c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7
e. 500 ÷ 5

Answer: c. 180 ÷ 9
d. 140 ÷ 7

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 180 counters to represent the 180 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 180 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Quotient:
A. Use 140 counters to represent the 140 dominoes. Then draw 7 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 7 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 140 ÷ 7
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 20 counters, therefore, the quotient is 20

Insect Flight

True flight is shared only by insects, bats, and birds. Flight in insects varies from the clumsy flight of some beetles to the acrobatic moves of dragonflies.
The wings of insects are not moved by muscles attached to the wings. Muscles in the middle part of the body, or thorax, move the wings. The thorax changes shape as the wings move.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 8

Question 21.
About how many times does a damselfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?
______ times

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Question 22.
About how many times do a scorpion fly’s wings beat in 6 minutes?
______ times

Answer: 10,000

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 3 minutes=5,000
Number of parts of time-intervals in 6 minutes = 6÷3=2
Number of wingbeats of scorpionfly in 6 minutes= 5,000 x 2 = 10,000

Question 23.
In one minute, about how many more times do a damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly’s wings?
______ more times

Answer: 200

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 3 minutes= 2,700
Number of wingbeats of Damselfly in 1 minute= 2,700 ÷3=900

Total number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 3 minutes= 2,100
Number of wingbeats of large white butterfly in 1 minute= 2,100 ÷3=700

Number of more times the damselfly’s wings beat than a large white butterfly=900-700=200

Question 24.
What’s the Question? The answer is about 2,300 times.
Type below:
___________

Answer: About how many times do an Aeschind dragonfly’s wings beat in 1 minute?

Explanation:
Total number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 3 minutes= 6,900
Number of wingbeats of Aeschind dragonfly’s in 1 minute= 6,900 ÷3=2,300

Common Core – Page No. 219

Divide Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 1.
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900
Think: 3,600 is 36 hundreds.
Use the basic fact 36 ÷ 4 = 9.
So, 36 hundreds ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds, or 900.

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,600 = 36 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 36 hundered ÷ 4 = 9 hundreds
3,600 ÷ 4 = 900

Question 2.
240 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 40

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 24 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 240 = 24 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 24 tens ÷ 6 = 4 tens
240 ÷ 6 = 40

Question 3.
5,400 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 600

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 54 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 5,400 = 54 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds
5,400 ÷ 9 = 600

Question 4.
300 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 300 = 30 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 30 tens ÷ 5 = 60 tens
300 ÷ 5 = 60

Question 5.
4,800 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 800

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 48 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,800 = 48 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 48 hundreds ÷ 6 = 80 hundreds
4,800 ÷ 6 = 800

Question 6.
420 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 42 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 420 = 42 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 42 tens ÷ 7 = 60 tens
420 ÷ 7 = 60

Question 7.
150 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 3 = 5 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 50

Question 8.
6,300 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 63 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 6,300 = 63 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 63 hundreds ÷ 7 = 9 hundreds
6,300 ÷ 7 = 900

Question 9.
1,200 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 12 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,200 = 12 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 12 hundreds ÷ 4 = 3 hundreds
1,200 ÷ 4 = 300

Question 10.
360 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 60

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 36 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 360 = 36 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 36 tens ÷ 6 = 6 tens
360 ÷ 6 = 60

Find the quotient.

Question 11.
28 ÷ 4 = ______
280 ÷ 4 = ______
2,800 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 7, 70, 700

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 28 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 7 counters, therefore, the quotient is 7

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 280 = 28 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 28 tens ÷ 4 = 7 tens
280 ÷ 4 = 70

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 28 ÷ 4
STEP 2 Use place value. 2,800 = 28 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 28 hundreds ÷ 4 = 7 hundreds
2,800 ÷ 4 = 700

Question 12.
18 ÷ 3 = ______
180 ÷ 3 = ______
1,800 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 6, 60, 600

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 18 counters to represent the 18 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 18 ÷ 3
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 180 = 18 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 18 tens ÷ 3 = 6 tens
180 ÷ 6 = 60

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 18 ÷ 3
STEP 2 Use place value. 1,800 = 18 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 18 hundreds ÷ 3 = 6 hundreds
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600

Question 13.
45 ÷ 9 = ______
450 ÷ 9 = ______
4,500 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 5, 50, 500

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 45 counters to represent the 45 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 45 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 5 counters, therefore, the quotient is 5

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 450 = 45 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 45 tens ÷ 9 = 5 tens
450 ÷ 9 = 50

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 45 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 4,500 = 45 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 45 hundreds ÷ 9 = 5 hundreds
4,500 ÷ 9 = 500

Problem Solving

Question 14.
At an assembly, 180 students sit in 9 equal rows. How many students sit in each row?
______ students

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Total number of students= 180
Number of rows= 9
Number of students in each row= 180 ÷9=20

Question 15.
Hilary can read 560 words in 7 minutes. How many words can Hilary read in 1 minute?
______ words

Answer: 80

Explanation:
Total number of words Hilary can read in 7 minutes = 560
Number of words Hilary can read in 1 minute= 560 ÷ 7= 80

Question 16.
A company produces 7,200 gallons of bottled water each day. The company puts 8 one-gallon bottles in each carton. How many cartons are needed to hold all the one-gallon bottles produced in one day?
______ cartons

Answer: 900

Explanation:
Total number of gallons bottled in each day= 7,200
Number of gallons bottled in each carton= 8
Number of cartons used= 7,200 ÷ 8= 900

Question 17.
An airplane flew 2,400 miles in 4 hours. If the plane flew the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did it fly in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 600

Explanation:
Total number of miles flew in 4 hours= 2,400
Number of miles flew in 1 hour= 2,400÷4=600

Common Core – Page No. 220

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A baseball player hits a ball 360 feet to the outfield. It takes the ball 4 seconds to travel this distance. How many feet does the ball travel in 1 second?
Options:
a. 9 feet
b. 40 feet
c. 90 feet
d. 900 feet

Answer: c. 90 feet

Explanation:
The height to which the player hits a ball=360 feet
Height to which the ball travels in 1 second= 360÷4= 90 feet

Question 2.
Sebastian rides his bike 2,000 meters in 5 minutes. How many meters does he bike in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 4 meters
b. 40 meters
c. 50 meters
d. 400 meters

Answer: d. 400 meters

Explanation:
Total number of meters travelled in 5 minutes= 2,000
Number of meters travelled in 1 minute= 2,000÷5= 400

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A full container of juice holds 63 ounces. How many 7-ounce servings of juice are in a full container?
Options:
a. 1
b. 8
c. 9
d. 10

Answer: c. 9

Explanation:
A full container of juice holds= 63 ounces
Quantity of servings of juice in one glass=7 ounce
Number of servings of the juice are= 63÷7=9

Question 4.
Paolo pays $244 for 5 identical calculators. Which is the best estimate of how much Paolo pays for one calculator?
Options:
a. $40
b. $50
c. $60
d. $245

Answer: b. $50

Explanation:
Amount Paolo pays for the identical calculators = $244
Number of identical calculators=5
The best estimated value of each identical calculator=$244 ÷ 5is approximately $50

Question 5.
A football team paid $28 per jersey. They bought 16 jerseys. How much money did the team spend on jerseys?
Options:
a. $44
b. $196
c. $408
d. $448

Answer: d. $448

Explanation:
Cost of each jersey=$28
Number of jerseys= 16
Total cost of the jerseys= $28 x 16= $448

Question 6.
Suzanne bought 50 apples at the apple orchard. She bought 4 times as many red apples as green apples. How many more red apples than green apples did Suzanne buy?
Options:
a. 10
b. 25
c. 30
d. 40

Answer: d. 40

Explanation:
Let the number of green apples be x and the number of red apples be 4x
4x + x = 50
x = 50  ÷ 5= 10
Number of red balls = 4x = 4 x 10 = 40

Page No. 222

Question 1.
Estimate. 1,718 ÷ 4
Think: What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
______ is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
______ ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because
__________________________________.
16 ÷ 4 = ______
1,600 ÷ ______ = ______
1,718 ÷ 4 is about ______
Type below:
_________

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 1,718 is easy to divide by 4?
1,600 is close to 1,718. What basic fact can you use?
1,600 ÷ 4
Choose 1,600 because it is close to 1,718 and can easily be divided by 4.
16 ÷ 4 = 4
1,600 ÷ 4 = 400
1,600 ÷ 4 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 2.
455 ÷ 9
______

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 455 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 455. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 455 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
455 ÷ 9 is about 50

Question 3.
1,509 ÷ 3
______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 1,509 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,509. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,509 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,509 ÷ 3 is about 500

Question 4.
176 ÷ 8
______

Answer:

Explanation:
What number close to 176 is easy to divide by 8?
160 is close to 176. What basic fact can you use?
160 ÷ 8
Choose 160 because it is close to 176 and can easily be divided by 8.
16 ÷ 8 = 2
160 ÷ 8 = 20
176 ÷ 8 is about 20

Question 5.
2,795 ÷ 7
______

Answer:  400

Explanation:
What number close to 2,795 is easy to divide by 7?
2,800 is close to 2,795. What basic fact can you use?
2,800 ÷ 7
Choose 2,800 because it is close to 2,795 and can easily be divided by 7.
28 ÷ 7 = 4
2,800 ÷ 7 = 400
2,795 ÷ 7 is about 400

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 6.
5,321 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 900

Explanation:
What number close to 5,321 is easy to divide by 6?
5,400 is close to 5,321. What basic fact can you use?
5,400 ÷ 6
Choose 5,400 because it is close to 5,321 and can easily be divided by 6.
54 ÷ 6 = 9
5,400 ÷ 6 = 900
5,321 ÷ 6 is about 900

Question 7.
1,765 ÷ 6
______ and ______

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 1,765 is easy to divide by 6?
1,800 is close to 1,765. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 6
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,765 and can easily be divided by 6.
18 ÷ 6 = 3
1,800 ÷ 6 = 300
1,765 ÷ 6 is about 300

Question 8.
1,189 ÷ 3
______ and ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:
What number close to 1,189 is easy to divide by 3?
1,200 is close to 1,189. What basic fact can you use?
1,200 ÷ 3
Choose 1,200 because it is close to 1,189 and can easily be divided by 3.
12 ÷ 3 = 4
1,200 ÷ 3 = 400
1,189 ÷ 3 is about 400

Question 9.
2,110 ÷ 4
______ and ______

Answer: 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,110 is easy to divide by 4?
2,000 is close to 2,110. What basic fact can you use?
2,000 ÷ 4
Choose 2,000 because it is close to 2,110 and can easily be divided by 4.
20 ÷ 4 = 5
2,000 ÷ 4 = 500
2,110 ÷ 4 is about 500

Reason Abstractly Algebra Estimate to compare. Write <, >, or =.

Question 10.
613 ÷ 3 ______ 581 ÷ 2

Answer: 613 ÷ 3 < 581 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 613 is easy to divide by 3?
600 is close to 613. What basic fact can you use?
600 ÷ 3
Choose 600 because it is close to 613 and can easily be divided by 3.
6 ÷ 3 = 2
600 ÷ 3 = 200
613 ÷ 3 is about 200

What number close to 581 is easy to divide by 2?
580 is close to 581. What basic fact can you use?
580 ÷ 2
Choose 580 because it is close to 581 and can easily be divided by 2.
58 ÷ 2 = 29
580 ÷ 2 = 290
581 ÷ 2 is about 290

Question 11.
364 ÷ 4 ______ 117 ÷ 6

Answer: 364 ÷ 4 >  117 ÷ 6

Explanation:
What number close to 364 is easy to divide by 4?
360 is close to 364. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 4
Choose 360 because it is close to 364 and can easily be divided by 4.
36 ÷ 4 = 9
360 ÷ 4 = 90
364 ÷ 4 is about 90

What number close to 117 is easy to divide by 6?
120 is close to 117. What basic fact can you use?
120 ÷ 6
Choose 120 because it is close to 117 and can easily be divided by 6.
12 ÷ 6 = 2
120 ÷ 6 = 20
117 ÷ 6 is about 20

Question 12.
2,718 ÷ 8 ______ 963 ÷ 2

Answer: 2,718 ÷ 8 < 963 ÷ 2

Explanation:
What number close to 2,718 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,718. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,718 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8 = 300
2,718 ÷ 8 is about 300

What number close to 963 is easy to divide by 2?
960 is close to 963. What basic fact can you use?
960 ÷ 2
Choose 960 because it is close to 963 and can easily be divided by 2.
96 ÷ 2 = 48
960 ÷ 2 = 480
963 ÷ 2 is about 480

Question 13.
If Cade shoots 275 free throw baskets in 2 hours, about how many can he shoot in 5 hours?
about ______ free throw baskets

Answer: 688 free throw baskets

Explanation:
Number of free-throw baskets in 2 hours= 275
Number of free-throw baskets in 1 hour = 275÷2=137.5
Number of free-throw baskets in 5 hours= 137.5 x 5= 687.5 =rounding to nearest whole number 688 free throw baskets ( approx)

Question 14.
A carpenter has 166 doorknobs in his workshop. Of those doorknobs, 98 are round and the rest are square. If he wants to place 7 square doorknobs in each bin, about how many bins would he need?
about ______ bins

Answer: 10

Explanation:
The total number of doorknobs in a workshop= 166
Number of round doorknobs in a workshop= 98
Number of square doorknobs in a workshop=166-98=68
Number of square doorknobs in each bin= 7
Number of bins= 68÷7= 9.7= rounding to nearest whole number 10 bins (approx)

Page No. 223

Use the table for 15–17.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 9

Question 15.
About how many times does a chicken’s heart beat in 1 minute?
about ______ times

Answer: 275

Explanation:
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 1,375
Number of times the chicken’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 1,375÷ 5= 275

Question 16.
About how many times does a cow’s heart beat in 2 minutes?
about ______ times

Answer: 130

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 2 minutes= 65 x 2=130

Question 17.
Use Reasoning About how many times faster does a cow’s heart beat than a whale’s?
about ______ times

Answer: nearly 11 times

Explanation:
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 325
Number of times the cow’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 325÷5=65

Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 5 minutes= 31
Number of times the whale’s heartbeats in 1 minute= 31÷5=6.2= rounding to nearest whole number 6 (approx)

Number of more times the cow’s heartbeats compared to whale’s=65÷6=10.8 times=rounding to a nearest whole number 11(approx)

Question 18.
Martha had 154 stamps and her sister had 248 stamps. They combined their collections and put the stamps in an album. If they want to put 8 stamps on each page, about how many pages would they need?
about ______ times

Answer: 50.25 pages

Explanation:
Number of stamps Martha has= 154
Number of stamps Martha’s sister has= 248
The total number of stamps they have= 154+248=402
Number of stamps on each page= 8
Number of pages= 402÷8= 50.25 pages= 51 (approx)

Question 19.
Jamie and his two brothers divided a package of 125 toy cars equally. About how many cars did each of them receive?
about ______ times

Answer: 41.67

Explanation:
Number of toys Jamie has= 125 toy cars
Number of toys Jamie and his two brothers divide= 125÷3= 41.67

Question 20.
Harold and his brother collected 2,019 cans over a 1-year period. Each boy collected the same number of cans. About how many cans did each boy collect? Explain how you found your answer.
about ______ times

Answer: 1,010

Explanation:
Number of cans Harold and his brother collected = 2,019 cans
Number of cans each boy collected = 2,019÷2= 1,009.5 cans = 1,010 cans(approx)

Page No. 224

Question 21.
Cause and Effect
The reading skill cause and effect can help you understand how one detail in a problem is related to another detail.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 10
Chet wants to buy a new bike that costs $276. Chet mows his neighbor’s lawn for $15 each week. Since Chet does not have money saved, he needs to decide which layaway plan he can afford to buy the new bike.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 11
Which plan should Chet choose?
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.
Type below:
___________

Answer: Chet can afford the 3-months layaway plan.

Explanation:
What number close to $276  is easy to divide by 3?
$270 is close to $276. What basic fact can you use?
$270 ÷ 3
Choose 270 because it is close to 276 and can easily be divided by 3.
27 ÷ 3 = 9
270 ÷ 3 = 90
$276 ÷ 3 is about 90

Use estimation to solve.

Question 21.
Sofia wants to buy a new bike that costs $214. Sofia helps her grandmother with chores each week for $18. Estimate to find which layaway plan Sofia should choose and why.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 3 months

Explanation:
What number close to $214  is easy to divide by 3?
$215 is close to $214. What basic fact can you use?
$215 ÷ 3
Choose 215 because it is close to 214 and can easily be divided by 3.
215 ÷ 3 = 71.6=72 (approx)
$214 ÷ 3 is about 72

Question 22.
Describe a situation when you have used cause and effect to help you solve a math problem.
Type below:
___________

Answer: To buy a bike

Explanation:
3-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 3
Estimate.
$270 ÷ 3 ______
6-month layaway:
$276 ÷ 6
Estimate.
$300 ÷ 6 _____
Chet earns $15 each week. Since there are usually 4 weeks in a month, multiply to see which payment he can afford.
$15 × 4 = _______
So, Chet can afford the ______ layaway plan.

The above is a profit gaining plan to buy a bike.

Common Core – Page No. 224

Estimate Quotients Using Compatible Numbers

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 1.
389 ÷ 4
400 ÷ 4 = 100

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 389 is easy to divide by 4?
400 is close to 389. What basic fact can you use?
400 ÷ 4
Choose 400 because it is close to 389 and can easily be divided by 4.
40 ÷ 4 = 10
400 ÷ 4 = 100
389 ÷ 4 is about 100

Question 2.
358 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 120

Explanation:
What number close to358 is easy to divide by 3?
360 is close to 358. What basic fact can you use?
360 ÷ 3
Choose 360 because it is close to 358 and can easily be divided by 3.
36 ÷3 = 12
360 ÷ 3 =120
358 ÷ 3 is about 120

Question 3.
784 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 100

Explanation:
What number close to 784 is easy to divide by 8?
800 is close to 784. What basic fact can you use?
800 ÷ 8
Choose 800 because it is close to 784 and can easily be divided by 8.
80 ÷ 8 = 10
800 ÷ 8 = 100
784 ÷ 8 is about 100

Question 4.
179 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 20

Explanation:
What number close to 179 is easy to divide by 9?
180 is close to 179. What basic fact can you use?
180 ÷ 9
Choose 180 because it is close to 179 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
180 ÷ 9 = 20
179 ÷ 9 is about 20

Question 5.
315 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: 40

Explanation:
What number close to 315 is easy to divide by 8?
320 is close to 315. What basic fact can you use?
320 ÷ 8
Choose 320 because it is close to 315 and can easily be divided by 8.
32 ÷ 8 = 4
320 ÷ 8 =40
315 ÷ 8 is about 40

Question 6.
2,116 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,116 is easy to divide by 7?
2,100 is close to 2,116. What basic fact can you use?
2,100 ÷ 7
Choose 2,100 because it is close to 2,116 and can easily be divided by 7.
21 ÷ 7= 3
2,100 ÷ 7 = 300
2,116 ÷ 7 is about 300

Question 7.
4,156 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 600

Explanation:
What number close to 4,156 is easy to divide by 7?
4,200 is close to 4,156. What basic fact can you use?
4,200 ÷7
Choose 4,200 because it is close to 4,156 and can easily be divided by 7.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
4,200 ÷ 7 = 600
4,156 ÷ 7 is about 600

Question 8.
474 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 50

Explanation:
What number close to 474 is easy to divide by 9?
450 is close to 474. What basic fact can you use?
450 ÷ 9
Choose 450 because it is close to 474 and can easily be divided by 9.
45 ÷ 9 = 5
450 ÷ 9 = 50
474 ÷ 9 is about 50

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates that the quotient is between.

Question 9.
1,624 ÷ 3
_____ ÷ 3 = _____
_____ ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 500 and 600

Explanation:
What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,500 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,500 ÷ 3
Choose 1,500 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
15 ÷ 3 = 5
1,500 ÷ 3 = 500
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 500

What number close to 1,624 is easy to divide by 3?
1,800 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 3
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,624 and can easily be divided by 3.
18 ÷ 3 = 6
1,800 ÷ 3 = 600
1,624 ÷ 3 is about 600

Question 10.
2,593 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 400 and 500

Explanation:
What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
2,400 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 6
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
24 ÷ 6 = 4
2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 400

What number close to 2,593 is easy to divide by 6?
3,000 is close to 2,593. What basic fact can you use?
3000 ÷ 6
Choose 3,000 because it is close to 2,593 and can easily be divided by 6.
30 ÷ 6 = 5
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500
2,593 ÷ 6 is about 500

Question 11.
1,045 ÷ 2
_____ ÷ 2 = _____
_____ ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 520 and 525

Explanation:
What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,040 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,040 ÷ 2
Choose 1,040 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,04 ÷ 2 = 52
1,040 ÷ 2 = 520
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 520

What number close to 1,045 is easy to divide by 2?
1,050 is close to 1,045. What basic fact can you use?
1,050 ÷ 2
Choose 1,050 because it is close to 1,045 and can easily be divided by 2.
1,050 ÷ 2 = 525
1,045 ÷ 2 is about 525

Question 12.
1,754 ÷ 9
_____ ÷ 9 = _____
_____ ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 195 and 200

Explanation:
What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,755 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,755 ÷ 9
Choose 1,755 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
1,755 ÷ 9 = 195
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 195

What number close to 1,754 is easy to divide by 9?
1,800 is close to 1,754. What basic fact can you use?
1,800 ÷ 9
Choose 1,800 because it is close to 1,754 and can easily be divided by 9.
18 ÷ 9 = 2
1,800 ÷ 9 = 200
1,754 ÷ 9 is about 200

Question 13.
2,363 ÷ 8
_____ ÷ 8 = _____
_____ ÷ 8 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 295 and 300

Explanation:
What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,360 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,360 ÷ 8
Choose 2,360 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
2,360 ÷ 8 = 295
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 295

What number close to 2,363 is easy to divide by 8?
2,400 is close to 2,363. What basic fact can you use?
2,400 ÷ 8
Choose 2,400 because it is close to 2,363 and can easily be divided by 8.
24 ÷ 8 = 3
2,400 ÷ 8= 300
2,363 ÷ 8 is about 300

Question 14.
1,649 ÷ 5
_____ ÷ 5 = _____
_____ ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 329 and 330

Explanation:
What number close to 1,649 is easy to divide by 5?
1,645 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,645 ÷ 5
Choose 1,645 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,645 ÷ 5 = 329
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 329

What number close to 1,650 is easy to divide by 5?
1,650 is close to 1,649. What basic fact can you use?
1,650 ÷ 5
Choose 1,650 because it is close to 1,649 and can easily be divided by 5.
1,650 ÷ 5 = 330
1,649 ÷ 5 is about 330

Question 15.
5,535 ÷ 7
_____ ÷ 7 = _____
_____ ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 790 and 791

Explanation:
What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,530 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,530 ÷ 7
Choose 5,530 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,530 ÷ 7 = 790
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 790

What number close to 5,535 is easy to divide by 7?
5,537 is close to 5,535. What basic fact can you use?
5,537 ÷ 7
Choose 5,537 because it is close to 5,535 and can easily be divided by 7.
553 ÷ 7 = 79
5,537 ÷ 7 = 791
5,535 ÷ 7 is about 791

Question 16.
3,640 ÷ 6
_____ ÷ 6 = _____
_____ ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: The quotient is between 606 and 607

Explanation:
What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,636 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,636 ÷ 6
Choose 3,636 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
36 ÷ 6 = 6
3,636 ÷ 6 = 606
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 606

What number close to 3,640 is easy to divide by 6?
3,642 is close to 3,640. What basic fact can you use?
3,642 ÷ 6
Choose 3,642 because it is close to 3,640 and can easily be divided by 6.
3,642 ÷ 6 = 607
3,640 ÷ 6 is about 607

Problem Solving

Question 17.
A CD store sold 3,467 CDs in 7 days. About the same number of CDs were sold each day. About how many CDs did the store sell each day?
about _____ CDs

Answer: 495(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of CDs in the store= 3,467
Number of days= 7
Number of CDs sold on one day= 3,467 ÷ 7=495(approx)

Question 18.
Marcus has 731 books. He puts about the same number of books on each of 9 shelves in his a bookcase. About how many books are on each shelf?
about _____ books

Answer: 81 books(approx)

Explanation:
Total number of books Marcus has= 731
Number of shelves= 9
Number of books on each shelf= 731÷9= 81 (approx)

Common Core – Page No. 226

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Jamal is planting seeds for a garden nursery. He plants 9 seeds in each container. If Jamal has 296 seeds to plant, about how many containers will he use?
Options:
a. about 20
b. about 30
c. about 200
d. about 300

Answer: b. about 30

Explanation:
Total number of seeds Jamal has= 296
Number of seeds placed in each container= 9
Number of containers Jamal used= 296÷9= 32.8=33 (approx)
Therefore, the number of containers used is about 30

Question 2.
Winona purchased a set of vintage beads. There are 2,140 beads in the set. If she uses the beads to make bracelets that have 7 beads each, about how many bracelets can she make?
Options:
a. about 30
b. about 140
c. about 300
d. about 14,000

Answer: c. about 300

Explanation:
Total number of beads Winona has= 2,140
Number of beads in each bracelet= 7
Number of bracelets made= 2,140÷7=305.7=306(approx)
Therefore, the number of bracelets made are about 30

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A train traveled 360 miles in 6 hours. How many miles per hour did the train travel?
Options:
a. 60 miles per hour
b. 66 miles per hour
c. 70 miles per hour
d. 600 miles per hour

Answer: a. 60 miles per hour

Explanation:
Total number of miles travelled by the train= 360
Time taken by the train to cover 360 miles= 6 hours
Number of miles travelled in each hour= 360÷6=60 miles

Question 4.
An orchard has 12 rows of pear trees. Each row has 15 pear trees. How many pear trees are there in the orchard?
Options:
a. 170
b. 180
c. 185
d. 190

Answer: b. 180

Explanation:
Number of rows of pear trees in an orchard= 12
Number of pear trees in each row=15
Total number of pear trees in the orchard= 12 x 15=180

Question 5.
Megan rounded 366,458 to 370,000. To which place did Megan round the number?
Options:
a. hundred thousand
b. ten thousand
c. thousands
d. hundreds

Answer: b. ten thousand

Explanation:
The given number is 366,458, the ten thousand place digit has 6 which while rounding off should be changed to the next consecutive number and the digits in the other places should be written as zeroes.

Question 6.
Mr. Jessup, an airline pilot, flies 1,350 miles a day. How many miles will he fly in 8 days?
Options:
a. 1,358 miles
b. 8,400 miles
c. 10,800 miles
d. 13,508 miles

Answer: c. 10,800 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in one day= 1,350 miles
Number of days=8
Total number of miles flew by Mr.Jessup in 8 days= 1,350 x 8= 10,800 miles

Page No. 229

Model the division on the grid.

Question 1.
26 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 12
Type below:
_________

Answer: 26 ÷ 2 = (20 ÷ 2) + (6 ÷ 2)
= 10 + 3
= 13

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 26 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 26 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 26 as 20 + 6. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (20 + 6 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
26 ÷ 2 = (20÷ 2 ) + (6÷ 2)
= 10+ 3
= 13

Question 2.
45 ÷ 3 = (□ ÷ 3) + (□ ÷ 3)
= □ + □
= □
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 13
Type below:
_________

Answer: 45 ÷ 3 = (15 ÷ 3) + (30 ÷ 3)
= 5 + 10
= 15

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 45 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 45 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 45 as 15 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (15 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
45 ÷ 3 = (15÷ 3 ) + (30÷ 3 )
= 5 + 10
= 15

Find the quotient.

Question 3.
82 ÷ 2 = (□ ÷ 2) + (□ ÷ 2)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2) + ( 2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Explanation:
A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 82 ÷ 2. Shade columns of 2 until you have 80 squares.
How many groups of 2 can you make?
B. Think of 82 as 80 + 2. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (80 + 2 ) ÷ 2. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colors.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
82 ÷ 2 = (80 ÷ 2 ) + (2÷ 2)
= 40 + 1
= 41

Question 4.
208 ÷ 4 = (□ ÷ 4) + (□ ÷ 4)
= □ + □
= □
______

Answer: 208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4) + (8 ÷ 4)
= 50 + 4
= 54

Explanation:
A. Outline another model to show 208 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 208 as 200 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
208 ÷ 4 = (200 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 50 + 4
= 54

Use base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 5.
88 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 22

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 88 ÷ 4.
How many groups of 4 can you make?
B. Think of 88 as 80 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
88 ÷ 4 = (80 ÷ 4 ) + (8 ÷ 4 )
= 40 + 4
= 44

Question 6.
36 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 12

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 36 ÷ 3.
Shade columns of 3 until you have 36 squares.
How many groups of 3 can you make? _
B. Think of 36 as 6 + 30. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 30 ) ÷ 3. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
36 ÷ 3 = (30÷ 3 ) + (6÷ 3 )
= 10 + 2
= 12

Question 7.
186 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 31

Explanation:

A. Outline a rectangle on a grid to model 186 ÷ 6.
Shade columns of 18 until you have 180 squares.
How many groups of 6 can you make? _
B. Think of 186 as 6 + 180. Break apart the model into two rectangles to show (6 + 180 ) ÷ 6. Label and shade the smaller rectangles. Use two different colours.
C. Each rectangle models a division.
186 ÷ 6 = (180÷ 6 ) + (6÷ 6 )
= 30 + 1
= 31

Question 8.
Explain how you can model finding quotients using the Distributive Property.
Type below:
_________

Answer: We can use the Distributive Property to break apart numbers to
make them easier to divide.

Explanation:
50
The Distributive Property of division says that dividing a sum by
a number is the same as dividing each addend by the number
and then adding the quotients.

Question 9.
Justin earned $50 mowing lawns and $34 washing cars. He wants to divide his money into 3 equal accounts. How much will he put in each account? Explain.
$ ______

Answer: $28

Explanation:
The amount earned by Justin on mowing lawns=$50
The amount earned by Justin on washing cars=$34
Total amount earned=$50 + $34= $84
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the amount he earned= 3
The amount put in each account= $84 ÷ 3 = $28

Page No. 230

Question 10.
Christelle went to a gift shop. The shop sells candles in a variety of sizes and colors. The picture shows a display of candles. Write a problem that can be solved using the picture.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 14
Pose a problem.      Solve your problem

Answer:
Question: How many candles are there in the gift shop?

Explanation:
Count the number of candles in the rows and columns and then multiply them, by this we can find out the total number of candles in the gift shop.

Describe how you could change the problem by changing the number of rows of candles. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: There will be no change in the solution by changing the number of rows of candles.

Explanation:
By changing the number of rows of candles the number of columns increase but there will be no change in the total number of candles.

Question 11.
For 11a–11d, choose Yes or No to indicate if the expression shows a way to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 147 ÷ 7.
a. (135 ÷ 7) + (10 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because 137+10 is not equal to 147

Question 11.
b. (147 ÷ 3) + (147 ÷ 4)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
Because according to the distributive property we need to divide the dividend into two parts, but not the divisor.

Question 11.
c. (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 140 + 7
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (140 ÷ 7) + (7 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Question 11.
d. (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 147
STEP2 We can break the number 147 into 70 + 77
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (70 ÷ 7) + (77 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +11= 21

Common Core – Page No. 231

Division and the Distributive Property

Find the quotient.

Question 1.
54 ÷ 3 = (30 ÷ 3) + (24 ÷ 3)
= 10 + 8
= 18
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 15

Answer: 18

Explanation:
54 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 54
STEP2 We can break the number 54 into 30 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (30 ÷ 3) + (24÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 2.
81 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 27

Explanation:
81 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 81
STEP2 We can break the number 81 into 21 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (21 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +7= 27

Question 3.
232 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 58

Explanation:
232 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 232
STEP2 We can break the number 232 into 200 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (200 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +8= 58

Question 4.
305 ÷ 5 = ______

Answer: 61

Explanation:
305 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 305
STEP2 We can break the number 305 into 300 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +1= 61

Question 5.
246 ÷ 6 = ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
246 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 246
STEP2 We can break the number 246 into 240 + 6
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 6) + (6 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 40 +1= 41

Question 6.
69 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 23

Explanation:
69 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 69
STEP2 We can break the number 69 into 60 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +3= 23

Question 7.
477 ÷ 9 = ______

Answer: 53

Explanation:
477 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 477
STEP2 We can break the number 477 into 450 + 27
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (450 ÷ 9) + (27 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +3= 53

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = ______

Answer: 32

Explanation:
224 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 224
STEP2 We can break the number 224 into 210 + 14
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 7) + (14 ÷ 7)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 30 +2= 32

Question 9.
72 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 18

Explanation:
72 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 72
STEP2 We can break the number 72 into 40 + 32
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (40 ÷ 4) + (32 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 10 +8= 18

Question 10.
315 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 105

Explanation:
315 ÷ 3
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 315
STEP2 We can break the number 315 into 300 + 15
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 3) + (15 ÷3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 100 +5= 105

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Cecily picked 219 apples. She divided the apples equally into 3 baskets. How many apples are in each basket?
______ apples

Answer: 73 apples

Explanation:
The total number of apples Cecily picked= 219 apples
Number of parts into which she wanted to divide the apples= 3
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 147 ÷ 7
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 219
STEP2 We can break the number 219 into 210 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (210 ÷ 3) + (9 ÷ 3)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 70 +3= 73

Question 12.
Jordan has 260 basketball cards. He divides them into 4 equal groups. How many cards are in each group?
______ cards

Answer: 65 cards

Explanation:
The total number of basketball cards Jordan has= 260 basketball cards
Number of parts into which he wanted to divide the cards= 4
Number of apples in each part = Quotient of 260 ÷ 4
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 260
STEP2 We can break the number 260 into 240 + 20
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (240 ÷ 4) + (20 ÷ 4)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 60 +5= 65

Question 13.
The Wilsons drove 324 miles in 6 hours. If they drove the same number of miles each hour, how many miles did they drive in 1 hour?
______ miles

Answer: 54 miles

Explanation:
The total number of miles drove by Wilson= 324 miles
Number of hours he drove = 6
Number of miles drove in each hour = Quotient of 324 ÷ 6
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 324
STEP2 We can break the number 324 into 300 + 24
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (300 ÷ 6) + (24 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 50 +4= 54

Question 14.
Phil has 189 stamps to put into his stamp album. He puts the same number of stamps on each of 9 pages. How many stamps does Phil put on each page?
______ stamps

Answer: 21 stamps

Explanation:
The total number of stamps Phil has= 189 stamps
Number of pages= 9
Number of stamps put on each page  = Quotient of 189 ÷ 9
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 189
STEP2 We can break the number 189 into 180 + 9
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (180 ÷ 9) + (9 ÷ 9)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +1= 21

Common Core – Page No. 232

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A landscaping company planted 176 trees in 8 equal rows in the new park. How many trees did the company plant in each row?
Options:
a. 18
b. 20
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: c. 22

Explanation:
The total number of trees in the landscaping= 176 trees
Number of rows= 8
Number of trees in each row = Quotient of 176 ÷ 8
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 176
STEP2 We can break the number 176 into 160 + 16
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (160 ÷ 8) + (16 ÷ 8)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 20 +2= 22

Question 2.
Arnold can do 65 pushups in 5 minutes. How many pushups can he do in 1 minute?
Options:
a. 11
b. 13
c. 15
d. 17

Answer: b. 13

Explanation:
The total number of pushups done by Arnold = 65
Number of minutes spent on pushups= 5
Number of pushups done in each minute = Quotient of 65 ÷ 5
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 65
STEP2 We can break the number 65 into 60 + 5
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (60 ÷ 5) + (5 ÷ 5)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +1= 13

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Last Saturday, there were 1,486 people at the Cineplex. There were about the same number of people in each of the 6 theaters. Which is the best estimate of the number of people in each theater?
Options:
a. between 20 and 30
b. between 80 and 90
c. between 100 and 200
d. between 200 and 300

Answer: d. between 200 and 300

Explanation:
Total number of people at the Cineplex= 1,486 people
Number of theatres =  6
Number of people at each theatre= estimate of the number of people 1,486 ÷ 6

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,488 is close to 1,486. What basic fact can you use?
1,488 ÷ 6
Choose 1,488 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,488 ÷ 6 = 248
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 248

What number close to 1,486 is easy to divide by 6?
1,482 is close to 1,486 . What basic fact can you use?
1,482 ÷ 6
Choose 1,482 because it is close to 1,486 and can easily be divided by 6.
1,482 ÷ 6 = 247
1,486 ÷ 6 is about 247

Question 4.
Nancy walked 50 minutes each day for 4 days last week. Gillian walked 35 minutes each day for 6 days last week. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. Gillian walked 10 minutes more than Nancy.
b. Gillian walked 20 minutes more than Nancy.
c. Nancy walked 10 minutes more than Gillian.
d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Answer: d. Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Explanation:
Time walked by Nancy= 50 minutes
Time walked by Gillian= 35 minutes
Nancy walked more time compared to Gillian
50-35=15 minutes
Therefore,  Nancy walked 15 minutes more than Gillian.

Question 5.
Three boys share 28 toy cars equally. Which best describes how the cars are shared?
Options:
a. Each gets 3 cars with 1 left over.
b. Each gets 8 cars with 2 left over.
c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.
d. Each gets 10 cars with 2 left over.

Answer: c. Each gets 9 cars with 1 left over.

Explanation:
Total number of toys three boys have= 28
Number of toys each boy got= 28 ÷3=9.33
Therefore we can say that each gets 9 cars with 1 leftover.

Question 6.
An airplane flies at a speed of 474 miles per hour. How many miles does the plane fly in 5 hours?
Options:
a. 2,070 miles
b. 2,140 miles
c. 2,370 miles
d. 2,730 miles

Answer: c. 2,370 miles

Explanation:
Number of miles flew by aeroplane in one hour= 474
Number of hours the aeroplane flew= 5 hours
Total number of miles flew in 5 hours= 474 x 5=  2,370 miles

Page No. 233

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 16

Question 1.
A number that is the product of a number and a counting number is called a _____________.
___________

Answer: Multiple

Explanation:
3 x 4 = 12
In which 4 is a multiple and also 4 is a counting number

Question 2.
Numbers that are easy to compute mentally are called _____________.
___________

Answer: Compatible numbers

Explanation:
Compatible numbers are pairs of numbers that are easy to add, subtract, multiply, or divide mentally. When using estimation to approximate a calculation, replace actual numbers with compatible numbers.

Question 3.
When a number cannot be divided evenly, the amount left over is called the _____________.
___________

Answer: Remainder

Explanation:
When we divide 10 with 3 there will be 1 remaining, which is called remainder.

Divide. Draw a quick picture to help.

Question 4.
26 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 8 Remainder: 2

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 26 counters to represent the 26 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 8 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 26 ÷ 3 = 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 2

Question 5.
19 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: Quotient: 4 Remainder: 3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 19 counters to represent the 19 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of circles filled= quotient of 19 ÷ 4 = 4

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

Use basic facts and place value to find the quotient.

Question 6.
810 ÷ 9 = _____

Answer: 90

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 81 ÷ 9
STEP 2 Use place value. 810 = 81 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 81 tens ÷ 9 = 9 tens
810 ÷ 9 = 90

Question 7.
210 ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 30

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 21 ÷ 7
STEP 2 Use place value. 210 = 21 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 21 tens ÷ 7 = 3 tens
210 ÷ 7 = 30

Question 8.
3,000 ÷ 6 = _____

Answer: 500

Explanation:
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 30 ÷ 6
STEP 2 Use place value. 3,000 = 30 hundreds
STEP 3 Divide. 30 hundreds ÷ 6 = 5 hundreds
3,000 ÷ 6 = 500

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 9.
635 ÷ 9
about _____

Answer: 70

Explanation:
What number close to 635 is easy to divide by 9?
630 is close to 635. What basic fact can you use?
630 ÷ 9
Choose 630 because it is close to 635 and can easily be divided by 9.
63 ÷ 9 = 7
630 ÷ 9 = 70
635 ÷ 9 is about 70

Question 10.
412 ÷ 5
about _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
What number close to 412 is easy to divide by 5?
410 is close to 412. What basic fact can you use?
410 ÷ 5
Choose 410 because it is close to 412 and can easily be divided by 5.
410 ÷ 5 = 82
412 ÷ 5 is about 82

Question 11.
490 ÷ 8
about _____

Answer: 60

Explanation:
What number close to 490 is easy to divide by 8?
480 is close to 490. What basic fact can you use?
480 ÷ 8
Choose 480 because it is close to 490 and can easily be divided by 8.
48 ÷ 8 = 6
480 ÷ 8 = 60
490 ÷ 8 is about 60

Use grid paper or base-ten blocks to model the quotient.
Then record the quotient.

Question 12.
63 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 63 ÷ 3.
How many groups of 3 can you make?
B. Think of 63 as 60 + 3. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
63 ÷ 3 = (60 ÷ 3 ) + (3 ÷ 3 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Question 13.
85 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 17

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 85 ÷ 5.
How many groups of 5 can you make?
B. Think of 85 as 80 + 5. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
85 ÷ 5 = (80 ÷ 5 ) + (5 ÷ 5)
= 16 + 1
= 17

Question 14.
168 ÷ 8 = _____

Answer:21

Explanation:

A. Outline another model to show 168 ÷ 8.
How many groups of 8 can you make?
B. Think of 168 as 160 + 8. Break apart the model, label, and shade to show two divisions.
168 ÷ 8 = (160 ÷ 8 ) + (8 ÷ 8 )
= 20 + 1
= 21

Page No. 234

Question 15.
Ana has 296 coins in her coin collection. She put the same number of coins in each of 7 jars. About how many coins are in each jar?
about _____ coins

Answer: 42

Explanation:
The total number of coins Ana has= 296 coins
Number of Jars= 7
Number of coins in each Jar= 296 ÷ 7 = 42 coins

Question 16.
Which two estimates is the quotient 345 ÷ 8 between?
_____ and _____

Answer: The quotient is between 42 and 43

Explanation:

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
336 is close to 1,624. What basic fact can you use?
336 ÷ 8
Choose 336  because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
336 ÷ 8 = 42
345 ÷ 8 is about 42

What number close to 345 is easy to divide by 8?
344 is close to 345. What basic fact can you use?
344 ÷ 8
Choose 344 because it is close to 345 and can easily be divided by 8.
344 ÷ 8 = 43
345 ÷ 8 is about 43

Question 17.
A total of 8,644 people went to the football game. Of those people, 5,100 sat on the home side and the rest sat on the visitor’s side. If the people sitting on the visitor’s side filled 8 equal-sized sections, about how many people sat in each of the sections?
about _____ people

Answer: 443

Explanation:
Total number of people in the football game= 8,644
Number of people who sat on the homeside= 5,100
Number of people who sat on the visitor’s side= 3,544
Number of equal-sized sections= 8
Number of people who sat in each of the sections= 3,544 ÷ 8= 443

Question 18.
There are 4 students on a team for a relay race. How many teams can be made from 27 students?
_____ teams

Answer: 7

Explanation:
The total number of students= 27
Number of students in each team= 4
Number of teams = 27 ÷ 4= 6.75 = 7 (approx)

Question 19.
Eight teams of high school students helped clean up trash in the community. Afterwards, they shared 23 pizzas equally. How many pizzas did each team get?
_____ \(\frac{ □ }{ □ }\)

Answer: 3

Explanation:
Total number of pizzas= 23
Number of teams= 8
Number of pizzas each team got= 23 ÷ 8=2.8=3(approx)

Page No. 237

Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
84 ÷ 7
_____

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 84 counters. Subtract 7 counters.
B. Subtract 7 counters from 84 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 2.
60 ÷ 4
_____

Answer: 15

Explanation:
A. Begin with 60 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 60 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 15.

Question 3.
91 ÷ 8
_____ R _____

Answer: 11.3=11(approx)

Explanation:
A. Begin with 91 counters. Subtract 8 counters.
B. Subtract 8 counters from 91 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 11

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 4.
65 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 13

Explanation:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 5.
Use Appropriate Tools Can you divide 32 by 3 evenly? Use the number line to explain your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 17
Type below:
__________

Answer: 11 (approx)

Explanation:
How many equal groups of 3 did you subtract?
So, 32 ÷ 3 = 10.8=11(approx).

Question 6.
John has $40 to spend at the yard sale. He buys 6 books for $2 each. He would like to spend the rest of his money on model cars for his collection. If the cars cost $7 each, how many can he buy? Explain.
_____ cars

Answer: 4 cars

Explanation:
Total amount John spent at the yard sale= $40
Number of books= 6
Cost of each book= $2
Cost of 6 books= 6 x $2 = $12
Amount left after John bought 6 books= $40 – $12 = $28
Cost of each car= $7
Number of cars bought = $28 ÷ $7 = $4

Page No. 238

Question 7.
A new playground will be 108 feet long. Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment. They want to put as many climbers along the length of the playground as possible. How many climbers can they place?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 18
a. What are you asked to find?
Type below:
__________

Answer: 12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12.

Question 7.
b. How can you use repeated subtraction to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

Answer: Repeated subtraction is a method to solve and find the quotient.

Explanation:
Example:
A. Begin with 65 counters. Subtract 5 counters.
B. Subtract 5 counters from 65 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 13

Question 7.
c. Tell why you might use multiples of the divisor to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: The multiple which divides 108 is 12

Explanation:
The number 108 has multiples which divide 108 evenly,
1 x 108 =108
2 x 54   =108
3 x 36   =108
4 x 27   =108
6 x 18   =108
9 x  12  =108
12 x 9   =108
18 x 6   =108
27 x 4   =108
36 x 3   =108
54 x 2   =108
108 x 1   =108
Multiples which divide 108 are 1,2,3,4,5,6,9,12,18,27,36,54,108.

Question 7.
d. Show steps to solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

Answer: 108 ÷ 9 =12

Explanation:
A. Begin with 108 counters. Subtract 9 counters.
B. Subtract 9 counters from 108 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 12

Question 7.
e. Complete the sentences.
There are _______ equal parts of the playground, each _______ feet long.
So, _______ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.
Type below:
__________

Answer: There are ___108____ equal parts of the playground, each __09_____ feet long. So, __12_____ climbers can fit along the length of the playground.

Explanation:
A new playground will be 108 feet long.
Builders need to allow 9 feet of space for each piece of climbing equipment.
Number of climbers that can fit along the length of the playground= 108 ÷ 9 =12

Question 8.
Which model matches each expression?
Write the letter on the line next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 19
Type below:
__________

Answer: 240 ÷ 80 expression resembles the second model while 240 ÷ 60 expression resembles the first model.

Explanation:
240 ÷ 80
A. Draw a number line with 80 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 3
240 ÷ 60
A. Draw a number line with 60 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 240 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 4

Common Core – Page No. 239

Divide Using Repeated Subtraction
Use repeated subtraction to divide.

Question 1.
42 ÷ 3 = 14
3)\(\overline { 42 } \)
-30 ← 10 × 3 | 10
——-
12
-12 ← 4 × 3 | +4
——-    ———–
0             14

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Begin with 42 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 42 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 14

Question 2.
72 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 18

Explanation:
A. Begin with 72 counters. Subtract 4 counters.
B. Subtract 4 counters from 72 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 18

Question 3.
93 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 31

Explanation:
A. Begin with 93 counters. Subtract 3 counters.
B. Subtract 3 counters from 93 and repeat the processes until the remainder cannot be subtracted from the divisor.
C. Record the number of counters left and the number of times you subtracted.
D. The number of times you subtracted is the quotient is 31

Question 4.
35 ÷ 4 = _____ r _____

Answer: 8r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 35 counters to represent the 35 dominoes. Then draw 4 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 4 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 35 ÷ 4
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 4 counters, therefore, the quotient is 8

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 35 ÷ 4, the quotient is 8 and the remainder is 3, or 8 r3.

Question 5.
93 ÷ 10 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r3

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 93 counters to represent the 93 dominoes. Then draw 10 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 10 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 93 ÷ 10
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 10 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 3

For 93 ÷ 10, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 3, or 9 r3.

Question 6.
86 ÷ 9 = _____ r _____

Answer: 9r5

Explanation:

Quotient:
A. Use 86 counters to represent the 86 dominoes. Then draw 9 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 9 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 86 ÷ 9
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 9 counters, therefore, the quotient is 9

Remainder:
The number of counters left over is the remainder. The number of counters leftover= 5

For 86 ÷ 9, the quotient is 9 and the remainder is 5, or 9 r5.

Draw a number line to divide.

Question 7.
70 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw a number line with 5 as each interval.
B. Draw up to 70 and count the intervals, it gives the quotient.
C. The quotient is 14

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Gretchen has 48 small shells. She uses 2 shells to make one pair of earrings. How many pairs of earrings can she make?
_____ pairs

Answer: 24 pairs

Explanation:
Total number of small shells= 48
Number of shells used to make one pair of earrings = 2
Number of pair of earrings made = 48 ÷ 2 =24

Question 9.
James wants to purchase a telescope for $54. If he saves $3 per week, in how many weeks will he have saved enough to purchase the telescope?
_____ weeks

Answer: $18

Explanation:
Cost of the telescope=$54
Amount saved each week = $3
Number of weeks he has to save the money to purchase the telescope = $54 ÷ $3 = $18

Common Core – Page No. 240

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Randall collects postcards that his friends send him when they travel. He can put 6 cards on one scrapbook page. How many pages does Randall need to fit 42 postcards?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7

Answer: d. 7

Explanation:
Total number of postcards Randall has = 42 postcards
Number of postcards on one scrapbook page = 6 cards
Number of pages needed to fit the postcards = 42 ÷ 6=7

Question 2.
Ari stocks shelves at a grocery store. He puts 35 cans of juice on each shelf. The shelf has 4 equal rows and another row with only 3 cans. How many cans are in each of the equal rows?
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer: c. 8

Explanation:
Total number of cans of juice on each shelf = 35
Number of rows = 4
Number of cans on the other shelf = 3
Number of cans placed on the first shelf = 35 – 3 = 32
Number of juice cans in the first row = 32 ÷ 4 = 8 cans

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Fiona sorted her CDs into separate bins. She placed 4 CDs in each bin. If she has 160 CDs, how many bins did she fill?
Options:
a. 4
b. 16
c. 40
d. 156

Answer: c. 40

Explanation:
Total number of CD’s in Fiona has = 160 CD’s
Number of CD’s placed in each bin = 4
Number of bins required to place the CD’s = 160 ÷ 4 = 40

Question 4.
Eamon is arranging 39 books on 3 shelves. If he puts the same number of books on each shelf, how many books will there be on each shelf?
Options:
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14

Answer: c. 13

Explanation:
Total number of books Eamon has = 39 books
Number of shelves = 3
Number of books in each shelf = 39 ÷ 3 = 13

Question 5.
A newborn boa constrictor measures 18 inches long. An adult boa constrictor measures 9 times the length of the newborn plus 2 inches. How long is the adult?
Options:
a. 142 inches
b. 162 inches
c. 164 inches
d. 172 inches

Answer: c. 164 inches

Explanation:
Length of newborn boa constrictor = 18 inches
Length of an adult boa constrictor = 9 x Length of newborn boa constrictor = 9 x 18 = 162
Total length of an adult boa constrictor = 162 + 2 = 164 inches

Question 6.
Madison has 6 rolls of coins. Each roll has 20 coins. How many coins does Madison have in all?
Options:
a. 110
b. 120
c. 125
d. 130

Answer: b. 120

Explanation:
Number of rolls of coins = 6
Number of coins in each roll = 20
Total number of coins Madison has = 20 x 6 = 120

Page No. 243

Question 1.
Lacrosse is played on a field 330 ft long. How many yards long is a lacrosse field? (3 feet = 1 yard)
Divide. Use partial quotients.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 20
So, the lacrosse field is _____ yards long.
______ yards

Answer: 37 yards (approx)

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor. For example, you know that you can make at least 100 ft which is long 33 yards.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 110 ft =  110 ÷ 3 = 36.6 yards = 37 yards (approx).

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 2.
3)\(\overline { 225 } \)
____

Answer: 75

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 3 = 150 : 225 – 150 = 75
3 x 25 = 75 : 75 – 75 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 75 ( 50 + 25)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 3.
428 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 107

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 50 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 50 x 4 = 200 : 428 – 200 = 228
4 x 50 = 200 : 228 – 200 = 28
7 x 4 = 28 : 28 – 28 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 107 ( 50 + 50 + 7)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 4.
7)\(\overline { 224 } \)
____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 5.
7)\(\overline { 259 } \)
____

Answer: 37

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 7 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 225 – 210 = 49
7 x 7 = 49 : 49 – 49 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 37 ( 30 + 7)

Question 6.
8)\(\overline { 864 } \)
____

Answer: 108

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 8 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 8 = 800 : 864 – 800 = 64
8 x 8 = 64 : 64 – 64 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 108 ( 100 + 8)

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 738 } \)
____

Answer: 123

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 6 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 738 – 600 = 138
6 x 23 = 138 : 138 – 138 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 123 ( 100 + 23)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 8.
328 ÷ 2 =
____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 2 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 2 = 200 : 328 – 200 = 128
2 x 64 = 128 : 128 – 128 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164 ( 100 + 64)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 9.
475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 10.
219 ÷ 3 =
____

Answer: 73

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 70 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 70 x 3 = 210 : 219 – 210 = 9
3 x 3 = 9 : 9 – 9 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 73 ( 70 + 3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 11.
488 ÷ 4 =
____

Answer: 122

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 4 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 488 – 400 = 88
4 x 22 = 88 : 88 – 88 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 122 ( 100 + 22)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 12.
Use Reasoning What is the least number you can divide by 5 to get a three-digit quotient? Explain how you found your answer.
____

Answer: The quotient can be a three-digit number or a two-digit number.

Explanation:
Example:

475 ÷ 5 =
____

Answer: 95

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 90 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 90 x 5 = 450 : 475 – 450 = 25
5 x 5 = 25 : 25 – 25 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 95 (90 + 5)

Page No. 244

Use the table for 13–15.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 21

Question 13.
Rob wants to put 8 baseball cards on each page in an album. How many pages will he fill?
____ pages

Answer: 31 pages

Explanation:
Total number of baseball cards = 248
Number of cards in each page = 8
Number of pages required = 248 ÷ 8 = 31 pages

Question 14.
Rob filled 5 plastic boxes with hockey cards. There were the same number of cards in each box. How many cards did he put in each box? How many cards were left over?
Type below:
___________

Answer: There where 12 hockey cards in each box, number of cards leftover = 4

Explanation:
Total number of hockey cards = 64
Number of boxes = 5
Number of cards in each box = 64 ÷ 5 = 12.8 that is exactly 60 cards can be fit in 5 boxes and 12 in each box
Number of cards leftover = 64 – 60 = 4

Question 15.
Rob filled 3 fewer plastic boxes with football cards than basketball cards. He filled 9 boxes with basketball cards. How many boxes did he fill with football cards? How many football cards were in each box?
____ boxes ____ cards

Answer: 6 boxes and 16 cards in each box

Explanation:
Number of basketball cards= 189
Number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept= 9 boxes
Number of football cards= 96
Number of boxes in which the football cards were kept =  number of boxes in which the basketball cards were kept – 3 =
9-3=6boxes
Number of football cards in each box = 96 ÷ 6 =16 cards

Question 16.
Marshall can buy 5 T-shirts for $60. If each shirt costs the same amount, what is the cost of 4 T-shirts?
$ ____

Answer: $48

Explanation:
Number of T-shirts = 5
Cost of 5 T-shirts = $60
Cost of each T- shirt = $60 ÷ 5 = $12
Cost of 4 T-shirts = 12 x 4 = $48

Question 17.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 22
Type below:
___________

Answer: 97

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 5 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 5 = 400 : 485 – 400 = 85
5 x 17 = 85 : 85 – 85 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 97 ( 80 + 17)

Common Core – Page No. 245

Divide Using Partial Quotients
Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 1.
8)\(\overline { 184 } \)
-80 ← 10 × 8 10
——-
104
-80 ← 10 × 8 + 10
——-
-24
-24 ← 3 × 8 + 3
——– ——–
0 23

Answer: 23

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 10 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 8.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 8 = 80 : 184 – 80 = 104
10 x 8 = 80 : 104 – 80 = 24 : 3 x 8 = 24 : 24 – 24 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 23 ( 10 + 10 + 3)

Question 2.
6)\(\overline { 258 } \)
_____

Answer: 43

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 40 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 3 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 40 x 6 = 240 : 258 – 240 = 18
3 x 6 = 18 : 18 – 18 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 43 ( 40 + 3)

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 630 } \)
_____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 630 – 500 = 130
5 x 20 = 100 : 130 – 100 = 30 : 5 x 6 = 30 : 30 – 30 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 20 + 6)

Divide. Use rectangular models to record the partial quotients.

Question 4.
246 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 82

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 80 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 80 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 80 x 3 = 240 : 246 – 240 = 6
3 x 2 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 82 ( 80 + 2)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 5.
126 ÷ 2 = _____

Answer: 63

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 60 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple,2.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 60 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 60 x 2 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6
2 x 3 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 63 ( 60 +3)
The rectangle models are given below :

Question 6.
605 ÷ 5 = _____

Answer: 121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 5.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 5 = 500 : 605 – 500 = 105
5 x 20 = 100 : 105 – 100 = 5 : 5 x 1 = 5 : 5 – 5 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 + 1)
The rectangle models are given below :

Divide. Use either way to record the partial quotients.

Question 7.
492 ÷ 3 = _____

Answer: 164

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 50 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 492 – 300 = 192
50 x 3 = 150 : 192 – 150 = 42 : 3 x 14 = 42 : 42 – 42 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 164  ( 100 + 50 + 14)

Question 8.
224 ÷ 7 = _____

Answer: 32

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 30 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 7.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 30 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 30 x 7 = 210 : 224 – 210 = 14
7 x 2 = 14 : 14 – 14 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 32 ( 30 + 2)

Question 9.
692 ÷ 4 = _____

Answer: 173

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 4 = 400 : 692 – 400 = 392
4 x 50 = 200 : 392 – 200 = 192 : 4 x 48 = 192 : 192 – 192 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 198 ( 100 + 50 + 48)

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Allison took 112 photos on vacation. She wants to put them in a photo album that holds 4 photos on each page. How many pages can she fill?
_____ pages

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 20 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 20 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 20 x 4 = 80 : 112 – 80 = 32
4 x 8 = 32 : 32 – 32 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 28 ( 20 + 8)

Question 11.
Hector saved $726 in 6 months. He saved the same amount each month. How much did Hector save each month?
$ _____

Answer: $121

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 6.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 100 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 6 = 600 : 726 – 600 = 126
6 x 20 = 120 : 126 – 120 = 6 : 6 x 1 = 6 : 6 – 6 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 121 ( 100 + 20 +1)

Common Core – Page No. 246

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Annaka used partial quotients to divide 145 ÷ 5. Which shows a possible sum of partial quotients?
Options:
a. 50 + 50 + 45
b. 100 + 40 + 5
c. 10 + 10 + 9
d. 10 + 4 + 5

Answer: c. 10 + 10 + 9

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 4.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 10 x 5 = 50 : 145 – 50 = 95
5 x 10 = 50 : 95 – 50 = 45 : 5 x 9 = 45 : 45 – 45 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 29 ( 10 + 10 +9)

Question 2.
Mel used partial quotients to find the quotient 378 ÷ 3. Which might show the partial quotients that Mel found?
Options:
a. 100, 10, 10, 9
b. 100, 10, 10, 6
c. 100, 30, 30, 6
d. 300, 70, 8

Answer: b. 100, 10, 10, 6

Explanation:
STEP 1
Start by subtracting a greater multiple, such as 100 times the divisor.
Continue subtracting until the remaining number is less than the multiple, 3.
STEP 2
Subtract smaller multiples, such as 10 times the divisor until the remaining number is less than the divisor. In other words, keep going until you no longer a remainder is left in the place of the remainder. Then add the partial quotients to find the quotient.
So, there are 100 x 3 = 300 : 378 – 300 = 78
10 x 3 =30 : 78 – 30 = 48 : 3 x 16 = 48 : 48 – 48 = 0
Therefore the quotient is 126 ( 100 + 10 +10 + 6)

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What are the partial products of 42 × 5?
Options:
a. 9 and 7
b. 20 and 10
c. 200 and 7
d. 200 and 10

Answer: d. 200 and 10

Explanation:
STEP1
42 x 5
Start by multiplying the digit five with the units digit 2 = 5 x 2 =10
Multiply the digit 5 with 4 in the tens place = 4 x 5 = 20
Since 4 is in the tens place when we multiply 4 and 5 we must place it in the hundreds place by assuming units digit to be zero.
Therefore, the partial product of 42 x 5 = 200

Question 4.
Mr. Watson buys 4 gallons of paint that cost $34 per gallon. How much does Mr. Watson spend on paint?
Options:
a. $38
b. $126
c. $136
d. $1,216

Answer: c. $136

Explanation:
Cost of each gallon of paint = $34
Number of gallons = 4
The total cost of the gallons = $ 34 x 4 = $136

Question 5.
Use the area model to find the product 28 × 32.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 23
Options:
a. 840
b. 856
c. 880
d. 896

Answer: d. 896

Explanation:
The whole rectangle is divided into four small rectangles the areas of these rectangles are:

Area of yellow rectangle= 30 x 20=600
Area of green rectangle= 2 x 20 = 40
Area of pink rectangle= 8 x 30= 240
Area of blue rectangle= 2 x 8= 16
Product of 32 and 28 = Area of yellow rectangle + Area of green rectangle + Area of pink rectangle + Area of the blue rectangle = 600+40+240+16 =  896

Question 6.
An adult male lion eats about 108 pounds of meat per week. About how much meat does an adult male lion eat in one day?
Options:
a. about 14 pounds
b. about 15 pounds
c. about 16 pounds
d. about 17 pounds

Answer: b. about 15 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of meat an adult lion eats in one week = 108
Number of days in a week = 7
Mass of meat ate by the lion in one day = 108 ÷ 7 = 15.4 pounds = about 15 pounds

Page No. 249

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.

Question 1.
48 ÷ 3
_____

Answer: 16

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 48. Show 48 as 4 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 6 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 16.

Question 2.
84 ÷ 4
_____

Answer: 21

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 1 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 21.

Question 3.
72 ÷ 5
_____ R _____

Answer: 14 (approx) with 2 as remainder.

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 72. Show 72 as 7 tens and 2 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 14.

Question 4.
Divide. Draw a quick picture. Record the steps.
84 ÷ 3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 24
_____

Answer: 28

Explanation:
STEPS:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 5.
Explain why you did not need to regroup in Exercise 2.
Type below:
___________

Answer: We did not regroup in exercise two because we used the method of counters in which we placed the counters one after the other in the circles and concluded with number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over.

Explanation:
Example: 28 ÷ 3(in the form of exercise 2)
A. Use 28 counters to represent the 28 dominoes. Then draw 3 circles to represent the 3 players.
B. Share the counters equally among the 3 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Find the number of counters in each group and the number of counters left over. Record your answer. 9 counters in each group and 3 counters are leftover.

Example: 84 ÷ 3

A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 84. Show 84 as 8 tens and 4 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 8 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 28.

Question 6.
Mindy is preparing fruit boxes for gifts. She divides 36 apples evenly into 6 boxes. Then she divided 54 bananas evenly into the same 6 boxes. How many pieces of fruit are in each of Mindy’s boxes?
_____ pieces of fruit

Answer: 6+9=15 pieces of fruits are in each box of Mindy’s

Explanation:
Total number of apples = 36
Number of boxes in which the apples were kept = 6
Number of apple pieces in each box = 36 ÷ 6 = 6
Total number of bananas = 54
Number of boxes in which the bananas were kept = 6
Number of banana pieces in each box = 54 ÷ 6 = 9
Total number of fruit pieces in each box = 9 + 6 = 15

Question 7.
Ami needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 4 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 25
Describe a model that would show how many are in each group.
Type below:
___________

Answer: 14

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 56. Show 56 as 5 tens and 6 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 14.

Page No. 250

Sense or Nonsense?

Question 8.
Angela and Zach drew quick pictures to find 68 ÷ 4. Whose quick picture makes sense? Whose quick picture is nonsense? Explain your reasoning.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 26
Type below:
___________

Answer: Zach’s quick picture is correct while Angela’s is not correct.

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 68. Show 68 as 6 tens and 8 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.
Hence Zach’s statement and the quick picture are correct.

Question 9.
Analyze What did Angela forget to do after she shared the tens equally among the 4 groups?
Type below:
___________

Answer: Angela forgot to regroup the leftover tens into ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.

Explanation:
Since there are 6 tens and 4 circles only 4 tens can be placed in them while the other 2 tens are leftover which must be converted into 20 ones.

Common Core – Page No. 251

Model Division with Regrouping

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.
Question 1.
63 ÷ 4 = 15 r3
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 27

Answer: 15 r 3

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 63. Show 63 as 6 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 5 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 15.
E. After grouping, there are 3 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 3

Question 2.
83 ÷ 3
_____ R _____

Answer: 27 r 2

Explanation:
A. Draw 3 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 83. Show 83 as 8 tens and 3 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 3 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 3 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 27.
E. After grouping, there are 2 blocks which weren’t grouped. So, the remainder is 2

Divide. Draw quick pictures. Record the steps.

Question 3.
85 ÷ 5
_____

Answer: 17

Explanation:
A. Draw 5 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 85. Show 85 as 8 tens and 5 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 5 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 5 groups.
D. There are 1 ten(s) and 7 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 17.

Question 4.
97 ÷ 4
_____ R _____

Answer: 24 r 1

Explanation:
A. Draw 4 circles to represent the divisor. Then use base-ten blocks to model 97. Show 97 as 9 tens and 7 ones.
B. Share the tens equally among the 4 groups.
C. If there are any tens left, regroup them as ones. Share the ones equally among the 4 groups.
D. There are 2 ten(s) and 4 one(s) in each group. So, the quotient is 24.
E. After grouping, there is 1 block which wasn’t grouped. So, the remainder is 1

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Tamara sold 92 cold drinks during her 2-hour shift at a festival food stand. If she sold the same number of drinks each hour, how many cold drinks did she sell each hour?
_____ cold drinks

Answer: 46 cold drinks

Explanation:
Total number of cold drinks Tamara sold = 92
The time in which she sold the drinks = 2 hours
Number of drinks she sold in each hour = 92 ÷ 2 = 46

Question 6.
In 3 days Donald earned $42 running errands. He earned the same amount each day. How much did Donald earn from running errands each day?
$ _____

Answer: $14

Explanation:
Total amount earned by Donald = $42
Number of days = 3
Amount earned on each day = $42 ÷ 3 = $14

Common Core – Page No. 252

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gail bought 80 buttons to put on the shirts she makes. She uses 5 buttons for each shirt. How many shirts can Gail make with the buttons she bought?
Options:
a. 14
b. 16
c. 17
d. 18

Answer: b. 16

Explanation:
Total number of buttons = 80
Number of buttons used for each shirt = 5
Number of shirts she can make = 80 ÷ 5 =16

Question 2.
Marty counted how many breaths he took in 3 minutes. In that time, he took 51 breaths. He took the same number of breaths each minute. How many breaths did Marty take in one minute?
Options:
a. 15
b. 16
c. 17
d. 19

Answer: c. 17

Explanation:
Total number of breaths Marty counted = 51
Time in which the breath was counted = 3 minutes
Number of breaths in one minute = 51 ÷ 3 = 17

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kate is solving brain teasers. She solved 6 brain teasers in 72 minutes. How long did she spend on each brain teaser?
Options:
a. 12 minutes
b. 14 minutes
c. 18 minutes
d. 22 minutes

Answer: a. 12 minutes

Explanation:
Number of brain teasers solved = 6
Number of minutes spent on brain teasers = 72 minutes
Number of minutes spent on each problem = 72 ÷ 6 =12 minutes

Question 4.
Jenny works at a package delivery store. She puts mailing stickers on packages. Each package needs 5 stickers. How many stickers will Jenny use if she is mailing 105 packages?
Options:
a. 725
b. 625
c. 525
d. 21

Answer: c. 525

Explanation:
Number of packages = 105
Number of stickers on each package = 5
Total number of stickers on the packages = 105 x 5 = 525

Question 5.
The Puzzle Company packs standardsized puzzles into boxes that hold 8 puzzles. How many boxes would it take to pack up 192 standard-sized puzzles?
Options:
a. 12
b. 16
c. 22
d. 24

Answer: d. 24

Explanation:
Total number of puzzles = 192
Number of puzzles in each box = 8
Number of boxes used = 192 ÷ 8 = 24 boxes

Question 6.
Mt. Whitney in California is 14,494 feet tall. Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney. How tall is Mt. McKinley?
Options:
a. 21,310 feet
b. 20,320 feet
c. 20,230 feet
d. 19,310 feet

Answer: b. 20,320 feet

Explanation:
Height of Mt. Whitney in California = 14,494 feet
Height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska is 5,826 feet taller than Mt. Whitney.
Therefore the height of Mt. McKinley in Alaska = 14,494 feet + 5,826 feet  =  20,320 feet

Page No. 255

Question 1.
There are 452 pictures of dogs in 4 equal groups. How many pictures are in each group? Explain how you can use place value to place the first digit in the quotient.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 28
______ pictures

Answer: 113

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 452. 400 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 45 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 11 = 44
Subtract. 45  − 44 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 1 ten as 10 ones.
Now there are 12 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 12 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×3 ones
Subtract. 12 ones − 12 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 113

Divide.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 166 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 41

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 166. 1 hundred cannot be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 166 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 40 = 160
Subtract. 166 − 160 = 6
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 4 ones = 2

So, the quotient is 41 and remainder is 2

Question 3.
5)\(\overline { 775 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 775. 700 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 70 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 700 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 140 = 700
Subtract. 700  − 700 = 0
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 70 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 70 tens  ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×14
Subtract. 75 − 70 tens = 5 ones
Multiply 5 x 1 = 5
Subtract 5 ÷ 5 = 0

So, the quotient is 155 (140 + 14 + 1)

Question 4.
4)\(\overline { 284 } \)
______

Answer: 71

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 284. 200 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 20 tens to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 200 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 50 = 200
Subtract. 20  − 20 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 80 tens to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 80 tens ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×20 = 80
Subtract. 80 tens − 80 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4
Subtract 4-4 =0

So, the quotient is 71 (50+20+1)

Question 5.
5)\(\overline { 394 } \)
______ R ______

Answer: 78

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 394. 300 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 ten to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 300 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 60 = 300
Subtract. 300  − 300 = 0 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 9 tens to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 tens ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×18 tens
Subtract. 90 tens − 90 tens = 0 ones
There are 4 ones
4 is the remainder.
So, the quotient is 78(60+18)

Question 6.
3)\(\overline { 465 } \)
______

Answer: 155

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 465. 400 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there are 40 tens to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 400 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 130  = 390
Subtract. 400  − 390 = 1 tens
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
Now there are 7 tens and 5 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 75  ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 25 = 75
Subtract. 75 tens − 75 tens = 0

So, the quotient is 155 ( 130+ 25)

Question 7.
8)\(\overline { 272 } \)
______

Answer: 34

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 272. 200 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 27 tens and 2 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 270 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 30 = 240
Subtract. 270  − 240 = 3 tens
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Regroup 3 tens as 30 ones.
Now there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 32 ones ÷ 8
Multiply. 8×4 ones
Subtract. 32 ones − 32 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 34 (30 + 4)

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide.

Question 8.
516 ÷ 2 = ______

Answer: 258

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 250 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×8 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 258 (250 + 8)

Question 9.
516 ÷ 3 = ______

Answer: 172

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 160 = 480
Subtract. 516  − 480 = 36 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 36 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 36 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×12 ones
Subtract. 36 ones − 36 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 172 (160 + 12)

Question 10.
516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

Question 11.
516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Question 12.
Look back at your answers to Exercises 8–11. What happens to the quotient when the divisor increases? Explain.
The quotient ______

Answer: The quotient gets decreased when we increase the divisor.

Explanation:

Example:

516 ÷ 4 = ______

Answer: 129

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 125 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 16 ones = 0

So, the quotient is 129 (125 + 4)

516 ÷ 5 = ______ R ______

Answer: 103 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 516. 500 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 50 tens and 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 500 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 100 = 500
Subtract. 516  − 500 = 16 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 16 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 16 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×3 ones
Subtract. 16 ones − 15 ones = 1 one

So, the quotient is 103 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 1

Question 13.
Reggie has 192 pictures of animals. He wants to keep half and then divide the rest equally among three friends. How many pictures will each friend get?
______ pictures

Answer: 32

Explanation:
Total number of animal pictures = 192
Number of animal pictures he kept with him = 192 ÷ 2 = 96
Number of pictures each of his friends got = 96 ÷ 3 = 32 pictures

Question 14.
There are 146 students, 5 teachers, and 8 chaperones going to the theater. To reserve their seats, they need to reserve entire rows. Each row has 8 seats. How many rows must they reserve?
______ rows

Answer: 20 rows

Explanation:
Total people who went to the theatre = 146 + 5 + 8 = 159
Number of seats in each row = 8
Number of rows which must be reserved for the students = 159 ÷ 8 =19.8 = 20 (approx)

Page No. 256

Question 15.
Nan wants to put 234 pictures in an album with a blue cover. How many full pages will she have in her album?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 29
a. What do you need to find?
Type below:
_________

Answer: How many full pages will she have in her album?
We can find number of pictures in blue pages?
We can find number of pictures in green pages?
We can find number of pictures in red pages?

Explanation:

Question 15.
b. How will you use division to find the number of full pages?
Type below:
_________

Answer: Since the total number of pictures and the number of colour pages are given we can divide the total number of pictures are the number of pages to find the number of full pages.

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
c. Show the steps you will use to solve the problem.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 13

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13

Question 15.
d. Complete the following sentences.
Nan has _______ pictures.
She wants to put the pictures in an album with pages that each hold _______ pictures.
She will have an album with _______ full pages and _______ pictures on another page.
Type below:
_________

Answer: 234 pictures, 18 pictures, 13 full pages, 0 pictures on another page

Explanation:
Total number of pictures =234
Number of pictures per page = 4 + 6+ 8 = 18
Number of full pages  = 234 ÷ 18 =13 full pages

Since the remainder is 0 the number of pictures on another page = 0

Question 16.
Mr. Parsons bought 293 apples to make pies for his shop. Six apples are needed for each pie. If Mr. Parsons makes the greatest number of apple pies possible, how many apples will be left?
_____ pies _____ apples left over.

Answer: 48 pies and 5 apples are leftover

Explanation:
Total number of apples= 293
Number of apples that make a pie = 6
Number of pies = Quotient of 293 ÷ 6 = 48
Number of apples leftover = 5

Question 17.
Carol needs to divide 320 stickers equally among 4 classes. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that completes the sentence.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 30 place.
_________

Answer: tens

Explanation:
Total number of stickers = 320
Number of classes = 4
Number of stickers in each class = Quotient of 320 ÷ 4 = 80
The first digit of quotient is in the tens place.

Common Core – Page No. 257

Place the First Digit

Divide.

Question 1.
62
——-
3)\(\overline { 186 } \)
-18
——-
06
-6
——-
0

Answer: 62

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 186. 180 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 18 tens and 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 180 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 60 = 180
Subtract. 186  − 180 = 6 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 2 ones =0 one

So, the quotient is 62 (60 + 2) and the remainder is 0

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 298 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 298. 280 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 28 tens and 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 280 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 70 = 280
Subtract. 280  − 280 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 18 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 18 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×4 ones
Subtract. 18 ones − 16 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 74 (70 + 4) and the remainder is 2

Question 3.
3)\(\overline { 461 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 153

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 461. 450 hundred can be shared among 3 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 45 tens and 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 450 ÷ 3
Multiply. 3 × 150 = 450
Subtract. 450  − 450 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 11 ones to share among 3 groups.
Divide. 11 ones ÷ 3
Multiply. 3×3 ones
Subtract. 11 ones − 9 ones = 2 ones

So, the quotient is 153 (150 + 3) and the remainder is 2

Question 4.
9)\(\overline { 315 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 35

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 315. 310 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 31 tens and 5 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide.310 ÷ 9
Multiply. 9 × 30 = 270
Subtract. 310  − 270 = 40 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 40 + 5 = 45 ones to share among 9 groups.
Divide. 45 ones ÷ 9
Multiply. 5×9 ones
Subtract. 45 ones − 45 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 35 (30 + 5) and the remainder is 0

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 766 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 383

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 766. 760 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 76 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 760 ÷ 2
Multiply. 2 × 380 = 760
Subtract. 760  − 760 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 2
Multiply. 2×3 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 383 (380 + 3) and the remainder is 0

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 604 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 151

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 604. 600 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 60 tens and 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 600 ÷ 4
Multiply. 4 × 150 = 600
Subtract. 600  − 600 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 ones to share among 4 groups.
Divide. 4 ones ÷ 4
Multiply. 4×1 ones
Subtract. 4 ones − 4 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 151 (150 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 7.
6)\(\overline { 796 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 132

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 796. 790 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 79 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 790 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 131 = 786
Subtract. 790  − 786 = 4 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 4 + 6 = 10 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 10 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 10 ones − 6 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 132 (131 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 8.
5)\(\overline { 449 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 449. 440 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 44 tens and 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 440 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 88 = 440
Subtract. 440  − 440 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 9 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 9 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 9 ones − 5 ones = 4 ones

So, the quotient is 89 (88 + 1) and the remainder is 4

Question 9.
6)\(\overline { 756 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 126

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 756. 750 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 75 tens and 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 750 ÷ 6
Multiply. 6 × 125 = 750
Subtract. 750  − 750 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 6 ones to share among 6 groups.
Divide. 6 ones ÷ 6
Multiply. 6×1 ones
Subtract. 6 ones − 6 ones =  0 ones

So, the quotient is 126 (125 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 10.
7)\(\overline { 521 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 74

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 521. 520 hundred can be shared among 7 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 52 tens and 1 one to share among 7 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 520 ÷ 7
Multiply. 7 × 74 = 518
Subtract. 520  − 518 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 1 = 3 ones to share among 7 groups.
Divide. 3 ones ÷ 7 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 74  and the remainder is 3

Question 11.
5)\(\overline { 675 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 135

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 675. 670 hundred can be shared among 5 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 67 tens and 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 670 ÷ 5
Multiply. 5 × 134 = 670
Subtract. 670  − 670 = 0 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 5 ones to share among 5 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 5
Multiply. 5×1 ones
Subtract. 5 ones − 5 ones = 0 ones

So, the quotient is 135 (134 + 1) and the remainder is 0

Question 12.
8)\(\overline { 933 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 116

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 933. 930 hundred can be shared among 8 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 93 tens and 3 ones to share among 8 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the tens.
Divide. 930 ÷ 8
Multiply. 8 × 116 = 928
Subtract. 930  − 928 = 2 ones
STEP 3 Divide the ones.
Now there are 2 + 3 = 5 ones to share among 8 groups.
Divide. 5 ones ÷ 8 (not possible)

So, the quotient is 116 (100 + 3) and the remainder is 5

Problem Solving

Question 13.
There are 132 projects in the science fair. If 8 projects can fit in a row, how many full rows of projects can be made? How many projects are in the row that is not full?
_____ full rows
_____ projects in the non-full row

Answer: 16 full rows and 4 projects in the non-full row

Explanation:
Total number of projects = 132
Number of projects placed in full row = 8
Number of rows having full projects =Quotient of  132 ÷ 8 = 16
Number of projects in the non-full row = Remainder of 132 ÷ 8 = 4

Question 14.
There are 798 calories in six 10-ounce bottles of apple juice. How many calories are there in one 10-ounce bottle of apple juice?
_____ R _____ calories in one 10-ounce bottles of juice

Answer: 133 calories

Explanation:
Number of calories in 6 bottles of apple juice = 798
Number of calories in each bottle = 798 ÷6 = 133 calories

Common Core – Page No. 258

Lesson Check

Question 1.
To divide 572 ÷ 4, Stanley estimated to place the first digit of the quotient. In which place is the first digit of the quotient?
Options:
a. ones
b. tens
c. hundreds
d. thousands

Answer: c. hundreds

Explanation:
The quotient of  572÷ 4 is 143
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 572. 560 hundred can be shared among 4 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 1 ten to share among 4 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 2.
Onetta biked 325 miles in 5 days. If she biked the same number of miles each day, how far did she bike each day?
Options:
a. 1,625 miles
b. 320 miles
c. 65 miles
d. 61 miles

Answer: c. 65 miles

Explanation:
Total number of miles biked = 325 miles
Number of days biked = 5
Number of miles biked on each day = Quotient of 325 ÷ 5 = 65

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mort makes beaded necklaces that he sells for $32 each. About how much will Mort make if he sells 36 necklaces at the local art fair?
Options:
a. $120
b. $900
c. $1,200
d. $1,600

Answer: c. $1,200

Explanation:
Cost of each beaded necklace = $32
Number of necklaces = 36
The total cost of the necklaces = $32 x 36 = $1,200 (approx)

Question 4.
Which is the best estimate of 54 × 68?
Options:
a. 4,200
b. 3,500
c. 3,000
d. 350

Answer: b. 3,500

Explanation:

Taking the terms nearest to the 54 x 68 as 54 x 65 = 3510 = 3500 (approx)

Question 5.
Ms. Eisner pays $888 for 6 nights in a hotel. How much does Ms. Eisner pay per night?
Options:
a. $5,328
b. $882
c. $148
d. $114

Answer: c. $148

Explanation:
Total pays of Ms Eisner in a hotel = $888
Number of nights = 6
Amount Ms Eisner pay per night = $888 ÷ 6 = $148

Question 6.
Which division problem does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 31
Options:
a. 42 ÷ 3
b. 44 ÷3
c. 51 ÷ 3
d. 54 ÷ 3

Answer: d. 54 ÷ 3

Explanation:
Number of counters in each model = 18
Number of models = 3
Total number of counters = 18 x 3 = 54
Therefore the model displays = 54 ÷ 3

Page No. 261

Question 1.
Ollie used 852 beads to make 4 bracelets. He put the same number of beads on each bracelet. How many beads does each bracelet have? Check your answer.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 32
Divide             Check
2
4)\(\overline { 852 } \)
So, each bracelet has _____ beads.
_____ beads

Answer: 213

Explanation:
Total number of beads =852
Number of bracelets = 4
Number of beads in each bracelet = 852 ÷ 4 = 213

Divide and check.

Question 2.
2)\(\overline { 394 } \)
_____

Answer: 197

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
2)\(\overline { 803 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 401 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
3)\(\overline { 3,448 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 1149 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 3,448. 3 thousand can be shared among 3 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
2)\(\overline { 816 } \)
_____

Answer: 408

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
4)\(\overline { 709 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer: 177 R 1

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 7.
3)\(\overline { 267 } \)
_____

Answer: 89

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 8.
The flower shop received a shipment of 248 pink roses and 256 red roses. The shop owner uses 6 roses to make one arrangement. How many arrangements can the shop owner make if he uses all the roses?
_____ arrangement

Answer: 84 arrangements

Explanation:
Number of pink roses = 248
Number of red roses = 256
Total number of roses = 504
Number of roses in each arrangement = 6
Number of arrangements = 504 ÷ 6 = 84

Page No. 262

Use the table for 9–11.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 33

Question 9.
Four teachers bought 10 origami books and 100 packs of origami paper for their classrooms. They will share the cost of the items equally. How much should each teacher pay?
_____ $

Answer: $210

Explanation:
Number of origami books = 10
Cost of each origami book = $24
Total cost of origami books = $24 x 10 = $240
Number of origami papers = 100
Cost of each origami book = $6
Total cost of origami books = $6 x 100 = $600
Total cost of items = $240 + $600 = $840
Number of teachers = 4
Cost earned by each teacher = $840 ÷ 4 = $210

Question 10.
Communicate Six students shared equally the cost of 18 of one of the items in the chart. Each student paid $24. What item did they buy? Explain how you found your answer.
__________

Answer: The students bought origami kit.

Explanation:
Number of students = 6
Number of items they bought = 18
Amount each student paid = $24
The total amount paid = $24 x 6 =$144
The item they bought can be found by knowing the cost of the item:
Cost of the item=
The total amount paid ÷ Number of items =  144 ÷ 18 = $8
Therefore the item is origami kit.

Question 11.
Ms Alvarez has $1,482 to spend on origami paper. How many packs can she buy?
_____ packs

Answer: 247

Explanation:
Cost of origami paper = $6
Amount Ms Alvarez was supposed to spend on origami paper = $1,482
Number of packs bought = $1,482 ÷ $6 = 247

Question 12.
Evan made origami cranes with red, blue, and yellow paper. The number of cranes in each color is the same. If there are 342 cranes, how many of them are blue or yellow?
_____ blue, or yellow

Answer: 114

Explanation:
Evan made origami cranes with red, blue, and yellow paper.
The number of cranes in each colour is the same.
Total number of cranes = 342
Number of cranes of each colour = 342 ÷ 3 = 114
Therefore there are 114 cranes of blue and yellow.

Question 13.
On Monday 336 fourth graders went on a field trip to a local park. The teachers divided the students into 8 groups.
Use a basic fact. Estimate the number of students in each group. Show your work.
_____ about

Answer: 42

Explanation:
Total number who went to the field trip = 336
Number of groups into which they were divided = 8 groups
Number of students in each group = 336 ÷ 8 = 42 students

Common Core – Page No. 263

Divide by 1-Digit Numbers

Divide and check.

Question 1.
318
2)\(\overline { 636 } \) 318
-6       × 2
——   ——-
03    636
-2
——
16
-16
——-
0

Answer: 318

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 2.
4)\(\overline { 631 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 3.
8)\(\overline { 906 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit.  The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.
STEP 2 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 3 Divide the tens.
STEP 4 Divide the ones.

Question 4.
6)\(\overline { 6,739 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 6,739. 6 thousand can be shared among 6 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 5.
4)\(\overline { 2,328 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 2,328. 2 thousand can be shared among 4 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Question 6.
5)\(\overline { 7,549 } \)
_____ R _____

Answer:

Explanation:
STEP 1 Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the thousands in 7,549. 7 thousand can be shared among 5 groups without regrouping. The first digit of the quotient will be in the thousands place.
STEP 2 Divide the thousands.
STEP 3 Divide the hundreds.
STEP 4 Divide the tens.
STEP 5 Divide the ones.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 7 and 8.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 34

Question 7.
The Briggs rented a car for 5 weeks. What was the cost of their rental car per week?
$ _____

Answer: $197

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Briggs = $985
Number of weeks = 5
Cost of rent per week = $985 ÷ 5 =$ 197

Question 8.
The Lees rented a car for 4 weeks. The Santos rented a car for 2 weeks. Whose weekly rental cost was lower? Explain.
The rental cost of _____

Answer: Weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos

Explanation:
Cost of the car of Lees = $632
Number of weeks = 4
Cost of rent per week = $632 ÷ 4 =$ 158

Cost of the car of Santos = $328
Number of weeks = 2
Cost of rent per week = $328 ÷ 2 =$ 164
Therefore weekly rental cost was lower for Lees compared to Santos.

Common Core – Page No. 264

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which expression can be used to check
the quotient 646 ÷ 3?
Options:
a. (251 × 3) + 1
b. (215 × 3) + 2
c. (215 × 3) + 1
d. 646 × 3

Answer: c. (215 × 3) + 1

Explanation:
Multiply 215 x 3 = 645
Then add 1 to 645
Then the dividend is 645 + 1 = 646

Question 2.
There are 8 volunteers at the telethon. The goal for the evening is to raise $952. If each volunteer raises the same amount, what is the minimum amount each needs to raise to meet the goal?
Options:
a. $7,616
b. $944
c. $119
d. $106

Answer: a. $7,616

Explanation:
Number of volunteers = 8
Amount raised by each volunteer = $952
Total amount raised = $952 x 8 = $7,616

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which product is shown by the model?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 35
Options:
a. 5 × 15 = 75
b. 5 × 16 = 80
c. 5 × 17 = 75
d. 5 × 17 = 85

Answer: d. 5 × 17 = 85

Explanation:
By counting the number of counters we can give the expression.
Number of counters in one row = 17
Number of rows = 5
Therefore the expression = 5 × 17 = 85

Question 4.
The computer lab at a high school ordered 26 packages of CDs. There were 50 CDs in each package. How many CDs did the computer lab order?
Options:
a. 1,330
b. 1,300
c. 1,030
d. 130

Answer: b. 1,300

Explanation:
Number of packages = 26
Number of CDs in each pack = 50
Total number of CDs the computer lab ordered = 26 x 50 = 1,300

Question 5.
Which of the following division problems has a quotient with the first digit in the hundreds place?
Options:
a. 892 ÷ 9
b. 644 ÷ 8
c. 429 ÷ 5
d. 306 ÷ 2

Answer: d. 306 ÷ 2

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 306. 300 hundred can be shared among 2 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 30 tens and 6 ones to share among 2 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Question 6.
Sharon has 64 ounces of juice. She is going to use the juice to fill as many 6-ounce glasses as possible. She will drink the leftover juice. How much juice will Sharon drink?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 6 ounces
c. 10 ounces
d. 12 ounces

Answer: a. 4 ounces

Explanation:
The total quantity of juice = 64 ounces
Quantity of juice she filled = 6 ounces
Quantity of juice she drank = Remainder of 64 ÷  6 = 4

Page No. 267

Question 1.
A firehouse pantry has 52 cans of vegetables and 74 cans of soup. Each shelf holds 9 cans. What is the least number of shelves needed for all the cans?
First, draw a bar model for the total number of cans.
Next, add to find the total number of cans.
Then, draw a bar model to show the number of shelves needed.
Finally, divide to find the number of shelves needed.
So, _______ shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.
_______ shelves

Answer: 14

Explanation:
Number of vegetable cans = 52

Number of soup cans = 74


Total number of cans = 74 +52 = 126
126 ÷ 9 = 14

So, 14 shelves are needed to hold all of the cans.

Question 2.
What if 18 cans fit on a shelf? What is the least number of shelves needed? Describe how your answer would be different.
_______ shelves

Answer: 7 shelves

Explanation:
Total number of cans = 126
Number of cans which can fit in one shelf = 18
Number of shelves required to place all the cans = 126 ÷ 18 = 7 shelves

Question 3.
Julio’s dad bought 10 dozen potatoes. The potatoes were equally divided into 6 bags. How many potatoes are in each bag?
_______ potatoes

Answer: 20 potatoes

Explanation:
Total number of potatoes = 10 dozens x 12 = 120
Number of bags = 6
Number of potatoes in each bag = 120 ÷ 6 = 20

Question 4.
At the garden shop, each small tree costs $125 and each large tree costs $225. How much will 3 small trees and 1 large tree cost?
$ _______

Answer: $600

Explanation:
Number of small trees = 3
Cost of each small tree = $125
Total cost of the small trees = $125 x 3 = $375
Number of large trees = 1
Cost of each large tree = $225
Total cost of the plants = $375 + $225 = $600

Page No. 268

Question 5.
Ms Johnson bought 6 bags of balloons. Each bag has 25 balloons. She fills all the balloons and puts 5 balloons in each bunch. How many bunches can she make?
_______ bunches

Answer: 30

Explanation:
Number of bags = 6
Number of ballons in each bag = 25
Total number of ballons = 25 x 6 = 150
Number of ballons in each bunch = 5
Number of bunches = Total number of ballons ÷ Number of ballons in each bunch = 150 ÷ 5 = 30

Question 6.
An adult’s dinner costs $8. A family of 2 adults and 2 children pays $26 for their dinners. How much does a child’s dinner cost? Explain.
$ _______

Answer: $10

Explanation:
Number of adults = 2
Number of children = 2
Cost of dinner of an adult = $8
The total cost of dinner of the adults = $8 x 2 = $16
Total amount paid = $26
Amount spent on children dinner = $26 – $16 = $10
Cost of dinner for the diner = $10 ÷ 2 = $5

Question 7.
Communicate Use the table at the right. Maria bought 80 ounces of apples. She needs 10 apples to make a pie. How many apples will be left over? Explain.
_______ apples

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Given the average weight of the apples = 5 ounces
Mass of apples Maria bought = 80 ounces
Number of apples =  Mass of apples Maria bought ÷ average weight of the apples = 80 ÷ 5 = 16
Number of apples which make a pie = 10
Number of apples leftover = 16 – 10 = 6

Question 8.
Taylor has 16 tacks. She buys 2 packages of 36 tacks each. How many garage sale posters can she put up if she uses 4 tacks for each poster?
_______ posters

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Number of packages = 2
Number of posters in each package = 36
Total number of tacks = 36 x 2 = 72
Number of tacks for each poster = 4
Number of garage sale posters = 72 ÷ 4 = 18

Question 9.
Ryan bought 8 dozen bandages for the track team first-aid kit. The bandages were divided equally into 4 boxes. How many bandages are in each box?
_______ bandages

Answer: 24

Explanation:
Number of bandages bought for the track team first-aid kit = 8 dozens x 12 = 96
Number of boxes = 4
Number of bandages in each box = 96 ÷ 4 = 24

Common Core – Page No. 269

Problem Solving Multistep Division Problems

Solve. Draw a diagram to help you.

Question 1.
There are 3 trays of eggs. Each tray holds 30 eggs. How many people can be served if each person eats 2 eggs?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 36
Think: What do I need to find? How can I draw a diagram to help?
45 people can be served

Answer: 45 people can be served.

Explanation:
Drawbar models to visualize the information given.

First, draw the model and compare to find the number of eggs they had.
Then we must model and divide to find how many eggs are served to each person.

Question 2.
There are 8 pencils in a package. How many packages will be needed for 28 children if each child gets 4 pencils?
________ packages

Answer: 14 packages

Explanation:
Number of pencils in each package = 8

Number of children = 28

Number of pencils each child needs = 4
Total number of pencils = 28 x 4 =112
Number of packages = 112 ÷ 8 = 14

Question 3.
There are 3 boxes of tangerines. Each box has 93 tangerines. The tangerines will be divided equally among 9 classrooms. How many tangerines will each classroom get?
________ tangerines

Answer:31

Explanation:
Number of boxes = 3
Number of tangerines in each box = 93
Total number of tangerines = 93 x 3 = 279

Number of classrooms = 9
Number of tangerines in each classroom = 279 ÷ 9 = 31

Question 4.
Misty has 84 photos from her vacation and 48 photos from a class outing. She wants to put all the photos in an album with 4 photos on each page. How many pages does she need?
______ pages

Answer: 33

Explanation:
Number of photos from her vacation = 84

Number of photos from her class outing = 48

Total number of photos = 84 + 48 = 132
Number of photos in each page = 4
Number of pages required = 132 ÷ 4 = 33

Common Core – Page No. 270

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Gavin buys 89 blue pansies and 86 yellow pansies. He will plant the flowers in 5 rows with an equal number of plants in each row. How many plants will be in each row?
Options:
a. 875
b. 175
c. 35
d. 3

Answer: c. 35

Explanation:
Number of blue pansies = 89
Number of yellow pansies = 86
Total number of pansies = 89 + 86 = 175
Number of rows = 5
Number of plants in each row = 175 ÷ 5 = 35

Question 2.
A pet store receives 7 boxes of cat food. Each box has 48 cans. The store wants to store the cans in equal stacks of 8 cans. How many stacks can be formed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 42
c. 56
d. 336

Answer: b. 42

Explanation:
Number of boxes of cat food = 7
Number of cans in a box = 48
Total number of cans = 48 x 7 = 336
Number of cans in each stack = 8
Number of stacks = 336 ÷ 8 = 42

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What product does the model show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers Common Core img 37
Options:
a. 284
b. 304
c. 340
d. 364

Answer: d. 364

Explanation:
Length = 20 +6 = 26
Breadth = 10 + 4 = 14
Area of the rectangle = 26 x 14 = 364

Question 4.
Mr. Hatch bought 4 round-trip airplane tickets for $417 each. He also paid $50 in baggage fees. How much did Mr. Hatch spend?
Options:
a. $467
b. $1,698
c. $1,718
d. $16,478

Answer: c. $1,718

Explanation:
Cost of each ticket of the airplane = $417
Cost baggage fees = $50
Number of trips of the airplane = 5
Cost of the trips = $417 x 5 = $1,668
The total cost of the trip = $1,668 + $50 = $1,718

Question 5.
Mae read 976 pages in 8 weeks. She read the same number of pages each week. How many pages did she read each week?
Options:
a. 109
b. 120
c. 122
d. 984

Answer: c. 122

Explanation:
Total number of pages = 976
Number of weeks = 8
Number of pages Mae read in each week = 976 ÷ 8 = 122

Question 6.
Yolanda and her 3 brothers shared a box of 156 toy dinosaurs. About how many dinosaurs did each child get?
Options:
a. 40
b. 50
c. 60
d. 80

Answer: b. 50

Explanation:
Total number of  toy dinosaurs = 156
Number of brothers = 3
Number of toy dinosaurs each brother got = 156 ÷ 3 = 50

Page No. 271

Question 1.
There are 9 showings of a film about endangered species at the science museum. A total of 459 people saw the film. The same number of people were at each showing. About how many people were at each showing? Select the numbers the quotient is between.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 38
Options:
A. 40
B. 50
C. 60
D. 70
E. 80

Answer: B. 50 C. 60 The quotient is between 50 and 60

Explanation:
Number of people at the showings = 459
Number of showings of a film = 9
Number of people at each showing = Quotient of 459 ÷ 9 = 51

Question 2.
Between which two numbers is the quotient of 87 ÷ 5? Write the numbers in the boxes.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 39
The quotient is between _____ and _____.

Answer: The quotient is between 15 and 20.

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 2.

Question 3.
Look at the model. What division does it show?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 40
_____ ÷ _____ = _____ r _____

Answer: 19 ÷ 3 = 6 r 1

Explanation:
Count the total number of counters =Dividend = 19
Number of circles = Divisor = 3
After the distribution of the counters,
The quotient is 6 because in each circle there are 6 counters
The leftover counter is the remainder = 1

For 4a–4d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the division sentence has a remainder.

Question 4.
a. 28 ÷ 4
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 7 and the remainder is 0

Question 4.
b. 35 ÷ 2
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 17 and the remainder is 1

Question 4.
c. 40 ÷ 9
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 4 and the remainder is 4

Question 4.
d. 45 ÷ 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:

Therefore the quotient is 5 and the remainder is 0

Page No. 272

Question 5.
A park guide plans the swan boat rides for 40 people. Each boat can carry 6 people at a time. What is the best way to interpret the remainder in this situation so that everyone gets a ride?
Type below:
____________

Answer: 4 people are leftover after the boat takes 6 people at a time for a ride, therefore, these four people go on the ride in the next round.

Explanation:
Quotient:
A. Use 40 counters to represent the 40 people. Then draw 6 circles to represent the divisor.
B. Share the counters equally among the 6 groups by placing them in the circles.
C. Number of counters formed in each group = quotient of 40 ÷ 6
D. Number of circles are equally filled with 6 counters, therefore, the quotient is 6
Therefore, the quotient is 6 and the remainder is 4
It means that the boat takes 7 rounds in which 6 are filled with 6 people while 4 people are leftover they take the last ride.

Question 6.
Nolan divides his 88 toy cars into boxes. Each box holds 9 cars. How many boxes does Nolan need to store all of his cars?
______ boxes

Answer: 10

Explanation:
Total number of toys Nolan has = 88
Number of cars placed in each box  = 9
Number of boxes = 88 ÷ 9 = 9.7 = 10 (approx)
We take approximate value because all the toys must be fit in the box.

A group of 140 tourists are going on a tour. The tour guide rents 15 vans. Each van holds 9 tourists.

Question 7.
Part A
Write a division problem that can be used to find the number of vans needed to carry the tourists. Then solve.
Type below:
____________

Answer: 140 divided by 9 gives the number of vans  needed to carry the tourists

Explanation:

Total number of tourists = 140
Number of students who fit in each van = 9
Number of vans = Quotient of 150 ÷ 9 = 15
The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part B
What does the remainder mean in the context of the problem?
Type below:
____________

Answer: The leftover of tourists = Remainder =5

Explanation:
The leftover of tourists= Remainder =5
Can be placed in a different van or can be adjusted in the 15 vans.

Question 7.
Part C
How can you use your answer to determine if the tour guide rented enough vans? Explain.
Type below:
____________

Answer: The number of vans would be correct if they were 16 instead of 15

Explanation:
Then the answer can be determined as all the 140  tourists have enjoyed their trip to the fullest and traveled comfortably without any hassle and bustle.

Question 8.
Solve.
3,200 ÷ 8 = ______

Answer: 400

Explanation:

Therefore we can say that the quotient is 400 while the remainder is 0

Page No. 273

Question 9.
Which quotients are equal to 300? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 1,200 ÷ 4
b. 180 ÷ 9
c. 2,400 ÷ 8
d. 2,100 ÷ 7
e. 90 ÷ 3
f. 3,000 ÷ 3

Answer: a. 1,200 ÷ 4, c. 2,400 ÷ 8, d. 2,100 ÷ 7

Explanation:

1,200 ÷ 4

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,400 ÷ 8

Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

2,100 ÷ 7


Therefore the quotient is 300 and the remainder is 0.

Question 10.
Margo estimated 188 ÷ 5 to be between 30 and 40. Which basic facts did she use to help her estimate? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 10 ÷ 5
b. 15 ÷ 5
c. 20 ÷ 5
d. 25 ÷ 5

Answer: b. 15 ÷ 5 c. 20 ÷ 5

Explanation:
188 ÷ 5
STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 15 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 150 = 15 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 15 tens ÷ 5 = 3 tens
150 ÷ 3 = 30

STEP 1 Identify the basic fact. 20 ÷ 5
STEP 2 Use place value. 200 = 20 tens
STEP 3 Divide. 20 tens ÷ 5 = 4 tens
200 ÷ 5 = 40

Therefore we can say that the quotient is between 30 to 40

Question 11.
Mathias and his brother divided 2,029 marbles equally. About how many marbles did each of them receive?
About _________

Answer: about 1,014 marbles each one recieved

Explanation:
Total number of marbles = 2,029
Number of people = 2
Number of marbles each one received = 2,029 ÷ 2 = 1,014

For 12a–12d, choose Yes or No to show how to use the Distributive Property to break apart the dividend to find the quotient 132 ÷ 6.

Question 12.
a. (115 ÷ 6) + (17 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 115 and 17 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
b. (100 ÷ 6) + (32 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii. no

Explanation:
According to the question, the nearest estimates are 100 and 32 but these are not divisible by 6.

Question 12.
c. (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 90 + 42
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (90 ÷ 6) + (42 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 15 +7= 22

Question 12
d. (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i. yes

Explanation:
STEP1 Find the nearest estimates of the number 132
STEP2 We can break the number 132 into 72 + 60
STEP3 We must divide the two parts of the number (dividend) with the divisor.
STEP4 (72 ÷ 6) + (60 ÷ 6)
STEP5 Add quotients of the above 12 +10= 22

Question 13.
There are 60 people waiting for a river raft ride. Each raft holds 15 people. Silvia used the work below to find the number of rafts needed. Explain how Silvia’s work can be used to find the number of rafts needed.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 41
Type below:
_________

Answer: 4

Explanation:
Total number of people = 60
Number of people each river raft can hold = 15
Number of rafts needed to give a ride to all the people = 60 ÷ 15 = 4

Page No. 274

A travelling circus brings along everything it needs for a show in big trucks.

Question 14.
Part A
The circus sets up chairs in rows with 9 seats in each row. How many rows will need to be set up if 513 people are expected to attend the show?
______ rows

Answer: 57

Explanation:
The total number of people = 513
Number of seats in each row = 9
Number of rows = 513 ÷ 9 = 57

Question 14.
Part B
Can the rows be divided into a number of equal sections? Explain how you found your answer.
Type below:
_________

Answer: Yes, the rows can be divided into equal sections. 57 ÷ 3 = 19

Explanation:
We can divide 57 using the divisor as 3, then the quotient is 19 and the remainder is 0.

Question 14.
Part C
Circus horses eat about 250 pounds of horse food per week. About how many pounds of food does a circus horse eat each day? Explain.
About ______ pounds

Answer: About 35 pounds

Explanation:
Mass of food the horses ate in one week = 250 pounds
Number of days in a week =7
Mass of food the horses ate per day = Quotient of 250 ÷  7 = about 35

Question 15.
Hilda wants to save 825 digital photographs in an online album. Each folder of the album can save 6 photographs. She uses division to find out how may full folders she will have. In what place is the first digit of the quotient?
_________

Answer: Hundreds place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 825. 800 hundred can be shared among 6 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 80 tens and 25 ones to share among 6 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the hundreds place.

Page No. 275

Question 16.
Which model matches each expression? Write the letter in the box next to the model.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 42
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 43

Answer: 1st picture – 150 ÷ 30
2nd picture – 160 ÷ 40
3rd picture – 150 ÷ 50
4th picture – 160 ÷ 80

Explanation:
150 ÷ 30

160 ÷ 40

150 ÷ 50

160 ÷ 80

Question 17.
Popcorn was donated for the school fair by 3 different popcorn vendors. They donated a total of 636 bags of popcorn. Each vendor donated the same number of bags. How many bags of popcorn did each vendor donate?
______ bags

Question 18.
Use partial quotients. Fill in the blanks.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 44

Answer: 212

Explanation:
Total number of popcorn bags = 636
Number of popcorn vendors = 3
Number of popcorn bags donated by each vendor = 636 ÷ 3 = 212

Therefore the number of bags donated by each vendor = 212

Page No. 276

Question 19.
Zack needs to divide these base-ten blocks into 3 equal groups.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 45
Draw or describe a model to show how many are in each group.
Type below:
________

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Total number of counters = 48
Number of groups they are supposed to be divided = 3
Then, 48 ÷ 3

Therefore the quotient is 16 and the remainder is 0.

Question 20.
Jim needs to divide 750 coupon books equally among 9 stores. In which place is the first digit of the quotient? Choose the word that makes the sentence true.
The first digit of the quotient is in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 46 place.
________

Answer: tens place

Explanation:
Use place value to place the first digit. Look at the hundreds in 750. 720 hundred can be shared among 9 groups
without regrouping.
Now there is 72 tens and 30 ones to share among 9 groups.
The first digit of the quotient will be in the tens place.

Question 21.
Ursula bought 9 dozen rolls of first aid tape for the health office. The rolls were divided equally into 4 boxes. How many rolls are in each box?
_____ rolls

Answer: 27 rolls

Explanation:
Number of rolls = 9 dozen x 12 = 108
Number of boxes = 4
Number of rolls in each box = Quotient of 108 ÷ 4 = 27 rolls

Question 22.
There are 112 seats in the school auditorium. There are 7 seats in each row. There are 70 people seated, filling up full rows of seats. How many rows are empty?
_____ empty rows

Answer: 6 rows are empty

Explanation:
Total number of seats = 112
Number of seats in each row = 7
Number of rows = 112÷7 = 16

Number of people seated = 70
Number of rows fully occupied by the people = 70 ÷ 7 = 10
Number of empty rows = 16 – 10 = 6

Page No. 280

Question 1.
Use the arrays to name the factors of 12.
a. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 47
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
There are a total of 12 counters in the given figure.
So, we can see that 6 + 6 = 12 from the above figure.
Hence we can write as 6 x 2 = 12

Question 1.
b. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 48
_____ × _____ = 12

Question 1.

Answer: 4 x 3 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12

c. Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 49
_____ × _____ = 12

Answer: 6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
The number of columns and rows are 4 and 3 respectively.
So we can calculate the multiplication by 4 x 3 = 12.

Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays and write the factors shown.

Question 2.
5: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 3.
20: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 4.
25: __________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 281

Practice: Copy and Solve Use tiles to find all the factors of the product. Record the arrays on grid paper and write the factors shown.

Question 5.
9: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 6.
21: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 7.
17: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 8.
18: ______________
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Use the diagram for 9–10.
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 50

Question 9.
Pablo is using 36 tiles to make a patio. Can he arrange the tiles in another way and show the same factors? Draw a quick picture and explain.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 10.
How many different rectangular arrays can Pablo make with all 36 tiles, so none of the arrays show the same factors?
________ rectangular arrays

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 11.
If 6 is a factor of a number, what other numbers must be factors of the number?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 12.
Jean spent $16 on new T-shirts. If each shirt cost the same whole-dollar amount, how many could she have bought?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Page No. 282

Question 13.
Carmen has 18 connecting cubes. She wants to model a house shaped like a rectangle. If the model has a height of one connecting cube, how many different ways can Carmen model the house using all 18 connecting cubes?
Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers img 51
a. What do you need to know?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
b. How is finding the number of ways to model a rectangular house related to finding factor pairs?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
c. Why is finding the factor pairs only the first step in solving the problem?
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
d. Show the steps you used to solve the problem.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 13.
Complete the sentences. Factor pairs for 18 are ___________________ .
There are ______ different ways Carmen can arrange the cubes to model the house.
Type below:
________

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
Sarah was organizing vocabulary words using index cards. She arranged 40 index cards in the shape of a rectangle on a poster. For 14a–14e, choose Yes or No to tell whether a possible arrangement of cards is shown.
a. 4 rows of 10 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
b. 6 rows of 8 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
c. 20 rows of 2 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
d. 40 rows of 1 card
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Question 14.
e. 35 rows of 5 cards
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:

Explanation:

Conclusion:

I think the answers provided in the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers are beneficial for all the students of 4th grade. Our aim is to help the students to become masters in maths. So, Refer to our HMH Go Math 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 4 Divide by 1-Digit Numbers and secure good marks in the exams.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Extra Practice

go-math-grade-3-chapter-1-addition-and-subtraction-within-1-000-extra-practice-answer-key

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Extra Practice makes you familiar with a variety of topics in it. HMH Go Math Grade 3 Solution Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 helps you learn problems from basic to advanced level. Practice using the Grade 3 Go Math Answer Key Ch 1 Extra Practice and learn different questions.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Extra Practice

There are different methods to solve additions and subtractions. Check out them before beginning your preparation and learn the topics within it. Extra Practice Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 helps you attain better grades.

Lesson 1.1 – Page No. 27000

Find the sum. Then use the Commutative Property of Addition to write the related addition sentence.
Question 1:
5 + 7 = __
__ + __ = __

Answer: 5 + 7 = 12

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
If you are adding 5 and 7 together the commutative property of addition says that you will get the same answer whether you are adding 5 + 7 or 7 + 5.
7 + 5 = 12

Question 2:
4 + 9 = __

__ + __ = __

Answer: 4 + 9 = 13

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
That means you will get the same answer is you add 4 + 9 or 9 + 4.
9 + 4 = 13

Question 3:
0 + 5 = __

__ + __ = __

Answer: 0 + 5 = 5

According to the commutative property of addition, changing the order of the numbers we are adding, does not change the sum.
You will get the same answer if you add 0 + 5  or 5 + 0.
5 + 0 = 5

Lesson 1.2 – Page No. 27000

Round to the nearest ten and hundred.
Question 4:
622
The nearest ten: __
The nearest hundred: __

Answer:
The nearest ten is 620
The nearest hundred is 600

Question 5:
307
The nearest ten: __
The nearest hundred: __

Answer:
The nearest ten is 310
The nearest hundred is 300

Question 6:
867
The nearest ten: __
The nearest hundred: __

Answer:

The nearest ten is 870
The nearest hundred is 900

Lesson 1.3 – Page No. 27000

Use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate the sum.
Question 7:
24
+ 82
Estimate:
__ + __ = __

Answer:

The round figure of 24 is 25.
And the round figure of 82 is 80.
25 + 80 = 105

Question 8:
112
+ 279
Estimate:
__ + __ = __

Answer:

Rounding Numbers to the nearest 10 means finding which 10 they are nearest to. 112 nearest to 10 is 110 and the number rounded to 79 is 80.
110 + 280 = 390

Question 9:
583
+ 169
Estimate:
__ + __ = __

Answer:

The number rounded 583 is 600 and the number rounded to 169 is 170.
600 + 170 = 770

Lesson 1.4 – Page No. 27000

Use mental math to find the sum.
Question 10:
71 + 99 = __

Answer:
First, add one’s place and then add tens place
1 + 9 = 10 and
70 + 90 = 160
160 + 10 = 170

Question 11:
38 + 58 = __

Answer:
First add ones place i.e., 8 + 8 = 16
Now add tens place 30 + 50 = 80
80 + 16 = 96
38 + 58 = 96

Question 12:
307 + 418 = __

Answer:
Add ones place 7 + 8 = 15. 1 will be carried to tens place
Now Add tens place 10 + 10 = 20
Now add hundereds place = 400 + 300 = 700
700 + 20 + 5 = 725

Lesson 1.5 – Page No. 27000

Use addition properties and strategies to find the sum.
Question 13:
13 + 47 + 21 + 79 = __

Answer: 160
Step 1:
First line up the numbers

13
47
21
+ 79

Step 2:
Now add all ones place
3 + 7 + 1 + 9 = 20
2 will be carries to tens place

Step 3:
Now add tens place
10 + 40 + 20 + 70 = 140
140 + 20 = 160

Question 14:
55 + 18 + 15 + 43 = __

Answer: 131

Step 1:
First line up the numbers

Step 2:
Now add all ones place
5 + 5 + 3 + 8 = 21
2 will be carried to tens place

Step 3:
Now add tens place
50 + 10 + 10 + 40 = 110
110 + 21 = 131

Lessons 1.6–1.7 – Page No. 28000

Estimate. Then find the sum.
Question 1:
Estimate: __
325 + 389 = __

Answer:  714
The sum of 325 + 389 = 714
The nearest hundred of 714 is 700. So, The estimated sum is 700.

Question 2:
Estimate: __
219 + 445 = __

Answer: 664
The sum of 219 + 445 is 664
The nearest hundred of 664 is 650. So, the estimated sum is 650.

Question 3:
Estimate: __
437 + 146 = __

Answer: 583
The addition of 437 + 146 is 583.
And the number nearest to the hundred is 600.
Therefore the estimated sum of 437 and 146 is 600.

Question 4:
Estimate: __
308 + 593 = __

Answer: 901
The sum of 308 + 593 is 901.
The number rounded to 901 is 900.
Thus the estimated sum is 900.

Lesson 1.8 – Page No. 28000

Use rounding or compatible numbers to estimate the difference.
Question 5:
82
– 44
Estimate: __

Answer: 35

Compatible numbers are the numbers that are easy to compute mentally and are close to the real numbers.
The number nearer to 82 is 80. And the number nearer to 44 is 45.
The difference of 80 and 45 is 35.
Therefore the estimated difference is 35.

Question 6:
192
– 78
Estimate: __

Answer: 120

Compatible numbers are the numbers that are easy to compute mentally and are close to the real numbers.
The number close to 192 is 190 and the number close to 78 is 80.
So, the difference of 190 and 80 is 120.
Thus the estimated difference is 120.

Question 7:
618
– 369
Estimate: __

Answer:

Compatible numbers are the numbers that are easy to compute mentally and are close to the real numbers.
The number closer to 618 is 620 and 369 is 370
The difference of 620 and 370 is 250.
Therefore the estimated difference of 618 and 369 is 250.

Lesson 1.9

Use mental math to find the difference.
Question 8:
92 – 41 = __

Answer: 51
First subtract ones place 2 – 1 = 1
Now subtract tens place = 90 – 40 = 50
So, the answer is 51.

Question 9:
451 – 125 = __

Answer: 326
Step 1:

Make the number you subtract a friendly number
Add +6 to 125 = 131

Step 2:

Since you add 6 to 125 you have to add 6 to 451
That means 451 + 6 = 457
Now subtract 457 – 131 = 326

Question 10:
703 – 359 = __

Answer: 344

Step 1:

Make the number you subtract a friendly number.
Add 1 to 359 = 360

Step 2:

Since you add 1 to 359 you have to add 1 to 703 = 704
Now subtract 704 – 360 = 344

Lessons 1.10–1.11 – Page No. 28000

Estimate. Then find the difference.
Question 11:
622
– 354
Estimate: __
Difference: __

Answer: 300
The round figure of 622 is 700 and 354 is 400.
The difference of 700 and 400 is 300.
Thus the estimated difference is 300.
And the actual difference is 268.

Question 12:
506
– 189
Estimate: __
Difference: __

Answer: 300
The number rounded to 506 is 500 and the number rounded to 189 is 200.
The estimated difference between 500 and 200 is 300. And the actual difference of 506 and 189 is 317.

Question 13:
763
– 295
Estimate: __
Difference: __

Answer: 500

The actual difference of 763 and 295 is 468
The round figure of 763 is 800 and the rounded number of 295 is 300.
The estimated difference between 800 and 300 is 500.

Question 14:
848
– 209
Estimate: __
Difference: __

Answer: 600

The number rounded to 848 is 800 and the number rounded to 209 is 200.
The estimated difference is 800 and 200 is 600.
And the actual difference is 848 and 209 is 639

Lesson 1.12 – Page No. 28000

Question 15:
Sara read 81 pages in her book. Colin read 64 pages in his book. How many more pages did Sara read than Colin?
____ Pages

Answer: 17 pages

Explanation:

Sara read 81 pages in her book.
Colin read 64 pages in his book.
To know how many more pages did Sara read than Colin.
Subtract 64 from 81 you get 17
So, the answer is 17 pages.

Question 16:

Herb planted 28 pea plants. He planted 15 fewer tomato plants. How many pea and tomato plants did Herb plant in all?
_____ Plants

Answer: 41 plants

Explanation:

Herb planted 28 pea plants.
He planted 15 fewer tomato plants.
Subtract the number of tomato plants from a number of pea plants
28 – 15 = 13 plants
Now add total number of pea and tomato plants = 28 + 13 = 41 plants
Therefore the total number of plants = 41

Without the Fundamentals of additions and subtractions,  you can’t solve problems of advanced level. Learn the basics that aid you in clearing your homework and assessment. Assess your preparation standard by solving the problems in the Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction within 1,000 Extra Practice.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes

go-math-grade-3-chapter-12-two-dimensional-shapes-answer-key

Access the Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes with Solutions. Seek Homework Help needed as a part of your preparation and avail 3rd Grade Go Math Answer Key to clear your queries. Enhance your problem-solving skills with the help of Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key and understand the concepts better. Begin your preparation and make the most out of the Grade 3 Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key to score better grades.

Go Math Grade 3 Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key

Practice is the perfect key to success and we have provided simple tricks to solve the Problems in Chapter 12 Two Dimensional Shapes. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 acts as a one stop destination to enhance your conceptual knowledge. You will know how to solve different Problems in Chapter 12 using the simple approaches by accessing our Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes.

Lesson 1: Describe Plane Shapes

Lesson 2: Describe Angles in Plane Shapes

Lesson 3: Identify Polygons

Chapter: Unlock the Problem – Page No. 715

Lesson 4: Describe Sides of Polygons

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 5: Classify Quadrilaterals

Lesson 6: Draw Quadrilaterals

Lesson 7: Describe Triangles

Lesson 8: Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes

Lesson 9: Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area

Review/Test

Describe Plane Shapes – Page No. 701

Write how many line segments the shape has.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 1
4 line segments

Answer:
4 line segments

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 1 701

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 2
________ line segments

Answer:
6 line segments

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 2 701

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 3
________ line segments

Answer:
8 line segments

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 3 701

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 4
________ line segments

Answer:
5 line segments

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 4 701

Write whether the shape is open or closed.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 5
________

Answer:
Open

Explanation:
The given shape does not start and ends at the same point. So, the shape is open.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 6
________

Answer:
Closed

Explanation:
The given shape started and ends at the same point. So, the shape is closed.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Carl wants to show a closed shape in his drawing. Show and explain how to make the drawing a closed shape.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 7
Type below:
___________

Answer:
chapter 12 image 1 702
Add a fourth line segment, so the shape starts and ends at the same point.

Explanation:
Add a fourth line segment, so the shape starts and ends at the same point.

Question 8.
The shape of a fish pond at a park is shown below. Is the shape open or closed?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 8
________

Answer:
Closed

Explanation:
The given shape started and ends at the same point. So, the shape is closed.

Describe Plane Shapes – Page No. 702

Lesson Check

Question 1.
How many line segments does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 9
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 5

Answer:
d. 5

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 5 701

Question 2.
Which of these is part of a line, has one endpoint, and continues in one direction?
Options:
a. ray
b. line
c. line segment
d. point

Answer:
a. ray

Explanation:
The line has one endpoint and continues in one direction is called a ray.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What multiplication sentence does the array show?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 10
Options:
a. 3 × 8 = 24
b. 4 × 8 = 32
c. 8 × 5 = 40
d. 4 × 9 = 36

Answer:
b. 4 × 8 = 32

Explanation:
There are 4 rows and 8 columns available. 4 x 8 = 32 is the answer.

Question 4.
What is the unknown factor and quotient?
9 × ■ = 27
27 ÷ 9 = ■
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6

Answer:
a. 3

Explanation:
9 x 3 = 27.
27 ÷ 9 = 3.
The answer is 3.

Question 5.
Which fraction is equivalent to \(\frac{4}{8}\)?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Plane Shapes img 11
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{4}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer:
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
\(\frac{4}{8}\) = b. \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 6.
Mr. MacTavish has 30 students from his class going on a field trip to the zoo. He is placing 6 students in each group. How many groups of students from Mr. MacTavish’s class will be going to the zoo?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 36

Answer:
a. 5

Explanation:
1 group = 6 students.
6 x number of groups = 30 students.
6 x s = 30.
s = 30 ÷ 6
s = 5.
5 groups of students from Mr. MacTavish’s class will be going to the zoo.

Describe Angles in Plane Shapes – Page No. 707

Use the corner of a sheet of paper to tell whether the angle is a right angle, less than a right angle, or greater than a right angle.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 12
less than a right angle

Answer:
less than a right angle

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 13
________

Answer:
Right Angle:

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 14
________

Answer:
Greater than a right angle

Write how many of each type of angle the shape has.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 15
________ right
________ less than a right
________ greater than a right

Answer:
4 right
0 less than a right
0 greater than a right

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 1 707
4 right Angles.
0 less than right angles.
0 greater than right angles.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 16
________ right
________ less than a right
________ greater than a right

Answer:
0 right
0 less than a right
5 greater than a right

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 2 707
0 right Angles
0 less than right angles
5 greater than right angles

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 17
________ right
________ less than a right
________ greater than a right

Answer:
2 right
0 less than a right
4 greater than a right

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 4 707
2 right angles.
0 less than right angles
4 greater than right angles.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Jeff has a square piece of art paper. He cuts across it from one corner to the opposite corner to make two pieces. What is the total number of sides and angles in both of the new shapes?
________ sides
________ angle

Answer:
The new shape has 6 sides and 6 angles

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 8 707
The new shape has 6 sides and 6 angles

Question 8.
Kaylee tells Aimee that the shape of a stop sign has at least one right angle. Aimee says that there are no right angles. Who is correct? Explain.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 18
________

Answer:
Aimee’s answer is correct

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 5 707
All the angles are greater than a right angle. Aimee’s answer is correct.

Describe Angles in Plane Shapes – Page No. 708

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What describes this angle?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 19
Options:
a. right angle
b. less than a right angle
c. greater than a right angle
d. small angle

Answer:
c. greater than a right angle

Explanation:
The given shape has the greater angle than the right angle. So, the answer is greater than a right angle.

Question 2.
How many right angles does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 20
Options:
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4

Answer:
c. 3

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 5 708

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What fraction of the group is shaded?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 21
Options:
a. \(\frac{5}{6}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer:
c. \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
There are 6 circles. And one circle is shaded out of 6 circles. So, answer is \(\frac{1}{6}\).

Question 4.
Compare.
\(\frac{4}{8}\) _____ \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Options:
a. >
b. <
c. =
d. ÷

Answer:
a. >

Explanation:
Given fractions have the same denominators. So, compare numerators to get the answer.
4 > 3. The answer is \(\frac{4}{8}\) > \(\frac{3}{8}\).

Question 5.
Which of the following does NOT describe a line segment?
Options:
a. does not end
b. is straight
c. is part of a line
d. has 2 endpoints

Answer:
a. does not end

Explanation:
The line segment is a straight line that has two end points. a. does not end not describes a line segment.

Question 6.
How many line segments does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Angles in Plane Shapes img 22
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer:
c. 7

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 6 708

Identify Polygons – Page No. 713

Is the shape a polygon? Write yes or no.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 23
no

Answer:
No

Explanation:
No, The given image doesn’t have line segments.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 24
_____

Answer:
Yes

Explanation:
Yes, A polygon is a closed plane shape that is made up of line segments that meet only at their endpoints. Each line segment in a polygon is a side.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 25
_____

Answer:
No

Explanation:
No, the given shape is an open shape. It is not a polygon.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 26
_____

Answer:
No

Explanation:
No, it has a curved path. So, the given shape is not a polygon.

Write the number of sides and the number of angles. Then name the polygon.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 27
_______ sides
_______ angles
_______

Answer:
6 sides; 6 angles; hexagon

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 1 713

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 28
_______ sides
_______ angles
_______

Answer:
4 sides; 4 angles; quadrilateral

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 2 713

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Mr. Murphy has an old coin that has ten sides. If its shape is a polygon, how many angles does the old coin have?
_______ angles

Answer:
10 angles

Explanation:
Given that the shape has ten sides. So, the old coin will have 10 angles.

Question 8.
Lin says that an octagon has six sides. Chris says that it has eight sides. Whose statement is correct?
_______ statement

Answer:
Chris’s statement is correct.

Explanation:
Chris’s statement is correct. An octagon has eight sides.

Identify Polygons – Page No. 714

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which is a name for this polygon?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 29
Options:
a. hexagon
b. octagon
c. quadrilateral
d. pentagon

Answer:
c. quadrilateral

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 1 714
It has 4 sides and 4 angles. The name of the polygon is quadrilateral.

Question 2.
How many sides does this polygon have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 30
Options:
a. 4
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7

Answer:
c. 6

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 2 714

Spiral Review

Question 3.
How many right angles does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 31
Options:
a. 4
b. 3
c. 2
d. 0

Answer:
a. 4

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 3 714

Question 4.
Erica has 8 necklaces. One fourth of the necklaces are blue. How many necklaces are blue?
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 8

Answer:
a. 2

Explanation:
Erica has 8 necklaces. One-fourth of the necklaces are blue. So, 2 necklaces are blue.

Question 5.
Which of these is straight, is part of a line, and has 2 endpoints?
Options:
a. line
b. line segment
c. point
d. ray

Answer:
b. line segment

Question 6.
What describes this angle?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Identify Polygons img 32
Options:
a. greater than a right angle
b. large angle
c. less than a right angle
d. right angle

Answer:
c. less than a right angle

Unlock the Problem – Page No. 715

Question 1.
Look at the polygon. How many pairs of sides are parallel?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 33
________ pair(s)

Answer:
1 pair of sides are parallel

Question 2.
How do you know the shape is a polygon?
Type below:
___________

Answer:
A polygon is a closed plane shape that is made up of line segments that meet only at their endpoints. Each line segment in a polygon is a side.

Question 3.
Lines that cross or meet are intersecting lines. Intersecting lines form angles.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 34

Answer:
Either less than the right angle or more than the right angle.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 35
The orange and blue line segments meet and form an angle. So, they are __________________
___________

Answer:
Intersecting lines

Question 5.
Intersecting lines that cross or meet to form right angles are perpendicular lines.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 36

Answer:
90 degrees

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 37
The red and blue line segments meet to form a right angle. So, they are ________________
___________

Answer:
Perpendicular lines

Question 7.
Lines that never cross or meet and are always the same distance apart are parallel lines. They do not form any angles.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 38
So, the polygon above has _ pair of parallel sides
_________ pair(s)

Answer:
The polygon has 1 pair of parallel sides

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Unlock the Problem img 39
The green and blue line segments would never cross or meet. They are always the same distance apart. So, they appear to be _________________
_________

Answer:
Parallel lines

Describe Sides of Polygons – Page No. 719

Look at the dashed sides of the polygon. Tell if they appear to be intersecting, perpendicular, or parallel. Write all the words that describe the sides.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 40
parallel

Answer:
parallel lines

Explanation:
The dashed sides are not intersecting with each other. So, the given lines are parallel lines.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 41
_______
_______

Answer:
perpendicular lines

Explanation:
The dashed sides are meeting to form a right angle. So, they are perpendicular lines.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 42
_______

Answer:
intersecting lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments meet and form an angle. So, they are intersecting lines.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 43
_______

Answer:
intersecting lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments meet and form an angle. So, they are intersecting lines.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 44
_______
_______

Answer:
perpendicular lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments meet to form a right angle. So, they are perpendicular lines.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 45
_______

Answer:
parallel lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments would never cross or meet. They are always the same distance apart. So, they are parallel lines.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 46
_______

Answer:
parallel lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments would never cross or meet. They are always the same distance apart. So, they are parallel lines.

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 47
_______

Answer:
intersecting lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments meet and form an angle. So, they are intersecting lines.

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 48
_______
_______

Answer:
perpendicular lines

Explanation:
The dashed line segments meet to form a right angle. So, they are perpendicular lines.

Problem Solving

Use shapes A–D for 10–11.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 49

Question 10.
Which shapes appear to have parallel sides?
_______ ; _______ ; _______

Answer:
A, C, D

Explanation:
A, C, D have lines that appear to never meet and are always the same distance apart. So, they have parallel lines.

Question 11.
Which shapes appear to have perpendicular sides?
_______ ; _______

Answer:
B, C

Explanation:
B, C have lines that meet to form right angles. So, they have perpendicular sides.

Describe Sides of Polygons – Page No. 720

Lesson Check

Question 1.
How many pairs of parallel sides does the quadrilateral appear to have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 50
Options:
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4

Answer:
b. 2

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 5 714
Side a and a are one pair of parallel lines.
Side b and b are one pair of parallel lines.
The quadrilateral has 2 pairs of parallel sides.

Question 2.
Which sides appear to be parallel?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 51
Options:
a. a and c only
b. b and d only
c. a and b, c and d
d. a and c, b and d

Answer:
d. a and c, b and d

Explanation:
a and c are parallel lines. They appear to never meet and are always the same distance apart. They do not form any angles.
Similarly, b and d are parallel lines.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mr. Lance designed a class banner shaped like the polygon shown. What is the name of the polygon?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 52
Options:
a. pentagon
b. octagon
c. hexagon
d. decagon

Answer:
a. pentagon

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Sides of Polygons image 1 720
The polygon has 5 sides and 5 angles. So, the given polygon is a pentagon.

Question 4.
How many angles greater than a right angle does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 53
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
b. 1

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Sides of Polygons image 2 720
One angle is greater than the right angles.

Question 5.
How many line segments does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 54
Options:
a. 6
b. 7
c. 8
d. 9

Answer:
c. 8

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Sides of Polygons image 3 720
The given shape has 8 line segments.

Question 6.
Which fraction names the shaded part?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Sides of Polygons img 55
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{6}\)
d. \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Answer:
c. \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation:
The given image has 6 parts. 1 part is shaded out of 1 part. The answer is \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 721

Vocabulary

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 56

Question 1.
An __________ is formed by two rays that share an endpoint.
__________

Answer:
Angle

Explanation:

Question 2.
A _____________ is a closed plane shape made up of line segments.
________

Answer:
Polygon

Question 3.
A ____________ forms a square corner.
________

Answer:
Right Angle

Concepts and Skills

Use the corner of a sheet of paper to tell whether the angle is a
right angle, less than a right angle, or greater than a right angle.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 57
________

Answer:
less than a right angle

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 58
________

Answer:
right angle

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 59
________

Answer:
greater than a right angle

Write the number of sides and the number of angles.
Then name the polygon.

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 60
________ sides
________ angles
________

Answer:
6 sides; 6 angles

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 1 713
6 sides; 6 angles

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 61
________ sides
________ angles
________

Answer:
4 sides; 4 angles

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Concepts and Skills image 2 721
4 sides; 4 angles

Question 9.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 62
________ sides
________ angles
________

Answer:
5 sides; 5 angles

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Concepts and Skills image 3 721
5 sides; 5 angles

Mid -Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 722

Question 10.
Anne drew the shape at the right. Is her shape an open shape or a closed shape?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 63
________

Answer:
Closed Shape

Explanation:
The given shape started and ends at the same point. So, the shape is closed.

Question 11.
This sign tells drivers there is a steep hill ahead. Write the number of sides and the number of angles in the shape of the sign. Then name the shape.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 64
________ sides
________ angles
________

Answer:
4 sides; 4 angles

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Concepts and Skills image 4 721
4 sides; 4 angles

Question 12.
Why is this closed plane shape NOT a polygon?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 65
Type below:
________

Answer:
2 × 5 = 10

Explanation:
The given shape started and ends at the same point. So, the shape is closed. A polygon is made up of line segments that meet only at their endpoints. So, the given shape is not a polygon.

Question 13.
Sean drew a shape with 2 fewer sides than an octagon. Which shape did he draw?
________

Answer:
pentagon

Explanation:
octagon has 8 sides.
2 + 8 = 10 sides

Question 14.
John drew a polygon with two line segments that meet to form a right angle. Circle the words that describe the line segments.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 66
Type below:
________

Answer:
perpendicular

Classify Quadrilaterals – Page No. 727

Click all the words that describe the quadrilateral.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 67

Answer:
Square; Rectangle; Rhombus

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 68
Options:
a. square
b. rectangle
c. rhombus
d. trapezoid

Answer:
b. rectangle

Explanation:
The given shape has two pairs opposite with the same length. Also, all the angles are right angles. The given shape is a rectangle.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 69
Options:
a. square
b. rectangle
c. rhombus
d. trapezoid

Answer:
d. trapezoid

Explanation:
Even though the given shape has four sides, they are not equal. Also, it has only two right angles. The given shape is a trapezoid.

Use the quadrilaterals below for 4–6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 70

Question 4.
Which quadrilaterals appear to have no right angles?
______ ; ______ ; ______

Answer:
B, D, and E

Explanation:
B, D, E don’t have right angles.

Question 5.
Which quadrilaterals appear to have 4 right angles?
______ ; ______

Answer:
A and C

Explanation:
A and C both shapes have right angles.

Question 6.
Which quadrilaterals appear to have 4 sides of equal length?
______ ; ______ ; ______

Answer:
B, C, and D

Explanation:
The B, C, and D have all the equal lengths.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
A picture on the wall in Jeremy’s classroom has 4 right angles, 4 sides of equal length, and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel. What quadrilateral best describes the picture?
_______

Answer:
Square

Explanation:
A square has 4 right angles, 4 sides of equal length, and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel.

Question 8.
Sofia has a plate that has 4 sides of equal length, 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel, and no right angles. What quadrilateral best describes the plate?
_________

Answer:
rhombus

Explanation:
A rhombus has 4 sides of equal length, 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel, and no right angles.

Classify Quadrilaterals – Page No. 728

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which word describes the quadrilateral?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 71
Options:
a. square
b. trapezoid
c. rhombus
d. rectangle

Answer:
b. trapezoid

Explanation:
The given quadrilateral doesn’t have right angles. So, it is not a square and a rectangle. Also, the quadrilateral doesn’t have equal sides. So, it is not a rhombus.

Question 2.
Which quadrilaterals appear to have 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 72
Options:
a. A and B
b. A, B, and C
c. A only
d. B only

Answer:
a. A and B

Explanation:
The A and B shapes have 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Aiden drew the polygon shown. What is the name of the polygon he drew?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 73
Options:
a. decagon
b. hexagon
c. octagon
d. pentagon

Answer:
a. decagon

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Classify Quadrilaterals image 1 728
10 sides; 10 angles

Question 4.
How many pairs of parallel sides does this shape appear to have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 74
Options:
a. 4
b. 2
c. 1
d. 0

Answer:
b. 2

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Identify Polygons image 5 714

Side a and a are one pair of parallel lines.
Side b and b are one pair of parallel lines.
The quadrilateral has 2 pairs of parallel sides.

Question 5.
What word describes the dashed sides of the shape shown?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 75
Options:
a. intersecting
b. parallel
c. perpendicular
d. right

Answer:
b. parallel

Explanation:
The dashed sides of the shape would never cross or meet. They are always the same distance apart. So, they appear to be parallel lines.

Question 6.
How many right angles does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Classify Quadrilaterals img 76
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
a. 0

Explanation:
There are no right angles available for the given shape.

Draw Quadrilaterals – Page No. 733

Draw a quadrilateral that is described.
Name the quadrilateral you drew.

Question 1.
4 sides of equal length
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Draw Quadrilaterals img 77

Answer:
square

Explanation:
A square has four equal sides and four equal angles

Question 2.
1 pair of opposite sides that are parallel
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Draw Quadrilaterals img 78
_________

Answer:
trapezoid

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Draw Quadrilaterals image 1 733
trapezoid

Draw a quadrilateral that does not belong.
Then explain why.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Draw Quadrilaterals img 79

Answer:
Chapter 12 Classify Quadrilaterals image 2 728

Explanation:
The shape is a trapezoid. It has only 1 pair of opposite sides that are parallel. The 3 quadrilaterals shown have 2 pairs of sides that are parallel.

Problem Solving

Question 4.
Layla drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel. Name the quadrilateral she could have drawn.
_________

Answer:
square or rectangle

Explanation:
The square or rectangle has 4 right angles and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel.

Question 5.
Victor drew a quadrilateral with no right angles and 4 sides of equal length. What quadrilateral could Victor have drawn?
_________

Answer:
rhombus.

Explanation:
A rhombus has no right angles and 4 sides of equal length.

Draw Quadrilaterals – Page No. 734

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Chloe drew a quadrilateral with 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel. Which shape could NOT be Chloe’s quadrilateral?
Options:
a. rectangle
b. rhombus
c. square
d. trapezoid

Answer:
d. trapezoid

Explanation:
A trapezoid will have only one pair of parallel lines.

Question 2.
Mike drew a quadrilateral with four right angles. Which shape could he have drawn?
Options:
a. rectangle
b. hexagon
c. trapezoid
d. triangle

Answer:
a. rectangle

Explanation:
A rectangle will have four right angles.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A quadrilateral has 4 right angles and 4 sides of equal length. What is the name of the quadrilateral?
Options:
a. pentagon
b. square
c. trapezoid
d. hexagon

Answer:
b. square

Explanation:
A square has 4 right angles, 4 sides of equal length, and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel.

Question 4.
Mark drew two lines that form a right angle. Which word describes the lines Mark drew?
Options:
a. perpendicular
b. parallel
c. acute
d. obtuse

Answer:
a. perpendicular

Explanation:
Intersecting lines that cross or meet to form right angles are perpendicular lines.

Question 5.
Dennis drew the rectangle on grid paper. What is the perimeter of the rectangle Dennis drew?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Draw Quadrilaterals img 80
Options:
a. 7 units
b. 12 units
c. 14 units
d. 15 units

Answer:
b. 12 units

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Draw Quadrilaterals image 1 734
3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 12 units.

Question 6.
Jill drew the rectangle on grid paper. What is the area of the rectangle Jill drew?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Draw Quadrilaterals img 81
Options:
a. 12 square units
b. 15 square units
c. 16 square units
d. 18 square units

Answer:
b. 15 square units

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Draw Quadrilaterals image 3 734
5 x 3 = 15 square units.

Describe Triangles – Page No. 739

Use the triangles for 1–3. Write A, B, or C.
Then complete the sentences.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 82

Question 1.
Triangle B has 3 angles less than a right angle and
appears to have 3 sides of equal length.

Answer:
B

Question 2.
Triangle _________ has 1 right angle and appears to have
_________ sides of equal length.

Answer:
Triangle C has 1 right angle and appears to have 0 sides of equal length.

Question 3.
Triangle _________ has 1 angle greater than a right angle and appears to have
_________ sides of equal length.

Answer:
Triangle A has 1 angle greater than a right angle and appears to have 2 sides of equal length.

Question 4.
Kyle, Kathy, and Kelly each drew a triangle. Who drew the triangle that has 1 angle greater than a right angle and appears to have no sides of equal length?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 83
_________

Answer:
Kathy

Explanation:
Kathy triangle has 1 angle greater than a right angle and has no sides of equal length.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
Matthew drew the back of his tent. How many sides appear to be of equal length?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 84
_________ sides

Answer:
2 sides

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Triangles image 1 739
a and b are 2 sides have equal lengths.

Question 6.
Sierra made the triangular picture frame shown. How many angles are greater than a right angle?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 85
_________

Answer:
0

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Triangles image 3 739
0 angles are greater than a right angle.

Describe Triangles – Page No. 740

Lesson Check

Question 1.
How many angles less than a right angle does this triangle have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 86
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
d. 3

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Triangles image 1 740
3 angles less than a right angle.

Question 2.
How many sides of equal length does this triangle appear to have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 87
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
c. 2

Explanation:
The two lines forming the right angle are equal in length.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A quadrilateral has 4 right angles and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel. Which quadrilateral could it be?
Options:
a. trapezoid
b. hexagon
c. triangle
d. rectangle

Answer:
d. rectangle

Explanation:
A rectangle has 4 right angles and 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel.

Question 4.
Mason drew a quadrilateral with only one pair of opposite sides that are parallel. Which quadrilateral did Mason draw?
Options:
a. square
b. rhombus
c. trapezoid
d. rectangle

Answer:
c. trapezoid

Explanation:
A trapezoid will have only one pair of opposite sides that are parallel.

Question 5.
Which shape has an area of 8 square units and a perimeter of 12 units?
Options:
a. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 88
b. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 89
c. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 90
d. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 91

Answer:
a

Explanation:
a. Area = 2 x 4 = 8 square units; Perimeter = 2 + 4 + 2 + 4 = 12 units.

Question 6.
What fraction of the square is shaded?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Describe Triangles img 92
Options:
a. \(\frac{3}{5}\)
b. \(\frac{5}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{3}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{5}\)

Answer:
c. \(\frac{3}{8}\)

Explanation:
The image has 8 parts. 3 parts are shaded out of 8 parts. So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) is the answer.

Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes – Page No. 745

Solve each problem.

Question 1.
Steve drew the shapes below. Write the letter of each shape where it belongs in the Venn diagram.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 93
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 94

Answer:
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 94

Question 2.
Janice drew the shapes below. Write the letter of each shape where it belongs in the Venn diagram.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 95
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 96

Answer:
Chapter 12 Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes image 1 745

Question 3.
Beth drew the shapes below. Write the letter of each shape where it belongs in the Venn diagram.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 97
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 98

Answer:

Chapter 12 Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes image 2 745

Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes – Page No. 746

Lesson Check

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 99

Question 1.
Which shape would go in the section where the two circles overlap?
Options:
a. triangle
b. trapezoid
c. square
d. hexagon

Answer:
c. square

Explanation:
A square is a rectangle with equal lengths of all sides.

Question 2.
Which shape could NOT go in the circle labeled All Sides of Equal Length?
Options:
a. rhombus
b. trapezoid
c. square
d. triangle

Answer:
b. trapezoid

Explanation:
A trapezoid will not have All Sides of Equal Length.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
How many angles greater than a right angle does this triangle have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 100
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
b. 1

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes image 3 745
1 angle is greater than a right angle.

Question 4.
How many sides of equal length does this triangle appear to have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 101
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2
d. 3

Answer:
d. 3

Explanation:
The triangle appears to have 3 sides of equal length.

Question 5.
Madison drew this shape. How many angles less than a right angle does it have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 102
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 3
d. 5

Answer:
a. 0

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 2 707
0

Question 6.
How many dots are in \(\frac{1}{2}\) of this group?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Problem Solving Classify Plane Shapes img 103
Options:
a. 6
b. 8
c. 9
d. 18

Answer:
c. 9

Explanation:
9 dots are in \(\frac{1}{2}\) of this group.

Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area – Page No. 751

Draw lines to divide the shape into equal parts that show the fraction given.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 104
\(\frac{1}{3}\)

Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 105
\(\frac{1}{8}\)

Answer:

Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 1 751

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 106
\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 2 751

Draw lines to divide the shape into parts with equal area. Write the area of each part as a unit fraction.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 107
4 equal parts
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 4 751
\(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 108
6 equal parts
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 5 751
\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 109
3 equal parts
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 6 751
\(\frac{1}{3}\)

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Robert divided a hexagon into 3 equal parts. Show how he might have divided the hexagon. Write the fraction that names each part of the whole you divided.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 110
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 7 751
\(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 8.
Show how you might divide the shape into 8 equal parts. What fraction names the area of each part of the divided shape?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 111
\(\frac{□}{□}\)

Answer:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 8 751
\(\frac{1}{8}\)

Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area – Page No. 752

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What fraction names each part of the divided whole?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 112
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)
c. \(\frac{1}{4}\)
d. \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Answer:
b. \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 2 752
The shape has 3 parts. One part is shaded out of 3.

Question 2.
What fraction names the whole area that was divided?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 113
Options:
a. \(\frac{1}{8}\)
b. \(\frac{1}{2}\)
c. \(\frac{8}{8}\)
d. \(\frac{8}{1}\)

Answer:
c. \(\frac{8}{8}\)

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area image 9 752
8 parts are shaded out of 8 parts. So, \(\frac{8}{8}\) is the answer.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Lil drew the figure below. Which word does NOT describe the shape?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 114
Options:
a. plane shape
b. closed shape
c. open shape
d. curved path

Answer:
c. open shape

Explanation:
The given shape is started and ended at the same point. So, it is not an open shape.

Question 4.
How many line segments does this shape have?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 115
Options:
a. 6
b. 5
c. 4
d. 3

Answer:
b. 5

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Describe Plane Shapes image 4 701
5

Use the Venn diagram for 5–6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Relate Shapes, Fractions, and Area img 116

Question 5.
Which shape would go in the section where the two circles overlap?
Options:
a. triangle
b. square
c. trapezoid
d. pentagon

Answer:
b. square

Explanation:
A square have right angles and all sides with equal lengths.

Question 6.
Which shape could NOT go in the circle labeled All Sides of Equal Length?
Options:
a. square
b. rhombus
c. triangle
d. rectangle

Answer:
d. rectangle

Explanation:
A rectangle doesn’t have All Sides of Equal Length.

Review/Test – Page No. 753

Question 1.
Which words describe this shape? Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 117
Options:
a. polygon
b. open shape
c. pentagon
d. quadrilateral

Answer:
a. polygon
c. pentagon

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Concepts and Skills image 3 721
A polygon is a closed plane shape that is made up of line segments that meet only at their endpoints. Each line segment in a polygon is a side. So, the shape is a polygon. Also, the shape has five sides and five angles. So, it is a pentagon.

Question 2.
Umberto drew one side of a quadrilateral with 4 equal sides and no right angles. Draw the other 3 sides to complete Umberto’s shape.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 118
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Chapter 12 Review image 1 753

Question 3.
Mikael saw a painting that included this shape.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 119
For numbers 3a–3d, select True or False for each statement about the shape.
a. The shape has no right angles.
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
ii. False

Question 3.
b. The shape has 2 angles greater than a right angle.
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
ii. False

Question 3.
c. The shape has 2 right angles.
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
i. True

Question 3.
d. The shape has 1 angle greater than a right angle.
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
i. True

Review/Test – Page No. 754

Question 4.
Fran used a Venn Diagram to sort shapes.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 120
Part A
Draw another plane shape that belongs inside the left circle of the diagram but NOT in the section where the circles overlap.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Chapter 12 Review image 1 754

Question 4.
Part B
How can you describe the shapes in the section where the circles overlap?
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The shapes in the circle overlap are polygons with right angles. Also, those shapes have 4 sides and 4 angles named as quadrilaterals.

Question 5.
Match each object in the left column with its name in the right column.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 121
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Chapter 12 Review image 2 754

Question 6.
Describe the angles and sides of this triangle.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 122
Type below:
____________

Answer:
The triangle has 3 sides of equal length. Also, the triangle has 3 angles with less than a right angle.

Review/Test – Page No. 755

Question 7.
Which words describe this shape. Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 123
Options:
a. rectangle
b. rhombus
c. quadrilateral
d. square

Answer:
a. rectangle
c. quadrilateral
d. square

Explanation:
The given shape is a square or rectangle with 4 sides and 4 angles.

Question 8.
Divide each shape into the number of equal parts shown. Then write the fraction that describes each part of the whole.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 124
Type below:
____________

Answer:
\(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
Chapter 12 Review image 1 755
\(\frac{1}{3}\)
\(\frac{1}{6}\)
\(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 9.
Han drew a triangle with 1 angle greater than a right angle.
For numbers 9a–9d, choose Yes or No to tell whether the triangle could be the triangle Han drew.
a. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 125
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:
ii. no

Explanation:
It has all the angles less than a right angle.

Question 9.
b. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 126
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:
ii. no

Explanation:
It has one right angle and two angles with less than a right angle.

Question 9.
c. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 127
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:
i. yes

Explanation:
It has one angle greater than a right angle

Question 9.
d. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 128
i. yes
ii. no

Answer:
i. yes

Explanation:
It has one angle greater than a right angle

Review/Test – Page No. 756

Question 10.
Look at this group of pattern blocks.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 129
Chapter 12 Review image 6 756
Part A
Sort the pattern blocks by sides. How many groups did you make? Explain how you sorted the shapes.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
A has 6 sides 6 angles = hexagon.
B has 4 sides 4 angles = quadrilateral
C has 4 sides 4 angles = quadrilateral
D has 3 sides 3 angles = triangle
E has 4 sides 4 angles = quadrilateral
F has 4 sides 4 angles = quadrilateral
1 triangle, 4 quadrilateral, and 1 hexagon blocks available.

Question 10.
Part B
Sort the pattern blocks by angles. How many groups did you make? Explain how you sorted the shapes.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
A and F have greater than a right angle.
B has 4 right angles.
C, D, and E have all the angles less than a right angle.

Question 11.
Teresa drew a quadrilateral that had 4 sides of equal length and no right angles. What quadrilateral did she draw?
____________

Answer:
rhombus

Review/Test – Page No. 757

Question 12.
Rhea used a Venn diagram to sort shapes. What label could she use for circle A?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 130
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Right Angle

Question 13.
Colette drew lines to divide a rectangle into equal parts that each represent \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the whole area. Her first line is shown. Draw lines to complete Colette’s model.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 131
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Chapter 12 Review image 1 757

Question 14.
Brad drew a quadrilateral. Select the pairs of sides that appear to be parallel. Mark all that apply.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 132
Options:
a. a and b
b. b and d
c. c and a
d. d and c

Answer:
b. b and d
c. c and a

Review/Test – Page No. 758

Question 15.
Give two reasons that this shape is not a polygon.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 133
Type below:
____________

Answer:
1. The shape is not a closed shape.
2. The shape has no line segments.

Question 16.
A triangle has 1 angle greater than a right angle. What must be true about the other angles? Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. At least one must be less than a right angle.
b. One could be a right angle.
c. Both must be less than a right angle.
d. One must be greater than a right angle.

Answer:
c. Both must be less than a right angle.

Question 17.
Ava drew a quadrilateral with 2 pairs of opposite sides that are parallel. The shape has at least 2 right angles. Draw a shape that Ava could have drawn.
Type below:
____________

Answer:
Chapter 12 Describe Angles in Plane Shapes image 1 707

Question 18.
For 18a–18d, select True or False for each description of a ray.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Review/Test img 134
a. straight
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
i. True

Question 18.
b. has 2 endpoints
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
ii. False

Question 18.
c. part of a line
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
i. True

Question 18.
d. continues in 1 direction
i. True
ii. False

Answer:
i. True

Conclusion

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes makes it easy for you to get a grip on the subjects. Refer to the HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key for quick reference and resolve your queries. Get Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Two-Dimensional Shapes Extra Practice and test your knowledge on the Chapter.